Class, Book. / VIGER'S GREEK IDIOMS ABRIDGED AND TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH PROFESSOR HERMANN'S LAST EDITION. ORIGINAL NOTES. By the Rev. JOHN SEAGER, B. 4 RECTOR OF WELCH BICHXOK, ROSS, HEREFORDSHIRE. SECOND EDITION, WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. T LONDON : VRINTED BY A. J. VALRY, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. SOLD BY LONGMAN AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.; BALDWIN AND CRADOCK : SIMPKIN AND MARSHALL ; AND ALL OTHER BOOKSELLERS. -? >n ABRIDGED INTO ENGLISH, FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, By the Rev. J. SEAGER, Author of 'Critical Observations on Classical Authors ' in the Classical Journal. VIGER ON GREEK IDIOMS. Translated into English, and abridged. 8vo. 9s. 6d. bds. ' But when they have made real advances in Greek prose, read over with them the whole of Viger. Mr. Berry, what I now recommend is really one of the most useful parts of education. You should make them read Viger in this way twice every year for five or six or seven years.'— Dr. Parr. HOOGEVEEN ON GREEK PARTICLES, on the same Plan. 8vo. 7s. 6d. bds. ' Hoogeveen's work on Particles has always been considered a valuable aid in the study of the Greek language ; and Mr. Seager has compressed and translated it in a manner which we could not desire to be better.' — Spectator. BOS ON GREEK ELLIPSES, on the same Plan. 8vo. 9s. 6d. bds. * Mr. Seager has contrived to retain the essence of all that is beneficial to the student, while he has placed it more easily within his reach by the order into which it is reduced.' — Intelligence. 1 Bos, Hoogeveen, and Viger, are works of valuable criticism.' — Bicker- steth's Christian Student. HERMANN ON GREEK METRES, on the same Plan. 8vo. 8s. 6d. bds. ' My hero is Hermann : he is not only a scholar, hut a philosopher of the highest order; and he smiles probably, as I do, at the petty criticisms of puny sciolists, who in fact do not understand what is written bv this great critic' — Dr. Parr. MAITTAIRE ON GREEK DIALECTS, on the same Plan. Svo. 9s. 6rf. bds. * It is impossible to speak too highly of the fidelity of the translation, or the skill of the abridgment. It is enriched by some modest Notes, and more original matter than careless readers will perhaps credit.'— Atlas. ' This volume completes Mr. Seager's epitomising labors. With Viger, Hoogeveen, Bos, and Hermann, the Greek Student has a set of scarcely dis- pensable subsidia, at all events in a more accessible form than before. Mr. Seager has labored zealously, and must be allowed to have deserved well of Greek literature.' — New Monthly Mag. %* These Five Works may be had in 2 vols., neatly bound in cloth, £1. ISs. PREFACE. The utility of VigerV Treatise on the Principal Idioms of the Greek Language is well known, and fully justifies his recom- mendation of a repeated perusal of the work by all who are desirous of entering with advantage on the study of the Greek authors. In that work he has collected and explained, on a plan of arrangement for the most part practically convenient, a multitude of phrases remarkable for their peculiarity or elegance. Many of these are very difficult, and are interpreted in no other book, or in none accessible to the generality of students, or in none so fully, clearly, and correctly. Is" is no wonder, therefore, that the work should have continued in general use ever since its first publication. 2 To say nothing of the testimony of others, Professor Hermann declares 3 it to have been deservedly esteemed most useful : and indeed its value is sufficiently attested by the comments of learned men ; of Reizius, Hoogeveeu, Zeunius, Schaefer, and lastly, of that most profound and acute critic, Professor Hermann himself. The first who published an edition of Viger with notes was Hoogeveen. Zeunius followed him, and added his own annotations to Hoogeveen's. Afterwards Hermann enriched his editions with the notes not only of Hoogeveen and Zeunius, and with a few which had been written by Reizius and by Schaefer* in the margins of their copies of Viger, but with very copious and important notes of his own. By all these additions to the original work, a body of Greek learning has been formed of the greatest moment to those who are desirous of attaining a thorough knowlege of that justly • Or, with the Latin termination with which his name, although he was a native of Rouen, has been dignified, Vigerus. 2 In the edition printed at Paris in 1644. 3 De Idiomatis. * The notes of Reizius are judicious and useful ; but those of that able scholar Schaefer, which Hermann found of any use, are so very few, that they have left no impression on my mind with regard to their value. admired language, which it is calculated to illustrate. But many are deprived of the henefit to he derived from the book, not only by an inadequate acquaintance with the Latin language, in which it is written, but by the bulk and price of it in its improved condition. It was considered, therefore, that to persons under the disadvantage of such a deprivation an Abridgment in English of the last edition of Viger might prove highly beneficial; and the publication of such an Abridgment was consequently resolved on. The plan and execution of the work were intrusted to me : and of these I proceed to give the reader some account. It was requisite for the further- ance of the Publisher's design, to reduce Professor Hermann's last edition to about one-fourth of its bulk. This I have endeavored to effect without any sacrifice of useful matter, by embodying both the text and notes in the formation of a new text, retaining every thing really valuable, and rejecting all that is manifestly erroneous and useless. 1 The general arrangement of Viger, however objectionable in some respects, has been unavoidably preserved, together with his division into Chapters, Sections, and Rules, as he calls his lowest sub- divisions. 2 The substance, indeed, of the notes appended in the original to each rule being here incorporated with the rule itself, the length of the rules is necessarily very unequal ; because many and long notes are often in the original referred to a long rule, while a short rule is often left without any annotation at all; but the facility of reference 3 and comparison afforded by this method will, it is hoped, overbalance any seeming inconvenience. 1 A considerable space in the notes, especially in Hermann's, is occupied in pointing out errors in the text or in other notes. Hoogeveen and Zeunius, who are very liberal in observations for the benefit of the raw recruits, commencing with "'' ccBterum monendi sunt tirones," or the like well-known gracious and condescending introductions, seem both to have been regarded by Hermann as scarcely out of the awkward squad themselves. Poor Zeunius especially comes often under his dis- cipline : — " this could have entered into the head of no man on earth except Zeunius;' — " no one living, except Zeunius, could have entertained such an imagination;" &c. lashes which can hardly be thought too severe, when inflicted on an instructor, who could persuade himself and teach others, that airb, for instance, in the following passages signifies the final cause: idav/xa^ov tov ''Epfioyivqv airb cpiAoaocplas : — air' ^lo-ayyeXlas Kplvecrdai. See note 57. page 581 of the original. Both the refuted and the refuting passages have generally been rejected by me ; but many useful parts, which may at first appear to be omitted, will be found transferred to places more appropriate to them. 2 As it has been found necessary here and there both to omit some rules, and to compress several others into one, the numbers prefixed do not always correspond to those of the original : in such, cases the latter are inclosed in the marks of a parenthesis. See, e. g., p. 58. Sometimes the number of a rule of Viger has been retained, not on account of the rule itself, but of the notes belonging to it. 3 One inducement among others to retain the division of the. original, was the PREFACE. VU Many of the definitions or descriptions which precede the examples of idioms in the original, are clumsy and inartificial ; inapplicable to the idioms treated of, or encumbered with unessential particulars; 1 often inadequate to the comprehension of all the examples following them, and often, on the other hand, too loose to apply peculiarly and exclusively to the idiom introduced by them. I have ventured, therefore, to remodel them in so many instances, that I can give only this general advertisement of such alterations. 2 The passages cited are next to be mentioned. Of passages equally adapted to the exemplification of an idiom, I have always preferred such as are given on good authority 3 to such as appear without any name either in the text or notes; and I have generally copied, with the omission sometimes of parts irrelevant to the idiom under con- sideration, all that are necessary to be immediately seen for the elucidation of that idiom ; 4 referring to all others of any use, espe- cially to such as are taken from books, where they may be easily and readily found. 5 In many instances mere references, instead of passages, are given in the original : the whole of these, I believe, both in the text and notes, have been transferred into this abridg- ment. They may perhaps appear very numerous; but for the thorough understanding of an idiom, it is often desirable to con- power afforded by it to my readers of ascertaining by reference the parts assignable to Viger and to each of his acnotators. The nature of my plan made it impossible to keep those parts separate, and distinguish them by the names of their respective contributors. There is one mark indeed by which some of Hoogeveen's contributions may stilt be often recognised without a reference to the original : I mean his affected and pedantic mode of quotation. He always, for example, cites the books of Hero- dotus by the names of the Muses ; and a certain part of Homer's second Iliad is always " Homer in Bceot." the verses being reckoned from the beginning of the Catalogue. He has, I believe, in very few instances been deprived by me of these badges of distinction. 1 In this respect they have sometimes reminded me of Boyle's recipe for the cure of dysentery. One of the ingredients in his medicine is. calcined bone ; and the bone to be employed is " the thigh bone of a hanged man." 3 As no mark of discrimination could well be applied to these numerous altera- tions, they can only be distinguished by comparison with the original. 3 An examination of the passages in the books themselves from which they have been taken is of so much importance on many accounts, (see e. g. note w, p. 43. />, p. 45. t, p. 49. A, p. 54. c, p. 67. I, p. 69. u and v, p. 74. y, p. 77. c, p. 126./, p. 129. t/,p. I49.e, p. 150."r, p. 155.n,p.l62.a,p. 165.e,p. 170.<7,p. 191. c, p. 202./, p.204. s, p. 252.) that, to render it more easy, T have not only given more correct and precise references in many parts, but have often supplied them when altogether wanting. In the original, one part of a reference is often in the text, and the other parts in the notes : in this Abridgment the Reader will have the advantage of seeing all the parts of the references together. 4 I have frequently thought it expedient to give the passages more fully than they appear in the original, and have sometimes given them from better editions. 5 Where the phrases quoted to illustrate an idiom are numerous, I have usually reduced them into alphabetical order. VIM PREFACE. template it in different situations, and in all its shades of vari- ation ; and in a large number of references there is a chance that some at least of the books referred to may be accessible to every reader. In translating the examples, I have not contented myself with the sense which words may possibly admit when considered abstractedly ; but of all the passages which I remembered, or to whi/h I was able to refer, I .have endeavored to give that interpretation which the tenor of the context requires. 1 The limits assigned to the work obliged me in many instances to render the idiomatical words only ; and where the meaning is very obvious, and is moreover contained in an exposition preceding the citation of examples, any further inter- pretation has sometimes been judged needless. Translation indeed, properly so called, was not always possible. Various modifications, transitions, and connexions of thought are expressed in Greek by words to which there are none precisely equivalent in languages formed by nations of less acuteness and refinement. Such is the mode of proceeding which appeared to me the most eligible with regard to the materials furnished by the origiual. In the hope of increasing their utility, I have offered some additions aud observations of my own; 2 but the want of room obliged me to leave many things unaltered and unnoticed, the propriety of which ap- peared to me, to say the least, very questionable. They who are thoroughly acquainted with the last editions of 1 In note 10, therefore, for example, p. 88. of the original, I have not, as others have, translated ovkst' epyov iyKadeiSeiv, 'dcrris iar 1 e\ev6epos, it is his business to sleep no more, who is free ; for that is far enough from the sense required by the context of Aristoph. Lysistr. 614. see this Abridgment p. 34. 1. 36. nor in note 88. p. 138, have I translated iro\vv p.\v top 'AA<=|cwSpov Kal$l\nritov iv tu7s Siaj8o\o?s (pepcav, often mouthing Alexander and Philip in accusations; see Abr. p. 51. 1. 11. nor in Hermann's note [143] on Ch. v. ^ ii. R. 7. olada vvv a p.oi yeviadca ; knottiest thou now what things are to happen to me? because it must be evident to any one reading and understanding the whole dialogue between Thoas and Iphigenia in the passage whence the words are taken, that the intention of the latter is not to inform Thoas of what is to happen to herself, but of what must be done to enable her to accomplish a purification which she pretends to be necessary: see this Abridgment p. 71. 1.2. nor in note 89, p. 340 of the original, have I rendered Aumjpbs '£p, know that you are wretched ; because in Aristophanes the words are addressed to Dicasopolis by Euripides after a great many impertinent and troublesome requests made by the former, and Euripides immediately adds, Kairox^pV^ov S6p.o}p : not to mention that KvTrnpbs never signifies unhappy or wretched: see this Abridgment p. 116. 1. 21. I will not exhaust the Reader's patience by giving any more instances, but rather refer him in general to the following work, and to the preceding note 3, page vii. 2 These are generally either included within brackets in the text, or placed in notes at the bottom of the pages. I perceive that through my inadvertence a few remarks of others have been included between brackets ; but they may be easily distinguished by reference to the original. For every thing in the notes I am solely answerable. PREFACE. ix Viger need not be told that this Abridgment has been a work of much difficulty and perplexity; and therefore need scarcely be entreated to regard with indulgence the imperfections which they may discover in it. Any suggestions offered by the really learned for the improvement of it will be gratefully received by the pub- lisher. J.S. Welch Bicknor, August 19th, 1828. N.B. Similar abridgments of Hoogeveen on the Particles, Bos on the Ellipses, Hermann on the Metres, and Maittaire on the Dialects, of the Greek language have been published. %* With respect to the references, as passages may be readily found in any books divided always into verses or other small portions, the editions of such books need not be specified. Of books not so divided (as indeed of most books) the editions referred to may generally be understood to be the best, when there is no specification of any particular edition. The following, however, have sometimes been cited without such specification : ^Eschines, Orat. Aurel. Allobr. 1607. Aristides, interpr. Canter. 1604. Clemens Alexandr. Colon. 1688. Demosthenes, Aurel. Allobr. 1607. Dinarchns, appended to the edition of Demosth. Hippocrates, Genet. 1657. Isocrates, interpr. Wolf. 1604. Lysias, Marburg. 1683. Pausanias, Xy- landr. Hanov. 1613. Philo Judseus, Colon. 1613. Plutarch, Francof. 1599. Proclus, appended to the Basil edition of Plato (but Plato himself is usually quoted from the edition of Serranus). In preparing this Second Edition for the Press, the Editor has corrected a few oversights which had formerly escaped his notice, and has inserted several additional Notes, the references to which are distinguished by asterisks ( # ) and obelisks (f). Viger. CONTENTS. CHAP. I. Page The Article (called by some the prepositive Article) . . l CHAP. II. The Relative o$ (called by some the subjunctive Article) . 13 CHAP. III.— THE NOUN. Section I. The Noun Substantive II. The Adjective III. On some particular Nouns, Adjectives, and Substan tives, alphabetically : viz. ayaObs, Ixtcpos, aXXos, a/x^a) avr/p, ciTroQpas, avdpwxos, aperi), ap^v, avro^wpos IV. 'Acpop/jii], fiaoiXevs, fiovXrjfAa, /3ta, beiXr], brjXos, biaira, hi Kaws, ilovXrjs, kiriboZps, epyov, erebv, eroi/ios V. "InTros, 'nnroyvojfuov, 'Laos, tcaipos, kokos, kclkwois Ttjs eirap X^a-s, tcXoTrrj twv brjfiOffiivv, icotvbs, Karaypem, Kvpia, itpo Qea[xia> ipf/pr), Kvpios *■ .... VI. Aoyos VII. Mepos, fiolpa, umbels, ju^^an), fiLKpbv and fieya, veaviicbs VIII. 'Qbbs, oIkovojios, olos, opyi) .... IX. "Oaos X. Ovpos, iraibes, els iraaav, vrXoifios, TroXirda, 7roXvs, TrXeov, irpay/xa, irpa&s, Trpoffyrifxa, irpocpaais, irpmra XI. ^Lrjfielov, TeKfxrjptov, avobeifys, pybiovpyyfia, awfxa, reXos, rkyyt], ris ; and ris. ..... XII. Toaovrov, (pdovos, %apis, X ei P> XP^ 0S XIII, Xpfjfxa, xpvabs, %wpa, &pa .... 18 24 30 32 36 39 40 43 46 49 52 56 57 CHAP. IV. On the Pronoun 59 CHAP. V. — ON THE VERB. I. On the Verb, with respect to kind or form . . 65 II. On the idioms of the Indicative, Imperative, Optative, and Subjunctive Moods .... 70 CONTENTS. III. On the Infinitive Mood, and certain tenses . IV. Of the Verbs ayairciv, aripyeiv, airoxpfjv, aairdS,euQai ayeiv koX (pepetv, cnroXaveiv .... V. BovXofxai, ye.vvq.v, riKreiv, yiveadai, ytyvwcriceiv, Bia-^apelv biwuetv, (pevyeiv, emtyevai ..... VI. On the Verb dpi . . . VII. On the Verbs elirelv, eXnlcleiv, eXireodai, k^epyeadai e^tevai, eoiKa, e%(o ...... VIII. On the Verbs rJKta, tcaraXafifiavo), aei/jicu, XavQavu), fieXXio vikciw, vo/i($oo, olba, 'iadi, oifiai . . IX. On the Verbs KarayivoxrKetv, Xeyeiv, 6/j.oXoyelv, 6, virapyta, {nrooreXXo/iai XIII. On the Verbs (palyofxai and (pepa> XIV. On the Verbs (j>Qdvetv, (pieiv, ^aipeiv, xpaodai, ■ywpeiv ey-^apeiv . . . . . . . 72 71 79 S2 84 92 97 101 105 107 108 CHAP. VI. — PARTICIPLE. I. On Participles in general II. On some Participles which appear to be redundant III. On the Participles inroXeXei/jifxevos, apyvnevos,, j3ovX6- fxevos, ytyvo/ievos, e^ojievos, evheypfievos IV. On the Participles of the Verbs ovofiaSot, vapex^, ttc- pie^w, 7ro£u5, reXeurdw, Tvyyavw, vnapxa, elfxl . ; . 113 120 122 123 CHAP. VII.— ADVERB. I. On the terminations of certain Adverbs . . .126 II. On the Adverbs aKptflCbs, aXXws re Km, apa . . 129 III. On the Adverbs a/ueXet, dvriKpv; avrwpvs . . .131 IV. On the Adverbs apaporus, apri, cnrapA, ems apri, apriws, dre^^ws, drpefxa, drpe/Jtas, av, aiidis, aire, abrlica . . 133 V. On the Adverbs avrodev, elra, e-rcetTa, efnrijs . . 136 VI. On the Adverbs e7rei, kneibrj, eirav, eireibav, eirietK&s . 139 VII. On the Adverbs eirinpoadev, eiye, rj, %, (with the Par- ticles annexed to them,) and tfbt) . . . 142 VIII. On the Adverbs fiaXXov and fxdXiara . . . . f 145 IX. On the Adverbs fj,era£v, fiexpi, prjv, fxovov ov, \iwv, vol, vfi, vvv, ot, o'ifioi, olye, bfiov, o/xias .... 147 X. On the Adverbs oiry, ottov, ottws, dirorav, orav, ore, ovtu>, pq.hiws, 6pa, TrdXiv, irep, Ttpiv, pa . . . .153 XI. On the Adverbs ttuis, ttov, rax«, w, and on those which express approbation or disapprobation . . . l6l xii CONTENTS. Section Page XII. Of Adverbs which have a peculiar energy and agree- ableness in negation ; and expressly of those of which /nil is the first in construction l65 XIII. On oh and ovk, and the Particles joined with them . 171 CHAP. VIII.— CONJUNCTION. I. On the Conjunction a\\a : 175 II. On the Conjunction av (for which the poets use ire and Key) with regard to its first and second use . . 178 III. On the third and fourth uses of av . . . . 181 IV. On the Conjunctions apa, apa, and ye 182 V. On the Conjunctions yap and £>) .... 186 VI. On the Conjunctions el, l)v, av, ehv, and their concomi- tant Particles 189 VII. On the Conjunctions re and mi, and their concomitant Particles 195 VIII. On the Conjunctions ;ue> and Se, and the Particles joined with them 200 IX. On the Conjunctions on and rolvvv .... 206 X. On the Conjunction u>s, and the Particles connected with it 209 CHAP. IX. — PREPOSITION. I. On the Prepositions afufi, avlt, avev, avn, II. On the Prepositions bia and eis . III. On the Prepositions Ik or e£, and kv . IV. On the Preposition em V. On the Prepositions Kara, fxera, and avv VI. On the Preposition Ttaph. . VII. On the Prepositions irepl and ?rpo VIII. On the Preposition irpos IX. On the Prepositions vnep, vn6, x w P« s ■ 217 222 22S 234 242 249 253 256 260 GREEK IDIOMS. CHAPTER I. THE ARTICLE.* Rule I. The article, in the masculine or feminine gender, agreeing ivill) no substantive expressed, is always to be referred to one under- stood ; and there is often an ellipsis of a participle agreeing with the substantive so understood : as Ttjs 'Aaias i) vpos tcis avaroXtts, i. e. § pep\s — Terpaniievriirpbs, — the part of Asia towards the East; -rjv Trapa to relyfos rjei/xev, i. e. rrjv obbv ayovaav Trapa r. r. .ZEschin. Socr. Dial, de Morte, c. 3. the road by the wall. (See H. Steph. de dial. Att. p. 17„ ad art. 21. Fisch. ad Well, iii, 259 seq. Wakef. ad Eurip. Ion, 438.) With the article in the neuter also a noun is sometimes under- stood ; as when grammarians say ro woiw, i. e. to pfjfia iroiib, the •verb 7roiw ; ro kclXws, i. e. to kirippri{xa kqXws, the adverb kuXuis. But there are many phrases in which no noun is expressed with the neuter article, for this very reason, that either the thing intended had no appropriate denomination, or that such denomination did not occur to the speaker or writer. Such are the following : to fxev on— to be on — partly — partly; boKw fici :o tov 'Iflviceiov 'i-wnov ireirovBevai, Plato in Parmen. what happened to Ibycus's horse seems to me to have happened to myself. So p) 7radoi/xt to tov Dow- tIus, Lucian, Demosth. Enc. p. 931. and Aristoph. Nub. 1200. ov novov to ttjs (tvkTjs TTturjaere, Matth. x\\, 21. ye shall not only do this which is done to the Jig-tree ; anijyyeiXov navra, kui tcl twv baifxojn$onerm', Matth. viii, 33. and told every thing, and what was befallen to the possessed of the devils. II. When the noun is expressed, the article is sometimes elegantly repeated: as e-^eadai tFjs bhov ti\s els t>)v (jMTtjpiav, to keep to the road to salvation. So tov vraparrXov tov ws enl tovs " Apafias, Arr. de Exp. Al. vii, 26* III. In a similar manner the article is joined elliptically with ad- verbs and prepositions: as ol Kad' fipas, (bvres,) those of our own times; ol evhov, those ivithin ; ol iraXai, the ancients ; c 6 navv, a Called by some the Prepositive Ar- sur la Nature des Animaux, p. 304. ed. tide. Paris. 1769.— J. S. 6 'Ej/ to? (Tvyypdfj./jLari rep ireplTov'Hpa- c T<£ tov irdvv TlepiKXeovs vt$, Xen. Kkhus, Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 21. In his book Mem. iii, 5, 1. the son of the famous about Hercules. So in French: " Un tel Pericles. See Abridgm. of Bos, p. IOC, homme est sans doute L' itre LE plus note a. — J. S. heureux de la Nature." Buffon, Discours Viger. A 2 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. the celebrated; r« oikoj, affairs at home, or one's home ; kv rols jj.d\t(TT a,* eminently or exceedingly. 11 IV. The article, with the particles jute and be, serves for partition, distinction, or opposition ; as ruv yp'r avppu\ovr-ui' ol jufr padvpov- / pev and ?/ be both signify partly ; navrus rov e'ibovs tovtov (pi'iGopev twtdvpeiv ; i) tov pev, tov be ov ; or the one part of it only, but not the. other? Plato de Rep. lib. v. p. 475. I. 15. — Some- times what is usually only referred to, or signified, by the article in this phrase, is, for greater perspicuity, expressed in addition to it ; either in both members, as imroi re iirnois, nai arbpes avbpaoiv, ))yw- viSovto' 01 pev — fitairacrdai tovs Ylepaas ol Maneboves' ol be elptai civtQv tijv enfiacnv, ol Yleprrai : those, the Macedonians, to repel the Persians ; these, the Persians, to prevent the egress of the Macedo- nians : Arrian, de Exp. Alex. 1. i. p. 33. 1. 11.; or in one only, as, e\et be avaXoyov ?/ KprjriK)) rafys npos Tt)v AaKojpiK>)v yeiopyovai re yap rols pev E'lXiores, ro'is be Kprjcrlv ol WepioiKm : for the Helots culti- vate the land for the latter, and for the former, (the Cretans,) the Periceci: Aristot. Polit. lib. ii. c. 8. Sometimes 6 pev and 6 be are not made correlative ; but what would have been signified by one or the other, is put in the place of it; as in Herodot. Terps. c. 94. where the Mitylenaeans and Athenians go to war with each other, ol pev cnraireovTes ttjv Xupnv' 'Adrjvaloi be, &c. " the former insisting on restoration of the territory, and the Athenians'' (instead of the latter,) &c. So Time. i. c. 84. — Sometimes one of these correlative expressions is omitted without any substitute, as dewv be lepa kv KuXAj/nj, 'AokXt)- ttlov, to be 'Afpobirqs emiv : there are temples of the gods in Cyllene, oj JEsculapius, and the other of Venus: Pausan. in El., lib. poster.; and in this case there is sometimes a repetition of the correlative expressed, as vexpol b % etwrTov, ol b' epeXXov, o! b' eneivro, Eurip. Or. 1496'. Pors.j See Musgr. on Iph. in T. 13fjl. In the following passage there is the same reference (or, to use a law term, the same innuendo) at each repetition of ol be, — ol pev being understood : rols 7ruio\ rols nXovtriois ol Tiarepes vfyeiv 7rapaivovmv, ol be (sc. KoXciKes) pedueiV ijbxppovelv, ol de uaeXyaiveiv' (jtvXarreiv, ol be bairavav' 0t- Xepyelv, ol be pa.dvp.e~iv : fathers exhort their rich sons to be sober ; but they (sycophants) to drink: to be temperate; but they, to be dissolute : to save ; but they, to spend: to be industrious; BUT they, to be idle: Plut. irepl ncab. ay. Ol be by itself, for some : kcrd'ra be ecpopeov beppara di'ipeia' ol be cat ly(dvu>v tu>v peyaXwv tu ira-^ea : they wore for clothes the skins of wild beasts: but some wore the thick skins of large fishes : Arr. Hist. Ind. c. 24. See too * See Abridgm. of Bos, p. 106, note /;. as eVl twv airo^roov, a secretary. — J. S. Add, ol iirl twv ^incrroKwv, the t 'SirovBrjs 5' vtto "Eirnrrov ol 5' a>p- clerhs or amanuenses ; and in such phra- Bovuto' tovs Se Ksipivovs Ne/cpous h.v eTSes. ses the article itself is sometimes omitted, Eurip. Hel. 1621.— J. S. Rule 4.] THE ARTICLE. 3 Arr. de Exp. Al. 1. i. c. 11. in init. — 01 be, by itself, in a general sense, for men: Uvpyoi Karripuirovro, rol be (Ionic and poet, for ol be) Xoiadiav Ni}^ot'-o fiolpav irpovfifiarwv beboptcores : the towers were thrown doivn, and men swam about, seeing their last fate before their eyes: Lycoph. v. 81. speaking of the deluge. See another unusual form in Olyss. a, 115. — Sometimes ris is substituted for one member of tile phrase : e£ wv avrovs avi]ptiKa at rives, ol be teal brj- fjLorriq: kreXeiirnnav : of whom some have destroyed themselves, others have been publicly executed: iEschin. de fals. leg. p. 258. I. 39. Sometimes it is added: 6 fiev ris ererpwro, 6 be ko.1 e-rreirrioKti : one had been wounded, another had fallen: Xen. H. Gr. iv, 5, 14. — Ol be rives and r t bi] be rives equivalent: ol fiev yap avruiv tcoXatcas teal irapaairovs uvaXa/jfiavovcnv, ol be rives eralpas ml %a- fiairvwas Xvrpovvrat, . . . e rjbri be rives teal tS>v veaviKwrepoov dirrovrai, KaKijp : for some of them entertain sycophants and parasites ; others purchase the freedom of courtesans and street-walkers, . . . and others there are who even engage in still bolder and more desperate prac- tices : Plut. irepl Tratb. ayioy. — Sometimes inslead of the partitive genitive which usually introduces this kind of phrase, a nominative is employed: ol be 'Acapvaves, ol fiev es"Apyos fcvvefioijBovv, ol be &c. for rwv be 'A«\ ol fiev — / Thucyd. iii, 105. So ol rrapovres be, ol fxev rjbovvro, ol be eyeXuiv : but as for those present, some were ashamed, and others laughed: Lucian in Conv. t. iii. p. 432. 1. 23. ed. Amst., which Latin authors have imitated : see Sallust, B. C. c. 2. init. Viig. iEn. xii, 277. Val. Fl. iii, 462. ; and Lucian has added to the nominative a genitive of a pronoun referring to it : oi Ko|ui- fiavres be, 6 fiev abrwv rifiverai £i/ fiev avrwv appeviK)] irepa rov fierpov — 6 b' 'A-fruXXiov Trpoairoie~irai fiev Tctvra el- bevai &c. : and as to your children, one of them, your daughter, is masculine beyond measure ; — and the other, Apollo, pretends to know all things: Dial. Junon. et Lat. The following form is still more bold ; ttoXXovs npovrpeirei' enl (piXoaofiav' ol be ovbels avru npoael^ov, — for ruv be ovbels : he urged many to philosophy, but no one of them attended to him : iElian lib. x. c. \6. V. H. — Instead of 6 fiei>, 6 be, eh fiev, erepos be, (in French lun, Vautre,) are employed with propriety : bvo be kuI fieyaXa, ev fiev, on ov nepl r&v 'iautv uywviZofiat, erepov be : the one, the other : Demosth. pro Cor. — Likewise, 6 els /cat 6 erepos, see Matth. vi, 24. ; and b els, 6 be erepos is in Luke vii, 41. ; and in Matth. xxiv, 40, 41, is found 6 els nat 6 eh; and in Arist. 1. Etlt. vi, c. 1. ev fiev and ev be are opposed, and also in his Rhet. ii, 20. ; and in Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 8. Iv e v H8jj 8e rives is evidently more em- iroXv yap ovrcas p.eya\si6repov, evaWa- phatical than ol 8e rives. — J. S. yeiarjs irrwaeoes, 3} ehrep ovrais ej/ / Homer is the source of this elegance, Be Suca cxKinreKwv 6 p.ev — . J. eh /xev rows vfipicovres, to'cs be bovXevovres : insolent tyrants to some, to others slaves : Ibid. c. 41. And presently afterwards, 7rp6s fiev vovs fiXovs — irpbs fV kyQpovs. And see Steph. de dial. Att. p. 184. V. The article with the preposition Kara forms elegant phrases ; as ra ko0' ripcis, t he affairs of our time, or more generally, all that relates to us : ra Kara Uavaaviav rov AaKebai/xovioi', Km Q e fj. i a- TOKXea rov 'Adrira'iov — ourws ireXevrrjcrev : thus concluded the events relative to Pausanias the Lacedcemonian and Themistocles the Athenian: Thuc. i, 138. see Macchab. lib. ii, c. 15, v. 37. Phi- lipp. i, 12. Coloss. iv, 7.: b Ni'ypos etfprve to. ku6' eavrbv, Niger arranged his affairs: Herodian iii, 1, 17. — In the same sense ra Trepl r/uas : a/ja r« irvQeuBai ra tr epi A e vtXq v Ka 1 Ke0 q yo v '. what had befallen Lentulus and Cethegus : Plut. in Vit. Cic. p. 872. ra rrep^i Qrjfiaiovs, the state of the Thebans' affairs: Isocr. Or. ad Phil. So with a/.!0< : ra a/j. or ni one word Towveyov, signifies, at present, for the present, as things go now; as, Tovvvey^ov kv ciyadals yivopai reus eKiriai, at present I entertain the best hopes. See Plut. 'EpwT. init. and lib. Tub. vii, 11. VII. "Oc!e, rjbe, robe, with the article repeated are used demonstra- tively for ovtos, uvrr), rovro ; as, obe 6 dvdpioTros, this man ; and for the enclitic be the Attics use b), as 6bl [see Fisch. ad Well. ?. p. 345.] : btowep Taiir eypatyev obi Trepi epov : on which account this man (or my friend Ctesiphon here) proposed these things in the psephism concerning me: Demosth. pro Cor. ; but this form, and that of the adverbs evOabl, wv\, &c. are proper in familiar language only, and therefore are never employed in tragedy, though very frequent in comedy. — The article 6 is used also where avros, ws, instead of it, or dis alone, would make the sense plainer : Kepttvpa'toi crfiov qvtmv tovs e^dpovs boKovvTas elvat efovevov, tyiv pev aWiav em. 6 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. kv to'is fxakiara and the like; of which hereafter. — 7. even with- out a preposition : (xu tu yiyiwrrKets, Srt, you know this, that, — ; Plato Crat. p. 434. E. to bk &pa ov tovtu %v, Id. in Symp. xx. 7. VIII. Tjjbe adverbially; here; in this way; in this manner; for ovrws ; obco being defective: — evtoijcrwpev be rai rrjbe, let us consider it thus also: Plato Apol. 32. tpevyio to beiXov Trjbe, by this course I avoid the charge of timidity: Eurip. Or. v. 773' Pors. — T»/6e is opposed to KaKeide'. — Trjbe Kcweiae arpe- (peaOai, to turn tins way and that way. Trj pev and rfj be are very frequently correlative ; for here, there, &c. : rrj pev opeaiv a-itelp- yeroi baaecri cot vxpijXols, Trj be irebiov avrf/s KaBfjKet is Te eir\ ti)v /neyaXrjv Tr)v Tavrr] daXnaaap : on the one side it (Hyrcania) is hem- med in by ivoody and lofty mountains ; on the other its plain extends as far as to the great sea in this part : Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii, 23. — Sometimes for partly — partly; or in this respect, —in that respect : teal ^,b)KpaTt}s rrj fiev opdws e3i]rei, rrj be f/papravev : and Socrates in some respects inquired rightly ; in other respects he erred: Aristot. Eth. vi, 13. IX. To tL among philosophers signifies the substance or essence of a thing; to tvoiov, the quality ; to noobv, the quantity: kcu yap (rayadov) ev rw ri Xeyerai, olov 6 6eos ical 6 vovs' teal ev tu iroiip, at aperai' rai ev rw iroau, to perpiov' ku\ ev rw irpos ti, to yp)\ci\xov' Knl ev xpovo), xaipos' rat ev tottw biatra, rat erepa TOiavra : for Good is spoken of in substance, as God, and Mind ; and in quality, as the Virtues ; and in quantity, as Mean or Moderation ; and in re- lation, as Utility ; and in time, as Opportunity ; and in place, as Habitation, and the like: Aristot. Eth. i, 6. X. With the same philosophers to bia ri is, the final cause. XI. Ti)v 7rp)v Tayio-Tr\v, as quickly as possible : JE\. H. V. vii, 5. T>)v evde~iav, di- rectly, straightforward, openly: 'OpTr)uiov rr/v pev evdelav rw Beppr; avvenrelv fifj To\pi)aavros, Plut. in Cic. p. 864. I. 2$. [p. 1584. 1. 8. ed. H. St.]— With the same ellipsis of Kara certain substan- tives expressed are employed with a genitive after them, as \apiv, for ihe sake : evbatporias xapiv, for the sake of happiness : Aristot. Eth. i, 3. see Eurip. Andr. 1228. Perictyone ap. Stob. 487, 51. Abresch, Auct. Diluc. Thuc, p. 420. — and with the article; tt)v ar)v "x.apiv, for your sake: Eurip. Andr. 221. and, Trarpwav ■%apiv, for the sake of their father : Eurip. Heracl. 242. — So b'tK-qv and TpoiTov, after the manner of , like: biKnv twv beiXirwv 7rvevpa- tov, Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. g 11. bixriv \tpaipas, iEschyl. Ag. 241. TpoTrov aiyviriwv, Ibid. 241. like vultures; rpoirov Xoy^»js, He- rodot. vii, 6$. Xpeos, for the benefit of: gov ovk eXaooov Tj kcivvs Xpeos, for your advantage no less than for her own: Eurip. Hec. 880. Pors. — Here may be mentioned ciKpiiv, still: unpriv kcl\ iipels ciavveToi eare ; Matth. xv, l(j. * See the Abridgm. of Bos, p. 100. I. 4. Rule 8— lb\] THE ARTICLE. 7 XII. The article with a genitive of a proper name signifies the son of, and very frequently occurs in genealogies : 'O tov &r)fioodevovs, the son of Demosthenes. ^wKparys 6 ^Iwtypoviatcov is used to signify either that he was the only son of Sophroniscus, or that he was that Socrates, whose father was Sophroniscus, to distinguish him from others of the same name; hut Zw/cptirjjs 'S.wtypoviaKov, without the article, is Socrates who had Sophroniscus, not any other, for his father. See Herodot. Er. c. 52. Xenoph. Cyrop. i, 27. — So in the plural, 01 yovewv biatrt'ifxwv, the sons of illustrious parents: Plut. irepl naib. aywy. XIII. To with a neuter adjective, usually in the superlative, sig- nifying the chief thing in an enumeration, after the recital of others: 01 be bvvarol icaXa KTrj/jtara Kara ti)v ywpav oiKobofxtais re ical noXv- TeXevi KaratTKevals a7ro\w\e(cores, to be pey iff tov, iroXefiov clvt elp-fjvrjs e-^ovres : but above all, &c. Thuc. ii, 65. ; and the neuter adjective without the article: /jieyiffTov be, Trj twv yj>r)na.Twv oiruvet KwXuaovrai : and what is of most consequence, they will be prevented by want of money: Thuc. i, 142. The expression is elliptical, to be jieyiaTov eart tovto. — In a similar sense the Latin writers used Id quod. See Cic. Mil. c. 30, fin. and ii. in Cat. c. 8. XIV. 'Fj-itI Tdbe (f-iepr) or KXlfxara), on this side, with a genitive; as e7rt Tabe twv Spun', on this side the mountains, opposed to e7re- neiva, on the further side, beyond; y) k-xeiceiva twv "AXTrewv KeXTiKrj, Gallia Transalpine Gaul beyond the Alps; ?'; en\ Tabe twv "AXnewv, Cisalpina, or Gaul on this side the Alps. — Not unlike this, is €7Ti QaTepa jiev, en\ darepa be, on this side, on that side. XV. To or, part: ttjs -%wpas to fxev ov Trpbs apKTOv earl, to be ov 77-joos ne(jr)f.ifipiav : of the country one part is towards the North, the other towards the South : Aristid. Panath. s XVI. To fiev, to be, partly, partly : to pev vir' eXjr/Sos, robe vnb beovs, partly through hope, partly through fear. And sometimes ti is added either to to per or to to be, or to both, to qualify the affirmation, rendering it generally, in some respect or other, according to the various senses of rts, less definite: to pev ti KaToiKTiaei twv QtjJ3wv,t6 be ws avyyvwara bebpaKevai e oi ojlXoi tu> Kvpo) trpooriyov 01 /<6c KnSoj/a/ovs beofievovs avrov peveiv, ol be 'YpKavlovs, 6 hi tis Vcjfipvav, 6 b£ rts laKav : and some other, Gobryas, and some other, Sacas: Xen. Cyrop. vi. iuit. — Sumelimes to pip u, to bi ti are not adverbial: Tfjs yeveaews i)fxu>v to fiev n ?'; narpls fiepl^erat, to be n oi yevvifrravres, to be ol koiirol (pi\oi: part of our lives our country claims for her share, part our parents, and part our other friends : Plato Epist. 9* In the plural, tci pkv, tu be: Herodot. iii, 80. Pind. Pylh. ii, 19- Soph. Trach. 534. Ta /jev — to be irXeov, partly, — but principally, or more: Time, i, 90. init. The forms are much varied in Pindar. See Nem. ix, 102. Ol. xii, 7. Nem. ii, 29. viii, 51. Pyth. xi, 70. ii, 56. Isthm. iii, 18. Ol. ii, 132. — In the same sense tovto fxev, tovto be. : teal tovto fiev tw lafir]iiu) 'A.n6\Xojvi eyj)i}oa.T0, tovto be £elv6v tivo. — KdTeKo! fxiae es 'Afifiapem : he both consulted Ismenian Apollo, AND, &c. Herodot. viii, 134. see too Herodot. iii, 106. ix, 27- Tovto fiev by itself, Soph. Aj. 6?0. Herodot. ii, 99. iii, 106\ 108. vii, 21. Tovto be. by itself, Herodot. v, 45. viii, 60. tovto fiev, — ?/ he av eo-obos, Id. vii, 176. Tovto fiev with fteTct be corresponding, in the beginning of the following chapter : Herodot. vi, 125. To fiev — tovto be, Id. viii, 102. Tovto fiev—eha, Soph. Phil. 1345.— This idiom is imitated in Latin by Hoc — Hoc. See Virg. Georg. ii, 351. XVII. To Xeyofievov, according to the adage, or proverb : dX\' i], to Xeyofievov, ko.toitiv eopTijs ijtcofiev ; but are we come, as they say, after the feast? Plato in Gorg. and in Phaed. c. 11. — To too Xoyov is used in the same sense ; Lucian, Demonax. [p. 999- A. edit. Salm.] Sometimes, instead of Xeyofievov or tov Xoyov, the name of the author, whose adage or words are quoted, is put in the genitive after ro : Hapfievibrjs be fioi (paiverai, to tov 'O fxr/pov, albows re fioi elvai a/j.a beirvs Te : in the words of Homer ; as Homer says: Plato Theaet. p. 183. The following are elegant variations of this idiom : fidXXov avTov XeXrjOev 1} 01 tijs daXarrns Xey 6 ptevoi %6es: he is more ignorant of it, than of the measures, as they say, of the water in the ocean : Plato Theaet. p. 173. I. 41. »/ Aiofieheia Xey 6 fievr) avayKn iroielv avr elpri- cannot perceive Hermann's meaning. — fi&ov parenthetically, in the same sense J. S. Rule 17—19.] THE ARTICLE. 9 ovtws ais eyfo Ke^ptj/Jtat, to7s trpaynaat av fxtyepeiv ^pi'iffCKrdai : not only because they are false, but because, even though they were true, it was advantageous to the state, that &c. Demosth. pro Coron. Ov yap ovofiaarl rovs Xoyovs Trou'iaofiai, Tw /u>) boKelv eXey\etv a KpvTrreiv Xpeutv : for I will not mention any one by name in my discourses, that I may not appear to accuse publicly what it is necessary to conceal: Greg. Naz. ad Episc. vs. 21. In this sense the genitive tov also is used with the infinitive, (eVecct or v-n-ep being defective,) but never perhaps without some negation, as fit), jur'i riva, fjrjbeva, following. See Sophocl. Philoct. 197. Heliodor. ^.thiop. p. 496. Diony. Hal. p. 12. 1. 33. Huds. Basil, quoted by Casaub. on Athen. p. 75. To is placed before words also taken materially, as bfie'is, w lirbpes 'Adrjvcuot, (to b' v/jiels orav e'iirw, ti)v rtoXiv Xeyta — ) : but when I say YOU, when I use the word you : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 255. I. 4. Reisk.] But the article is sometimes omitted before words so taken : Ism.: 'Ft yap fxoyrj /xoi rvjab' arep (5iojitijj,ov ; Cieon : 'AW ?/oe fxevroL /jt) Xey' ov yap ear en, Soph. Ant. vs. 56j . do not employ the word ijbe:'' and in the writings of grammarians the article is put in the gender of the word understood before that which is taken materially; as Xeirrei »; els, (wpodeais being understood,) the preposition els is defective: Sch. Aristoph. Nub. 1083. So Xeliret ri bia, the preposition bia is understood: Sch. Thuc. 1. iv. init. The neuter article is put before members of sentences also: wept tov 7rws aKoveiv v/ucis kfiov be't,' about the manner in which you ought to hear me : Demosth. de Cor. p. 226. 1. 5. [St. Luke xxii, 24. Plat, de Rep. vi, p. 510.] — and before sentences, either complete and forming propositions, or defective and elliptical : ws to 'H,uepa eaA, Kol Nv£ ean, Trpos [iev to bieievyfierov /ueyaXrjv e^et al,iav : as the proposition It is day, and the proposition It is night, are very good when taken disjunctively, or formed into a disjunctive proposition : Epietet. Enchir. c. 58. See Plato Pliaedr. p. 273. 1. 20. St. Paul, Gal. v, 14. Id. Rom. xiii, 9. Plato Phaedr. p. 272. init. : to b' e/ue Kopwvrj Treido/bievoi' tov ddXiov obov nepieXdelv crabia irXelf ?} -^IXta ! that I, ivretch that I am, should, have wandered about more than a thousand stadia trusting to a crow! Aristoph. Av. vs. 5. — See Virg. iEu. i, 41. Soph. Phil. 234. Aristoph. Nub. Sl6\ Xeuoph. Cyrop. ii, 2, 1. To be, followed by /.n} or pjSe, Aristoph. Nub. 269. Ran. 741. XIX. The article is often deserted, as it were, by the noun which should have followed it, the construction having been suddenly changed on account of a doubt about the proper appellation of the thing to be expressed ; a form most common in orations ; as, // twv aXXiov 'E,\A?'/!'wi', e'ire xP'l Kamav, e'ire ayvoiav, e'ire kcu ravra afMporepa elireiv : the — must I call it baseness, or ignorance, or both together, of the other Greeks: Demosth. de Cor. [p. 231, I. 21.] — Two singular nouns after a plural article : ai J' avr eltropobxrai, 'Adrjvau'i re Kal "Hpt], Horn. II. v, 418. h I conjecture the true reading to be i To this head the passages quoted 'AAA' tySe jUeV aoi jurjSeV* ov yap iar en. above from Dem. pro Cor. and Gregv — J. S. Naz. ought to be referred.-— J. S. Fiser.. B 10 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. 1. The article with an appellative noun sometimes stands for a pro- per name: o ketwioacxpHTTris, slthentEUS ; b yewypiupos, Strabo ; b irepi- vyi)Ti)<;, Dionysius, whose poem is entitled lUpn'iyrjo-is rfjs oiKovfiivr}s ; b eOriKoypc'ityos or b tOvoypr'npos, Stephanus of Byzantium, who wrote a book wept 7roAew>' rat b)'i/.iu>i> ; b napaftdirns, the emperor Julian, who is commonly styled the Apostate, uKoararris ; b t&v aruaeuiv &&?yi?r$*» Hermogenes the rhetorician ; b tc^vlkos, Herod tan the grammarian ; b reyvacos Tewpyios, Chceroboscus ; b iropO/xevs, Charon ; b irovnpbs, the Devil; b (IovkoXosJ Theocritus; b avyypafevs, Thucydides, (Aphthon. ; Greg. Cor. de dial.); b xPwopp>l/Jui>, Chrysostom ; b deoXoyos, Gregory of Nazianzum ; b 7roir)n)s, Homer ; b piirup, De- mosthenes. — Equivalent to the appellative so used is a participle with its dependent words : b to. edviKa ypdipas, Stephanus of Byzan- tium ; b iroujaas to. Aiovvmaica, Nonnus of Panopolis, whose 48 books of Dionysiacs are still extant ; ' AXefavbpevs prjTwp b ra epwrtra Trails, k Achilles Tatius, author of the amours of Clitophon and Leucippe ; b ret j3ovkoXikci ypciipas, Theocritus ; b ra Kvirpia. ypaxpas (viz. eirr) or 7rotr)/uara), Stasitnus ; and b TreipaZwv, the Devil. 2. Secondly, the article with an appellative marks a thing determi- nate^, or demonstratively : Ibovres tov aarepa, e^aprjuav, rat eXQov- t€s eis tov oikov evpov to traibiov, Matth. ii, 10, where a certain particular star, house, child, are emphatically signified ; see also Matth. ii, 2. [The article sometimes appears to be employed for a purpose exactly opposite, — to signify things indefinitely; whence it has been supposed to stand for tis : * eav tis tu>v tyiXwv avaicoivuiTai vTrep T(t>i>, iElian, V. H. viii, 1. et7rep rw aXXb), Plato Phaed. 25. see Xen. Mem. iv, 6, 13 : — and interrogatively, Xen. Mem. iv, 5, 10. cf. Xen. CEc. xi, 20. But in reality what is taken for the article in such passages, is tis itself in another form ; for the Ionic dialect sub- stitutes Teo and rev for tov when the latter represents twos or rivos, and Tea) for rlvi. The form is probably used by the Attics in the genitive and dative singular only; but if it should be granted that it is used in the plural also of those cases, (since the plural appears iu the Ionic rewr and reoim, and in the pronoun, otuiv and orois,) yet at all events it is never employed in the nominative or accusative of either number.] 3. The article with the appellative sometimes follows the proper name as a cognominal addition: thus, 'HpanXetTos b crKoretvbs, Hera- clitus the obscure ; 'Iwawys b Ba7r-t Tk%vn. cumlocution Lord Shaftesbury designates Aristoph. Thesm. 420. " Sciunt Grsece Aristotle as the Grand Master of Art, docti, tov, rep, indefinita, eademque ac- Homer as the Grand Poetic Sire, Socrates centu notata, et interrogantia omnium and Plato, as the Philosophical Patriarch, esse generum. evp-qpa Se'|aT' etc tov vvp.dopas vofito, iEschin. in Tim. p. 172, 1. 43. rijv tov ry ovtl pt}Topucov — re^vrjv, Plato Phaedr. p. 269, I. 30. The article repeated, with the intervention of nal, has an indefinite signification: el to teat to eirolrjirev avQpwrros ovrool, ovk av aireda- vev : if this man had done so and. so, or this and the other : Demosth. de Cor. [p. 308, 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] add Aristid. Orat. pro Quatuorv. p. 420. ra Kal tu iroiovaas, Aristid. ib. p. 356. For this phrase 6 be'iva is sometimes substituted. — 'O belva is used on the following occasions : 1. when a certain person is spoken of, but his name is unknown to the speaker : l bey^ov tovtov av, iropQfiev, /cat roe belva, Lucian, Catapl, 13. t. i. p. 635. — 2. when the name of something spoken of is purposely suppressed: ro belva fievToi p) Xa^uveTwaav ovtoi, to JbucaaTitcbv," 1 Lucian, Bis Ace. c. 23. t. ii. p. 822, 51. — 3. when a name is not remembered: Aristoph. Thesm. 620, 621, 622. — 4. when it is indicated that any name will serve the purpose, one as well as another. In this sense, for 6 be'iva koa 6 belva the Latins say Caius and Sempronius. In the plural, ol belves tov bij/uov (underst. presented with a crown) audevTes ino tov bfyov : such and such persons. The article is prefixed to interrogative pronouns; when it always refers to something previously said by the person interrogated ; the article appearing to be the commencement of an anticipation of what the person questioned is expected to say, and the interrogative pronoun to be resorted to, after a short aposiopesis, from inability to proceed. Tr. evbaifxovei' Tracy^ei be davfxaaTov. Merc, ro — tL', Aristoph. Pac. 696.— -Merc. J, >] npo- bepKetrOai f.t6pov. Clior. to no~iov evpiov rijcrbe tyiipnaKov voaov ', jEschyl. Prom. vs. 248. the remedy which you discovered for this malady, was what ? Tiie article is joined with every part of speech, except the con- junction, in an adverbial sense : ro KeipaXaiov, principally, above all, in sum; to aXndes, Herodian iii, 8. r 6 arpexes, Theogn. \67 • in truth, in reality; to apx, in the mean time: Lucian, Tox. to fx^XP 1 e^ou, down to my time: Herodot. Th. c. 10. to naXat, formerly: Plat. Phaedr. 251, 1. 19- to napavriKa, for the present, for the time: Thuoyd. i, 134. to irp\v, before: Iliad, e, 54. ro npoaQev, heretofore : Xen. Cyrop. v, p. 129- ro ttCjs, in what manner, how: St. Luke xxii, 2. to. is yevovs bo£av, ivitk regard to celebrity of birth: Pans, in Arc. — to a.no tovtov, to and Tovbe, to /xerct tovto, to etc Tovbe, from this time forward, henceforth. — to ana tovtov, and ro e7ri tovtois, after this, after these things: Lucian, Conv. t. iiij p. 427, 433, 447- to k\ apxvs, at first, at the outset : * " Neque ilia rb vvv elvai, rh Tiipepov yap u-erpioos t6 ye rlifiepov elvai. In elvai, idem significant quod vvv et ri^/xe- Soph. (Ed. C. 1189. ((re y elvai &c.) puv, sed, ut id nunc, ut id liodie sit : i. e. sensus est, ut tu sis is, qui ilium malis quantum hodie satis est: quod nos did- remuneretur. Nos, du fur deine person "■ mus, fur jetzt : fur heute. Kex^pevrcu Hermann De Ell. et Pieon. — J. S. Chap. ii. Rule ].] "Os. 13 Paus. Achaic. 401. to e£ vpwv, as far as you can : Rom. xii, 18. to en kKeivf, as far as he is concerned: Isocr. Paneg. to tear e/jtavrov, as far as I am able, or in me lies, to the best of my ability : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 908. 922. see Rom. i, 15. iElian, V. H. i, 32. 70 icad' kavTov, individually , with respect to his own private con- cerns: Thuc. i, 60. to cu0' r/fiipav, daily: Plat. Phzedr. p. 240. 1. lfj. to Kara capita, according to the Jlesh: Act. Ap. ii, 30. to irpbs ttiv eta, toivards the east : Herod. Melp. c. 19. to irpo tovtov, formerly, before: Thuc. ii, 15. ra 71-pos 7raroos 'Adriralos, on his father's side; to ewiira v, for the most part, always, universally: Herodot. Pol. c. 157. Tw, in that case, then : Horn. II. h, 290. — wherefore, for that reason, on that account: Horn. I!. (5, 250,254. and so all the poets. See Musgr. ad Eurip. Hel. 1489- Vale-ken. ad Fragm. Callim. p. 82. — In this sense Horace uses Hoc, Sat. i, 6, 41. In the same signification to, Horn. II. iii, J76. and o and w. Eurip. Hec. 13. Valcken. ad Phcen. p. 52. CHAPTER II. THE RELATIVE "Os." RULE I. °Os fxev, osbe, for 6 fxev, 6 be: ov fxev ebeipav, or be enre- KTeivav, ov be e\idoj36\r](Tai> : one — another — another: St. Matth. xxi, 35. Herodian iii, 8. Rom. ix, 21. — So koi os, and he, i. e. then he answered or said thus ; and »)S' os, said he, (for e' ov for and tov: rw per 6p6iZs ael XP^~ fxevos, afi ov be to'is beopevots eVapcwv : and with the other, or out of the other (wealth): Plut. Public, [p. 177- ed. H. St.] O fiev — os be, one — another: Theogn. 205. So Oppian, Hal. i, 585. in the plural; and Appian, Pun. p. 59- ^Elian, V. H. vi, 1. — "Os fxev — 6 be, one, — another: Rom. xiv, 2. — ("Os in these phrases is not what is sometimes called the relative, or subjunctive, article ; but a demonstrative pronoun. Anciently this pronoun had two forms, o, tov, and os, ov: both forms were used indifferently for the relative article, as appears from Homer; and although later usage appropriated os, ov, to the relative article, yet in some forms the ancient significa- tion has obtained.) To the examples may be added : Mosch. Ep. Bion. 77, 78. Rliinto ap. Cic. ad Att. i, 20. Demosth. pro Cor. 248. 277, 20. 282. 289- In the second division of a sentence there must be sometimes understood a case of os different from the case * Called by some the Subjunctive Article. J 1 THE RELATIVE "Os. [Chap. ii. expressed in the first division : livioxOi be~ fxtv yaytkeoQat TJ, brew' re irari)p KeXerat, kcu avbavet avrfj, Odyss. ii, 114. I. e. ical bans avba- vet avrjj. — So Odyss. v, 54. xx, 341. Rhianus i, 9- *Os often, (as the Latin Qui,) agrees with a following noun instead of its antecedent: rt)v utcpijv ni KaXevvrat KXrjibes rf/s Kvirpov, Herodot. v, 108. UeprjiKov I'tfos, rbv a.KtvciKT]v KuXeuvat, Herodot. vii, 54. — so Eurip. Med. 14. Androm. 864. Hel. 289. See Fisch. ad Well. p. 341.— and sometimes with a noun understood, of a gen- der different from that of its antecedent: vetyeXr) be \xtv a./j.(pifieftr)Ke Kvaveri' 70 fjiev cvttot epwel, — i. e. vetyos, Horn. Od. xii, 74. See Greg. Cor. p. 38. and Keen. Steph. Dial. Att. p. 131, 134. Sometimes other redundant pronouns are added to 6's : <5v o pev av-wv, Callim. Epigr. 44. wv o fiev bfitiv, Menand. Epigr. ols 'OXv/nriot deoi AoTeV iror alrols, Soph. Phil. 315. II. "Ooris is, l. Quis, Quisnam, who," without interrogation, and so jJTti, o,ti, (to distinguish it from bn, that, conjunction) through all the cases. In this sense it very frequently occurs in the repe- tition of the substance of a question by a person to whom that ques- tion has been addressed; corresponding to ris in the question: as, Pisth. : irpbs rwv Bewv, av b' el rls avbpwv ; Meton. bans e'ifi eycii ', Merwv: Aristoph. Av. [997.] See Aristoph. Av. 961. and 1528. in which last verse the neuter b,n is so used. — 2. Quisquis, who- soever/ In this sense it sometimes follows nds in the singular, (but in the plural rravres baot, not rravres (drives,) or has various particles annexed to it, as bartaovv, o,rl rrep, b,ri bt), b,ri irore, b,ri bij wore, or brth'inore, brtbrjirorovv. bans irore, 1E\. V. H. ii, 13. 0, rt irore, Aristoph. Pac. 180. bans brirrore, Demosth. in Chers. init. bartaovv, Plato Euthyphr. c. 6. and ./Esch. Dial, ii, 13. rrav b,ri irep, Plato Euthyphr. c. 6. bans by], Horn. Od. o, 400. ovs be ri- vets, some, preceded by ttoXXovs fiev, Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii. c. 23. — Ovbels bans ov, nemo non, every one : KarayeXq. av r)fiu>v ovb els oarts ov : there is no one who would not laugh at us: Plato, Hipp. M. p. 299- see Herodot. iii, 72. v, 97. Eurip. Hel. 932. oibels bs ovy), Soph. CEd. R. 372. The entire phrase was originally ovbeis eartv, bans ov\ but afterwards the negative pronoun was put in the case, whatever it might be, which the construction required in the relative pronoun: as ovbeva bvriva ov tcarexiXaae rwv irapovrwv, Plat. Phaed. [p. 47. 1. 18. ed. Bas. prim.] Add Lucian, Deor. Dial, ii, 1. [p. 122. B. ed. Salmur.] "Os enters into a phrase employed by persons unwilling or unable to speak plainly : j)v Evpvadevs ftev, bs l\v'. such as he was: Epict. ap. Arr. iii, 26. irpoetXero jmev bibaanaXov e£ enravrwv, bvriva hi) ko.1 rrpoeiXero: whoever he was: Aristid. Orat. Fun. in Eteon. p. 136. ebpaaev b,ri hi) ical ebpaaev, no mat- ter what: Heliod. CEth. I. 5. See ^sch. Choeph. 778. So 6W : ewXeva', ottws eirXevaa, deofiavel norpw, Eurip. Or. 79- Pors. [according to the ingenious punctuation of Hermann.] III. (IV.)"Orts is used by the poets, where the metre will not admit Ovk olS' Sans, I know not who: p Soph. Antig. 178. 182.— J. S. Horn. Od. 0. 28.— J. S. Rules— 11.] THE RELATIVE "Os. 15 qf ports: ashy Horn. II. r, 260. Od. fx y 39. In other places they use octtis: see Odyss. 0, 210. o, 400. Callim. in Ap. 23. 27. 6'riVa for ovtivu, Odyss. 9, 204. onvas for oii<0' tav, (without an ellipsis,) wherefore, therefore : Lycurg. adv. Leocr. c. 18. St. Luke xii, 3. — (elliptically, see Theocr. Epigr. xvii.)— because; biKas eicricras, avd' v, q wherefore, on which account. 'Ep' 6ls, k(f f, eq>' are, on what terms, on condition, for the purpose of: 'iaraai yap e0' ol s avrovs Kva^ipjjs dyerai, on what terms or conditions: Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 11. ovbenore petSorwv wpe^drjaav, i) k, w, on condition that, with a future, Thuc. i, 113.: with an infinitive, Xen. Ages, iv, 1. H. Gr. vi, 3, 7- ii, 2, 12. Anab. iv, 2, 12. [k(j>' J, with a past tense, signifies bton, because: Thorn. M.] — kef w re, with an infinitive, on condition that: Aristoph. Plut. 1001. Xen. Hist. Gr. ii, 4, 28. iii, 1, 17. for the purpose of, Xen. Anab. vi, 6, 13. H. Gr. ii, 3, 8.— Often ecp" oh is for iirl ro'is if' oh, and eft « for enl rw e(j>' J: as /japrvpe'i, e'/ tytXotrocpia. b £>]Te~iy ecpobta, rj kXaaaiav obds KaraXeiirerai, Gaza de Sen. — 6. with superlatives : as ?] tux^to, as quickly as possible : Xen. Cyrop. vii, 5, 82. — and in the same sense with a substantive: »/ tu\os, with all speed : Plut. in Cic. p. S70. 1. 33. — In most of these instances pepibi or 6§w is understood. XII. "Os is frequently put in the case of its antecedent instead of the case which its governing verb would regularly require : as, 'ioaoi be obbev wv Xeyovai, but they know nothing of what they say: Plato A p. Socr. p. 22. XIII. The sense, or emphasis, requiring such a construction, os is placed before its antecedent, as Qua is in Latin : b'nep earl ftaXurQ' vnep hfiwp, — tovto TrapuoTijaat tovs Beovs v/jlIp : that WHAT is most for your interest, that the gods may suggest to you to do: Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 226. 1. 2. Reisk.] See Mark vi, 16. Matth. xxvi, 48. — (A noun, which ought regularly to have been in another division of the sentence, is, with Attic elegance, joined to the pronoun relative : as orw eboicei TavTa 0ew TyueXei" for Beds jyueXet, Xen. Eph. p. l6l. but this phrase is not peculiar to Attic writers. See Vaick. ad Herodot. p. 574. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 27. 29. Coray ad Theophr. 268. Fisch. ad Well, iii, p. 340. seq.) XIV. "O, whereas/ or in which matter: biafepoprws yap robe ejfOfiev, &are toX/j^p re o't avTol paXtara, kcu 7rept wv eVi^eipty'rouei' eicXoyicleaBai. *0 rots dXXois afxaBla pep Bpacros, Xoyicpos be okvov p e$T)Xu)icivai 'nnroxePTavpovs, Xen. Cyrop. iv, 3, 17- — 3. that, on : AevacreTe yap roye TrciPTes, 6 pot yepas ot^erat aXXrj, Horn. II. a, 120.] XV. The neuter plural a with the particle re signifies as, as being, since, &c. rd avru kipovp, are ovic cnroXenrov eavrb, oinrore Xriyei Kipovpepop : as not deserting, since it does not desert, itself: Plato Piiaedr. p. 245. are tov 'AiroXXwvos optcs, as being Apollo's, since they are Apollo's: Plato Pluedr. c. 35. cf. Plat. ibid. c. 27, 28. 275. iEsch. Dial. iii. extr. tovs 7rot»jras — ov irapabelopeBa, — are rvpappibos iptjras: since (or because) they are celebrators of despotism: Plato Rep. viii, p. 568. — With an absolute case: are r Thuc. seems to have referred h to in its progress, from what he at first in- roXnav and eK\oyl^eff9ai, hut to have tended it to be. See Thuc. iii, 12. p. 394. changed the construction of the sentence. 1. 11. ed. Bekk. — J. S. Rule 12— 18.] THE U&&& DbBfiTAN ' frTVE . 17 tT]s fxev yrjs k\ovor]s ra fxeaa rov koer/idv, since the earth occupies the centre of the universe: iEsch. Dial, iii, 19. — In Pind. Pytli. iv. it signifies, in the manner in which, Kadanep : aV — evepye-ai Aet?rV eTTciyyeWovTt. (3 pers. plur.) "Are bij and ola b>) have the same sense as are. XVI. The neuter in the dative is put with a verh for the latter's derivative or kindred substantive: as, ols yap evTV-^ritceiaav ev AeuKrpois, ov [terpiws eiceyprivTo, Demosth. pro Cor. for rots evTv^ji- fiaai : their success, their victory at Leuctra. So ev ols ri /japravov at liWoi' for toIs riov aXXwv auaprj/uao-i : the errors of others : De- mosth. ib. [p. 231. 1. 13. ed. Reisk.] XVH. e Os sometimes follows an antecedent, with which it cannot grammatically agree : as, ev woXvrpoirois yap £u/u(f>opa7s kviar-uvtai (the parents of tliose who had fallen in battle) rpacpevres, to e' ei/ri»%es, oi av rrjs evirpe7reorarj]s Xa^uaiv, wcrirep o'lbe /uev vvv, reXevTfjs, vfie'is be Xuttijs, kciI oh evevhaifiovrjaai re 6 fitos o/moiws ical ivTeXevrfjaai £vve- fxerprjOr] : Thuc. ii, 44. le bonheur certes est pour ceux, qui, &c. Gail. That excellent critic Hermann reads i) oh evevbaifxovfjaai, &c. under- standing fxdXXov, and translating thus : Seiunt enim, va'riis se casibus in vita usos, potiusque fortunatos esse, quibus vel exitus honestis- simus, uti his nunc, vel luctus, ut vobis, contigerit, quam quibus sic est traducta vita, ut in ea et essent felices, et decederent. — [So the construction would be, to b' chromes etceivois elvai fxaXXov, oi, &c] XVIII. "Arm is put for ariva, what. When this substitution is more evident, it has the aspirate; when less so, the soft breathing, cirra, which last, like tis, is added to other words, and seems to render their meaning less determinate, being often little more than an expletive. The following are examples: — 1. utto, in direct interro- gation : irujs rat arra iroTe bteXe%0r) ', how and what? Demostli.de Fals. Leg. p. 241. see Horn. II. k, 409- : in indirect interrogation : e'i Tts — epwTMr] fi/uas, avra arret eari, Plato ii. de Rep. see Horn. II. k, 208. : without any interrogation ; eTnarelXas arm efiovXero, Plato Phaed. c. 65. see Plat. Symp. 4. Soph. 41. extr. Crit. 12. Horn. II. a, 554. According to Eustath. the word is compounded of a and the Doric or Megaric aa, which signifies Ttva. — 2. arret : elVe fioi OTnroV atraa irepl \po\ ei'uara earo, Horn. Od. t, 218. i. e. birdla tan, aaca goto. See jEscIi. Dial, ii, 19. Plato Phaid. 31. Fisch. ad Plat. Soph. 45. Polit. 36. — "Arra may be rendered some, some such, nearly, or the like, somewhat, &c. : H) ravr eariv, rj Toiavra arra, Plato Phaed. 63. ct\\a cirra, Plato Phaed. 19, 52, 57. utto. ciXXa, Plat. Apol. 18. ttoXXo. arra, Plat. Phaed. 44, 65. erepa arra, iEsch. Dial, ii, 36. oXlya Uttu, Aristoph. Vesp. 55. afiiKpa arra, Plat. Polit. 3. arra roiabe, Plat. Phaed. 4. beiva a-ra, ib. 64. ohrpa arra, (i. e. oiKTpa citivu eariv) XoyonoiovvTes, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 6. reTTap' arra pev/xaTa, Plat. Phaed. 6l. — It is sometimes put absolutely : eXeyev arra rrpoaiceKvtyus, Plat, de Rep. 5. something. — To be ex- plained, eXeyev ariva eXeyev. — noXefiel be aXXr/Xots eviore avTwv arra Try : some, Plato Soph. 30. — With a substantive: avbpanoba cirra, Plato Phaedr. p. 259. ^P^"" 7 "" arra, id. Rep. x. p. 601. epy arra, Lucian, Nigr. — When the phrases in which cirra was used Viger. c 18 THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap. hi. § i. became so trite, that ils original and proper signification was not attended to, it was joined willi some words very improperly, as witli irtji'iKu: wtivliea &rrtt, Aristoph. Av. 1.513. for irtiv'tKa ore. XIX. (XX.) "Arm is also a term of respect and kindness, used by younger persons in addressing their elders : o7ri£, li-ra, yepme, Achilles to Phoenix, Mom. II. «, 003. see II. p, 56\. Od. tt, 31. 57. p, 6. 599- 0, 369. Calliin. Ep. i, 3. — So rerni was used by younger to older friends. XX. When the antecedent goes before an infinitive mood, the verb of the relative is also put in the infinitive : as erj, el vat iroWovs aXXovs rwi' 'EXXifvuiv, ovs flovXe ardat, &c. for ol tfiovXovm : he said, there were many others of the Greeks, who were willing, &c. iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 288. See Plato Phanlr. p. 272. 1. 41. iElian, V. H. xii. c. 35. So the Latin writers. Corn. Nep. in Themist. c. 7« Curt. vii. c. 4. § 6. vi, 8, 10. viii, 1, 25. Suet. Caes. 47. CHAPTER III. SECTION I.— THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. Rule I. Some remarkable changes of the cases and numbers of substantives, occurring chiefly in Attic writers, especially Plato, are to be observed : 6 be 'Aatrvptos, 6 BafivXwt'a. re eywv ko\ Trjv aXXrjv 'Aarrv- piav, eyto fiev utp.nl 'nnreas fxev a^eiv, Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 39- 0»7A" — Karavevocu inreppevea Kpov/wva — ^AarpcnrT id v eiribe^^evaiatfiaa/]- para (paivwv, Horn. II. /3, 350, 353. See /Elian, V. H. ii. c. 11. init. Ep. ad Rom. ii, 8. So Ter. Hec. iii, 1, 6. See Linacer de Em. Struct. La't. Serin. Sanct. Min. iv, 11. and Perizon. Graev. ad Cic. Verr. iii, 71. Ern. Diatr. de grata negligentia orationis. Brunck. ad Soph. El. 480. Duals with plurals: hvolv — pepwv ovriav, Aristid. pro Qtia- tuOrv. p. 481. bvinv {]fxep(ov, Theophr. Ch. Adulat. : bvio be oi i/iees iiarriv, Horn. II. e, 10. Heliod. /Eth. x, 6. rw cV ai/rw fxaprvpoL earwv, Horn. II. a, 338. ./Elian, V. H. i, 15. in fine, rw — 7)\Qov, Horn. II. e, 275. — An enallage from singular to plural is in Horn. II. a, 549, 550. and Acts xv, 46. See Xen. Mem. i, % 62. i, 2, 42. See Sil. It. xi, 25. — In Ter. Eun. i, 2, 88. his necessarily follows Eunnchum, because the class or kind in general was to be signified. See Virg. /En. viii, 427. — The plural is used for the singular to amplify or exaggerate : e/j.im' oirep teal irpoTepov e&ire/Lnrovro, Tliuc. i, 59- unless epyov, or some such word, be understood. In Thuc. ii, 47. — rj voaos — fip^aro, — Xeyopevov — eyKaraaKrjipai, Xeyopevov is a nominative absolute, and avrrjv is to be understood. See Clark, ad Odyss. xii, 75. — to bva- ttjvov eKetvo bo^apiov 7rpoer//xwi' tov fliov' vvv be ovvlrjfit fiby, ws eKeivr) p.ev avoxpeXijs, Lucian, Dial. Antil. et Achill. [p. 260. D. ed. Salmur.] Here eieetvri may agree with 8d|a understood. See Em. ad Xen. Mem. i, 3, 3. — There is no proper enallage in the passage of Paus., 1. El. post. p. 352. 1. 35. but rather an addition purposely made to state with greater exactness, what had before beeu stated with less : nor in Luke i, 55. because XaXe~iv irpos ma, and XaXelv tivi, are both forms in common use, and equivalent. — There are some instances of enallage in which neither the sense nor the construction is completed, as the beginning of the sentence might lead one to ex- pect ; as in the following auacoluthon : ^.fiivbvpibrjs o Ivfiapirrjs es ToaovTov Tpvi\oTrovlas : and in other constructions : see Arr. de Exp. Al. i. c. 18. in fine. III. Some substantives, especially 6b6s, way, ypafi/mrj, line, /iep\s or fiepos, part or portion, are elegantly understood. — 'Odds is defective in evdeias ixrpaTrfjiiai, to turn out of the straight road ; evavriav ievai or vir kvavrias (pepeoQai, to go, or be carried, the contrary way ; ayeaOat rr/v ewl davarw, to be led to execution. IV. On forensic subjects blxr) is often defective : as, bt evdeias or Kctr' evOe'iav avraywviSecrdai, to meet the proceedings of a plaintiff or prosecutor in a fair and direct manner, and not to have recourse to exceptions or other evasions, [see Suid. in WeTa,] equivalent to evdvbiKi'a yjprjaQai or evdvbiKe'iv. So KpiveaQai rrjv eiri Qavary, to be tried on a capital charge. V. 'lifxepa is understood in ttj it porepaia, the day before; rfj vcrrepaia, the day after, the next day. See Plut. Thes. [p. 5, 1. 20. ed. H. St.] The following examples of ellipsis of nouns may be added :-— to tov loXujvos, (a.ir6(pdey[ia, apophthegm): irpos 6pdr)v (yuviav, angle); -n-pos opdas ?lx^ w > ? et *"' ^ e drawn at right angles: Eucl. Opt. Theor. 24. rr/v eju)jj> avrfJKas, (yvth^rji', sentiments.) bia ToaovTov, (biavTi) fiaros, interval.) els q.bov, (bofxovor oikov, abode or habitation.) So ev tov av eovTes fiovXevwvTai, (o"iko> CO THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap. hi. § i. house,) Herodot. i. 133. rov irepi tt/s \pvxv s ^pe^ur, (Kivhvvov, risk,) Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 430. Fully expressed, tuv irepi \pv%fis rptxovri Kivhvvov, Dion. Hal. in Isocr. p. 98. and Ant. Horn. iv. p. 209. I. 28. See Eurip. Phcen. 730. and Aristopli. Vesp. 375. kv \evK0~1s entyepevdm, (i /hut in is, garments,) Artemid. Oneir. ii, 3. So St. John xx, 12. 'O TlXaron' i\v rwv aotfiwv, (e'ts or tis, one.) ev rals Aiovvativ, (eopraolpois ijuepais, festival days.) ti)v apery v ec veas avuet, (f)\iicias, age, years,) Synes. irpb n]s ev AevKrpois, (fia\r)s, bailie.) to noXv tijs pr/TopiKTJs, (fiepos, part,) Plato. So Air. de Exp. Al. iii, 7. fully expressed in c. 24. — rfjs 'ipv^ys tovto, (juepos) ev J al enidvuiai elaiv, Plato Gorg. p. 493. 01 ev reXei, {aires, being ; those in office.) onus ruvra prjb^ls trevoerai, (opa, take care, s ) Lysias pro Erat. ra rov 'Hpoborov, (avyypau- uara, writings.) ypa/ufxariKt)v euade, (r e-% VT ) l '> art.) a^lav a-mireiv, (j 1 put pia%', penalty, punishment.*) ano rijs avrfjs aireia- 8ai, (rpcnre$r)s, table.) yev tKrj cvvranaeTai, Kal airtariKrj, (ttt(j>- cei, case,) Sch. Aristopli. Plut. 93. an noXial, (rpf%es, hairs,) Epigr. Gr. i, 13. Ttorripiov i^vxP°v, (vbaros, water,) Matth. x, 42. us fiadvv eKotufidrjsl (vir vo v, sleep,) Lucian, Dial. Cycl. et Nept. bia KevTjS avenXaTTOjxev i]u~iv (pofiovs, (yrrovoias or inr o\ i]ipe ws, suspicion,) Dion. Hal. vi. rij erepa, (%eipi, hand.) eq> oaov, (xporor, time.) — 'Ufiepa, day, is not properly a substantive, says Eustath., but an adjective, signifying mild, placid, and with it there is understood tyams or Karaaraois rov aepos, illumination or state of the atmosphere: eireibi) ?}v irpbs ijpepav, when it was growing light; ir (ids eanepav, on the approach of evening. VI. T))v rirrav — air eiideias ovk e'/ Kol\n, Ccelesyria : Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 13. eV< ti)v pea-qv bieftr) tu>v irorapiLv, to Mesopotamia: Zositn. i, 4. A substantive is sometimes put in the nominative case absolute, when I lie rules of regular syntax require a different case: as, (3ovX6- pevos be KUTuanoirov rira irepipat, -ebo£ev airy eTrm'ibeos el vat v 'Apacnras : wishing to send some spy, — Araspas appeared to him a Jit person : Xen.Cyrop.iM, 1,31. Oav&v yovv, &oe kuXXiov duvelv, (so Aldus rightly,) Enrip. Or. [v. 77 1. Pors.*] — and sometimes another word, equivalent in meaning to that in the nom. absolute, is added in the case in which regular construction would have required the nominative absolute to be : poav be £vi>ixet ttj apurrepqi, y be be^ia,dpdoi tt) s -^etpos eneivqs oi baKrvXoi, Philostr.de vit. A poll., 1. iv. c. 28. but the right, the fingers of that hand are extended. So Rev. ii, 26. cf. Exod. xxxii. init. Act. Ap. vii, 40. Rev. iii, 21.Tob. vi, 7, 8. Judith xi, 9. Sirach x, 22. xx, 30. xl, 29- xli, 14. — On this idiom see Kypk. ad Act. Ap. xx, 3. Valck. ad Eur. Phcen. p. 101. seq. Brunck. ad i*Esch. Pers. 120. ad S. c. Th. 6*83. A genitive of an appellative is sometimes in apposition with a substantive not expressed, nor directly understood, but of which the meaning is contained in a preceding adjective : YLvdvicXia, Aaicebai- povtov ovra, iroXews irepupavovs, Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 15. In a simi- lar manner a pronoun or adjective has reference to a substantive, of which the sense is involved in a preceding noun, verb, or adverb : so avroi>s, meaning biaXoyovs, is by Lilian, V. H. xiv, 15. referred to btaXey eaQai™ which precedes; and avrovs meaning vavras to vavs preceding, by Ant. Lib. c. 37. See St. John vii, 44. Lucian, Nigr. 'AQnvas—avTo'is, i. e. the Athenians, [p. 21. A. ed. Salmur.] See Matth. iv, 23. — 'nnrofyopfilw — eVj rovrutv, i. e. horses: Herodot. iv, 110. tub 'Afljy ras, — 01, id. vii, 2. vees 'EXXrjvibes, — ovtoi, i. e. the Greeks: id. vii, 197. — So in Latin: Laconicam, — eorum : Corn. Nep. in Timoth. c. 2. See Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 305. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. v, 54. xi, 20, 68. Pors. ad Hec. 22. Fisch. Preef. ad Well. Gr. p. 9. seq. and in Anim. ad Well. iii. p. 268, 306. seq. Valck. ad Phcen. p. 9. ad Hippol. vs. 526. Jungerm. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 235. A. and Hemsterh. ad t. i. p. 400. Greg. Cor. p. 37. seqq. et Keen. Brunck. ad iEsch. Pers. 13. ad Soph. OZd. R. 267. ad Eur. Phcen. 1767. So, an adjective: eytav avrbs biKaato, Kai p ovrira x t), kui t6 itttti- k6v, kqi tov ofjuXov, the senators, the equites, and the plebeians : Dio. to fiapfiapov, the barbarians ; to vtd'jkoov, the subjects ; to GTpa- tiwtlkov, the soldiers ; to ireiiKov, the infantry ; to tzowov, the com- munity, the people, country, or nation. See Ovid, Met. xii, J. Cic. in Verr. [ii. 46', 6'3. i, 38.] II. An adjective sometimes assumes the natural gender of its sub- stantive, instead of the grammatical gender: as Kopiov KaXXiurn, a most beautiful girl ; fxetpaiaa evrv^e'is, fortunate youths : Synes. See Horn. Od. 0, 125. (See examples of adjectives, participles, and articles, so used, ap. Musgr. ad Eurip. Or. 270. Markl. ad Suppl. 45, 237, 272, 91 8, 1141. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. ii, 39. Hi, 36. xi, 25. Fisch. ad Well, i, p. 371. i", p. 274, 306, 314, 317- seq. Keen, ad Gr. Cor. p. 29.) — and sometimes, without any consideration of natural gender, or signification, an adjective, pronoun, or article, is put in a gender different from that of its substantive : as the Attics say tovtu tu) ripiepa, these two days: Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 11. tw x €l P e > ^ ne ^ wo hands: Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 18. See Seal, ad Phrvn. p. 84. Markl. ad Suppl. v. 140. Brunck. ad Soph. OZd. C. 1*600. El. 977- ad Amtoph. Lysistr. 323. Fisch. ad Well, i, p. 315 seq. 365. 379- ii, 160. iii, 308. It is common, especially in poetry, to join a mascu- line participle in the dual number with a feminine substantive. See Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. p. 205. seq. and Matth. Gr. Gr. § 436. When masculine participles in the plural are put for feminine, (of which Hermann ad Orph. H. 78, 4, has given examples,) it seems to be either because some masculine substantive was in the thoughts of the writer, or because the plural, having a wider and more indefinite sense, has in general a designation of the preferable gender. Hence this change of genders is very rare in the singular : see Horn. II. /3, Rule 1 -4.] THE ADJECTIVE. 25 88. ep-fcofievawv ; for these genitives plural of participles are used, in the masculine form, of the feminine gender. When one woman is spoken of in the masculine gender, the plural number is always used : and vice versa, wlien the plural is used of one woman, it is in the masculine gender : see Dawes, Misc. Cr. p. 310. Brunck. ad Soph. El. 399- 977- Ant. 026. 986. ad Eur. Med. 316. Pors. ad Hec. 515. So when a man and a woman are spoken of together, as abeXtyol, Zeun. ad Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 7. But wlien any one person in general, man or woman, is signified, the masculine singular is used, although a woman may be meant on the particular occasion on which the words are spoken : as in Eurip. (Ion 973.) Creusa, speaking of her- self, says, Ka\ ttws tci Kpeiauw, 1' t) r o s £> v, virepbpap.w ; and hoiv can I, a mortal, get the better of the gods? See Heath, ad Eurip. Med. 805. Valck. Diatr. p. 175. Elmsl. ad Med. p. 211. Hermann, ad Soph. Trach. 207. — On the other hand, when women are spoken of plurally, in such a manner that men cannot be understood to be meant also, the feminine gender is used: i\ netyvKctjjiev ootyal \i6l- Xiara, Eurip. Med. 386. Under this head may be mentioned the passage of St. Matth. XXVlh, 19. /-tadrjTevaare irtivTa ra edvrf, (3aicri$vvres avroiis, &c. in which uvrovs is to be referred to eOvrj, and not, as the Anabaptists say, to /j.adrjTas implicitly signified in padrjrevcrnTe. See Ron), ii, 14. and edi't], which is a collective noun, must be taken to comprehend infants: see Sept. Gen. xxv, 23. — This change of gender is fre- quent in the article: as, ra roiavra Kivabrj, vt nenoti]Ka(Ti fiev ov- bev, &c. Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 97. 1. 29. See Maccab. i, c. 5, 2. and Tibull. iv, 1, 62. and Cort. ad Sail. Catil. lvi, 5. The Greeks go even so far as to say Aai's, r] jieya icXeos, Athen. Deipn. xiii, 589. Sometimes the adjective is elegantly put in the gender, number, and case in which its substantive would have been put according to regular and ordinary syntax, while that substantive is put in the geni- tive plural after the adjective : as, «u\/3(a, yvvi\ -we kitifavStv : Fulvia, an illustrious woman : Pint, in Cic. p. S(>8. — [and for another case,] &pbpa tCjv intfavwy, an illustrious man: P'lut. in Cic. p. 867. 1. 30. So a substantive, and in the singular, — vfipios epya for 'vfiptoTiKo. epya, Solon, injurious deeds.— Sec Sail. B. J. c. 3. Corn. N. in Att. c. 13. V. Comparative adjectives are employed, sometimes, not to in- stitute a comparison between a higher degree of some quality, &c. in one thing, ami a lower degree of the same quality, &c. in another thing; but to signify an incapacity or inability in one thing to act in some certain manner, or to produce some certain effect, with regard to another thing : as, ^pn/iariov Kpeirrav, — nepbovs KpeirTwv, above the temptation of money, — of gain ; incorruptible: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 197. 2Q0. fibovfjs Kpelrrwv, proof against pleasure, not to be subdued by pleasure : Heliod. /Eth. v, c. 4. orepva Kpeirrii) Xoyov, breasts beautiful beyond description : Athen. Deipn. xiii. p. 588. apid/iov icp. out of number. See Spanh. ad Joseph, ii. p. 413. A. [See Eurip. Iph. T. 844. Suppl. 844.] e\- Trihos Kpelaoov, beyond hope of relief or amendment : Thuc. ii, 64. eXnibos tcpe'iaaov, beyond hope of attainment: Paus. in Beeot. p. 5fj3. [So opinione valentior, Cic. ad Att. vii. ep. 6] irupufilbes Xoyov /uecjoves, Herodot. ii, 148. VI. In a bad sense: Kpe/rrwv rijs iraibelas, unimprovable by instruction: Aristot. tcpelaaov X6yov, too bad to be described: Thuc. ii, 50. icpeliraov irriKovpias, incurable: iElian, H. An. i, 54. See Musgr. ad Eurip. Troad. 204. Thorn. M. p. 603. VII. So }]ttu»v irddovs, unable to bear up against calamity ; a\>~ bpa bo£r)s yrrova cat irpos tovs (plXovs albovs, a man not proof against the fear of public opinion, and the shame of refusing any thing to his friends : Plut. Pomp. p. 655. 1. 4. VIII. Sometimes the phrase is varied by substituting an accusa- tive governed by npos or Kara, preceded by rj, for the genitive: as, ao(pd)T€pa rj icad' eavrov, things too deep for himself. In this form it often signifies merely, in proportion to: as, bo£av eXarrw Jj npos to *a- Topdtvfia, glory too little in proportion to the achievement : but iepdv apj^aiorepoi' */ Kara rrjy 'luivwv evoiicriaiv, is, a temple built before the settling of the lonians : Pausan. Ach. p. 399- 1- 14. IX. Sometimes an infinitive, preceded by $, takes the place of the genitive : as, tcpeirrovs ovras 1) aXwrai, too powerful to be overcome or taken, for rfjs aXwcrcws \* and sometimes the infinitive is preceded by Jj its, Aristid. ad Capit. p. 529- X. Sometimes the genitive is put after the comparative degree, when the rules of ordinary syntax, and perspicuity, would require another case with ») : as, rats twv fiaXiara rjJ typove'iv btatyepovruv knXa~is Quaeon Trpoae^eiv bel ob-% t^ttov twv a nobel^e we, for ?/ rats anobdty-oLv : the simple affirmations of men eminent for wisdom are to "And without^: acrdeveffrepos i\v Demosth. c. Aristocr. p. 637. I. 17. ed. rbv faep Trjt y'lKrji iveyKflv k6vov, Reisk. — J. S. Rule 5— 12.] THE ADJECTIVE. 27 be as much attended to as demonstrations: Aristot. So 777$ eJprjyrjs for 7} ?; eiprirT), Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 255. i. 12. cd. Reisk.] bixai- orepoy ev -oielv rot's olteiovs rwv odveiwv, for ?/ rows odveiovs : it is more just to do good to friends than to strangers. So Soph. Ant. 74. Phil. 0S2. In other passages the genitive is the case required by regular construction, but it is irregularly made to depend on the comparative, instead of depending on some other word which is omitted: as, 7rvpajjuba be i-ai vvros aTreXine-o ttoXXov eXdaaw rov ■xarpbs, for rijs rov irarpos : he too left a pyramid much less than his father's: — literally, less than his father : Herodot. ii, 134. See Diod. S. iii, 35. Eurip. Tr. 7S7- In the following passage the genitive is to be resolved into two other cases of the same uoun, with 1*/ preceding them : ) eavrijs, OKrib upyviai '. the height, in the part where it is highest, is eight fathoms : Herodot. Etit. c. 124. avros avrov rdre (}>aiveTat fieXritiTti Ipr, in his best plight ; da e7ri beica : hut in the seventeenth he returned. Sometimes a numeral adverb is joined with a cardinal number, as efibofir)KovTaicis enra, Matt, xviii, 22. seventy times seven. XIV. — 3. That to express the excess of half an integral above any plurality of integrals, the Greeks join with a word compounded of r)fx\ and the name of that integral, the ordinal number marking the » numerical place in which that half integral would stand if each of the plurality of integrals and itself were numbered as units : as, two talents and a half, rplroy i^iTaXavTov. four drachmte and a half, iteix-KTov {j/ulbpa^iJLoy, Hesych. rerapTuv jj/xiav, to rerapro*' jy/aora- rjjpor. XV. — 4. That to designate lime, a numeral adjective in alos is often used, which does not agree with any substantive signifying time, but with some other: as, bevrepalos ck tov 'Adrjyaiwy uareos rjy ev liraprr], he was in Sparta on the second day from his leaving Athens: Herodot. Er. c. 106. becara'tos atyineTo, he arrived on the tenth day : Arrian, Exp. Al. i, 1. rerapralos eoriv, he has been dead four days : St. John xi, 39- See Wetsten. — and interro- gatively : 7ro<7ratos — kkelae atytKoifiriv ; in how many days could I get there? Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 129- airo tT]s fiaxy rptraXos cMpiKielTai, he arrives on the third day after the battle: Arrian, Exp. Al. c. 3. See Wakef. ad Soph. Trach. 1 65.— These adjectives in atos are sometimes used as ordinals, and made to agree with the substantive of time : Eurip. Hec. 32. Plato Phaed. [p. 22. 1. 20. ed. Bas. prim.] Thuc. v, 75. viii, 51. See Pors. ad Hec. 32. Valck. ad Hippo). 247. Monthly Rev., Jan. 1799. P- 89. XVI. — 5. That in a few inslances the adjective signifying an ordinal number is to be understood to designate a priority also in time : as, aiiTos r/pepq. TpiTT} — elbev o\piy cltottov, on the third day (i. e. before he slew Clittis.) he saw a strange vision: Plut. Alex. p. 6'93. When it designates posteriority in time, it has a genitive after it, with or without a preposition : as, irepTTTr) be 11 earn vpepci airo tovtcdv, on the fifth or sixth day after these things : Herodot. iii. p. 92. ed. Camer. bevrepip be eret Tovreioy, Herodot. Er. c. 46. in the second year after these things ; Tpir-qv i]f.iepay aiirov i'ikovtos, the third day after he came : Thuc. viii, 23. Or it is followed by ?*; and a part of a sentence depending on it : as, rfj varepaiq: — iy ?f av e\dot to TrXolny, on the day after the arrival of the ship : Plato Phaed. 2. XVII. — 6. That the time in which any thing may be done or come to pass is put in the genilive : as, kljbv fj/jepHy beta, fiaWov be Tpiwv i] TCTTaptav, els tov 'EWrjVTrovTOv arjnxdai : it being prac- ticable to arrive at the Hellespont in ten days, or rather in three or four: Dem. pro Cor. p. 317. anovaeode bvo'cv rj rpiibv fipepfiy, 30 'AyuQot— "AXKov. [CHAP. III. § iii. you will hear in two or three days : ibid. — 7. That the relative of a singular antecedent, with which an ordinal adjective agrees, is found in the plural: ievripav iirioToX))v, ev (us, 2 Pet. iii, 1., the relative applying to the first, as well as the second, which by implication in- cludes the first. — 8. That to express the number of associates of any person, the name of that person is followed by an ordinal number marking his numerical rank, if reckoned last, and by the pronoun avros : as, YlepiKXys 6 EavdiTntov arparriyos wv benaros avros, being general ivith nine others: Thuc. ii. 13.* KXeiniribTis — rpiros avros earparriyei, Cleippides had the command with two others: Thuc. iii, 3. e^eirefxipap — Auem-Xea -kL^-ivtov avrov cTparriyav, Thuc. iii, 19. so i, 6l, 116. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 2125. See Plato de Legg. iii. p. 695. Theocr. ii, 119. Diodor. ii. p. 577- and interrogatively: noaanos earpart/yei \ or iroaros earpaTi/yet avros; how many were joined with him in command? and without a question and without specification of number, c)Xi- yooTos, with a few others: Beros. ap. Jos. Ant. x, 11. Jos. c. App. p. 1045. 1 Maccab. iii, \6.~9. That a declinable cardinal number, exceeding a hundred, is sometimes joined with a collective noun in the singular : as \i\iri 'I^ttos, a thousand horse : Herodot. See other examples in Steph. Thes. i. 1699. G. So 1 Maccab. iii, 39. iv, 28. — 10. That when a numeral adjective forms a compound with t"7T/,it signifies one integer, and such proportional part of that integer as the numeral adjective before its composition with eVi indicates : as inhpiTos, one and its third part ; eVoySoos, one and an eighth : Plato Timasus, p. 313. translated by Cic. (de Univ. c. 7>) sesqui- tertium, and sesquioctavum numerum. Section III. — On some particular nouns, adjectives, and substantives. Alphabetically. RULE I. 'Ayaf3o's. In the vocative, wyadk has a light shade of irony or sarcasm, as bone in Latin.* See Plato Gorg. p. 491. 1- 25. "Aicpos, chief, most eminent, has a partitive genitive, and genitive of the thing as to which the eminence is possessed: rwv ttoitjtwv oi anpoL rfjs noiricrews e/carepcts, of the poets the chief in both kinds of poetry : Plato Theaet. p. 152. I. 44. "AXXos, like a comparative, has a genitive: aXXo ov aladi) crews €7nffTiijj.r}, knowledge being different from perception : Plato Theaet. p. 186. aXXa 7-wi' hiKaibtr, things different from just things: Xen. Mem. iv, 4, 25. and erepos has the same construction. See Plato Phaed. c. 19. So alius in Latin : Hor. Ep. i, 16, 20. ii, 1, 240. Pbaedr. Prol. 1. iii, 41. Ta aXXa, in other respects: Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 41. 1. 25. Herodot. ix, 25. So es r aXXa, and es re to. Xoina, Paus. Ach. p. 401. erepos aXXos, joined, Eurip. Suppl. 573. Barnes. aXXos erepos joined, Eurip. Or. 339- Pors. * "Somma ledit Henry de sortir a ten others.) Voltaire, H. de Charles XII., parlementer pour son profict; commeil fit 1.2. luy qdatriesme." Montaigne, Ess. V Not unlike my icorthy, in English. 1. i. c. 5. (with three others.) " Le Minime malus, and the good man, are roi de Pologne n'eut que le temps de said of dull or simple persons. — J. S. nionter a cheval, lui onzieme." (icith RULE 1 — 2.] v A\,We — 'Ardputros. 31 For Xonrbs: lixekla // a\\ n, the rest of Sicily: Plato Ep. 8. p. 307. 1. 6. ti)v fiev (iWjjv (Eiifioiav) b/xoXoyia naTearijaavTo, 'Eariaias be, &c. and the rest of the island, &c. "AXXore aXXos, and aXXos cat aXXos, are used to signify inconsis- tency and variability: iiXXore ciWwi' earl Xoywv, he says first one thing and then another: Plato Gorg. p. 482. I. 9- 01 b' avbpes aXXoi Ka\ &XX01 irapa tovs ypovovs, men change tvith the times: Aristid. pro Quatuorvir. p. 393. and compounded things are said iiXXor aXXcos e^en-, to be perpetually changing: Plato Phaed. c. 25. "Afxcjxo (as well as apfyorepov) refers to two different things in a sentence in which it is syntactically unconnected : "A/^tpto yap, nal voiiaov ava\pv%eis irvpoeoaav, Kcu /mi cKopizioQev ftef^X-n^iv^ i)pa KOfii- e?e/s : for you both relieve my burning malady, and afford grateful assistance to me, who have been stung by a scorpion : Orph. de lap. in Chab. So Q. Cal. vapaXenr. i, 20. tyvoei j) rpotyrj ?*; ajityorepa, Plato Gorg. p. 542. I. 20. by nature or by aliment, or both. See Horn. II. y, 179. v, 166. -Avfip, even in the singular, is put, not for vir, but for homo, a mor- tal : Soph. (Ed. C. 566. Aj. 77- It is used for As, Horn. II. e, 770. Theogn. 199. See Hor. Od. iii, 1, 9. Sometimes it abounds, or at least is not to be translated into Latin: as \cit6/j.ci avbpes, Q. Cal. povKukos aitjp, Id. vi, 347. stonecutters, neat-herd." So avdpwTros, Luc. ii, 15. Matth. xviii, 23. 'Av))p and tis are joined, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 5. Act. Ap. v, 1. In the plural, avbpes, for the continent, opposed to vrjuoL, Horn. H. Apoll. 142. Pind. Ol. vi, 15. 'A-n-ofpas. 'Airoippabes i)/j.epai, dies nefasti, in Latin, on which it was unlawful to administer justice ; [from a™ in a sense of absence, and ippaSw."] Lucian calls the same anpaKTovs, void of business, in which nothing can be transacted; eirapuTovs, accursed; /mapovs, abominable ; anaitrtovs, unlucky, ill-omened. 'Ano Tfjs 'EXXabos aXirtjpie, O pest of Greece! [/Esclrin. c. Ctes. p. 521. I. 8. Reiske's ed.] " AvQpionos is often said of a woman : as, yv/xv^v rrjv ardpwxov, the woman naked: Dion. Hal. irepl awO. 6v. So Plut. de Aud. Poet. p. 26. I. 47. Allien, xiii. p. 576. Dem. pro Cor. p. 518. 1. 43. /Elian, V. H. xii, 1. xiii, 33. Xen. Cyrop. v. beginning. Dion. Hal. i, p. 64. 1. S.* Oeds also is said of a female. z Here the English idiom is similar; k a, 9pci}iros ei/- to be named: Eustatb. — J. S. vovs Kai ttio-t^, Demosth. in Kurrg. et * 'Afinp-ovovcrris de rrjs avQpconov, but Mnes. p. 1155. 1. 28. t^v &v9pojirov iireBei- the woman being much distressed: De- |a, ib. p. 1159. 1. 27. privo della vita raosth. Fals. Leg. p. 402. 1. 24. Reisk. molli huomini di ciascun sesso et eta. fiapfSapov &v9 poniTov, ical Tavrayvva?- Guicciard, 1. ii. — J. S. 3'2 "Ardpunos — 'A^o/yu/. [CHAP. III. § iv. "AyBpuzos, for atrip, vir, a husband: ArQpwrros ku\ yvri), a husband and wife : xEschines. So Matth. xix, 10. "Ardpunos for ris, qtiidam, some one, a certain person : Mark xii, 1. III. 'ApeT>). — 1. beneficence, liberality : Time, ii, c. 40. IV. — 2. natural affection and humanity : oi uperF/s r) fierairoiov- fjevoi, Time, ii, 51. goodwill, benevolence, philanthrophy, Time. iv, S6\ So in Latin, virtus for benignilas: Plaut. Mil. Gl. iii, 1, 82. V. — 3. celebrity, renown: bvya/xis — (pepovaa es /xev roiis iroXXoi/s aperijy, Time. i. [e. 33. pro evbotyu, Harpocr. See the Etym. So Anclocid. See Suid. Wass.] VI. — 4. the proper virtue or excellence of any thing in general: as aperijy yi/s, the goodness of the soil: Time, i, [c. 2.] aperi/ rijs j^w- pas, the goodness or fruitfulness of the country: Plalo de Legg. ./Elian, V. H. ix, \6. aperrj par os, health, good habit or constitu- tion of body: Plato Gorg. p. 517- Troirjrov aperrj, the proper excel- lence of a poet : il>. v, 21. and ^j ev ro'is jxerpois aperi), metrical skill: ib. ii, 13. In Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, \6. itperij comprehends strength of body, fortitude of mind, skill in horsemanship, riches, power. VII. — 5. virtue, duty, honor: yvyaixeia aperi), Thuc. ii, 45. nepl rov biicaiov ecu rijs aperijs, Thuc. iii, 10. VIII. Ti)y apyi)v, hpyjiv, ro Knrapy^as, from the first, at first, at all: ^aXenwrepoy, Ik rrXovatov rtevqra yevecQai, f/ ap^j/v [i>) itXov- Tf](rai : it is more grievous to become poor after having been rich, than never to have been rich at all: Xen. Anab. vii. [7. 17-] fyn, v rr)y ap^rjv ov be7y eyue bevpo elu>p, or simply avr6ayfjrai ; as, o tyevyurv err avrorpwpf yevofievos, the culprit having been caught in the fact. 'E7r«vri'0wpw is properly used of thieves taken with the stolen goods on them ; but it came to he applied to persons detected in the commission of any crime, as adultery, John viii, 4. SECTION IV. Rule I. 'Atyop/j)). — 1 . a power of shunning what is destructive : Beat. Damasc. II. — 2. substance, fortune, means of living: as, {i^be^iay ucpop/jtr/v k\ei rov fiiov, il n'a aucun moyen de vivre. See Xen. Mem. iii. [12, 4.] Demosth. pro Phorm. p. 601. I. 6\ and means, in general ; RULE 1—6.] BaatXevs — AyXas. 33 occasions, facilities: ttoXv yap nXeiovs cKpoppas els to rrjv napa Qewv evvoiav e^eiv °l°^ vfuv evovaas, 1} eiceivw : que VOUS avez beaucoup plus de moyens que lui d'obtenir la bienveillance des Dieux : De- niosth. 01. ii. p. 8. 1. 51. See Xen. Mem. ii, 7, 11. Schol. Eurip. cited by Hindenb. ad Xen. and Suid. III. — 3. a deposit, a fund to draw upon, in a bank ; this the later Greeks called tvdrjicri, which comprehends all precious possessions. IV. — 4. for opfii], natural desire, instinct : Plut. — 5. in a rhetori- cal view, pretext, handle, occasion, for narration, for disquisition, for argumentation, &c. Dion. Hal. de Lysia. Plut. HaaiXeits, by itself sometimes, and sometimes with fxeyas or 6 jieyns, signifies, by way of eminence, the king of Persia: Demosth. de Rhod. Lib. 'p. 83". 1. 5. Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 33. ^Elian, V. H. i, 22. [cf. Aristoph. Acb. 647. Corn. Nep. in Ages. 2. J Plato Gorg. p. 524. Aristid. Or. in Rom. p. 352. Arrian, Exp. Al. c. 1. iElian, V. H. xii, 1. lEscb. Dial, ii, 4. Eustath. ad Dion. Perieg. v. 1056. twv Ylep- awv is added by Dinarchus, in Demosth. p. 96. 1. 26. and by others. BovXrjfxa sometimes means scope, drift, purport: tovto yap fiot boKei tG)v ptjfxuTwv to ftovXrjfxa elrai, Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 423. and by the same kind of personification the verbs fiovXeadai and IdeXeiv are applied to inanimate things to signify tendency, approxi- mation, ability, &c. in them : /3ov\erai per tovto, o vvv eyw opw, elvai olov aXXo tl twv ovtwv, evbee'i be, &c. Plato Phaedr. C 1Q. tU fxev cjvv ywpia rat to. bevbpa ovhev p edeXei bibaffKeiv, Plato Phaedr. p. 230. cf. Xen. Mem. hi, 12. extr. Big. in the dative, with a genitive after it, signifies against the incli- nation or will of what is expressed by the genitive : as, fila fi/uwp, against our will : Thuc. i, 43. ftia Qvpov, unwillingly, contrary to my inclination: Eurip. Ale. 832. fiia. tGjv brjpapxwv, in spite of the tribunes, in defiance of the tribunes: Plut. in Caes. p. 7 19- c [See Abresch, Auct. Dil. Thuc. p. 2"22.] Sometimes the genitive is understood : as, fiia. ovv — oi^o/mai (pevywv, Plato Symp. 32. V. AeiXri, by itself, signifies twilight, either in the morning or in the evening. It is often joined with words denoting different parts of the day : belXtjs ewas, early dawn; belXrjs o4/ias, late, in the evening, about sunset ; beiXrjs (.tea^pfipias, noon. VI. ArjXos, abrjXos, ayepds, and other similar adjectives, instead of being put in the neuter with the impersonal verb, followed by ws or on, or by an accusative and infinitive, are elegantly made to agree with the nominative case of the verb, followed by a participle also agreeing with that nominative: as, brjXos eoTi 7raparo/jLi]aas, he has evidently transgressed : for bfjXov eorty avTov wapat'ofiTjaai. So tyave- pbs with a future participle, Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 231. 1. 16. ed. Reisk.] and abrjXos : e'en be ovk abqXos epm>, it is plain that he means to say : Demosth. in Mid. Instead of a participle, ws, or on, is sometimes subjoined to the verb: w$ oh npoOvfios fie el bibafat, bfjXos el: Plato Euthyphr. p. 14. 1. 20. it is plain that you are not 'Apecptav ras irv\as tj/mp jSia tcSs' spite of the multitude: Demosth. adv. it A ^ a> v : they opened the gales to its in Lept. p. 473. 1. 3. Reisk. — J. S. Viser. E 34 Atd/rci — "F.pyov. [Chap, III. § iv. willing to teach me. 6n in Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 12. cf. Xen. GEc. \ii, 8. abriXos ear if el, Pint, ill Cues. p. 710. KctTuyeXqs jinv, brjKo's el: you are plainly laughing at me: Afistoph. Av. 1408-. For other adjectives so used, see below 11. J. 10. Chap. VI. Sect. i. R. 13. Diod. Sic. xi, 27- See Fiscli. ad Well, iii, 313. Auura is not only a certain mode of living, but a place, an apart- ment : rets Tuir 6epair6)Td)i' bialras, the bedchambers of the servants: Pint. Dicelce, Plin. ii. ep. 17. It also signifies an arbitration, upiais Tvpi) bkr)s, Moeris Att. 'Ei btairrjfjta, an abode, residence. VII. A/raios is used in the same manner as bF/Xos, &c. See R. 6. ti)i' ctlriav ovtos ecrn blicaios e^etv, it is just that he should bear the blame: Demosth. pro Cor. VIII. Aifcaiov, a defect, an objectionable particular ; forming a plea, or just ground for accusation or opposition : a^doi^inv av el tovto fxoiov bofyttpi bikenov naTiyyopelv tov rofiov, Demosth. adv. Lept. [p. 477- I. 6'. ed. Reisk.] 'Eyicu/v\m iratbev/xaTa, the liberal arts : Plut. irepl nnib. ay. called collectively eyKVKXoTraibela. See Schott. Obs. Hum. ii, 1. IX. 'E^ovXns biKn, [from e^eiXXto, to eject ; or efyvXXeiv, 6 eanv klioQeiv Kdl iicfiaXXeiv, Hesych.] an action or prosecution against a per- son who expelled another from his properly, or detained it from him : d Demosth. in Mid. [p. 528. 1. 12. ed. Reisk.] Aristides uses the expression metaphorically, saying that no one could e&vXns Xd^etu rijs yijs against the Athenians; because they passed for avToydoves, and therefore could not be accused of ouster with regard to Attica. Patiath. X. 'ETrtbo^os is elegantly employed like bfjXos, &c. R. 6. eitibo^os — ear iv a. \pead at tov Kaipov, he is expected to seize the opportunity: iiriSo£6s eanv — xadelv, he is likely to suffer. See Oudend. ad Thorn. M. XI. "Epyov sometimes signifies interest of money, as in Demosth. in Aphob. [p. 8l6. 1. l6. Reisk. ] e office, pr ovince, business : rai -rtpoa- ern£e tQ naibl tovto ej^eiv epyov, and he assigned this to the boy as his business: iElian, V.H. viii, c. 15. See Aristoph. Av. 862. Hence epyov eanv is rendered decet, it becomes, it is the part of, as in ovk er epyov eynadevbeiv, ogtis ear eXevOepos : it no longer becomes, Ot- is the part of, any freeman to slumber in this affair: Aristoph. Lys. 6"l5. [6*14.] and by another gradation it signifies custom or way, edos: 'AOrjvaiwv epyov, eXerjtravres givtovs, — enoifoare : you did as the Athenians are accustomed to do: iEschin. Ep. xiii. See another example in Sect. i. R. 1. p. 84. and in this sense epyov is sometimes suppressed : tjbiicoviiev av, — kcu ov% ij^wv eTroioy/uev : we should have acted unjustly, and not like ourselves ; or, not after our usual manner: Aristid. Or. Leuctr. ii. p. 72. Sometimes it signi- d See Demosth. in Mid. p. 540. 1. 21. of a law-court.— J. S. Reisk. and 543. 1. 27. adv. Callipp. p. « Tb apxcuov, the principal; rb epyov, 1240. 1. 22. where the Qovkr) consists in the interest : Dem. in Aphob. p. 819. 1. 2. refusing to pay, or deliver up one's goods Reisk. — J. S. to satisfy, a debt incurred by a sentence RULE 7—14.] 'Ereo>'— "Ero} tijv vivooy^eoiv epyov aoi yeveaQai, before you have fulfilled your pro- mise : Lucian, Dem. EllC. p. 904. raya rrjs v/Aerepas yeyovev epyov o\tywplas, perhaps it was the effect of your negligence : Lucian, lb. p. 910. — or, that upon which any effect is produced ; the subject of it: fiiaiov davarov epyov eyevoiro, the victims of a violent death: iiilian, vii, 2. fieXuyv epyov ical ro^eias yey evr) fiev ot, victims, &c. Helioil. /Eth. i, 1. Kelrat XapUXeia, ku\ ttoXc fiias -^etpos epyov — yeyerrjrai, lb. ii, 4, TtoXepov epyov j.iayj>uevovs ye- veodai, lb. vi, 13. — It signifies any great event: Tpta'iicov epyov, the Trojan war: Arrian, Exp. Al. i, 11. t£ abrav rov epyov, imme- diately after the calamity: (of the sacking of Thebes,) lb. c. 18. 7T/oo rod epyov rov ev Mapaduivi, before the achievement or victory at Marathon: Paus. in Ach. p. 425. [and in the plural, d™ twv Trept Mapadura epym>, Dion. Hal. Ant. R. v. p. 291.] Also a crime: to epyov to -rrepl rov "Irvv, Thuc. ii, 29. — An undertaking or enterprise : epyov /u?) e^eadai, ear av cKftiKero avrbs, not to engage in the undertaking, (a siege,) before he himself arrived: Arrian. Meya epyov in apposition with a noun to signify magnitude : 6 be ■%epuabiov Xo/3e \etp\ Tvbeibrjs, peya epyov: Horn. II. e, 303.-^ XIII. 'Ereov is by nature an adjective, from eta or etjtl : el ereov KaX%as finvreveTat : true, aXr)Qes, Horn. II. /3, 800. But it is com- monly used adverbially, signifying, — 1. really, seriously, in truth: II. u, 359. o, 53. Aristoph. Vesp. 8. — 2. obsecro, prithee, I pray, en vtrite, en bonne foi, in reality : (interrogatively,) av b' el tis ereov; Aristoph. Eq. 730. See Aristoph. Nub. 93. 1502. Vesp. 832. XIV. "Etoi/uos sometimes signifies, in store, ready for use, or for supply : paaroi — nXypeis eirippeovros eTOifxov yaXaicros, Plut. in JEmil. p. 262. koXttovs pevuara — e£ erolfxrjs icat vTroKetfievrjs cKptevras ap-^fjs : cavities or reservoirs emitting streams from a source always subsisting in readiness: Plut. lb. 'E£ eroipov, readily, at will : arpaTu'o-as e£ erolpov Xifip)], Isocr. ad Phil. e£ eroifiov KaXo'is Kqlyado'is . 1. 1, 6". p. 7. I. 26". p. 14. 1. 7. p- 31. 1. 5, 19, 3*. p. 57- 1. 2, 4, 7- Matth. xx, 21, 23. xxv, 41. xxvii, 38. Rev. x, 2. Act. Ap. xxi, 3. See Huds. ad Thue. i, 126. Qarepor, (formed of to erepov,) preceded by bvo~u>, is especially used in dilemmas. Aviuf Oarepov, either — or; one or the other: being often used absolutely (and sometimes parenthetically) with an ellipsis of livayKi], aXqdes, tract's eorti', or the like. See Aristid. pro Qua- tuorv. p. 46'9. SECTION V. Rule I. "Ittttos in the feminine signifies cavalry :* Herodot. i. 80. where too, »/ Kctfir)Xos, a troop of camels. So >/ fiovs, a herd of oxen : see Thorn. M. p. 169. "Itttios in composition with other words augments their significations : 'nnroypdjfAcjv, exceedingly discerning: eyto he tovtwv QvfJLov iTCTroyvCj fxova, iEsebyl. in Jacul. 'nnrofiafjiova. prj/jiaTa, high-sounding words, rant: (Jirirorvcpia , Lucian, de Conscr. Hist. c. 54.) Aristoph. Ran. 839- [821. Br.] called p/jfxaff \tttt6- Kprjfxva, Aristoph. Ran. 960. [929. Br.] i. e. excessively rough and rugged, as it were. 'nnraXeKTpvojv, magnus gallus, Aristoph. Ran. [932. 937. Av. 800. Pac. 1177-] See Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 237- Bovs has the same effect in composition as Ittttos : fiovirais, a great hoy, a lad: fiovXipos, fiovXi/jia, ravenous hunger: see Aristoph. Plut. 874. called also fiovfipuans by Horn. II. to, 532. and Callim. Cer. 103. and (joviTeiva by Callim. Cer. 24. fiwyaios, a braggadocio : Horn. II. v, 824. Od. c, 8. fiovvefipos, a large hind or fawn: see Etym. M. Moer. Tricl. ad Soph. Aj. 232. Tpls also is added lo adjectives to increase their signification : rpitr^aKupios, thrice happy, very happy: Tpifiapfiapos, extremely barbarous. So the neuter of nds : TTc'ivaoipos, consummately wise: TrayKaXos, most beautiful ; and TrayicctAws, adv. Plato Phsedr. p. 171. Tra/nTTovTipos, utterly bad: Aristoph. Ach. 934. Sometimes with superlatives: TrafifieyurTos, iElian, V. H. x. c. 2. Tra.[nrpG>Tos, Pind. Isthm. 6. Horn. II. «, 93. TTuvvcTaTos, and adverbially iravvoTaTov, for the very last time: Aristoph. Ach. 1133. Eurip. Or. 367. 1021. II. "Icros. 1. "mtov «<7w kuityepeiv, to make a just requital, par pari referre : expressed also by~ fxeTpeiv ttjv "iar\v, (fxolpav viz.) or toTs 'irrots u/j.elj3eadai, with an accusative of the thing or person : as ty)v evep- yeaiav, the benefaction : or rbv evepyeTi'iaav-a, the benefactor. But *iaov 'irru> sometimes means equal parts of wine and water: and the phrase is used adverbially, or unconnected syntactically with the rest of a sentence : as, (piXoTriaias iaov 'iaf KeKpap.evas, love-cups of equal S But see H. Steplu Thes, ii. 1332. * "Ittttou /.teAaiVjjs r,y^uuv rpur/xvpias. c— J. S. iEschyl. Pers. 320. Blomf.— J. S. Mule l — 6.] "loos. 37 parts of wine and water : Alexis ap. Athen. Deipn. x. p. 431. See also Hippocr. de Nat. Mill. p. 570. 1. 48. III. Twv "idiav Tvyyaveiv, to meet with one's deserts ; either in a good or bad sense. 'A71-0 tov "iaov, or onto rrjs 'lays, on an equality, with equal rights, on equal terms ; and ec Tov'iaov, the same : Julian, Misopog. p. 359- and e7ri rrj 'iarf, to which na\ opoiq. is sometimes added: Thuc. i, 26. and in the plural, eni rots toots /cat ofAotois 7rn\iTeve(j9ai, to live in a state on an equality with the citizens. But e£ "iaov, eftarjs, and eTrtor/s, signify equally: Julian, Misopog. p. 358. Antonin. els eavr. 1. ii. c. 8. en 'iarjs atyws, worthily, suitably, adequately, as the subject deserves; pro rei dignitate : Lucian, Dem. Ene. t. iii. p. 498. ed. Amst. p. 891. IV. The following constructions of to. 'lira are to be remarked : oh fxeTean twv 'iawv, ovbe twv 6/uiolwv, w avbpes 'Adijt'dlov, vrpos tovs ttXovgiovs rols 7roX\o7s tjfiwv : the generality of us, or, we, the main body of the people, are by no means on a par with the rich, in obtaining redress, or maintaining our rights: we have not equal favor shown us: Demosth. in Mid. [p. 551. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] twv 'iawv oh fiere'ix e to'is aXXois, id/' VI. "Ivor, with a dative, signifies, — 1. in a philological or gramma- tical use, equivalent : as, fir) eyylays )re ev : ' many answer as if they had h Viger says that in this passage the to?s Te 'Axaio?s ical ro?s "AAA01S TPH2IN idiom toTs &\\ois r,jj.7v is to be noted, as iyivovro, Flato Alcib. i. p. 25 8. 1. 27. ed, exactly answering to the French u nous Basil, prim. a Koiva, v)) Ala, waffiv inrdpxei autres ; but y/puv is not in the passage as to?s aycav&fxhois irapb. -rijr twv "AAAflN quoted by Viger, and I have notbeen able 'YMflN (pvcreoos : Dem. in Aristog. p. 794. to find the place in Demosth, — Hooge- 1. 9. Reisk. So in Italian : Ma voIaltei veen affirms that &A\os so abounds in elite ; Chicchesia potra dire &c. St. Lucian's dialogues, but does not refer tfj Matth. xv. 5. transl. of Martini, Arch- the place. I therefore give the following- bishop of Florence. Un pensar al fine examples of &\\os so redundant : avrap puo dare la vita a noi altri meschini. 'OSvaaehs TepTrer ivl (ppecrlu fjaiv aKovoov, Inscript. in Notes on Byron's Ch. yfe Kat "AAAOI 4>AIHKE2, Horn. Od. 0, Harold, c. iv.— J. S. 368. elydproi ical XPVP ^yx^P L0V "AAAO * I wish Viger bad given some autho- yivqrai, Hes. Op. 341. The meaning of rity for this phrase. The following is an &X\o in this last passage is discussed, or example of tea ical with an infinitive, but rather abandoned, by Steph. in his The- in a very different construction: N«o- saur. t. iv. c. 666. d.e.f.g. — ku\ al ^dxai ffTpdrov ttotI — avayivuxjKovrSs n tov ttch- 7e, Kal oi 8d.VB.T0i, 5;a to.vtj\v ttjv diacfiopuv, 7)tov avry T€ ko.) Kpd.TVjTi, rbv lxzv (TuvSiaTi- 38 Katpot — Ki'fiia. [CllAP. III. § v. not heard (l syllable. And with unep hv\ 'iaov av e'iri -rre'iaai, virep av, to Xeyb/jevov, XiOov eiprjaat : that one might as well try to boil a stone, as the saying- is, as to persuade him : jEscIi. Socr. Dial. 7rept irXovr. VII. Toy es 'iaov to. epya bpaiws icaiTovs Xoyovs — KadiCTav-a, who has made good his ivords : Time. i. — which might have been thus expressed also, 'too. rols Xbyois ra epya k. When number is spoken of, it signifies as many : jrern/Koira f*eP ira'ibas, 'laovs he avbpas, Thuc. i, 1 i 5. So Arrian, de Exp. Al. ii. c. 2. Some- times a dative of the thing equalled is added ; as, ^elprts be rerrapas elxe, Ktu aKeXrj ra. 'icra rnis x e P fTl > Plato Symp. p. 189- Sometimes the aceus. apiQfxbv follows 'ioos, as in Arrian, Exp. Al. i. p. 12. in fine. [For 'iaov 'lata see R. 2.] To "iaov, as a substantive, justice, right, law: iroXefiw fxaXXov */ r» 'ia q> iifiovXi'idrjaai' ra ey(c\>j/uar« tiereXdelv, by war rather than by fair discussion of right : Time, i, 34. As an adjective, with a genitive : rijs airois ena^eis tov ai'bpos, Pint, in Publ. p. 9[). B. XII. KaTaxpews, vnoy^pews, vniyyvos ovaia, property encumbered with debt, pledged, mortgaged, avenatyos (often joined with i/7ro0//i>?/) ovaia, the contrary: ovaia (pavepa (Demosth. de Pace) [p. 59- I. 5. Reisk.] real property, or immoveable goods : ovaia a(pavt)s, personal property, or moveables. XIII. Kvpia (fipepa viz.) the day fixed for a trial at law : Eui'ip. Or. 48. Achill. Tat. viii, 405. ty)v Kvpiav opoXoyelv, to undertake or find sureties for appearance, vadimonium promittere ; enrav-av els ti)v Kvpiav, to appear on the day, obire vadimonium : tjjs wplas enro- Xelneadat or varepelaOat, to fail of appearance, vadimonium deserere. Kvpia is also put for any appointed day ; as is cupupiapevr], ra/crj), ciTroreTay/JLerT], vevopiapevr). Oeadai, rhv 8' 'i a a k al \iy\ aKova ai: Diog. Laert. in Polem. p. 145. 1. 27. ed. H. St. 12mo. Rule 7 — 16.] Kvptos—Aoyos. 39 XIV. So ?7 irpoQea^xia is used either for a fixed and appointed day in general, [see Lucian, Nigr. p. 39- C. F. ed. Salmur. and Galat. iv, 2.] or for one fixed for some legal proceeding : whence v-ireprifxepos Tijs Ttpodeafjias, one who has failed to appear, or to comply with the sentence of a court, hy the time appointed ; a defaulter ; or simply vnepi]i.iepos, [Demosth. in Mid. p. 518, 1. 2. 54-0, 1. 23. in Lacr. p. 927. 1. 1. in Steph. i. p. ] 123. I. 4. ed. Reisk.] or eKirpoOecrpos, or virepirpuQeafxos. Hence vtrfpiifiepov Xafie'iv, and elairparreiv, Dem. 11. c. and vKepr)nepia, the last day allowed for the above-mentioned purposes J He who appeared on the appointed day was said to be e/jTrpodeo-fxos. XV. Related to this subject is the phrase epr)fjr) hikrj, or kprifiobiKiov, or simply epi'ip-ri : i. e. a cause in which there ivas a failure of ap~ pearance. Hence kpr]\xr\v Xafielv or iXelv, to have judgment by default; ep^/jr/v Karrjyopelv, to accuse a person in his ab- sence: Plato Ap. Socr. p. 18. I. 28. XVI. Kvptos vojjlos, a law in force; one which the people reus \prj(j)l(Tfiaai Kvpiov irenoi^Ke, has* passed by their suffrages ; axvpos, re- jected or repealed ; out wv, as fj m olaa bUri, a cause heard, decided, done ivith. "AKvpoi rwr eavrwv, or tuv itpbs avrovs, persons deprived of the management of their affairs, as ohocpdopoi, guilty of oUocpdopia, spendthrifts, miners of their fortunes and families. Kvpwas, and nvpos, power, efficacy, distinguishing character, vir- tue or faculty, essence: Plato Gorg. p. 450. 1. 20. 40. [p. 304. 1. 19, 28. ed. Bas. prim.] expressed by xecpaXaiov, p. 453. and in another form by the verb nvpow, and its participle Kvpoifievos, p. 451. I. 17, 32. and 1. 27- SECTION VI. < Rule I. Aoyos. [See Niceph. Greg, techn. gramm. p. 344. ap- pended by Hermann to the treatise de emend, rat. Gr. gramm.] See Plato Thea?t. p. 206. 208. Aoyov ahelv, to ask leave to speak ; Xoyov hihovai, to give permission to speak; \6yov Xafielv, and Xoyov Tv%e~iv, to receive permission to speak. II. Aoyov btbovcu, airobibovai, vizo(r\eiv, k to give account, to render account: see Plato Cratyl. p. 426. Phaad. p. 63. Gorg. Xoyov $riTelv, Xafifiaveiv wapd rivos, or uiraiTelv, to demand or take an account from him: Demosth. de Chers. [p. 101. 1. l6. Reisk.] Phil. i. [p. 49- 1. 19-] de Chers. [p. 99. 1. 15.] and [in Onetor. p. 868. I. 5.] Some- times Xoyov biboiai is to submit to interrogation, to answer questions : Demosth. 01. ii, p. 9* 1. .44. like which is ev rw fiepei bibovai eXey-^ov, to expose one's self to refutation in one's turn: Plato i See Deraesth. in Euerg. &c. p. 1162. ferring to it in the plural: "And all 1. 27. Reisk. lb. 1154. 1.8. — J. S. the way the joyous people sings, And * More properly perhaps have: but with their garments strowes the paved Spenser construes people with a verb in street." F. Q. i, xii, 13. the singular, although in the same sen- h Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 371. 1. 18. tence he puts a possessive pronoun re- Reisk. — J.S. 40 Aoyos — Mepus. [CHAP. hi. § vii. Gorg. p. 474. 1. 11. and Xoyov bibovat, to enter into con- versation. III. Auyov euvr bi&ut'cu is to consider a matter, to weigh it well, to turn it in one's mind: Plut. de Orae. Def. p. 419. IV. Auyov ncipe^etv, is, to give people a pretext or occasion to say, that, &c. appreter a purler, — dabimus sermonem iis qui aesciunt, &c. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ix, 3. V. AoyoL, — 1. with reference to the meaning rather than to the .words themselves: rives ovv i)aav 01 ircipa tovtov \6yoL Tore prjdev- res ; ivhai then was the language which he held at that time? Demosth. pro Cor. — 2. considered as mere words, \6yot ravra teal oKf/xpis, Demosth. [What we familiarly call fudge, or humbug.} VI. Eis \6yovs ekdelv, or lerat, or Karacrrfjiai, or avveXQe'iv, or avvie- rai, or tMpiKeodat, to enter into conversation : rwv efjol c'nriKo/jtevwv es Xoyovs, of those who have talked with me: Herodot. ii. — and ev X6yu> ehai, to be engaged in conversation ; etre en propos avec quetqu'un. VII. But ev \6yois elvat, or 7ro\vs e. X. e. is, to be much celebrated ; and on the contrary, ovr' ev Xoyw, ovr ev apiQpy, of no name or account : -Orac. ap. Said, de iEgiuetis. VIII. Aoyos, by itself, it is rumoured, it is said: ws Xoyos, as it is rumoured. IX. Aoyos with a pronoun, opinion: ws abs Xoyos, as you maintain: Plato Gorg. p. 477. /car' efxov ye Xoyov, as I think, according to my opinion. X. Aoyos Trends, sermo pedestris ; either prose, properly so called, as in Strabo, i. p. IS, (and in which sense Plato opposes neiy Xeyetv to fxera fxerpiov: cf. Lucian. de Conscr. Hist.) or, a style plain and prosaic, although metrical. — Aoyos alone is also used for prose, as in Aristot. Poet, i, 19. iii, 26*. and in the plural, Xoyoi, Plato Gorg. p. 502. and Xoyoi ipiXol, as in Plato de Legg. ii. p. £)3. ed. Bip. Hence Xoytoi, prose-writers : Pind. Pyth. i, 183. Nem. vi, 51. but in v. 75. Xoylovs means writers in general. 'Ev Xoytp, with some genitives, is under the name of: as in Herodot. Er. c. 23. 'Evl X6ya>, in a word, in sum : Plato Gorg. p. 524.1.31. Phaed. c. 45. 'Iicaros Xoyos, ample scope for holding forth or discourse : Plato Gorg. p. 512. 1. 23. Xoyos rroXvs av e'it] bieXdelv, it would require a long discourse to enumerate or recount. aXX' el pev OappaXeojs eyib e-^h) irpos davarov, Tj /ui), ciXXos Xoyos'. is another matter, is foreign to the present purpose: Plato, ore be QaXXaj "^aipovaiv, — a XX os earai Xoyos: there will be another time for discussing: Athen. Deipnos. xiii. p. 587. See Aristot. Poet, ii, 24. Eth. Nic. i, 5. Magn. Mor. i, 4. 5. SECTION VII. RULE I. Mepos. — ret ev fiepei, or ret e7r« fiipovs, or ret ica-a fxepos,. particulars. So to. ko.6' exuerrov. II. 'Ev jjiepet, or kcitu i^teoos, one by one, separately ; also, in turn : Rule 1—5.] Mepos — Meoos. 41 Plato Gorg. p. 462. Thuc. iii. c. 4>g. Also Kara fxipos, by portions, part at a time : pvpiaat 7rapara£af is said of, time intervening: vv£ ev peaw, Kal -Kuprifxev — els ttjv exkkiifflay : after a night had passed, we &c. iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 284. 1. 36. ypovos ev peay, Kal — avaKaXovat tov 'hoavvriv, after some time they recall John : Euseb. Hist. Eccl. iii, 23. See Propert. iii, 14. ink. Ov. Met. iv, 167. Fast, iii, 8O9. Virg. Mn. ix, 395. Cie. Catil. i, c. 2. In the same sense, ov ttoXv to ev peau>, Kal 01 arpanoirai, &c.not long afterwards : Photius in Exc. Herodian. — 3. but, without Kal following, ev peay is said of an obstacle: tL — ev peay tov avppilai: what hinders them from being united? Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 113. [v. Dorv. ad Cliarit. p. 601.] — and 4. without Kal, to ev peatp signifies difference : as, noXv to ev fjeaa), there is a great difference. And, with allusion to a race, ov /uiKpu :w plow, by no small distance or interval, by no small superiority: Heliod. iEth. vii, c. 10. — 5. ev fieaw, publicly, openly, in public: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 495. Plut. in Caes. p. 721. v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 547. 'E>' peau, near, at hand, ready: Theocr. Id. xxi, 17. Xen. (Ec. v, 7. Anab. iii, 1, 21. See Ter. Ad. iii, 4, 7. and cf. Bergl. ad Alciphr. iii, 3. p. 235. — 6. fxeaos, with two genitives, may be rendered between: Trjs be ev KcplvOp pay^rjs, Kal rrjs ev Aex«'V> pteaos apyiav EbfiovXlbris : Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 474. to. i)[xl(j)wva /neaa twv acpwvwv earl Kal tQv (pwvrjevTUV. V. Ov. Met. x, 174. 233. Hor. Od. ii, 19,28.-7. fxeaos, with a genitive, signifies in the middle of what is expressed by the geni- tive ; as, vavv fiear\v KXvbwvos, a vessel in the midst of the waves: Gregor. Naz. Carin. de se ipso, v. 52. So Matth. xiv, 24. v. Virg. JEn. ii, 508. x, 56, 379. xii, 564. — 8. [The example under Visrer. v 42 Moipa— Mtyas. [Chap. III. § vii. this head has nothing peculiar to the word /ukcros.] — 9> ota p-kvov, in a parenthesis, Sch. Time. e. g. ad iii, 20. hut kv raj bio. peaov "Xpuvy, is, in the mean time : Herodot. Ur. e. 27- — 10. pkaos bt- KacT>)s, Tbuc. iv, 83. an arbitrator, an umpire: v. Ov. Met. v, 564. peaos 7ro\iTr)s, Thuc, a citizen of middle condition; between the richest and poorest. Micros, a middle-aged man : epya viuv, fiovXal be picrwr, ev-^ai be yepovnav, v. attributed to Hesiocl. — 11. pecrov Xapflaveiv, to take by the middle; also, to intercept: Plut. -napaXX. 'EXX. kcu 'Pwp. p. 305. 307- VI. Moipa. — 1. whatever is allotted or appointed by providence : Odyss. t, 592. JEsch. Dial. i. extr. [p. 653. 1. 33. ed. Basil, prim.] Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 18. Odyss. v, 171. — Hence, by consequence, 2. whatever is just, right, Jit, decorous, kv poipa, and Kara polpav, rightly, properly, duly, becomingly, Horn. Od. x> 54. Od. 1, [352.] Od. [v, 48.] Od. 0. [496.] Od. p, 35/— 3. state or condition of life, Plato Cratyl. p. 398. 1. 20. and estimation or repute. See Plato Crit. p. 51. 1. 10. — 4. Molpai, Parcce, the deities presiding over fate. 'E»> poipa, with a genitive, is used in the same manner as kv pipet above, R. 3. VII. Mj/Seis followed by pyre — ju>'/re, and two substantives, with the first only of which it agrees in gender : piqbepiav pyre yapiv prjre avbpa, &c. Dernosth. de Fals. Leg. VIII. Mrr^avrt, possibility. Ovbepia fir}X av 'H » w ' tn an infinitive, it is impossible, or it can by no means be, &c. el ovv unwary ns yevoiTO, &vre ttoXiv yeveadai kpacrrwv, &c. if therefore it were possible, if it could by any means come to pass, that, &c. Plato Symp. e. 6. c'f. Plato Apol. c. 15. Phaed. c. 36. Hence aurj^aria, perplexity, dilemma, straits, and aprj^aviiv, to be unable : YElian, V. H. i, 3. IX. Interrogatively, ris pnyavri ; hoiv is it possible that ? &c. With or without a negative : see Plato Ph6jjios, a steward ; okoropos, said of a woman, a houseivife : Lysias pro Erat. VI. Olos, (corresponding to toiovtos, expressed or understood,) with an infinitive, as: toioiitovs arQpionous, o'lovs fieduadtvTus dp^eia- 6at rotavTa, ola, &c. men of such abandoned characters as to get drunk and dance in such a manner, as, &c. Demostli. 01. ii. See Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 37. ii, 9, 3. iii, 11, I. and Schwarz. ad Theophr. Ch. c. 1. also Plato Pliard. c. 28. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 16". Mem. i, 4, 6. With a finite verb : toiovtovs oloi tyaivovrai, &c. Xen. Mem. iii, 6, 16. cf. ad Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 3. VII. For ooos, with yjpovos : ovre n)v 'EAXaSa Kpan'iaas to'ls oirXots 6 ^iXimros, olov KaraS,evlai kcu rtdaooevoai ypovov eayev '. sufficient time to subject and tame them : Plut. Alex. In the following unusual forms olos appears to he redundant : el pev yap ris uvfjp ecrnv ev avrols, olos eptreipos iroXe/xov K(u ayuviav : for if there is among them any man experienced in war and engage- ments : Demosth. Ol. ii. el pev toi 7]v uvt iXoyiKos olos avt)p, but if a contentious man were present : Plato Theaet. p. 197- but in reality there is an ellipsis — (toiovtos) olos (koTiv «n)/>) e^ireipos, &c. Sometimes olos, agreeing with a substantive, has afier it an accusative of another substantive expressing some quality of the former; as, Inrep oluiv ovtwv 'ABrjvaiwv t))v ciyaptarlav, for the Athenians, so ungrateful as they are : Lucian, Dem. Enc. i. e. v-rrep ovras ayapioTtov oloi elotv ol 'Adr)i>a~ioi. — Sometimes, by attraction, it is, with its noun or pronoun, put in the same case as its correlative toiovtos, although ordinary syntax would have required another ; as, yapi£6jjievov o'la) a o\ 6\vbp\, obliging such a man as you : Xen. Mem. ii, 9, 3. i. e. avbpt TOtoi/T(f, olos av el. VIII. Olos for us, as: d\\" oloi navTes ye cnrpaypoi'es kol (piXo- Trpnyfioves Tvyyavovaiv, but as all idle people are apt to be busy med- dlers. For ws, how, i. e. in how great a degree: olos peyas kcu he iv bs drhwos riywviadr) ; how great and dreadful a battle was fought! Lys. in Orat. Fun. [p. 98. 1. 11. Reisk.] Olos put alone, to indicate qualities or character indefinitely : ov-e T

e\e7v bv- vo.lt av tous tyiXovs, ciAA' ovb' avrrjv cru>£etv : she would be so far from being able to benefit her friends, that she would be unable even to save herself: Polyb. So pi) olov in b. v. — See Wessel. ad Diod. S. iii, 18. XII. Olov alone, for instance, for example ; and in the same sense olov bi) Xeyu, or (pr^u, and olov n Xeyia. Olov, and olovei, for waei, wcravel, wairepei, loanepavel, as it were, as if. And olovirep el following ofjoiov, Xen. Cjrop. i. c. 19. "Ofioiov is sometimes fol- lowed by warrepavel, or wcnrep av el, as in iEschiii. Ep. xi. and by us, or waet, as in iEschin. Dial, de Mort. c. 14. ob% o/ioioi — ical, it is not the same as ; or, it is one thing to, &c. and another thing to, &c. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 225. q XIII. Ola, neut. plur., and old ye, and ola hi], for are §/), utpote % quippe : ola bi) e/jjoaXovros rov vbaros, seeing that the water had Jloived in, the ivater having flowed in: Herodot. ii, p. 111. B. avrbs — rrjv vT](rov, ola bi) Oeos, ev/japws bieKOG/urjvev : as being a god : Plato Crit. p. 113 v. Soph. Aj. 1042. eiri aravpo'io fxipov rirXrjKas eirianre'tv Ola fiporus' (in thy nature as man ;) rpirdry be rnjXas Xiires 'A'ibovTjos Ola deos : (in thy nature as God ; as being God ;) Greg. Naz. carm. xiii. Ola, in such a manner: ola rijv vavv del kvkXui wepuaraTai Ka\\r) navroband, Aristid. Panath. oV ayopeveis,* in such P " At sequente substantivo dativi ca- 9 Tb irpay/jia '6iioiov eb~6ttei fioi, Kad- sus, pro intelligere, &c. ponitur. Piat. direp av e? ris, &c. Lucian, Reviv. Ion. el yap rexvy dids re ?jv aKXoov mot. p. G03. C. 613. A. — J. S. Toir]Tu>v atravrw \4yeiv dlos r av tfada. * See the Abridgm. of Bos, p. 73. in —J. S. Aayi£ofj.evos. 46 'Opyif— "Oaos. [ClIAP. III. § ix. a manner do you speak, (in a bad sense,) or on account of ivhat you say: Horn. di. p, -I7.9. a, 388. See also Mom. II. c, 758. In a similar sense daaa Q. Cal. Paral. ix, 424. The following is a summary of the uses of the particle olov : — 1. as, followed by ovriv, so : Plato Phacdr. p. 225. — 2. as, for example: Plato Phaedr. p. 340. — 3. about; olov beau arabiovs, Thuc. iv, 5)0. — 4. in what a manner ! how ! Horn. Od. (3, 230. Aristoph. Pac. 33. XIV. 'Opyi), commonly anger, sometimes means rpoiros, natural disposition, manners, affections, desires, feelings: ov rrj alrij dpyfj avanetdo/Aerovs re 7ro\epelv, Kal ev rw epyu) irpaaaovTas, Thuc. i. [c. 140.] p. 92. — [dpyn and rpuTros are however distinguished by Herodot. vi, 128. See Theogn. v. 958.] tus dpyas bpotovv, to as- similate men s manners or dispositions : Thuc. iii. p. 227. Hence evopyijrujs, moderately : Thuc. i. c. 122. XV. In the plural, dpyas eirupepeir, with a dative, to comply with the ivishes of a person ; to gratify : ' AaTvoypv — t wupepovra dpyas Tiaanfepvet, Time. viii. c. 83. [p. 253. 1. 11. ed. Bekk.] andCratinus (cited by the Scholiast of Thuc. I. c.) says, rijv MovaiKijv anopearovs eirt^epeii' dpyas fiporols awQpoai. SECTION IX.— "O^. Rule I. In the plural, for the relative os : twv aayoXovuevwv irepl t>)i' 'FAXaba, off 01 fieXXovaiv els atcpov eXavvetv Tfjs yXwrrys : as many as; all zvfio. In this sense it is mostly subjoined to iras ; and the verb substantive is often understood; as, wavQ'' daa d?wa yepaala Kal evvbpa Kal ntr/va. to iraXaidv 6j.io) TTOTi-^avwv xepo7»', only not touching it myself: as far as I can without using my own hands to do it : Soph. Trach. 12lfj. XIII. "Oaov avTiKa, oaov ovirw, oaov ovbe-Kw, oaov ovk i'jbr), jam jam, forthwith: oaov air Ik a rov rrpayparos a\popai, I will presently set about the affair ; eaupevov oaov ovbenw, on the point of being ; about to be immediately : Herodian, i. c. 13. oaov ovk ifbri cnrijX- 6ev, il ne fait que de parlir ; s t6v oaov ov napovra iroXepov, the war which is on the point of commencing : Thuc. i, p. 26. See Dorv. ad Char. p. fj(J2. seq. ed. Lips. XIV. The expression is applied to other things besides time : as, oaov ovk avroTTTrjs yevopevos, having been almost an eye-witness ; all but an eye-witness. XV. With oyehbv, redundantly: o%ebbv oaov tjkovtos, Euseb. Praep. 13. XVI. "Oaov, fjXUov, olov, onolov, between two substantives, agree with the first rather than with the last ; as, Ttayos oaov, or fjXiicov, 6 baicTvXos, the thickness of a finger. To specify quantity, oaov is put absolutely in the neuter : — 1. be- tween two substantives in the same case, without regard to number or gender; as, fxilfts rov oirbv aiXejiov oaov rpi&fioXov, having mixed as much as three oboli of benzoin: Hippocr. de Nat. Mul. p. 570. rpt(36Xovs oaov Koy^nv, lb. and with an ellipsis of the first substantive, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 15. — 2. with the first sub- stantive in the genitive : biKTiipvov KprjTiKov oaov ofioXbv, Hip- pocr. lb.— 3. with a participle : Xevtco'tou Kaprrbv, oaov iv ro'ts rpial SaKTvXois \aj3«v: seed of white violet, as much as you can take in three fingers : Hippocr. lb. — 4. with an infinitive; see an example at the end of Rule 9. "Off a, for the purposes of, in the capacity of, for, as: ry Xo'^w be — oaa ciKpoTToXei — e-^pujvTo, Pans, in Arc, p. 527- vvkti pev oaenrep iipepo: expijro, Xen. Ages, vi, 6. "Oo-os, with a substantive, is sometimes equivalent to a superlative r B69pov 6pv£ai (Saov re irvyovaiov gone but an instant. Ne vous etonnez cvda Kal evOa, Odyss. k, 517. — J. S. pas de voir Ie Vicorate de la sorte : il ne s I take these Greek words to mean, fait que sortir d'une maladie qui lui a he is all but gone, he is on the point of rendu le visage pale. Muliere, Prec, Ri- going ; whereas the P'rench given by Vi- die. sc. 12. — J. S. ger signifies, he is just gone, he has been EtJLE 11 — 16.] "Ocros— OaTs. 49 adverb: oaov ra^os, with the utmost speed: Soph. Aj. 1009. "Oatd in the dative, with or without er, signifies while: oaf be olroi ovveatriKaaiv, kv roaovTf, &c, Paus. in Messen. p. 228. 1. 23. Aiso until : ev oaf V av iraXiv eXduai, Xlri^/jra p^re bf/aai — prjbeva, fir/re, &c. Thue. iii. c. 28. With words of time it may sometimes be translated every, or by an adverb: epeadai, to sail before the wind. II. In the same sense, is ovpov Karaartjiat, ovptta irXf xprjaaadat, ££ ovpias (irvofjs viz.) nXe'iv, and, in one word, ovpiobpopelv, and Karov- puiaai. Also ovpla Belv, Aristoph. Hence enovplcu), to propel with a fair wind? and figuratively, to succeed (v. transitive;") and €7rovpia$uj, Lucian ; and xarovpow, Polyb. [1.] to spread the sails to a fair wind. [This is Budaeus's explication. Viger adopts Suidas's, to sail prosperously ; making it a verb neuter.] III. The Greeks sometimes say the sons (iralbes) of persons, when they mean the persons themselves ; Ihus, p/jrdpwi', larpuv, (ptXoa6} \pa/u/uoi fiadelai : for all was craggy rocks, or deep sands ; for there was nothing hut, &c. Philo Jud. de Vit. Moys. i. — 5. Sometimes iras, in concord with a substantive, is equivalent to the adv. iravrufs', as, 7rdffa avayicri piaelv tovs alriovs, you must unavoidably ; you cannot but, &c. Epict. Ench. c. 38. and c. 18. Aristoph. Pace 373. anas Kivbvvos, Pind. Nem. 8. irdaa j3\aj3n, (iEgistbus,) utterly pestilent: Soph. El. 297* [301.] Tray Tovvavriov ettriv, it is quite the contrary: Plato Soph. v. Virg. /En. v, 800. See Brunck. ad Soph. El. 301. Phil. 927. — 6. t6 ndv TreXayns, the open or mid sea. — 7- for 6X0 s : T7jr (paTvrjv eovtrar -^aXKerjr iraaav, Herodot. ix, 70. — 8. bia rravrbs, always: Soph. Aj. 704. Herodot. i, 122. — 9. es to rrav, omnino : iEsch. Choeph. 6'S2. 939. Eum. 84. — 10. iravra elvai tivi, to be every thing to a person; to be all in all to him : Herodot. iii, 157. vii, 156. v. Berg. p. 236. ad Alciphr. ii, 3 — but with the article, 7jv re 01 ev rip Xoyf to. rravra r] Kww, is, and he talked of nothing else but of Cuno : Herodot. i, 122. — 1 1 . 7rds for wavTobanos, ttovtoIos, of every kind: oiutvolffi re naeri, Horn. [II. a, 5] — 12. to irdv, the •vulgar, the common herd: Pind. Ol. ii, 153. w v This interpretation of Hoogeveen's, '"Add: — 13.ets ttav TrpoeArjAvde /xox- omni studio vel cura, appears very ques- Grjpias, for els -rraaav juoxfljjpiac, De- tionable. — J. S. mosth. Ol.iii.p. 29.1. 17. Reisk. els ira.v Rule 4 — 7-] YWU/jos— TlXeov. 51 V. Ytkoifios or 7r\w7^uos. — e.ri ttXoi prntv ovftov , Apyji yap fit> jjcto- irwpov : the time for safe navigation being not yet passed : Philo in Legat. So in the compar. Time. i. p. 5. [c. 7.] and, TrXwipibrepa eyeie-o nap aWr/Xovs, their intercourse by sea was rendered easier and safer: Time, i, [c. S ] HXSupos, (of a place,) safe for naviga- tion ; ttXih/jios vavs, sea-worthy : [Time, i, 29.] VI. UoXireta, political conduct ; measures of a public man : De- mosth. pro Cor. [p. 257. I. J. Reisk.] VII. UoXiis, in great force, having numerous forces : ttoXvv pev ev yfj, iroXvv be ev daXaaar) : Plut. de Fort. Rom. FIoAOs is also said of a person much spoken about : ttoXv v per tov 'AXe'favbpov Kal fyiXtirnov kv Tals biu0oXa~is cpeptov, perpetually naming, (or, objecting to me) Alexander and Philip in your calumnies: jEsch. c. Ctes. [p. 6\5. 1. 5. Reisk.] cf. iEsch. in Timarch. [p. 165. 1. 7- Reisk/] ooi be ttoXvs plv b KuXXIvt paras, Callistraius will be an ample topic : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 892. lloXvs, with a gen. much, a great part : 7js (x^P as ) «ye"' k«* )v Kpiaiv enro- (pvyorri: he has gained nothing by his acquittal: Arr. Exp. Alex, iii, 27. See Isocr. Paneg. [p. 98. 1. 1. ed. Battie. Cantab. 1729-3 e ' s tcivtov Ttepirpe^eiv pvpiatcis, ovbev TrXeov irotovvres '. to no purpose, without advancing: Plato Theaet. 01 ttoXXo], the multitude. YloXvs is said of what exceeds, or is superlative in any respect : y Txo-aphs ttoXvs, rushing with a vehement tide: see Virg. iEn. vi, 659- ttoXv tcanbv, extremity of evil: Time, ii, 51. ttoXvs XaXuiv, talkative to excess: BL\. V. H. xii, 14. TToirjms earl ti TtoXv, the meaning of iroirjais is very comprehensive: Plato eXdiiv, having undergone extremity of tcixvtSs /j.oi r)v oikuv eV SrifioKparia, if suffering: Demosth. in Conon. p. 1261. it were not my paramount care, my chief 1.5. — 14. to ttclv, adverbially, ivholly, solicitude, above all other considerations entirely , altogether • 3> to KaXov irodopZo-a, with me, all in all to me : Solon's lett. to rb irav Xldosl Theocr. Id. iii, 18. imp- Cross, in Diog. Laert. — J. S. prifiaTtKais, o.vt\ tov 8i6Xov, Scliol. — 15. * XIoAvs fj.lv yap 6 $l\nnros gctou, for iravT ex eiJ > you comprehend the matter there will, be a great deal about Philip, thoroughly; you take the thing exactly : (in Demostlunes's defence of Timarchus, Aristoph. Av. 1460.— 16. iravTOs p.aXXov, viz.) — J. S. most certainly, indisputably : Plato Pliaed. v Ovtco 0' r)v ttoXvs, Sio-t', so mighty p. 28. 1.37. ed. Bas. prim.; really, in- ivas he, &c. Aristoph. Av. 488. ovtcos deed, Piat. Plisedr. p. 196. I. 6. — 17. r)v na\ eXeirdai Kal KaTacppovr)(Tai ttoXvs, in TravTOs, by all means, indispensably ; so great was he both in, &c. Diog. Laert. Xpil eft iravTOs i) tov oiavefjiovTa 'IXiwv in Aristipp. ttoXvs yap, ttoXvs, Kal exeiv, i) ttjv Upop.y]Qiws p.epiSa (pepeaOai, ToXp.t]p6s iffTtv &vQpwwos : immoderately Lucian, de Merc. Cond. p. 485. c. ed. troublesome : Demosth. adv. Boeot. p. Salmur. So QairavTos, Lucian, Reviv. 1024. 1. 3. Reisk. p. 416. E. ed. Salm. — 18. et p.T] irepl The following phrases may be added: 52 Tipdypa — Irj/ueloy. [CHAP. fir. § xi. Symp. &pa iroWi), late: Mark vi, 35. iro\vs for ttoWukis, CalKm. Dian. 27 '• Heliodor. vi, 4. VIII. TIpay/ia. — Awry ovbev eoTtv en irpdyfxa npos Tas avvQi]Kas ravras, he has no longer any thing to do with, &c. any concern in : Demosth. eav be \pevbfj, ovbev bq irpay pta ; no matter ; it does not signify: Plato Symp. irpfjyp\a pievToi ovbev k-TroiyaavTO, they cared not, they concerned not themselves about it : Herodot. Er. c. 63. ol ev irphyjiaai, those entrusted with public affairs, with the government of a state: Thuc* Like xprj/^a, it is said of any thing that surpasses : Hnve\67reta be Meya vpayfia, Eubul. ap. Ath. Deipn. xiii. p. 559." an admirable or excellent woman. IX. Upa^is, in a forensic use: tx\v vpa^iv elvai e£j evos koA a/Mbolv, a form added in some legal instruments, to signify that the parties are bound jointly and severally, each to be bound and liable for the whole. X. Upa^is, stratagem, trick, intrigue, [and so Ttpdyfia, Greg. Cypr. in Ep.] and irpafyKOTte'tv rtva, or ir6\iv, &c. to circumvent, outwit, trick, a person ; to take a town by artifice.* XI. FIpd(T)(>jjua, ornament, glory: Hapbeis, to irpoaj^rjjjia rijs — yyefjovias, Plut. in Alex. XII. Tlpooyriiia, mask, screen, pretence , color, pretext : v. Time. i. p. 64. XIII. In this sense it is often put absolutely, and opposed to to 6' akijdes : ostensibly, so and so, but in reality, &c. — In the same manner npotyaaiv fiey is opposed to rp b' aXndeio:, as in Aristid. pro Quat. p. 309- and to epyw be, as in Paus. Cor. p. 132. XIV. Ta TrpbJTa for v Trp&ros : 'iadi tu>v 'Adqvalwv ra irpwra f Lucian, in Tim. V. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 147. Brunck. act Eurip. Or. 1251. Hec. 784. SECTION XI. Rule I. To confirm any tiling which has been said, the Greeks use the words (rnpie'tov, reicufyHOV, cnrobeifa, fxaprvptov, &c. with be in an unconnected position, at the commencement of the next sen- tence or member of a sentence; as, Trpbs jxev xpnjiaTwv KTT)i\orifiias avijXwoev , &c. a proof of it; as appears from this, &c. Demosth. adv. Androt. [p. 617. i. 12. ed. Reisk.] Aristot. Etli. vi. c. 5. jueya be arjfielov ews pev yap, &c. Aristid. pro Quat. p. 353. — Sometimes those words are not used so elliptitally, v. Herodot. Pol. 221. Aristid. 1. c. p. 247. Plato Apol. S. p. 40. ArjXov be, rw, &c. Aristot. Eth. vi. c. 2. In the same sense Xenophon uses ebf/Xwuev, Cyrop. vii, 1, 30. cf. Mem. i, 2, 31. In the like unconnected position, ro be pabtovpyrifja' end yap, &c. but the knavery was thus; when, &c. Euseb. Praep. Ev. p. 220. Iwfia signifies a person, an individual: iEsch.inTira. p. 173. 1. 28. Virg. JEn. ii, 18. v, 318. Eurip. Med. 24. vfipeis opwrres els to. eXext- depa aufiara yivofxevas, Dinarch. c. Deniosth. p. 94. 1. 54. [Here the body of the person is the part chiefly regarded ; as it is in iEschyl. Prom. 865. and in Lycurg. adv. Leocr. c. 30.] Kara owfia, indi- vidually : Kal cvWf'ifibrjv airavras, Kal \wpls eicaarovs Kara aw\xa, iEsch. in Ctes. p. 405. I. ult. Reisk. Iwfxa, a slave, Tob. x, 1 1 . [v. H. St. Thes. iii. 1213. B.—J. S.] Sai^a, a corpse, a carcass: v. Pind. Ol. ix, 52. Nem. ix, 55. Horn. II. iii, 23. xviii, l6l. xxiii, 169. II. TeXos, a troop, Herodot. ix. c. 42. — Magistracy, public office or station: e%w twv flaatXewv, Kal twv uaAiora ev reXei, Thuc. i, 10. TeXos be, es reXos, /cat reXos, and reXos alone, signify at last: He- rodot. Er. c. 66. Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 51. 1. 11. Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 923. Xen. (Ec. 17. § 10. Thuc. i, 109. Xen. Cyrop. i. p. 25. and ii. p. 42. And in the same sense to reXevralov, Lucian, 1. c. p. 902. PJato PliEed. p. 91. I. 35. and ra TeXevrala, Demosth. 01. ii. p. 6. and mepas, iEsch. in Tim. p. 119. 1. 29- [p. 84. 1. 13. Reisk.] and repfia, Phocyl. 131. — But to reXos, and bia reXovs, sometimes signify, wholly, utterly, absolutely : Pho- cyl- [v, 47.] Xen. (Ec. 17- § 10/ Te-^vT)- Traarf re^ijj is by all means, d with all possible speed: Ari- sloph. Eccl. 530. 366. Ideln Texvy,* openly, without disguise: Herodot. Call. c. 57. See Larch, (vi. p. 120.) III. Tis has sometimes the article before it; see Ch. I. R. 19. and Aristoph. Av. 1039- Nub. 773. But 6 be tis is some other, another: Aristoph. Av. 1444. "Ey/wo-i be br) ti tovto ; but what is this which they have? Plato Phaedr. p. 259. V. Lucian, de Sacr. 13. t. i. p. 536. IV. Tts for 7ro7os, as, tis yap lyw irpbs toctovtovs ; what am I against so many? See Hist. Susann. v. 54. V. Various particles are subjoined to tis, expressive of the wonder, c Add TeAos, a market toll: Aristoph. KaBear-fiKee 4k tijs lOe'njs {openly, avow- Acliarn. 896. — J. S. edhj) AaKtSaifiovioicri. iroAe'^ios. ix, 36.) d See Aristoph. Thesmoph. 65. — J.S. KaraSS^as aiirovs lOeir) rexvp anoAnruv * (In which sense Herodotus some- avrbv, (in good earnest.) ix, 56. — J. S. times uses the phrase in ttjs ifcnjs: 34 T.s. [Chap. hi. § xi. ignorance, &c. of the inquirer; as, r/$ apa, rls wore, ri S//7rore, TL brjTU, &c. VI. Ti yap u\\o — *i with a verh : Alex, ri yeA^s ; Diog. ri yap a Wo, y ayef.uliaOr}t', &c. why because I recollected what the Greeks did, to be sure: Lucian. [Dial. Mart. p. 253. C. ed. Salrnur.] — and ri yap av a\\o ; it is unavoidable ; how can it be otherwise? is some- limes put at the end of a sentence. Kal ri yap, in a word, to be brief: Lucian, Tox. p. 609. — TV yap ; serves as an affirmative answer: to be sure, certainly, Quidni? v. Eurip. Or. [v. 476. Pors.] — TV with a subjunctive mood ex- presses a doubt as to what shall be done, when doing is practicable ; as, ri ; With an optative and ac, it expresses a doubt whether any thing can be done at all; as, ri bijr' av rip.e~ts bpujiev', Soph. Phil. 1393. what then can we do? i. e. I fear we can do nothing at all. But the poets frequently omit the ay, as /Esch. Choeph. 392. Soph. Ant. 604. — Sometimes ri is to be supplied from a preceding interro- gation: iEsch. Eum. 791. 821. Eurip. Ion, 1446. VII. TV yap, el nr/, and ri be, el fxi), in answers, what but. How did your wife appear to attend? &c. ri be, el fit) vKia^ve'iTo ye eni- /ue\))uea6ai ; why so well that she promised, &c. Xen. CEc. p. 844. and in the same manner presently afterwards. VIII. "AWoTL e is used in questions ; as, eiUon $ wepl nXeiarov •noiy, onus ; &e. do you not esteem it of the greatest importance? are you not very solicitous that? &c. Plato Apol. p. 24. 1.30. aXXori ?} ol Tavry oliceovres AlyvK-iojv ireivynnvmv ', Herodol. ii. c. 14/ And without i] : aWori ovv, r)t> b' eyio, ovbe larpus, Kad' ouov larpds, rb ru> larpio Gvjx) is omitted, the interrogation is in aXXo ri alone ; not in the other words of the senteuce.] IX. 17 interrogative is used in a form wherein doubt is expressed as to a proper appellation : to ri a e'iiru) ; how shall I find a name bad enough for thee? Aristoph. Nub. 1381. [1360.] u> ri av el-nuv ere ris 6p6ws itpoaei-not; 0/ what name can be applied to thee bad enough for thy deserts? Demostli. pro Cor. p. 3l6. init. X. 'A\\a ri jxi\v ; ivhat else then, if not that? said by an interro- gator when a prior question has been answered in the negative : Plato Symp. c. 23. cf. c. 25. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 23. Theocr. Id. viii, 15. But sometimes ri p/»'; is an affirmative answer: to be sure, of course: Plato Soph. c. 5. Phaedr. p. 229. cf. ib. p. 272, 273. And ri yap ov; and ttws yap ov ;s have the same use. 7 ' € "AAAoti (or &\A.o rt) occurs in such h Hoogeveen wrongly translates t[ oZr interrogations only as are used to elicit an tovto; in Plato Hip. M. p. 298. [3-18. I. acknowledgement or concession; never in 51. Bas. prim.] by Quid ita? The whole such as are employed merely for the sake passage stands thus : Socr. &ireipos el tov of information. — J.S. avSpbs, Si 'lirirla, ois ffX^rKids icm, Kal ov- f Add Xen. Anab. ii, 5, 2. iv, 7, 4. — Ser paSlws airodexi^vos. Hip. ri ovv J.S. tovto, S> Scfj/cpares ; (what matters that ? * Socr. a\\h p.)]V evvofxos y' 7) Aa/ce8cu- what does that signify?) to yap opO&s he- p.wv. Hipp. ttS>s yap ov; most assuredly : y6p.evov avaynri avTy airodexeadai., ?*) p.11 Plato Hip. M. p. 346. 1. 36. Bas. 1. airo5ex°M e ' f "f' -KarayeXaaToi thai. — J. S. Rule 6 — 14.] Tis. 55 XI. Tts is elegantly added to many words, imparting to them somewhat of its own indefinite signification ; as, ttoIos tis, Aristopli. Nub. 763. [755.] Plato Soph. 1. Aristid. pro Quat. p. 296. was ti; fieya ti, ovbev ti, scarcely at all, or not at all: Herodian, i. c. l6. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 42. u^iKpuv ti. tto\X(3 tivi yeipav, Aristid. Or. Plat. iii. p. 405. -noWoj tivi irpu>TOs, lb. p. 402. biraaov ti bmpepei, how much it differs ; roia&e tis, Xen. Mem. i. 1, 1. Cf. Plato Symp. e. 2. Tts is often understood ; as in Soph. (Ed. R. 314. Aj. 154. (Ed. R. 6l2. 517. Xen. Symp. v, 2. cf. Xen. Ages, i, 22. and Fiscli. ad Well. p. 294. ; and especially before genitives used partitively ; as, Kay yajurj wot clvtos, 1) tmv ^vyyevwv, rj tujv 0/Xwv : and if he, or (any one) of his relations or friends marry: Aristoph. Nub. 1125. [1112.] See Soph. El. 1323. Act. Ap. xxi, 16. and Hor. Od. iii, 13, 13. XII. Tts indefinite is found in interrogations. See Demosth. Phil. i. [p. 43. 1. S. Reisk.] t\s evbm; is any one loithin? iEsch. Ch. 652. Tt for 0, Vi, that which, what: Mark xiv, 36. cf. vi, 36. viii, 2. Matth. xx, 22. XIII. Tts, on Fr., one, i. e. any person : AaKeba! fiova irokeav p.6vi]v ov irpoboQe~iaar~—evpoi tis av, Paus. Ach. p. 415. See Horn. [II. jS, 271.] jEsch. Eum. 154. Theogn. 184. Instead of tis and a verb in the 3rd person, a verb alone in the 2nd person (as in Latin) is employed : Horn. II. e, 85. XIV. lids tis, every one. navd' emcra, every one of the parti- culars, Basil, ad Domit. In the same sense, avros etaoros irpu- tos eairevbev ap$ai paxus, each, every one, Pans, in Mess. So ■names 0001, and izas 6 with a participle, Luke x viii, 14. John xviii, 37. xix, 12. Also eeaoros tis, and aiiros tis. Tts alone is put for etceteras, each, every one:' vvv tis, u> orpaTtuiTai, — eireiyeaQa : Plut. in Fab. v. Xen. Cyrop. vi, 1, 6. vi, 4, 20. Abresch. ad iEsch. iii. p. 85. Brnnck. ad Soph. Aj. 245. Tts, though construed with a verb in the third person, sometimes signifies the person speak- ing; as, iToi tis Tpe\perai; Aristopli. Th. 603. — Tts and ti for a person, and a thing, of importance: Epict. Ench. c. 18. Act. Ap. v, 36. Theocr. xi, 79. In this sense it is opposed to ovtis in Pind. Pyth. 8. to ovbeis in Epict. Ench. c. 31. (see Aristoph. Eq. 158. For obbels in this sense Lucia n uses to fiijbev, Mort. Dial. t. i. p. 282.) and sometimes fieyas is added torts in this use, Act. Ap. viii, 9. See Ov. Fast, vi, 27- — Aeyeti' ti, to say something of weight or moment ; something to the purpose : Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 12. /Esch. Socr. Dial, ii, 7, 23. Soph. GZd. R. 1475. Trach. 865. to which is opposed ovbev Xeyeiv, Plato Apol. 17. [which, however, seems some- times to mean to be of little weight: Eurip. Suppl. 595. v. Her- mann's addenda ad vs. 6l2. iEsch. Agam. 176.* ex Schutzii conj.] * This is an imitation of Horn. e3 p.zv Dr. Blomfield conjectures, 0. a. 8e7|tzi tis S6pv 6ri£d(Tdci>, &c. II. /3, 382, 383, tt. to. " non se quidquam fuisse ostendet." 384.— J. S. —J. S. * For ovSlv av \Qat irpiv &v, (v. 164.) 56 Ta—Xu f Hs. L Chap - ni > § *>'• — ^ ■Ex etv Tl > '° be rich: JEsch. Dial, ii, ]3J r\ elbiyai, to have much knowledge or wisdom: Plato Apol. 6", 7, 10. rl elvai, to be of great account or consequence: Id. ib. 33. rl ttohuv, to be well employed: Id. Sympos. T('s for itoios, Soph. Tracli. 31 1. v. Valck. ad Fragm. Call. p. 23. Tts sarcastically substituted for av : rovr els uviav rovirns 'dpyerai Ttvi, somebody will suffer for these words, i. e. you, Teucer, (to whom Menelaus is speaking,) shall repent of them: Soph. Aj. 1133. v. Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 3. p. 285, 6~1.* SECTION XII. Rule I. Ton-ovrov, thus much only : l rorrovrov vireiwibv, adding only this: Demosth. So rocrorbe,* Herodot. ii. p. 111. — Tooovtov is fol- lowed by oaov, v. Herodot. vi, 137- oh tovovtov — iretifjevTes, ooov 0o/3ou/uerot : not so much through persuasion as fear : Thuc. i, 88. "JLrepos tooovtos, as much again: erepov togovtov ^poyov, Isocr. Paneg. p. 141. II. 66vos ovbels expresses readiness or willing- ness : d\\' ovbels dovos ovbels, <5 IdXiov, (in answer,) ^wil- lingly, O Solon : Plato Tim. p. 23. 1. 36. So ovbels (pdopos, w levoi, (in answer,) Ceb. Tab. [p. 8. 1. 6. ed. Simps. Ox. 173S.] a fievroi Tvyyavk) aKt]Kows, dovos ovbels Xeyeir : Plato Phaed. Also Plato Soph. c. 1. Xapts. — \uptv ^xeiv," 1 or elberai, is to be thankful, or grateful ; with a dative of the person, and a genitive of the thing; as, qw ooi Xapiv rovrov: v. Deni. pro Megal. p. 34. I. 14. Xapiv (or x&P L ~ ras) airobiborat, (Dem. Ep. ii. p. 111.) or reXe'iv, to make a return for a kindness. \apiv airocrrepelv, to be ungrateful: Plato Gorg. p. 520. I. 26. 6 as a favor, a^v yapiv,for your sake : see Ch. I. R. 11. i But 6X etSTt ' in Aristopli. Nub. 723. m In Aristoph. ovo'ep.lav e%w ye r$ is, have you got any device yet ? — J.S. piy xapiv, is, I have no enjoyment of k Add; Tis, in a very eniphatical life; my life is a burden to me: Lys. sense, for any person or thing whatever, 865. and rots Se aniois x&P lv ovSefiiav without any exception : irpqorepovs yev4 yr\ ku\ 0eo(\ nal rovro to ing phrases maj be added: eirel ovk &pa dffe'jSTjjtta %\o.tt6v Vivos 7jye7o-0€ ; Dem. tis X&P IS ^ ep M-apvaadai, Horn. II. i, in Androt. p. 018. 1. 5. v. et adv. Lep. 316. i>irio~xeTO Pond^aeiv fierti fieyd- p. 284. 1. 17. T7, why, wherefore: An- A-ns x^P lTOS: ver V readily, very uil- stoph. Plut. 252. — J.S. Ungly: Polyb. E. L. 31. vejxeiv xapi"> 1 Not much unlike this is its sense in to gratify, (with a dative,) Aristoph. Av. Plut. Ly sand. & or (xword&rjv, or lie pvord- crews, or Ka7 under power, subjected: Soph. El. 1090. v. Thorn. M. p. 896. VI. 'Ev y€p aLV > (nearly the same as kv x €t P^ v vofiy,) in battle; ivhile engaged ; in the affray : tovs juey kv x e P aiv airkKTeivav, tovs be $u)vras eXa/3ov. VII. Xetp&v abiKtov (ip£at, or Karap^ai, to be the aggressor,? Xen. Cyrop. i. c. 30. to begin hostilities, Maccab. iv, 40. and apxeiv abiKwv, (neuter,) HL\. V. H. i, 14. ets x e 'P as ^ va >- is said of an amicable meeting, as well as of a hostile encounter. ? VIII. Xpeos. — %pewv airoicoircu, (novlf* a , > n l ' ie singular, is said of a particular sum of money : Act. Ap. iv, 37. The principal, or capital, was called to up^ulov, to. apyala, apyaiov baveiov, apyaiov Kepav ' — & X^PQ T0V evebpevovTos aXwvai. VIII. (IX.) Tots fxev ottov 'iTV^ev eKacrrov (car«/3e/3\j7ra«, rots be ev X<°pq eKdirta TeTb.yp.eva ice'irai : in their proper places ; in order : Xen. (Ec. iii, 3. cf. Cyrop. iv, 5, 37- IX. (X.) Kara x^P av ^X eil '> or P-eveiv, r or ctTpepelv, to remain un- disturbed, unremoved, in statu quo. Xpa, dignity, rank, honor, station, {locus,) Polyb. i, 43. Jos. Arch, vi, 10, 1. Xwpa, the country, in contradistinction to the town, Xen. Hier. x, 5. Polyb. i, 1, 72. Htrodian vi, 4, 11. cf. Graev. Lect. Hes. c. viii. p. 38. X. (XI.) "flpa, proper time, full time, high time. 5 "£lpa, puberty, maturity, marriageable age : i']bi] b' eh avbpbs &pav yKovarjs Tfjs Koprjs, Plato Crit. p. 113. 1. 32. Marriageable girls are said iv Spa yevea- dai, Herodian i, 2, 3. The following uses of &pa, signifying time, are to be noticed : — 1. Spa tFjs fifxepas, a twelfth part of the natural day : Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 4. Herodot. ii. p. 153. ed. Wess. — 2. wpa ti]s vvktos, a fourth part of the night: Xen. Mem. iv, 7, 4. which is called also ?/ tyvXanri. — 3. Spa, midnight: Sapph. fragm. ap. Hephaest. * (mktos a/AoXyos, Horn. Od. b, 841.) — 4, Spa pr)vbs, one part or division of a month ; r 2/C€7rTeoj/, TrSrepov Set rovs /xev &\Xovs ti tot &vBpes ovk ^kovctlv ; &pa 8' i)f ni- vSfiovs, ots im roh aSLicovo-i r\jv w6\tv \an lb. 877. Sipa xrot, & fie\rto , Te, tov vfiets aveypdipaTe, aKvpovs eluai, rSvSe de Kpoicrov ira?5a waideveiv : then, my worthy, Kvpiov $) tovvomt'iov, TovTov (i\v Xvffai, you had better teach Croesus's son: Lu- Kara, X& P av Se [tevetv robs ixWovs cian, Vit. Auct. p. 361. D. Salmur. — J. S. eav: Demosth. in Timocr. p. 701. 1. 16. * P. 6-5. 1. 11. in the ed. of Dr. Gais- — J. S. ford— J. S. ' "n p a. jSaSff en/ j Aristoph. Eccl. 30. Rule 4-10.] THE PRONOUN. 59 one of the three decades, into which the Greek months were divided: Xen. Mem. iv, 7, 4. — 5. wpa eviavrov, one of the four seasons of the year, "ilpat in the plural: -javTa oaa wpai tyvovcri, Xen. Anab. i. p. 39. ed. Hutch, min. — 6. wpa, by way of eminence, the spring: Polyb. ii, 9. and the summer: Galen, de Fac. Alim. ii. Cf. Greev. Leer, ad Hes. "Epy. 31. — 7. wpa, proper season, fit time: >/ tov anupov tipa, Xen. O2o. xvii, 1. Cf. Trill. Obs. iv, 28." CHAPTER IV. ON THE PRONOUN. Rule I. Periods are elegaully terminated by the pronouns eyw, ijfiirepos, vjjerepos, ovros. V. Ceb. Tab. [p. 40. 1. 2. ed. Simps.]" Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 227- 1- 6.] lb. [p. 228. 1. 12.] lb. [p. 260. I. 6.] [V. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 245. I. 29. Aristoph. Av. l627<] — 2v terminates in St. John iv, 19. cf. viii, 48. II. In the Greek, as in some other languages, the datives of pri- mitive pronouns are sometimes elegantly or emphatically redundant : [ioi, v aoi, w iijjuy, Soph. Aj. 2l6. vffiv, Soph. GEd. R. 1401. — Qui Mi hi, ubi ad uxores ventum est, turn [demum] fiunt senes : Ter. Phorm. v, 8, 21. III. A possessive pronoun sometimes agrees with a substantive signifying something with regard to which the personal pronoun im- plied in the possessive is passive or the object, not an agent or source; as, evvoia. yap kpw rrj ay, for I shall say it out of my good-will towards you: Plato Gorg. p. 486. I. 5. abs xodos, my longing for you : Horn. Od. A, [201.] Trpovoiq rrj arj, through forecast for your welfare; out of precaution used on your behalf ': Eurip. Andr. 660. e/ui] bwpea, a gift bestowed on me: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 32. IV. A possessive is transferred from its proper substantive to another: -by e/u.by wbiywy irovov, my pain of labors, for kp&v, the pain of my labors: Eutip. Plioen. V. Words are often put in apposilion or in concord with the geni- tive of a personal pronoun implied in a preceding possessive, or to which personal genitive that possessive is equivalent in signification ; as, rap hiapiracovai tov KUKobai fiovos. So Aristoph. Plut. 33/ VI. Avrbs is sometimes employed as a reciprocal pronoun : cara- (f>vyi)i> airy — TTopHoiro, he might provide a refuge for himself: 1 Add: avatraveadat. Kad' & pay, early, 6 /jl^j wpcuvt Ari/JLucrTpaTos, Aristoph. Lys. betimes: Polyb. i, 45. t\ks iroWrjs 391.— J. S. &pas, late, in the evening; Polyb. v, 8. ™ "Epa, so early in the morning: every page of Cebes. — J. S. Aristoph. Eccl. 395. is ras wpas, for v Aristoph. Eys. 707. Nub. 116. ever: Aristoph. Ran. 380. Sipa, age. Acharn. 458. — J. S. See Plut. Alcib. p. 350. 1. 1. H. Steph. V Aristoph. Nub. 206. Eccl. 136. Ran. Ages. p. 1126. 1. 19. Mr] upaiaiv 'ikoito, 1119. — J. S. perdition take him! Lucian, Dial. Me- x "H/xeTepoy ay efrj iro.vely ical lao-Qai retr. p. 734. D. Salm. fx\\ tbpas 'IkoictO', ra roiavra, t5>v Kcd is To5e avra. irpo- Aristoph. Lys. 1037. rivxovro /u?j tbpav ayay6vT(ov : Lucian, Jup. Tr. p. 206. QefjLil\ovs, thus thou in- structest thy friends: Xen. Mem. ii.y Avrfjv in the second person, St. Luke xiii, 34. Suas for nostras is in Ov. Ep. v. 4(5. See Fisch. ad Well. p. 172. In the phrase avrbs k 474. — of a person as acting without cooperation, II. 6, J 5. p, 48. rtjv avrbs tyiXeeatcev, with whom he was in love, and whom he ivished to love exclusively, without any rival: II. 1, 449. Avrbs, emphatically, for even, very, (in the 3rd sense in Dr. Johnson's dictionary ;) Iliad i, 450. /x, 429. *'> 614. — ^ C. 1. § 30. where I find (ravrTjs.— repeated, and governing the accusat. of a J. S. relative : 4iroiT]aev 'hi' '6irep Ka\ 6 fiaoavT0)s (T6dev Biovoeiro irapaXafiflciveiv irao' rb tovto, the very same thing : Aristoph. ifiov rijv vaxv, out, eVeiSij — ■hvay KacrOr} Pint. 153. — J. S. iirl t^v va.vv airUvai, ehd&v 7)Qi\t)ffi fiot e Add, avrov, hue, hither: Aristoph. SiaSe^aaBai am-hv : Demosth. adv. Polycl. A v. 663. v. Dindorf. e'£ cu/ttjs, imme- p. 1215. 1. 28. Reisk. So Plut. in Arat. diately : Tlieogn. 231. and in one word p. 18S7. 1. 20. ed. H. St.— J. S. e|auT?)s, Polyb. xiii, 5. avrb tovto. See * Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 123. 1. 16. Toup. ad Longin. Fragm. v. — J. S. Polyb. vi, 48. Theocr. Id. y, 19 J. S. / Where it may be rendered unde- c See Aristoph. Ach. 504. Thesm. 472. servedly.—J. S. — J. S. 62 THE PRONOUN. [Chap. iv. Cor. [p. 247. 1. 24. Rcisk.] — (abroK^Xevaros, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 475.) vavs avTavbpos Karen ovrioOr), together ivith her crew; vhtas ai/ravbpovs, with their inhabitants : Plul. irupaXX. 'E\X. ical 'PwjU. p. 306. 'liriros uvrtxpoprus K(iTeKpr}[Avicr6r), load and all; ckw- -KtjKarovv Kvirapiaoois avToicXubrus tea) ahrOKVfiOts, for oars they used cypresses with their branches and leaves on: Lucian, Ver. H. i. [p. 741. E. ed. Salmur.] avre^ovo-ios, one's own master ; to avre^ovmoy, uncontrolled liberty or power ; avroKetyaXos, a primate ; uvti)koos, an ear-witness; avTonrTjs, an eye-witness, Plut. I. c. p. 310. whence avroxl/la, and avroipei: avr6fioXos,£ a deserter to the enemy, or one who comes spontaneously ; avrovofins, avroreXrjs, avrobiKos, indepen- dent ; avdobios, fresh from a journey; avrvKXriros, self-invited; avrobibcLKTos, self-taught ; abrovpyds, one who works with his own hands, Palaeph. Fab. 3. h avro^eip, one who executes anything with his own hands, Aristoph. Av. 1135. especially (in which sense avro- davaros also) homicide: Soph. El. 958. 1022. Hence avrayeip (as well as avTotyovos, avrodavaros, avroKrovos) signifies a self-murderer ; whence the adverb avro-^eipi. avToirpoawTrns, one who does any thing in person; avrayyeXos, one who brings intelligence himself: v. Niceph. Greg. § 62. Ammon. p. 2. and Valck. avderrrjs or avro- evrvs, the same as avro^eip, Soph. 02d. ft. 106. avToxpn^a, adv. in reality, indeed; avTo^ma btaicovos, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 36'0. abrofioet, at the first assault, with the mere shout of onset: Thuc. ii, c. 81. aiiTodev, see on THE ADVERB, avdrjfiepov, (poetically avTfjixap,) on the very same day, the selfsame day ; [avrijs &pas, in- stantly /forthwith : Plut. Inst. Lac. 34. Herm.] avreperrjs, one who rows on occasion, although rowing is not his proper and regular function: Thuc. iii, c. 18. [i. c. 10. vi. c. 91.] avruavOpwiros, the specific essence, or abstract idea, of man: Plato, v. Aristot. Eth. i. c. 6. avroroavTo, ipsum illud ipsum :' Plato Alcib. i. So with proper names : AvOofirjpos, a very Homer ; Avrofiopias, a very Boreas, another Boreas : Lucian, Timon. * B One who come b of himself how tn e SiKaioaivrj, Chrys. iii. p. 611. 1. 19. enemy, and is not brought against his avTodu!-, Aristoph. Pac. C07. avroada- will, as a prisoner of war. — J. S. vourla, Chrys. iv. p. 235. 1. 35. avro- h Eurip. Or. 910. Pors.— J. S. fa}), Chrys. ii. p. 579. 1. 1. avroda- 1 That which is itself supremely or ktos, Plut. Moral. § 434. A. avroQripiot/, really, by way of eminence, p. 225. 1. 3. Chrys. iii. p. 16. 1. 39. avroKeAevoTcos, ed. Basil, prim. — J. S. Chrys. v. p. 995. 1. 6. avToKiQivos, Chrys. 3 The following also will contribute to i. p. 30. I. 42. avro\6yos, Orig. c. Cels. show into what a variety of compounds p. 79. 1. 32. avrofi,aKapi6Tns, Clirys. iv. avrbs enters. The passages and interpre- p. 325. 1. 31. avronavia, Chiys. i. p. 61. tations I have given in the new edition of 1. 19. avTop-arl, Chrys. v. p. 846. I. 31. H. Stephens' Thesaurus. avrayperos, aui-o^Tcop, Simonides. avroveKpbs, Chrys. Simonides. avroaXrideia, Chrysost. t. ii. vii. p. 93. I. 22. avToir^y^, Chrys. ii. p. p. 587. 1. 15. Sir H. Saville's edition 608. 1. 14. avrSnoios, Soph. (Ed. C. Orig. c. Cels. p. 135. 1. 55. Cantab. 1058. 698. avTOiriicpia, Chrys. iii. p. 840. 1. 32. avTo$aai\evs, Clirys. iii. p. 30. 1. 36. avropi^a, Chrys. ii. p. 608. 1. 14. avro- avToaMpas, Chrys. t. v. p. 564. 1. 26. s, when a repetition of Ss in a case different from its preceding one would be required by regular construction: ov bi) eiriTpexpojjiev wv (jxxfxev ta'ibeadai, icai belv avrovs avbpas ayadovs yeveaOai, yvvaiica /jnfieladai, Plato de Rep. iii. p. 395. 1. 34. v. S. John xv, 5. Revel, ii, 18. xvii, 2. 1 Cor. viii, 6. Avtos occurs in various forms of tautology : see Mattli. viii, 23. Luke xix, 26. Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 51. cf. Matth. iv, l6. viii, 5. ix, 27. v, 40. John xv, 2. xviii, 11. Revel, vii, 9. Act. Ap. vii, 21. v. Jens, ad Lucian. t. i. p. 296. So Cic. pro 1. Manil. c. xiv. [§ 40.] OI is in like manner superfluous in Paus. Phoc. p. 660. and atyiai in Paus. Cor. p. 90. Avrds is defective, when its antecedent noun is referred to two verbs requiring different cases. See Isocr. Paneg. p. 98/ XI. After tovto, this, the conjunction on, that, is very frequently placed; as, olbe tovto kclXws etcelvos, on, &c. he very well k?iows this, that, &c. Demosth. Phil. i. ovk ayvow tov6\ on, Demosth. Ol. 1. Sometimes on precedes tovto, as in Aristoph. Av. 1176. and sometimes on is the last word of the sentence : ov iravaofiai, tovt "nrb v Sri, lb. 1408. Sometimes, tovto being last in collocation, the article to, with some particle, precedes on, or ws: as, to be, uts KXeofavTos — o-ofos eyevero, — tovto r\bri iJKovcras : iEschin. Dial, de Virt. v. Nepos in Alcib. c. 6. Virg. Eel* iii, 35. Cic. CatiL ii, c. 8. XII. (XIV.) Ovtos is sometimes added, when the construction would be complete without it, for the sake of explication (especially after digression); as, 'AptaTobrj/jif Tetceiv r?)v yvvaiKa, rrj ovofxa elvai 'Apyeirjv, * Tavrrjv be reiceiv bibvfia : Herodot. Er. c. 52. v. Ter. Heaut. [i, 1, 82.] Cic. pro Mil. c. 26. [Cn. Pompeium, — hunc, &c. § 70.] — or for the sake of emphasis, as in Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 268. 1. 15. Reisk.] (j>a/j.evoi tov varraTOv alet airoyey6/j,evov rwv fiacriXewv, tovtov b>] yeveadai apiOTOv '. Herodot. Er. c. 58. v. Lucian, Macrob. p. 828. For the sake of emphasis it is repeated in St. James i, 25. Instead of an addition of ovtos, there is some- times a repetition of a noun ; as of a proper name in Paus. Lac. p. 162. 1. 27. and of two proper names in MX. V. H. viii. c. 9. The case of ovtos, when thus added, is not always the same as that of the antecedent word to which it refers; as, ras be aXXas, — ravrais — •nponBeaai ayuiva : Paus. ill Lac. p. 185. 1. 10. Ovtos is defective after several propositions followed by be ; as, Kal aXXa noXXa teal 7ravro7a eyevero ryai fxayrfoi, ev be bf] Kal, Sic. understood. rovreoiai, Herodot. Terps. c. 95. ava iraaav fiev dXXrjv 'EXXaba, ev be (ravrrj) kol wept 'lojvirjv, Herodot. Er. c. 86. The pronoun is expressed after ev be in Lucian : ev be bri rovrois (piXoao- ovs Tivas, de Parasit. See also Lucian, t. i. p. 438. 1. 63. ed. Amst. raostli. pro Cor. p. 307. 1. 25. avro(p6v- Chr. itceivos avr6s ; PI. avrSraros. An- rr)S, Soph. El. 272. avroxohri, Chrys. iii. stoph. Plut. 83. aMrara, Cic. Att. 1. 6. p. 840. 1. 32.— J. S. ep. 9.— J. S. * Add, that aMs has a superlative : 64 THE PRONOUN. [Chap. iv. A pronoun is understood after ku\ npos in Eutrop. Metaphr. v. c. 6. after avv be in Theogn. 724. and after avv re in Orph. Hymn. [Ivv is used adverbially with be or re : see Nic. Ther. 628. 650. 843. 853. 86.9- 881.] So xwpis be, for \u)pis be rovruiv. XIII. (XV.) Pronouns, and more especially ovros, are now and then found hi irregular positions, in which they occasion some degree of obscurity; as, einyeipi]reov bfjQv e^eXeadai r>)v biafioXi)v, fjv v/j.els ev ttoXXu) \povo) ^X ere ' Tuvryv ev ovrwal oX'iyo) xP"' 'V • P'^to Apol. S. for eTrifc vfi. ev ovr. 6\. yj>- Tavr-qv e%. r. b. i)v b[A. ev -k. yp' e^ere/ In Act. Ap. i, 22. rovrojv is removed to the distance of two verses from rwv avveXQovrwv avbpwv in v. 21. to which it refers. See Nepos in Pelop. c. 2. XIV. (XVI.) Kcd ravra /xev bri ravra is equivalent to, so much for this, at the conclusion of a subject, or head of discourse ; but ml ravra alone is used for aggravation or exaggeration ; and that too; and that:" 1 av be poi botcels ov irpooeyeiv rov vovv rovrois, Kal ravTa aoy : but you seem to me to pay no attention to these things ; and that too although you are wise: Plato Gorg. p. 508. See Demosth. contr. Phorm. [p. 922. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] Id. Epist. iii. [p. 1485. 1. 18. R.] Id. pro Phorm. [p. 958. 1. 14. R.] v. Hoogev. Praef. ad Doctr. Partic. p. 9." Kal ravra is found, although rarely, at the end of a sentence : YIepiicXeovs be ovk efeiaw, redvTjKoros kuI ravra '. but you did not spare Pericles, and that too after his death: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 504. In this kind of phrase ovros is not always put in the neuter plural : it has sometimes the gender, number, and case of a preceding noun to which it is to be referred : yvvaaeds, Kal ravrrjs vecpas, Heliodor. iEth. c. 1. elvai kXevQepotai J) bovXoiai, Kal rovroiai us bpanerrjai: Herodot. Er. c. 11. fiaaiXea rbv a^tyfievov emarafxevos, Kal rovrov abeXa\ov iralba rov kfxov : Heliodor. iEth. x. c. 23. See also Herodot. CI. c. 147. Tovro with verbs of naming is of the same import as so: rovro yap eicaXelro, for so he was called: Lucian, Ver. H. i.° So Lucian in Conv. [p. 856. D. ed. Salmur.] 'ApKrroreXrjs ras vvv 'UpaKXeiovs arijXas KaXov/uevas, npivrj KXrjdijv ai rovro, (prjal Rpiapeu KaXeladat. avras : Ml. V. H. V. c. 3. When ovros is employed to represent the subject of a proposition, it is put in the neuter, although the predicate be a substantive of a different gender; as, rovr eariv ari/xla, Epict. c. 31. This practice is different from that of elegant Latin authors with regard to their 1 P. 7. 1. 42. ed. Basil, prim. Almost bor? Thomson, Spring, 367.— J. S. every one must be sensible, I think, of B See Aristoph. Ecc!. 401. Xen. Anab. the superior energy of the arrangement i, 4, 12. Mem. ii, 3, 1. Demosth. de chosen by Plato.— J. S. Reb. Cherrh. p. 103. 1. 16. R. In Phil. m Ye defraud; AXDTHATyourbrethren: iii. p. 114. 1. 3. p. 117. 1. 29. de Rhod. 1 Cor. vi, 8. The consideration of— so libert. p. 197. 1. 12. Tribuno plebis small a standing force on our own side, (jucestor non paruisli, cui tuus pejesek- and that too in a country destitute of tim collega pareret : Cic. ad Div. xv, 21. forts a7id strong places, &c. Addison on —J. S. the War. And the plain ox, shall he ° XaXeiraivovres t<£ ~2Kiv9apcp, {rovro bleed, — and that, perhaps, To swell the yap inaAuro) : p. 738. E. ed. Salmur. riot of tk' autumnal feast Won by his la- —J. S. Rule 13, 14.] VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. 65 pronouns in such cases ; yet there are exceptions : see Virg. Mn. iii, 173. Ovid, Her. Ep. ii, 56. iii, 8. Curt. ix. c. 10. § 24. Tovro sometimes involves the meaning of several preceding words; as in Plato de Rep. iv, 421/ Ovtos for 6 belra ; an indefinite person : Kal av, cat ovros, redp)j- leaBe, Antonin. els ecivr. iv. c. 6. Tovrois answering to oh, and rw to rovru : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 266.1 12. R. and p. 26"S. 1. 15.]* CHAPTER V. SECTION I. — On the verb, with respect to kind OR FORM. Rule I. Verbs, having an active form, have sometimes a passive [or reciprocal] signification ; as, a\iaicu>, {to take, to capture, to convict, to condemn,) chiefly in its preterperf. eaXwfea, and 2 aor. i}\u>v, or eaXwv, Att. v. Arrian i, 1/ v. Hindenb. ad Xen. Mem. ii, 5, 5. Abresch. ad iEschyl. I. i. p. S6. Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 1041. Or. 296. et Soph. CSd. C. 74. II. 'AvaKafjnrreiv, to be reflected: tci be els ciXXr]Xa avaKufXTrrei, Aristot. Metaph. i. III. 'AvriXapfiaveiv, to be restored to health, strength, &c. Theophr. v.* IV. 'A»ra7ro£/5wjUt for cipranobibofiai.' V. 'ATraWarreiv, to be freed, to be discharged: tccifxpei re noXkaius, xal aTraWc'iTTei pyov, and come off more easily : Aristot. Probl. § 5. v. Bud. p. 318. Faesii OScon. Hipp, in IncaXXaTreiv. A^w and avt,ai>u> are sometimes intransitive: ifv^riaev \\ nXdrrj, P 'Apybs 5e Kal a/j-eAris yevfiaerai fJ.a\- iEsch. in Tim. p. 107. 1. 9. ed\ca virb Kov avrbsavrov; (irAovrrioas x vT pebs, sc.) KrjarZv, /Esch. de Fals. Leg. p. 197. 1. 1. IIo\u ye. Ovkuvv Kaniwv x VT P^ s 7'T^- I" a passive form as well as sense : Ari- rai ; Kal rovro, e 'yaOol, ravr ecrrl 7rw * 'AvaAa/ifidveiv, to be renewed : Plut. ravry: matters are not yet in that state, Mor. t. ii. p. 961. 1. 9. Wyttenb. in 8vo. are not arrived at that : Aristoph. Eq. irpoaaveiA-ncpvlas ^S?j rrjs Swd/xeus, the 843. els rovro, to such a pitch or degree ; army hating now recovered from its fa- with a gen. els rovr' eh^AuQe rod vo- tigues and sufferings: Polyb. iii, GO. — juijew/ v.iitw Kal Xeyeiv Kal ypd Secnrod^ Sapddveiv fxlv ei'/j, to 5 1 aveyelpeoQai fiij av- Aristoph. Pac. 275. So Vesp. 142. 851. TcnroStSo i-n, yiyvSy.evov Ik rov KaOevSov- The full phrase is ravra BpSi : crirevo'e ros, &c. were not opposed to it as correla- rax*us, Isic. ravra dpu. Aristoph. Eq. the : Plato Phaed. p. 28. I. 29. ed. Bas. 495. — J. S. prim. Add, el yap /at] ael avrmroSiSoiri r XlapayeynpaK&s, f) irapavolas eaAaiKc&s : Ta erepa rols erepots yiyv.6jj.eva, wcrirepel convicted 0/ imbecility; /Esch. c. Ctt'S. kvkAoi nepuovra, aAAa eiideld ris ei'77 tj p. C42. 1. 10. R. ahoivai ^evdo/w.prvpiuiv, yevecns, &c. Id. ib. p. 72. 1. 10. — J. S. Viger. 66 VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. [Chap. v. § i. Clem. Alex. Adm. ad Gent. p. 30. rjvlrjrrev u Xads, Act. Ap. vii, 17. 6 \oyos tov 6eov tf-v^ave, Act. Ap. vi, 7. v. Luke ii, 40. BnXXw also and some of its compounds are used intransitively or as reflexive: fiaXX' es KopaKas, go to the devil. u EiffjGuUu, to run in, to burst in, to make an irruption, to in- vade: bin be rTjS QeawptOTibos 'A^ep^. 7rora/jos peoov eafiaXXet es avryi', Tbuc. i, 46. els tj)i — Aai:e.bai/joriu)v y^wpav elaefiaXov, Di- narch. c. Demoslh. p. 101. So e,u/3a\Xw, Air. Exp. Alex, i, 1.* So enbiSomi, to discharge itself, to disembogue, v. 11. ■KOTafius TXaii- kos eKbibwaiv es daXuaaav, Pans, in Acli. p. 431. s " 'ETTibiborai, to make a progress, to advance: Plato. Cratyl. p. 410. in fin. Isocrat. Paneg. in fin. [p. 191. 1. 8. ed. Battie, Cantab. 172.9.] Demosth. Phil. ii. p. 49- 1. 45. Plato Hipp. M. p. 283. 1. 43. Hero- dian iii, 13. Isocr. ad Demonic, p. 8. Nicocl. p. 64. emblborat, to be recruited by food : Hippocr. Aph. ii, 31. 32. speaking of the body. eiribibioKev ev rrj nuXet to dfxoXoyelr irorr)povs elrai : it has become very common: Aristot. Rliet. i, 15. p. 76. 01 e7n§e§a//cores avro'is, overweening, arrogant persons, swollen with pride: Schol. Aristopii. Nub. 36 1 . [p. 95. I. 20. Bekker's ed. (for Priestley 1826.)] So the simple verb : 6 5' fjbovjj bovs, but he, having resigned him- self to pleasure ; having indulged his desires : Eurip. Phcen. p. 112. [v. 21.] VI. The 2 aor. and preterperf. of 'la-r^m, and especially of its compounds, have a passive sense ; as, Kara is very frequently used as a verb neuter ; and KafnrTu, Rom. xiv, 11.^ and kXIvu), Luke ix, 12. eKtcXivw, 1 Petr. iii, U. 2 Aeinu) has sometimes a passive sense, especially in a grammatical use: Xeinei >> els, the preposition els is understood: Schol. Aristoph. ad Nub. 1083. [1070. p. 121. of Bek- ker's ed. printed for Priestley, 1826.] ra errojueva Xeivet, what fol- lowed is lost. Aeiirei alone in the margin of a book signifies that there is a chasm or vacuity from part having been lost or destroyed. ™ 'Es nSpttKas alone, pest ! the deuce! voring him, being softened in his favor ; Aristoph. Vesp. 852. equivalent to to 8el- Plut. Ag. et Cleom. p. 1473. H. St. va, says Brunck. (see note on chap. 1. rrjs &pas irapafjih' ovens, on the arrival § xviii.) v. Aristoph. Acli. 864. — BctAAco of spring : Polyb. E. L. 35. — J. S. with a middle signification : (paia /3uhe?v x It occurs as a verb neuter in Ari- ijxdria, to put on mourning : Polyb. E. L. stoph. also : orav pkv 7) Aipvn Karao-Tr}, 93. — J. S. Xa/Apdvovo-ip ovSev : when the lake is still v Add, pdxo/.iai p,6vos a.vTi/3el3A7]Kcbs, or undisturbed, they catch nothing; Eq. J ivill fight opposing myself single-handed : 865. — J. S. Aristoph. Eq. 767. irapaPdAA eiv els v V. Soph. CE<1. C. 86. avoxapirTeiv , ir6\iv,to goto: Polyb. xii, 3. irape^a- to walk backwards and forwards : Diog. Ae KpdvTopi, he became Cravtor's disciple: Laert. in Aristot. p. 165. 3. 19. in Zenon. Diog. Laert. in Arcesil. irapaPaAelv p. 239. 1. 31. ed. H. St. form, minim. — XlAdrcavi, Id. in Aristot. 7rape'/3c.Ae 2a>- J. S. Kpd.Tti, Id. in Antisth. 7rpo{idAAe iv, to 2 Add airoKAiveiv , Soph. (Ed. R. 1192. be before in a march, Polyb. iii, 51. — J. S. — J. S. ■" Add , dlov tvdib'ovs to> "AytBi, fa- Rule 6 — 12.] VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. 67 'ATroXeiTrto is a verb neut. in Isocr. ad Dem. p. 11. and eXXe/n-w in Epict. Ench. c. 12. and with a gen. e\Xe<7rw eman'j/jijs, J want, or am deficient in, knowledge : Plato Theag." VII. Me-aflciXXetv, to be changed: peteflaXev (vbwp) els aepos Ibeav, Plato Tim. p. 60. v. Jos. Ant. Jud. i. c. 11. § 4. jueva- j3aXXeu> irpos, Pliilo de Leg. ad Caium. But fxerafiaXXeadat is commonly the same as avTo/jo\e~tv : v. Plut. in Alex. VIII. TlapaKiveiv, to move indecorously : Aristoph. Ran.* to be mad : iroXXoi [lev vtto TrapuKetc ivrjKor b)V buKpdelpot'Tai, for TrapaiceKLvrjfxe- vwv, Xen. Mem. iv.* Ylapoiveiv, to be mad-drunk. JlKrjQbvw occurs in a passive sense: iroTn/iol irXriQ vvovres, swollen, full: Plut.<* And afievvvjii in the preterp. eii>KiKov avmavrus iroXenov' ov bt e/ie" oh yap hi) e'-ywye eiroXi-evSfxrjv ttw tote' npwrov jxev, &c. Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 230. 1. 27. Reisk.] X. iTeiyeiv, to be arrayed in martial order. [!rel%eiv in this use is not passive, but intransitive, as it always is : to march in array : II, X, 331.] XI. IvvaTTTb) is reflexive, when it signifies, to adhere firmly : Theophr. or, to encounter, to engage, to conflict ; as, awairreiv rols voXe/Aiois" a. els ras %elpus, Polyb. a. els f-iayyv or els irvXep-ov. And so Trpoajjlfai, to approach or advance close to ; to arrive at. XII. TeXeti', to be classed or ranked with or under, to belong to, to be reckoned or enrolled among : at es to 'Aj^akop reXoverat iro- Xeis, Paus. in Eliac. i. reXelv els avbpas.z Tpe^w also, and its compounds, are used as intransitive; as, Treptrpeiru), Hesiod, Theog. 58, See Curtius iv. c. 6. 29. vii. c. 1. Virg. Mn. i, 108. Suet. a Add SiaXe'nreiv, io be placed or stand efferre : Casaub. to go beyond or pass at intervals : '6xvos airea^^Kei, the lamp had 6 In Brunck's edition v. 644. aitSiret been extinguished: Plato Symp. p. 193. vvv, ¥iv /j.' viromvriaavT IS-ns : writhing, I. 17. ed. Bas. prim. — J. S. flinching: said by Xanthias about to be f'Orav 6 pikv reivn jSiaiws, 'O 5' iirava- ftogged by iEacus. — J. S. arpifpeiv SivnTai, KairepeiSeaBat ropps : c Not simply by men furore percitis, as Aristoph. Ban. 1102. wrongly, I think, Viger translates it, but by men mad after translated, refutare. Add, avriarpefeiv, something ; in the third sense of the to be reciprocally predicable : irdvTa Se word in Johnson : iroAAol fx\v yap Sia, rb ra irpbs t\, irpbs hvr tar picpovra. Keys- naAAos virb twu eirl rots wpaiois irapa- rai : Aristot. Categ. c. 7. — J. S. kzkivi)k6t<>>v SiatyQeipovrai, {are debauched, s The compound SiareAeTj/ is frequently not occiduntur): c. 2. §35. Add, airotu- used as a neuter : see Xen. Anab. iv, 5, vuv, ^Eneas Poliorc. c. 10. pedem porta 9. i, 5, 27. — J. S. 6s VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. [Chap. v. § i. Claud, c. 22. Gt-ll. ii. c. 28. iv. c. 6. Virg. G. i, [l63.] JFm. x, 362. G. iii, 365. The following may be added to the foregoing verbs : &yetv, to go : Xen. Anab. iv. p. 220. John xi, 7. Trpoouyeir, (0 approach: Act. Ap. xxvii, 27. trvvayeiv, to be impending or brewing : /El. V. H. iii, 9/' enaxveti', to be recruited or restored: Act. Ap. ix, 10.' afi- eifteiv, passively, Hippocr. kot tijrpetov p. 67I, 14. avatyepeiv, to be restored: Hippocr. irepl yvv. p. 26'8. 22. cf. Aphor. ii, 43. buiva- Traveiv, to rest: Hippocr. Aph. ii, 48. vi, 18. Some active infi- nitives are put in a passive sense after certain adjectives; as, p(ju>i> tyvkaoaeiv, Eurip. Med. 320. bviaros Karat'oriaai '. i]hvs ibelv : noXets x'oXcTrai Xafielv : ufros ukovocli : v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 386. and 534. Locella ad Xen. Ephes. p. 239- Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 100. Many intransitive verbs are used as transitive : rj%ev \epa, Soph. Aj. 40. vrerpa Xafiirovaa creXas, Eui'ip. Ion, 235. '1/uepa peiTU) yaXa, Theocr. v, 124. v. Reisk. in Misc. nov. Lips, vi, p. 520. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 495. Abresch. ad Tlioni. M. in e\7ri$u). Bruuek. ad Eurip. Or. 1427. Nicepli. Greg, post Hermanni librum de emen- dand. rat. Gr. gr. p. 350. § 188. Neuter verbs as passive; as, redvriKev v, I viewed, or was viewed. So e7r£jue\r/0>7icu for eiriiieXyjaaadai, Xen. Mem. i, 13, 11. i, 4, 13. ii, 10, 2. The same observation applies to the preterperfect also of those verbs ; as, TtenoitivTai ti)v eiKova, for Trenoiriwai, Paus. in Eliac. p. 310. evTedeifievos ra Xpi]/AaTa els rijp vavv, having put the goods on board the vessel: De- mosth. adv. Phorm. p. 58Q. [p. 917- I. 8. Reisk.] v. Cic. pro Mil. c. 13. [§ 33.] and P. Manut. ad 1. It is particularly remarkable that verbs, which in their active voice have a neutral or passive significa- tion, have often in their middle of passive voice an active significa- tion ; as, from rayeveiv, which is neuter, (iEseh. S. ad Th. 58.) Tayeveodai, to send a person to a post or station. XIV. By a very elegant idiom, a noun, which, if the sense only were regarded, should be the subject of a verb subsequent in the h "tirf^dyeiv, to escape, to go forth: * 2we7nv anvrui oet biareXels : for OavfiaSco, on av — btareXe'is, I admire your being always consistent : ri\v re yrjv, oiroar) early, elbePai, literally, to know the land, how much it is: Xen. Mem. iv. [7, 2. knoivs the mea- sure of the land,] 6 MiXwv top KiKepwva beiaas, fiij — -%elpov btayw- viarjrat: for beiaas fiy) 6 KiKepov^. b. Milo fearing lest Cicero might plead the ivorse : Plut. in Cic. p. 8/8. 1. 30. tovs Kptras, a Kepbavov- aiv, — /3ouAo/jeafJ vfnv (j>pa T °1 S beret irrepa : for ere^eepvovro : Aristot. v. Pind. 01. xi, 4. sq. Manetho iv, 354. Eurip. Bacch. 1348. v. Hermann, Comment, de nietris Pind. ad Olymp. viii. This is the ordinary construction when the noun is in the neuter, although there are ex- ceptions : see Horn. II. /3, 135. Revel, i, 19. 2 Petr. iii, 10. l But the Attic writers never join plural verbs with neuter substantives in the plural, except when animate beings are spoken of: see Pors. in addend, ad Eurip. Hec. 1149. A verb is often put in the singular before several plural nomina- tives, if the nominative immediately succeeding it be singular; as, avrepel QiXnnros, Kal 'Avrtyerr/s, Kal 6 avnypatyevs, Kal rives aXXot : Demosth. adv. Androt. p. 704. (v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 487.) and i P. 239. I. 12. Reisk. where e'-ycb Fals. Leg. p. 353. 1. 24. vdari avrao-(a means Philip, of whom Demosthenes is rpa\eia p-eXera hri\4yeiv '6n tpavraaia el, speaking, not Demosthenes himself. — Epict. Ench. c. 5. where Wolfius very J. S. unnecessarily proposes to read earl for h Add, ol 8' elirov, Zn ttcavol ea/iev els el. See also Epict. Ench. c. 11. — J. S. t)]v x®P av sfi&dWeiv, &c. Xen. Anab. ' In the passage in Ceb. Tab. [p. 37. v, 4, 4. Tavra irdvTa note? 8t}Xoi>6tl ovSev 1.12. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] irdvTa (icaita) &\\o ii'SeiKvi/ievos r) Stl eyon ovdev ireTrov- aico\ov9ovo~iv , these evils are represented 6a: Demosth. in Mid. p. 579. I. 5. Reisk. as living forms. See I. 9. So in the passage where eyk means Midias, not the speaker, of St. John's Gosp. x, 27. animals are Demosthenes. See also Demosth. de spoken of. — J. S. 70 THE INDIC., IMPER., Ac. [Chap. v. § ii. after several plural nominatives, if (hat immediately preceding it be either singular, or neuter plural ; as, ftpovTiu xal aaTpairai icai pv^unKpa KareXanfiave, Charil. p. 46. I. 19- bak-pva kcu bei'iaets kcu dpFjvos eyevero, Diod. S. xx, 72. v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 271. There is often an irregular transition from one number to another; as, TepTrvas rvpavrois ybotas, brav 6c\t], viz. 6 rvpctrvvs, or Tvpuivos tis, Eurip. Suppl. 453. v. Heindorf. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 195. Protag. p. 499. and Herodot. Melp. c. 22. — and, with reference to eicaaros understood, in Galat. vi, I. which is expressed in a like change of numbers in yEl. V. H. i. c. 31. or there is a confusion of numbers; as, "li\iou /uapTvpofieada bpuia & hpq.v u\> fiovXofiat: Eurip. H. F. 858. where, if grammatical rules, rather than the object of the thoughts, had been attended to, the expression would have been either /uctpTvpo/jLui bpiLaa, or /unprvpu/ueda bpu>t>res. See Pors. Suppl. praef. ad Hec. p. 38. v. Ter. Eun. ii, I. [19.] Ov. Trist. i, 3, 10. The Attics often put the plural for the singular: see Valck. ad Phoen. p. 363. Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 493. 524. and the tra- gedians especially do so for the suke of emphasis : Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 543. ad Soph. CEd. R. 366. Antig. 565. A verb is sometimes joined with several substantives, with one only of which it can be properly construed : Hesiod, Theog. 640. v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 395. sqq. SECTION II.— On the idioms of the indicative, impera- tive, OPTATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. Rule I. — The indicative mood is sometimes put for the optative or subjunctive ;* as, ovbkv" 1 TrtoiroTe avrrj ovre elira, ovre £iroir) go in quickly: Soph. El. 14-9S. The Attics join the optative with av in the sense of a future; as, fievoip av, I will remain : Soph. Aj. 88." V. (IX.) The subjunctive properly expresses possibility, without any indication of thought or expectation about that possibility : ovk e^w ottoi t pctTThifiai, is, / have no resource to which I can betake myself ; but ovk e^w orroi TpaTro(fir)i> av, is, I have nothing to ivhich I can hope or expect to have recourse. Tpairoi^v without av can be joined with a past tense only ; ovk ei%pv owoi rpairoifj.r]v. n T?7 8' Iffrhv (TT-fiaaiTo yvvy, irpofiaKoi- is in the second aorist, if it have a distinct t(Jt6 %pyov : Hesiod, 'Hfiep. 15. deoir av. second aorist ; otherwise it may be in the Run! Away! Aristoph. Eq. 1161.— J. S. present tense, but is more frequently in With respect to the older poets, the first aorist. Every schoolboy knows whenever a wish or a prayer is expressed that ^ yiyvono, or jut? riyxavoi, would either by the simple optative mood, or not be Greek. Edinb. Rev. Feb. 1812. — with firj, el, ude, el yap, effle yap, the verb J.S. 72 THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. § iii. In ri Xeyu ; tI ^; and the like, subjunctives are not put for in- dicatives; but, except when there is a signification, peculiar to the subjunctive, that something ought to be done, I hnoio not, I am in doubt, tell me, or somewhat equivalent is to be understood : v. Her- mann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 1Q2. On fiuvXei ei-rrco see Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 26'7. The subjunctive mood often expresses doubt or irresolution ; as, emwjiev ?/ oiytifiev ; ?*/ ri bpuao/iev ; Eurip. Ion, 758. a/\\« b>'iT eXdto ; Eurip. Or. 778. v. Valck. ad Phoeu. p. 277- ad Hippol. p. 247. Diatr. p. 211. ad Herodot. p. 332. In the first person plural only it is employed in exhortation ; as SECTION III. — On the infinitive mood, AND CERTAIN TENSES. Rule I. All the different cases are joined, according to circum- stances, with the infinitive mood. When the construction is not in- fluenced by any word preceding in a different case, the accusative is generally employed ;P and sometimes an accusative is to be understood with it, even when a different case of the same word has preceded ; as, heofxai iifxcop — to. hUaia ^ir)(f)iaacrdai, evdv fxov pevovs on, &c. Lys. adv. Theorem, p. 364. ed. Reisk. (v. Markl. ad h. 1. and p. 620.) When the word joined with the infinitive is to be under- stood of the subject of the verb upon which the construction de- pends, it is put in the nominative. The following example exhibits both an accusative of a word not signifying the subject of the prin- cipal verb, and a nominative of a word which does signify it: to fxev /uvpuiKis fivplovs KEKvpvxQai. TrnpaXe'nrio, kcil to ttoXXolkis avros ioTetyavibadai 7rp6repoi> : Demosth. pro Cor. ? If ever an accusa- tive is used, when the subject of the leading verb is indicated, it is always wiih the accompaniment of a reciprocal pronoun : evofiiSov iiovroiis irpwTovs yeveadcu itavTwv avBpwTuov, Herodot. ii, 2. He might have said ki'6/jnS.ov ttp&toi yeveadm, but not eyofii^ov Tzpurovs yeveadai without ewvrovs. On the other hand, a nominative is some- times found where an accusative might be expected ; but then it is referred to a subject existing in the thought, and not in the expres- sion : etrrat typevos col tovto KrjXrjrijpioi' Tijs 'HpaicXeias, wore fi)']Tiv elaihiov 2rep£«t yvvaiKa KeHvos cwt\ gov nXeov : Soph. Tr. 574. i. e. KrjXridijaeTui 6 'HpaKXijs, &c. v. Clark, ad Horn. II. i, 170. Dorv. ad Char. p. 230. ed. Lips. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 303. The Latin poets have imitated this Grecism : v. Horat. Od. iii, 27. [73.] Ep. i, 16. P UpofX7]d4ajxe eluai peu)V ditcaios elvcu rvyxd- Triybs ifiov : Lucian, Dial. Mort. p. veiv, Demosth. pro Cor. p. 243. ). 6. ed. 248. E. See Lucian, Contempl. p. 324. Reisk. (p-rijA ojxoios ehcu avroj, Lucian, A. Time, ii, 81. p. 339. 1. 9. ed. Bekker. Prom, es &c. p. 14. A. ireio-w ehai 5e)v a KuXXirr-os alcxpos clAXw yevei (jv^fiaXelv : the most beautiful of apes is ugly compared with another species of animals : Plato Hipp. M. p. 289- Aety with /uiKpov, or oXiyov, is put absolutely or parenthetically, for almost, nearly ; as, vXlyov be'iv kjxavrbv eire\u66/ur)v, I almost forgot myself: Plato Socr. Ap. [p.. 7- 1. 2. ed. Bas. prim. e/uavTov.] nareftaXov yovv, fiiKpov belv: Lucian. v. Isocr. Evag. p. 474. Dem. pro Cor. 231, 30. rioXXov be'iv is the contrary ; as, u, noXXov be'iv, e'iirot tis av : which any one would be far enough from saying. r The following is an example of a and with an ellipsis of net, Demosth. adv. genitive with the infinitive: tio-Qo^v ab- Lept. p. 494. I. 1.— J. S. tuv 5ia rfyv tcoi-qcriv olo/j.ivoov nal ra\\a * An infinitive signifying purpose or v eivat avdpcinrwv, a ovk end; equivalent to the subjunctive with W: Plato Apol. S. p. 9. 1. 13. ed. 'iva: iyw Se Kv\ixvt6v re croi koX Basil, prim. — J. S. SiSoi/xi, Tew roitjtv avTiKVTjfjLtots eAKvSpta _* Evxojxai — 7}(ui> — yeveadai — irtaro'ts neptaAe i Xeyeiv. v. Thuc. ii, 77. Pint, in Demosth. p. 849. Isocr. Evag. p. 476- and 456. and for fwcpov tbetjoev, /wcpov aweXnre is some- times elegantly substituted ; as in Plut. Cees. p. 719. VI. (VII.) It is sometimes, like the English infinitive, equivalent to the Latin gerund in dum : as, ebwicev avrrj irpo'iKa t^tir ru enn tci Kvirpia, M\. V. H. ix, 10". v. Theogn. 1164. Lys. j»ro Polystr. p. 666. [1. 2.] Reisk. and Virg. Mn. v, 248. 26'2. 307- 538. ix, 362. v. Abresch. ad Cattier. p. 34. Casaub. ad Ath. i, 7. p. 24. VII. (VIII.) In indirect or oblique speech, as it is termed, (as when one states the substance of what another has said, and does not repeat his very words,) the infinitive is put after ws instead of the indicative; as, ws Ibe'iv tov ' Aya6Wn, M when Agatho saw him: Plato Symp. c. 2. v. Herodot. i. p. 5. 1. 18. ed. Camer. cf. i. p. IS. 1. 35. The following uses of the infinitive after ws are also to be remarked : ws olov eiireiv, as for example : Epiphan. Kara alpea. i. p. 17- tovtw araatv tiv\ ws tyw 'boKovv 6pg.v, rev^eiv ev aXXrjXrjacv : these, as I thought I perceived, were commencing a dissension among themselves : iEschyl. Pers. 187. Here, instead of the proper word erev\oi', an infinitive is employed, depending on us ebuicovv opav. v. Erf. ad Soph. Ant. 732. Latin authors have imitated this construction : see Cic. de Off. i, 7. 22. de Or, iii, i, 3. There is sometimes an ellipsis of an infinitive. 1 ' VIII. (IX.) The infinitive is used to express what is decreed or ordered ; as, to \prjfiufia tovto ypafyk) irXelv enl tovs tottovs, ev oh av ?) 0/\(7T7ros : Demosth. pro Cor. i. e. a psephism ordering to sail, &c. and it is sometimes substituted for the imperative mood :* as, e'itceTe, jun§e Oeo'is fxev eatvejxev Ifi fxcc^eadai : II. e, 606. eav tis cnro- KTe'ivn Tvpavvov, Tij-ias Xap.fta.veiv, Mceris in v. Xa/ufiaveiv, from Aristoph. Av. It is used also to express a wish ; as, w 'Lev, etcyerea- 6at pot 'Adnvalovs TiaaaQai ! O Jupiter, that 1 may be able to avenge myself on the Athenians ! Herodot. v, 105. — or admiration, indigna- tion, or other emotions ; as, ah ravTa bpaoai ! that you should have done these things ! when the article is often added: Aristoph. Nub. 816. or the article and be : Aristoph. Nub. 269. Av. 5. 7 '. Ran. 741. IX. (X.) Different tenses are often promiscuously used by the best Greek writers : this is so remarkably the case with regard to the w Apollodorus's friend is relating what eddppei is used as a transitive: neither Aristodemus had told him ; that he, Philip placed any confidence in them, nor Aristodemus, had gone uninvited to Aga- they in Philip. There is an ellipsis of an tho's; evQbs 8' ovv, ws Ideiv tov 'Aya- infinitive in such phrases as ws ffoyyov elaanovaeTai Qvrjr&v Trap' "Aiby, ao\ rdh\ 'llpaKXeis, Xeyo) : if any one can hear, &c. Eurip. Here. F. 490. It has been supposed to be put for the present* in many passages in which it will be found to retain its own proper signification: in the Medea of Eurip. when the chorus has informed Jason of his children's death, he answers, (v. 1310.) oifxoi ri XeHets; what will you proceed to tell me after this com- mencement? v. Hec. 515. 710. 1114. ed. Pors. This signification is very manifest in the following passage : Neopt. Trap' ovnep eXafiov ra.be ra rug, uvdis TtdXiv — . Ulyss. w Zev, ri Xe'£,eis; ovn ttov bovvai voeis; Soph. Phil. 1233. The preterperfect of some verbs has a present sense ; as, ■aefo^-qjj.ai, I am afraid, Thuc. i, 144. beboaca, Theogn. 38. tceKXrjficu, Eurip. Hec. 550. and of such verbs the preterpluperfect is used as a pre- terimperfect. V. Thom. M. in ebeboitceiv, p. 264. *" There is a marked distinction be- 1. 1. — J. S. tween the present tense and second aorist * So in Italian: MANDAN: II tu- in Lncian's Gallus : $[m\v yap rbu EvKpd- multo svani. Artas. Fia vero? e come? rrjv — airoOviifficeiv, elra,irpoaKa\taavTa. Metastasis, Artaserse, iii. 10. and in /ue, Kal SiaQrixas Qefievov, — iMKpbv hriffxdv- French : Lis. Ah miserable pere, que ra, airodave'iv : p. 245. B. ed. Salmur. feras tu, quand tusauras cette nouvelle ? The Malic aorist was used, says Eusta- Sq. Que sera ce? Moliere, L'Am. thius, to express a wish for the speedy Med. i. G. accomplishment of one's desires, p. 37. 76 THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. § Hi. XI. (XIII.) The second aorist in boi>, and the prelerperfect in ko, of verbs of t lie fourth conjugation, arc scarcely in use. Instead of them the first aorist is most frequently employed. XII. (XIV.) The aorists and preterperfects * passive are sometimes used for the same tenses of the active or middle voice : biaXexQv- vai for biaXQaoQai, to have conversed; evXnfitiQrji', I acted with caution ; IpyaaOeis, having wrought ; biavorjdels, having thought or intended, Thuc. i. bwqdiji'ai, to be able ; KarioKTloQrfv, I have shown pity or compassion, Eurip. Iph. A. 686. tyrjQHTfievbtv, having de- creed, Thuc. i. bcbwprifxevris, having given, 2 Petr. i, 3. V. Steph. de dial. Att. p. 65. Markl. post Suppl. Eurip. p. 281. Fisch. praef. ad Well. Gr. p. xii. seq. XIII. (XV.) Of verbs in ew the future in eata is more frequent and elegant than that in i'iau> ; and the e is commonly retained in (he tenses derived from it: e7raivew, -reauj, -ve/ea, -vedqv. Even from evp{)Gu> cotnes evpedrjv, and from kpnaw kppkQr\v ; -f- and the poets even prefer lengthening a syllable by doubling the characteristic letter to exchanging this e for n : thus KaXeaauro, Horn. II. a, 54. ^.u-^eaaa- pevta, 11. a, 304. XIV. (XVII.) Of passive verbs, that have both aorists, the second aorist is oftener used than the first; as, irXijTrofxai, eTrXayrjv oftener than eTr\j]%dr]t>. [eTr\ayr)v with respect to mind, 1 was dismayed ; kirXi]yr]v with respect to body, I was struck.] The first aorist middle in both an active and passive signification is very common ; but the second has much oftener an active than a passive signification ; as, eiX6/j.r)v, I took, or chose; seldom I was taken, or chosen : from aipeopai. A transition is often made from one person to another : from the first to the third in Mark xi, 32. from the second to the third in Ps. cxliii, 9, 10. Eccl. xlviii, 8. from the third to the first in Acts i, 4. xvii, 3. from the third to the second in Luke v, 14. Macchab. i. sub fin. Acts xxiii, 22. See Xen. Cyrop. i, 4. extr. [In all these passages there is a transition eilher from oblique or indirect phrase- ology, or recital, to direct, or vice versa.] v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 89. and 347. p.. 253. 273. ed. Lips. Hermann, ad Eurip. Hec. 1253. and Raphe!. Annotatt. philolog. ex Xen. ad Act. i, 4. [Before proceeding to the idioms of some particular verbs individu- ally, it may be proper here to speak of two classes of verbs. One of these is of verbs which always end in l$w, and signify similitude or imitation ; as, XifieviSetv, to be like a harbour, Polyaan. iv. Hence verbs so terminated, and derived from proper names, signify, to be of the side, or party, or sect of, to favor, to follow: as, McueSoj/t- £eiv, Pint, in Demosth. fyiXnnriZetv, ib. p. 854. 'lovbatSeiv, ib. p. 864. 1. 23. krinooQevLZeiv, ib. p. 872. 1. 49- But 'EXXqviSetv (^sch. c. Ctes. p. 299. 1. 11.) is to speak Greek; and 'EXXrjvlgeodai airo Tivbs, (Thuc. ii, 68.) to learn of him to speak Greek. The other * ovtu TroXXa teal p.eyd\a kcu fx&xW - Bas. 1. — J. S. ysVij Ka.Tu8e8ov\c>}f>i.4v7) ^v t\ TlepoSiv t ifyt6y Plato Theast. p. 79. 1. 10. ed. hpxh. Plato, Menex. p. 367. I. 2. ed. Bas. 1.— J. S. § iv. Rule 1—5.] OF THE VERBS Ayavfv, &c 77 class is of verbs appropriated, or used eitiT^beibis ; as, noie'tv is used peculiarly of the performances of poets ; Xe ye iv, of orators ; avyypcicpeiv, of historians ; laropT] a a 1, of geographers ; bibaa- Keiv, of preceptors; biaXeyeadai, of Socratic philosophers, who were expert in interrogating and answering ; a vpflovXeveiv, of sena- tors, &c] SECTION IV. — Of THE VERBS ayairav, arepyeiv, cntoxPW, aoiraSeaQai, iiyetv koi (pepeiv, cnroXavetv. RULE I. The verb ayairq.v sometimes signifies to prefer ; as, aya- irqv to. bwpa dvri twv Kotvfj nam ro'is "EAX?j«7< av/Mpepih'Twv, to prefer bribes before the common advantage of the Greeks: Demosth. pro Cor. and with wpo : ay cnrTjaai ri]v tjttciv itpo rfjs eXevBeplas, Plut. in Camill. II. It signifies also to rest satisfied; to be content ; to think one's self well off; ovk ayenras o& ear/Xos virepfu'iXoiai ped' fiplv balvvaai ; Horn. Od. paitov aanaieadai, Plut. Cees. c. 23. — 4. to receive willingly, to entertain ; aarroieadai to pvdubes, Lucian, de Conscr. hist. p. 696. — 5. to praise, Lucian, Muse. enc. p. 531. y — 6. to receive as a scholar or disciple, Plato in Thcag. p. 92. 'Attoxp/>, to content or satisfy, with a dative of the person satisfied : el yap riavylav eyeiv i]deXev, airoyjpTiv evlots vpCov av fioi boKe~i\ I think some of you would have rested satisfied : Demosth. Phil. i. p. 19. 1. 45. IV. "Ayeiv forms circumlocutions with 5m and a genitive; as, ayeiv riva bia riprjs, to honor a person ; a. bia (ppovribos, to take thought about ; a. bi albovs, to reverence. V. With a dative and ev it signifies to esteem, reckon, or regard x th 8e — ayairas — robs apye\6cpovs to show that it does not signify to praise. nepirpcoywv, Aristoph. Vesp. 672. — J. S. — J. ?. y The passage referred to seems rather 78 "Ayeir, 'Aicoveiv, &C. [CHAP. v. § iv. as; thus, tows lXovs kv abeXtyols &yeiv. And so with napa and an accusative ; as, 7Tfip' obbev, irapii ttoXv, Trnpu wXelov, &yeiv. And with a genitive case alone ; as, twv bwbeica. dewy 'HpaxXea iiyovoiv, they reckon Hercules one of the twelve gods : Arr. Exp. Al. ii, \6. VI. Also with an accusative it signifies to account or esteem ; as, rets be twv upyovTuv (a/uaprius) fxeyaXas yye, Xen. -Ages. VII. "Ayeiv kcu Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 50. 1. 12. v. Horn. II. e, 484. Virg. Mn. ii, [374.] "Ayeiv and its compound Imayeiv signify also, to lead to prison ; as in Polyb. v, qy. a!lc l E. L. xiii. Isocr. in Amart. p. 594. Plut. Cses. 14. and, to lead to execution: Xen. H. Gr. ii. p. 321. ed. Bryl. iEl. V. H. i, 30. Lycurg. Or. p. 198. 12. ed. Reisk. Arr. Exp. Al. vii, 8, 7. So ducere : v. Gesn. in Thes. 'Akovw has after it a genitive of a person : aKovetv fxov, Plato Euthyph. p. 3. 1. 39. An accusative of a thing: ravra liKovaas, Plato Apol. S. Both together : atcovaare /uov (Spa^ea, Dinarch. in De- mosth. p. 98. 1. 38. v. Plat. Apol. S. p. 17. 1. 8. It has sometimes a genitive of the thing with 7rep<, Plato Phsed. p. 6l. 1. 36. and even without 7rept: amove bij fiaXa KaXov Xoyov, Plato Gorg. p. 523. init. v. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 41. When dfcovw signifies to he called, it may take a nominative both before and after it : z koQXbs cikovu>, Time. v. Hor. [Ep. i, 1(5, 17-] 'AtroXaufiavio is said of contrary winds : to detain or impede: orav Tvytjuaiv 01 iivefioi itnoXafiovTes avrovs, Plato Pheed. p. 58. [p. 22. 1. 27. ed. Bas. prim.] VIII. 'AwoXavw, both in a good and bad sense, to profit or suffer by, to get, takes after it,— l. a genitive of the thing alone. — 2. a genitive of the person alone. IX. — 3. a genitive both of the thing and of the person. — 4. an accusative of the thing alone ; the accusative expressing good or evil. X. — 5. an accusative of the thing, and a genitive of the person or thing, or of both together. XII. — 6. In any one of these constructions an accusative of what the good or ill regards, governed by fl-pos, is sometimes added ; as, Tfjs iLwKpciTOvs irpos avrbv evvolas Kai pe~iv, biwKeiv, (pevyen', e7zet,ievai. Rule I. EovXo/jiai sometimes signifies, to intend, to aim or en- deavour, to effect: y be (pvats fiovXerai pep tovto woieiv woXXaKts, ov fxivTot huvarai, Aristot. Polit. i, 4. See al-io Polit. ii, 6. and Rhet. ii, 23. also the passage cited from Plato, under ftovXijpa, chap. iii. Sect. iv. R. 4. itetyvKe yap )/ A.vaiov Xefys ej^eip to ^apiey, fj be 'lao- Kparovs fiovXerai: for the diction of Lysias is naturally graceful ; that of Tsocrates affects to be so : Dion. Hal. fiovXeadai, to signify, to mean: to pep Tfjs Trjdvos ovk evvoZ t'i fiovXerai, Plato in Cratyl. Tevpqv. As yevva.v is not only used properly of males, but impro- perly of females ; so rkretv, commonly appropriated to females, is sad by good authors of males also: ^.bovcnv—r^p "Hpau yevrrjaa- oQat top "H0 a mftov, Lucian. *Nav}s eravrw eKaarore yiyveoQai, Plato Eu- thyph. p. 3. [p. 1. 1. 30. ed. Bas. 1.] and, synecdochically, with an accusative of the part present : yeve&Qe Sjj fioi — rrjv biaroiav — ev rw deaTpo), i. e. imagine yourselves present in the theatre: iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 296. [p. 540. 1. 17. ed. Reisk.] — 4. with au accusative and an infinitive after it, for, to come to pass, to happen : Theogn. 639. Aristot. Polit. viii, 3. § 15. Luke xvi, 22. Act. Ap. xxi, 1. xxii, 17. and with wore before the infinitive: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 2, 2. — 5. with an adverb: x w P' s ylyveadai, to be divided: Xen. Cyrop. iv, 1, 18. See viii, 7, 20. John vi, 19. and 25. — 6. with a pre- 6 TlyvecrOcu is said also of a divinity stoph. Lys. 634. — J. S. favoring or sanctioning an enterprise : c See also Demosth. 01. ii. p. 5 aurbsydp ixoiyiyveTairris deols ixBpas 1. 27. ed. Reisk. Xen. Anab. i, 5,15. Tca,Ta£ai T^cSe ypabs ttjv yvdOov. Ari- J. S. Rule 6—1-2.] Yiyv&aKeiv, &c. 81 position: nepl bojfxariov ykyovev, Eustatli. v. John vi, 21. — 7« with a participle, periphrastically : p) npobovs ?'//ias yern, do not betray us: Soph. Aj. 589. v. Philoct. 773. Plato Phsedr. c. 20. 21. 62. d FiyiwcTKeiv signifies to decree, (whence kyvtaafieva, decrees,) to resolve, to determine: eyvw Kivbvveveiv, Plut. v. Aristot. Poet, vii, 26. e AmreXety, to continue, with a participle ; as, ypwuevoi biareXov/iev, we continue to use, or using : Isoer. c. Soph. See Plato Ap. S. p. 31. 1. 7. or an adjective; as, biare\u> evbaifiwv, Xen. Ages, i, 37. x, 4. Cyrop. i, 5, 10. Mem. i, 6, 2/ Aiacpepeiv. bietyepofxev ovbev ec7r\?}£et r&v bp&vrwv, we were no less astonished than the (other) spectators : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. £)1S.£ X. Ata-^iope~iu, said of money, is, to be current, to pass : Lucian, de Luctu. [p. 430. D. ed. Salmur.] /( XT. &.iii)K€tv sometimes signifies, to travel rapidly, to post: tSdice fiotiQi'ivwv, Plut. Pomp. 2 Sometimes, (both of persons and things,) to seek the company of, to pursue or follow J as an object of desire, emulation, imitation: rovs evyvu)fiovas biwuetv, Xen. bevrepa XeKrpa biainei, seeks to marry again: Epigr. Gr. biwtce fiaoiXetav e7rtr?j§eu/mra, Isocr. Sometimes it is, to persecute; sometimes, to shun or repel: Xen. Ages, iii, 1. Anacr. xxxiv, 5. cf. P. Victor. Var. Lect. xxxvi, 71. XII. Sometimes it means to accuse, to prosecute; as, biwiceiv riva ev- yov-i b'iKr]v biro Kdrwros, Plut. Cic. p. S78. 1. 37- 'Awotyevyetv is, £0 be acquitted. Avvaadai irarra, to be omnipotent; bvvaadai bio ofioXovs, to be ivorth, to be of the same value as, two oboli ; rrjv avrrjv bvyarai bov- Xtucrw, amounts to the same subjugation ; carries the same subjuga- tion or slavery with it : Thuc. i, 141. [p. 210. 1. 1. Bekk.] a Add, yiyv6p.evov apyvpiov, money concern one's self about : v. Casaub. ad raised by the sale of things: Xen. Anab. Epict. c. 34. o~Las, in some manner. "Eanv oVws, it is possible that: Soph. Aj. 379- Eurip. Phoen. 1658. ovk eanv orrtos ov% bfiovoriao/jiev, we shall be sure to agree: we cannot but agree in future: Isocr. Paneg. p. 150. v. Heliod. iEth. v, l6. and Hor. C. iii, 1, £). eanv onov, somewhere, in some places, sometimes; and interrogatively ; eanv ottov av rrapuv fjyavaKrrjaas : did you any where, (or in any stage of the proceedings) though present, express any anger? Demosth. pro Cor. p. 31 6. III. El fit, in different persons, numbers, and moods, is often under- stood ; and early especially after avdyKt], beivbv, ehbs, obbev olov, (see C. III. § viii. R. 6.) v. Schaef. in Mel. crit. p. 43. s. IV. So after ihs Xoyos, as it is reported: olbev ^aXe^cc, there is no difficulty: Plato Hipp. M. p. 200. 1. 20. v. Plato Apol. S. p. 28. 1. 10. Aristoph. Eq. 213. Isocr. Nicocl. [p. 94. 1. 4. ed. Battie, Can- tab. 1729-] V. "Ean be' at the beginning of a sentence, for eyet be ovrojs, now the matter stands thus: Demosth. de Chers. p. 36. 1. 5. [p. 91. I. 7- ed. Reisk.] VI. "Ean ftdXtara tovto beos, this is chiefly to be feared : Demosth. Ol. i. and so with other substantives and ovros, as eXnts, Kivbvvos, &c. VII. r Rv for kariv* Thuc. ii, 6l. [p. 305. 1. 4. ed. Bekk.] So ■Xpijv, ebet, npoarjicev, eVXeo and ewXero, &c. for the present. VIII. E'irj with an accusative and infinitive after it: eirj, — to fivdw- bes vTMtcovaai, may the fabulous prove tractable and obedient, &c. Prut. Thes. IX. Elev, the third person plural, is used in transition to a fresh topic or head from one despatched or done with : so much for thai : l v. Plato Apol. S. c. 22. extr. or in introducing a particularisation k Aristoph. Ach. 767. Lys. 445. l See Demosth. in Androt. p. 597. Vesp. 183. 1509. Ach. 157. v. Brunck. Ii 17. in Boeot. de Nom. p. 998. 1. 9. 999. ad Aristopb. Thesm. 74.— J. S. I. 17. 1003. I. 11. ed. Reisk.— J. S. Rule l— 13.] THE VERB elfxi. 83 or further developement of what has already been said more gene- rally : well then: v. Plat. Ap. S. c. 3. It may be rendered well then also when it is used in allowing, or not disputing, the validity of an objection urged, and proceeding in consequence to modify by interrogation or otherwise what one has to say further: v. Plato Phaed. c. 64. or when, a thing being granted, or taken for granted, one proceeds : v. Plato Crit. c. 7. Symp. c. 4. It is used in first accosting persons, especially before asking a question, like well in English : Plato Crit. c. 66. /Esch. Choeph. 717. and before a question asked through impatience to hear further: Discip. e^des be y fj'fiiv helwvov ovc t)v eaizepas. Streps, eiev. tc ovv irpbs tcLXQit eiraXafii}- naro', well; what did he contrive? &c. Aristoph. Nub. 176. It is used also hy persons answering when called : eiev y', dcovw : well, I hear: iEsch. Choeph. 655. Aristoph. Pac. 663. X. The infinitive ehai, especially with hwv, is often redundant in Attic authors : m rov be aywva ovk ev rw KoXirip eiciov elvai Troirjaofiat, Thuc. ii, 89. with etcovaa, Plato Pheedr. p. 252. init. with eKovres, Plato de Rep. vii. p. 518. Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 120. 'Ekcjv is used without elvai in Xen. Anab. ii. pp. 281. 303. 345. Luc. Dom. 595. Demosth. 244, 10. Elvai is redundant with other words in Herodot. vii, 143. iv, 33. ii, 44. Lucian, 767. and Bis Ace. 322. Xen. Anab. i. p. 260. Leuncl. Long. Past. i. p. 14. 9. v. Thorn. M. p. 290. seq. H. Steph. de dial. p. 26. Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 164. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. C. 11S9.^ XI. Elvai is added to the phrase formed by to and I™ with a dative ; as, 70 e7r' eiceivois elvai, as far as in them lies ; as far as they are concerned: Thuc. viii. [48. p. 205. 1. 15. ed. Bekk.] v. Lysias in Agor. 481. in Ergocl. 825. It is also added to signify an end or purpose: Horn. II. e, 315. A, 20. XII. It signifies relation, especially of a child to a parent ; as, HfxiKpov narpos elvai xpaai tov NtKoarrparov, they say Nicostratus is the son of Smicrus: Isaeus. (paal pev ovv elvai Qpa(xv/.ia^ov Ni/cd- cTparov, that Nicostratus is Thrasymachus's son : Id. [And in such phrases tcuXelcdai is sometimes used bv poets instead of elvai : as by Pind. Pyth. iii, 118. Eurip. Rhes. 298. Soph. El. 365.] So the participle: YlToXeuaiov na\ EvpvbtKt)s olaav, being the daughter of Ptolemy and Eurydice. XIII. Also of a slave to his master ; and it is used with a genitive more generally to denote any kind of possession, whether proper or figurative; as, ^j) tov Xeyovros 'iaQi, Aristoph. Eq. 856. So Soph. CEd. R. 917. See 1 Cor. iii, 22. Demosth. ad Pantoen. p. 982. 1. 3. ed. Reisk. vfiiliv ahrwv bvres, being your own masters, not in- fluenced by others: Demosth. p. 456. 1. 9. m "'Eickv ehai non est simpliciter \by choice ; if you can help it.} Veretamen sponte, sed quantum quis sponte quid cum pleonasmo dici credasapud Herodot. faciat. ov5e prjv s re ehai 1 Add, ovZev el/.u, I am undone, I am from his own conjecture. — J. S. ruined: Aristoph. Vesp. 997. and obiter Viger appears to be in error here, elfi eyui, it is alt over tvith me: Aristoph. el Kal 1X7] aiirol roaovrov i)aa.v els aperr)V, Ach. 1185. but ovSev el in Aristoph. seems to mean, even although they them- Eccl. 144. is, you are of no importance, selves were not so very eminent in virtue, you are nobody, ehai jxera ywainos, said — J. S. of sexual intercourse : Aristoph. Plut p The intimation of advantage is in rl, 1081.— J. S. Rule l—Kav avrS r>)v ap^i/v, Aevntov fyiXimrov y v w /j. y] v ei- ttovtos, on the recommendation of Lucius Philippus ; Lucius Phi- lippus having authorised the measure by speaking and voting first in favor of it : Plut. in Pomp.' 'EXtti^w and eXnofxcu properly signify merely to expect, or to think, and are therefore used in speaking of evil/ as well as of good ; as, f.i€jiaTr}v avfxtyvpav — i]Xtcl£,ov TzeiaeaBai, Lys. Or. Fun. p. 505. v. Herodot. Er. c. 100. Horn. II. v, [v. 8.]Oppian, Hal. i, 88. also Virg. JEn. iv, 41Q. ii, 658. x, 2£1. xi, 275. Catull. carm. 83. HI. 'E^epxeadai and k^ievai are sometimes used absolutely, for, to march, to go forth to war: Demosth. 01. ii. [p. 21. 1. 18. and 25.] IV. "Eoiko. sometimes indicates inclination or intention : eon: a be Kal vvv viroicara(3ri(7ea9ai, and now too, I think I shall go down — Je pense queje men vais descendre: Lucian, in Charon, [p. 328. B. ed. Salmur.] V. "Eoikc, with a dative, it is fit, becoming, consentaneous.* VI. 'tis eoiKe, parenthetically, a kind of slight affirmation ; it seems: 6 yap bfi yjpovos eKelvos ijveyKev avdpwwovs, — (lis eoicev — inrep rb kcmov ov ttot Theag. p. 239. 1. 26. ed. Bas. 1. Trpoaei- ij\iri(r' &u : Aristoph. Av. 956.— J. S. •new, to say in addition, to add : Demosth. * la the passage cited by Viger from in Aristocr. p.395. 1. 26. ed. Hervvagianas Demosth. OLynth. ii. [p. 18. 1. 10. ed. secundaB : hut Reiske, p. 628. 1. 13. has Reisk.] it appears lo have its proper and irpowrwv.- — Trpoeiiteiv rvA <\>6vov, to give ordinary sense ; resembles, or is like, and one notice of a prosecution against him for is to he rendered, is like the effect of. murder : Pseudo-Demosth. in Neser. p. —J. S. 86 "Ex eu '- [Chap. v. § vii. struct ion; as, iibwurios e?x €n '» t° be unable: v. Arr. Exp. Al. i. c. 26. us '&kcu7tos eroifxorriTos J) j3ov\}'iaews eoye, according to the degree of readiness or inclination of each : Pint. Camill. nvrws c'xw rijs yi'w/jrjs, this is my opinion: v. Lucian, Demosth. Enc. p. 890. tovtwv oXiywpcos eyeiv, to neglect these things: Demosth. Phil. iv. p. 60. eyeiv bfiolws Till, Herodot. hi. 24. InreyBCJs eyovTes npos civtov, bearing ill-will towards him: Herodian i, 12. kyiXws e'x € '> and KaWiara eyet, are expressions by which an offer or invitation is civilly declined :" Athen. Deipn. xiv, 12. Theocr. xv, 3. like recte and benigne. v. Ter. Eun. ii, 3, 50. Hor. Ep. i, 7, ]6. and 62. KaXws e^ei, with a dative, is becoming or honorable to : Xen. Mem. i, 3, 3. X. With prepositions eyeiv forms various circumlocutions : a/u^i or irep\ ti eyeiv, to be occupied about something ; eye.iv bia (j>povTi- bos, to think or study about: Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 907. bia oto/jlcitos eyeiv, to mention frequently : Athen. Deipnos. xiv, 3. eyut ae kv opyjj, I am incensed against you: Thuc. ii, 18. eyeiv kv aiTtats or hi ahias, to blame. knl ccpiai eyovTcis, being hostile or adverse to them: Herodot. Er. c. 49- And with participles also: aiyuivra eyeiv, to keep silent : Arrian iv, 8. but chiefly with participles of aorists : tov \6yov be aov Trakai Oav/jLaaas ej(w, / have long been wondering at your discourse: Plato Phaedr. p. 257- 1.21. v. Hesiod, Op. 42. -KTii^avTes elyov, they kept cowering: Eurip. Cycl. 406. eyei irepavas, he has done or perpetrated : Soph. Aj. 22. properly, he is in the state or condition of one who has done or perpetrated. — In such expressions regard is had both to the time of the participle and of eyeiv. v. Valck. ad Phoen. p. 267. seqq. Sometimes a participle of eyeiv is joined pleonastically with a finite verb; as for axoXoyeiadai, 3L\. V. H. ii, 39. fiiov e\eiv, for fitwvai, lb. iii, 29« yvwjurjv e'^eo', for ytyp&fffreiv, (to decree or determine,) lb. iv, S. 5et7ryov e'x«v, for Set7r»'e7j/, lb. iii, 39. h v s t v ^V p a ex eiv > ^ or ^w^'" y X e ^ ,/ > ^ys. P* 746". ed. Reisk. enlboaiv e^euf, for e7ribibovai, Xen. CEc. xx, 23. epyov ex eiV > f° r epya^erx- Qai, Xen. Mem. ii, 10, 6. Ages, xi, 12. Kaipbv e'xetv, fo 6e se«- sonahle or opportune : Thuc. i, 42. Kaicdi> ex eiv > to he diseased; to be faulty: Plat. Gorg. p. 478. \6yov e'xeiv, to be reasonable: Plato Phaedr. p. 62. bvo/xa e'xetj', to be called ; to be represented, (falsely; and in opposition to being in reality ;) Herodot. Pol. c. 13S. '° ^ ave the worst of it: Thuc. iii. c. 5. In the imperative, e'xe bij is, attend now, mind now ; e^e br), tcui fxoi robe etVe, Plato Io. p. 535. [" Non male Ficinus vertit, animadverte quid velim." Hermann.] To fikv 7ex»'»?s re am drex^tns Xoywv irept, luavois e^erw, let this suffice : Plato Pliaedr. p. 274. "E^etv sometimes signifies, to be rich: Lysias p. 579- ed. Reisk. Soph. Aj. 157. Demosth. p. 1123. v. Aristoph. Plut. 596. and 1 Cor. xi, 22." "Exeodai, with a genitive, signifies, to lay hold on, to keep hold of : w ixovrat tov ottXov, M\. de N. Anim. V, 3. tovtov exopevos f]yov/j.at oiiic civ Trore ireaelv, Plat. Phaed. p. 100. 1. 40. To cleave to, to adhere to, to apply to: rwv fleXrlarwv e'xov, Epict. Ench. c. 29. v. Tbeogn. 31. v avbpGjv, Plat. Ep. 6. To follow closely and unremittingly for the purpose of fastening upon; to pursue with constant scrutiny in order to expose, stigmatise, fyc. exeadai twv abiKTjpaTwy tov ^tXimrov, Demosth. pro Cor. p. 251. To be attached to or connected with, v Add, ttov P» 50. — J. S. 88 "Hku), &c. [Chap. v. § viii. and therefore to participate in the character or qualities of; rdis uXijOeias expH&vois ireiOofjevos, Euseb. in Hierocl. c. 12. To depend on, to be in the power of; aev b' exerat bovvai fliov i)b' acpeXe'adat, Horn, in Terr. Matr. v. Horn. II. i, 102. Plat. Protag. p. 324. To be next in order, time, rank; ret e^u/ieva rwv elprifiivwv, Heliod. jEth. v, 1(5. v. Xen. CEc. vi, 1. ev Tf k\op.iv^ eviavro), 1 Machab. iv, 28. t'X«juevas fJLOv aadi'/aij, [l] Esdr. iv, 42/ SECTION VIII. — OF THE VERBS iJKO), kot aXafi fiut'OJ, tce~tf.iat, Xai'dcivw, f.ie\X(j), I'lxato, vo/ui^oj, oiba, iidt, ot/aui. Rule I. "Hew is joined with participles present, past, and future : iJKei fepwv, he bri?igs: Isaaus. ijKev avaarpexpas, he returned: De- niosJh. i]Kia ovfifiovXevawv, I come to counsel or advise: Demosth. II. With 7r6ppw, ev, and enl ttoXv, a genitive following : Troppw rfjs yXiKias ijxwv, far advanced in years. Trvppo), or ev, or e#t noXv, ttjs Traibelas ijicetv, to make a great progress in learning, ev i'jiceiv twv Xprjfju'iTUJi', to be rich : Herodot. QeXat ; Herodot. Er. c. 37- v. Act. Ap. ii, 12. xvii, 20. KaraXafifiuveti> is sometimes used impersonally : 'E7rw7rea kolt- eXafiev cnroduvelv, Paus. in Cor. p. 95. it came to pass that Epo- pens died. [See H. St. Thes. ii, 571. g.] Kelodai is said of laws enacted: rols robots to~is Kei/j.evois e/3o>j- x The following significations of deri- bring it about : Polyb. iv, 52. iirexew, vatives and compounds of l^o) are worthy to purpose, to design : Diog. Laert. Anax- of observation : to dance , to imen. to restrain, to repress, to repel: cut capers: Aristoph. Pac. 324. tira/jure- Aristoph. Vesp. 338. Pac. 1121. to Xeiv, to cloak: Plut. Sert. p. 1046. 1. 13. hinder; to prevent : Polyb. ix, 1. to ed. Steph. auex^v, to solemnise, to cele- sue for, to canvass for, to aim at: Ari- brate: Aristoph. Thesm. 948. to inhabit : stoph. Lys. 490. to cease: Aristoph. Eq. Soph. CEd. C. 674. to emerge from, to 915. to persecute: Horn. Od. t, 71. escape: Soph. CEd. R. 174. ■Kpoo , av£x eiV > Karifyeiv, to dwell: Theogn. 262. to take, to wait, to remain quiet: Polyb. v, 17. to take down: Polyb. ii, 32. to last, to Trpoaai'exeo'dcu %fjv, to endure to live : Po- hold, to continue : Aristoph. Pac. 944. lyb. E. Peiresc. p. 106. avoQerai gov Sia/caTe'xeu', to take possession of : Polyb. twv ira-Tpiioiv xpV^-Tcay, will contest with iv, 55. irpocexeti', to have besides ; to you al law the right to them: Aristoph. have in addition: Plat, de Rep. vii. p. Av. 1658. c«rex eiJ/ > to receive: JEsop. 438. 1. 1. ed. Basil. 1. irpoo-ix^ lv A*/*^*"* Fab. 47. Plut. t. i. p. 165. 1. 21. 219, 22. (an accusative instead of a dative) to iii. 1248. 1. 17. ed. Steph. Siex^iy, to re- make; to sail into: Po]yb.n,9.Trpo4xety, move, to put away : Plut. Alcib. p. 352. to be more ancient, to be before: Diog. 1. 10. Sie'xew toss xe?pas, to be anxiously Laert. in Cleob. p. 34. 1. 8. ed. H. St. — desirous of a thing ; to exert one's self to J. S. R'ULE 1—4.] Aavflavw— -MeXXw. S$ Qow, Lysias c. Frum. icaXws nei/uevovs vofxovs, Lucian, Abdic. Hence v\uki]v : for ■noiovfjievos eXade, Thuc. i, 65. irpovXeyov XwdavovTes, Herodian ii, 14. Other verbs, especially such as signify continuance or conclusion, are construed, as Xavddva) is, with a participle; as, fiavdavwv btareXel., he continues always learning: v. Plat. Gor#. p. 49 1. 1. 25. XaQwv avros envrbv, having forgotten himself : Euseb. Pra?p. iii. IV. MeXXw in its ordinary sense is always followed by an infinitive ; v Here some unusual senses of several to close ; ^v\\dp.j3av avrov rb ar6/u.a, stop -compounds of Xafifidvo) may be men- his mouth: AristoprT. Ach. 926. viroXap.- tioned : 5ia\ap.^dveiv, to share, i. e. to ffdveiv, to understand, to take one's mean- receive in shares: Xen. Anab. v, 3, 5. to ing : Plat. Gorg. p. 307. 1. 33. etl. Basil. seize or arrest : Plut. Arat. p. 1893. 1.31. prim. viro\ap.j3dvea6ai, to be thought or ed. H. St. to seize by the middle: Ari- judged of as to character: Demosth. in stoph. Eq. 264. to intersect or divide: Aristocr. p. 623. 1. 5. ed. Reisk — J. S. Polyb. v, 59. to fence off, or fortify; z The construction of this phrase has Polyb. i, 42. to deliberate, to consult: been imitated by Virgil : sensit medics Polyb. iv, 25. to determine, to resolve: delapsus in hostes : JEn. ii, 377. — J. S. Polyb. iv, 5. to be assured or convinced a An infinitive is sometimes substituted of: Diog. L. in Zen. p. 240. ed. H. for the participle ; as, p.^ AavOdvcao-iv St. iK\ap.pdveiv,tolearn,to acquire the — ras peylffTas Kal KaWiffTas irpo'ievai knowledge of: Polyb. ii, 39. i^eAa^eu rip.ds : lest they heedlessly lavish and &rav, (Ionic) gets or receives: Diog. throw away, &c. Polyb. v, 90. e\adev 6 Laert. in Biant. p. 32. 1. 15. ed. H. St. Bpovros «otoi irvhas epx e ^0ai irpbs tulit: Is. Casaub. ovXAafiQdveiv, to r6irov eXdSri, Plut. iu Brut. p. 1804. join, to connect (one word with another): 1. 2. ed. H. St.— J. S. Aristoph. Eq. 21. to squeeze together, Viger. M 90 MiXXut — NiKciw. [Chap. v. § viii. as, fxeXXio noielv, I am about to do. fxeXXw KiQapictew, M\. V. II. iii, 32. ovofiaaai (UeWw)/, Lvs. p. 412. cd. Lond. fieXXovriov aXwiai Xt/jy, JEl. V. H. v, 20. virep fxeXXw iraQelv, ZEsch. Proai. 626. fxeXXui v/ids btba£,eu>, Plat. Apol. 6". V. The infinitive is sometimes understood : as in tu piev e/.ieXXev, cos eboKei, tlov beivtov, tu b' i')br} 7raprjv : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 292. 1. 15. ed. Reisk.] yevrjtreaOat, LTVLifiriaeo-dni, or the like. In /jijbets (pdoi'U) to fxeXXov ukovctt), Demosth. in Lept. Xe^dijrreaOui. VI. The infinitive suppressed is sometimes that of a verb pre- ceding in the sentence ; as, tus pev knopdow, ras be €LieXXoi>, (iropdi/- oeiv viz.) rals be yiretXovv tlov iroXewr, Isocr. in Hel. Laud. — or fol- lowing, as in Thuc. i, 134. [p. 195. 1. 3. ed. Bekk.] and Athen. Deipn. iv. p. 166. VII. Me\\fa> sometimes signifies, ivhal must necessarily come to pass, what must be, ivhat ought to be, what is to be : cod efxeXXev, wcnrep ehos, els adpoovs flaXXiov, ciei twos Tev£eoBai oko-kov, he could not but hit some mark: Dion. Hal. v, 24. v. Horn. II. £, 125. Od. a, 232. b, 181, 377- a, 137. x» 322. Pyrrhus, in answer to the soldiers who called him an eagle, r.i yap ov LieXXio, rols v/j.erepois onXois, &mtep wKVTTTepots, alpopevos ; how can I but be one, raised on high as lam upon your arms as upon wings? Plut. in Apophth. — In the Phredo of Plato, Socrates, to one saying odev be cnreXinofxev, k-rraveXQwfxev, e'i col ijbo[xepw kaTiv' answers, aXXa I'lbofievcp ye' ttuis yap ov fxeXXet ; how can it be otherwise? 24 extr.— v. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 405. Xen. CEc. xviii, 1. and Bach, ad 1.*' Tt eiieXXov KeXevtreiv ', 1) t'i ov^ovXevaeiv avTrj Trotelv ', what could I bid, or what advise the state to do ? what ought I to have ordered, &c. Demosth. pro Cor. beticvvei, iroiav dboy avrovs bel (3ubl$eLi', el i (underst. 7r6Xefxov) KXtjdrjvai TpmKov, ical ov% 'EXXijiikov, k%et>i.Kr)oe : Paus. Messen. The verb Kparelv has the same significations and constructions as XII. (XV.) NopiSetv is sometimes to institute or establish by law; to practise or observe by law or by custom ; to use : ol "lwves en teal vvv vofiigovirt, celebrate by custom, ((he Bacchanalian rites, viz.) Thuc. ii. tovs fioiypvs vofxiSovat noXXal tuiv noXewv vrjiroiva atro- Kreiveiv, sanction by laiv : Xen. Hier. iii, 3. Hence ret vevopnafxeva, the institutions of a state; irapa to vevo/uio-fieiov 'Pw/xalois, Sozom. viii, 10. j'o/i/eW iTnroTpotpias, Pind. Isthm. ii, 55. v. iEsch. Choeph. 1003. (999. v. Abresch.) Virg. Mn. vii, 690/* ^w^v vo/uigovTes, Herodot. ii. With a dative; r£ vofxiafian rofxliovai, use: JEsch. Dial, ii, 24. v. Thuc. ii, 38. and Abresch, Diluc. Thuc. p. 193. vo/ui£eo6ai, to be in use: Plat. Gorg. ottws twv vofxiSo/ueruv rvyuoi, i. e. evayia\iaTb)v, vevop.iajxeviov, Demosth. p. 733. ed. Reisk. v. and p. 1399. 'SofitSovra Xeyeiv in Plat. Pliaedr. p. 257. 1. 32. is, to speak in earnest ; to say what one really thinks. XIII. (XVI.) Olba, I know, is used instead of the present elbu, and the compound avvoiba instead of avveihu) or avveibofiai : v. Acts xxvi, 27. In the second person olada : v. Plat. Gorg. p. 486. Olb' on is used parenthetically, and is generally preceded by el : ijKovere [xev ovv, ev olb' on, Kat v/xels 'laerovos bvo/ua : Xen. H. Gr; vi. v. Demosth. de fals. leg. p. 201. 1. 37. eXtofxai n wv, ev olb' on, Kenedy ovtidv : Plat. Apol. 27. where there is a confusion, very com- mon in Greek authors, of two distinct phrases; viz. eXwfiai n twv Kaictov, and eXwfiai n tovtwv, a ev olb' on koko. can. Ev does not always precede olb' on thus used : Aristoph. Lys. 60. Demosth. Phil. ii. p. 28. Aristid. Or. Leuctr. p. 91. Olb' on often concludes a sentence: v. Aristoph. Vesp. 1339- Pac. 364. Plut. 890. Eurip. Phcen. 1611. XIV. (XVII.) And in the same unconnected manner ev 'iadi and ev 'iad' on are used, both in the middle and at the end of sentences. See Xen. Cyrop. v, near the beginning. Alo-xvvolprjv av, ev "10Q1, eV uvt(3 : Lucian. Ev 'iaff on concludes a sentence in Aristoph, Plut. 183. d With an infinitive: ovrw 5irj7e7 Horn. II. u, 635. ad Aristoph. Lys. 1256. I suppose, and Koifiiffov sch. and intransitively, to lie 1 trow, have a similar meaning ; and are down ; epx*° vvv xi, to he re- RULE 1 — 4.] 'O/ioXoyeTv— 'OfkioicaVeiK. $3 force, or importance: Eurip. Suppl. 595. v. addend, in ed. Her- manni ad v. 612. iEschyl. Agam. 176, ex Schutzii eonj.f Ov Xeyw is a form by which one, who has said'any thing ominous or dangerous, desires it may be unsaid : el b' eVeari ve/ueats, ov Xeyco : Soph. El. 1467. v. iEschyl. Agam. 880. Eum. 869. 'OfxoXoyeJy, to promise, to accept an invitation : wjuoXoyjjera §' els rr\aepov irapkaeaQai, (viz. to supper at Agatho's,) Plato Symp. With 6/j.oXoye'iv signifying to agree to anything, crvy^iapeHy, cvfx(ftii)ve~iv, avvrldeedai, avfifiaiveiv are nearly synonymous. II. '0(p\itjK&veiv and ocpXeiv are put singly for, to be condemned, to be cast : ear be 6 (pevyuv v Bpovros, O that Brutus were alive! Plut. iraQovnav a pjjror' w ed. Bas. 1.] eW &(j>eXe uoi Ktibefj-wy rj ^vyyevijs elvai ris, would that I had some protector or relation! Aristoph. Vesp. 731. With a'ide, Iliad a, 415. ws &(peXes avToff oXeadai, O that thou hadst there perished! Horn. II. y, 428. wcfseXe with an accusative and infinitive, Lucian, de Dea Syr. 25. It is to be remarked that &eXov is used only in wishing that something had been, were now, or may be hereafter, which was not, or is not, or will not be : &(j>eXov davelv, I wish I had died : but I did not die : &s olv, is used only when one wishes something of which he really hopes for the accomplish- ment, because he believes it to be possible. But whenever e'ide or peated, to he often mentioned: Xen. Anab. course: Aristoph. Plut. 1082. Eccl. 890. ii, 1, 12. aTroA4yea6ai, to resisn, to give said of a woman, Plut. in Solon, p. 162* up: Plut. Pomp. p. 1152. 1. 16. ed. H. I. 31. ed. H. St.— J. S. St. 5taAeyeeXe fii'ib' kykvovro doal vees ! Callim. Epigr. xviii. v. Arrian, Diss, ii, 18. On wfeXov and '6fJ. adv. Steph. p. 1120. Also to come into ones mind: see Eurip. Rties. 780. (and so daep^eaOai, Eurip. Ipli. A. 1374.) irapioTarai pot tovto iroie.lv, it comes into my mind to do this ; whence ei; rod 7ra- pt(TTG.fxevov Xeyeir, to say what comes uppermost ; to speak extempore. VJII. (IX.) Also to be courageous ; as, ovtoj irapeorn rw Qvpu, ws, &c. so full of spirit and promptitude was he, that, &c. whence na- paarr,fxa and irapaoraois,* boldness, presence of mind, [and to irapeoTr]- kos, audacity, assurance : Aristoph. Eq. 399- J- S.] and TTapacrrartKos uvrjp, abounding with alacrity, spirit, presence of mind : Polyb. xvi, 4. Also, to reduce to subjection ; as, d)v o'ucovpevnv irapaarijaaadai, to subjugate the whole world. YiapiGTaaQai is said too of what is within a person's power or ability : v. Eurip. Androm. 231. It signifies also to persuade, to incline, to impel, to incite: wapec- r?7<7aro tov veavianov icpbs to Koivunelv, &c. Polyb. Exc. Leg. S5. irapaffTricrao-Qai tovs aKovovras els to fid Wo v ahrw avvayavaKrelv, Polyb. ii, 59J Demosth. in Aphob. iii. p. 860. 1. 17. ed. Reisk. See Demosth. adv. Eubul. p. 1305. 1. 11. in Aphob. iii. p. 852. 1. 15. Lucian, Philops. p. 466. ed. Salmur. — J.S. k Jlapdaraffis, perturbation, alienation of mind : 8ia ttji/ TrapdcrTaaiv ttjs Siavolas oppoovTes inl rb vfix<= rots SirAois aireirviyovTO : Polyb. iii, 85. irepixapys olaa. trpbs ras 8vpas cm^vTa, na\ /uer& ira- paarrdo'eas rjffird^eTO tovs peaviaKovs '• Po- lyb. x, 5. leetitia cum stupore: Ernesti. —J. S. 1 Add, irapto-Tao-Oai, to show: Polyb. E. L. 144. to occur, Plut. Moral, t. iii. p. 157. 1. 10. ed. Wyttenb. 8vo. and also the following senses of ia-Typi and some of its other derivatives and com- pounds : itpiv &v ye Tp4xv, before I cease running : Aristoph. Ach. 176. 'larrf fSSeiov Snpbv, she weighed beef fat : Ari- stoph. Vesp. 40. iiriaTaBpeveiv, to dis- turb, to annoy, to bother: Plut. Moral, sect. 778. b. ed. Wyttenb. ttjs ap&tfls eKeyero aradfi^o-aaQai tovs aaTepiaKovs, to have marked the situation of: Calli- mach. ap. Diog. Laert. p. 9. 1. 1. ed. H. St. aTadjxao-Qai, to conjecture : Soph. (Ed. R. 1111. airaviffrao-dai, to depart: Theogn. 528. KaT^avao-Trjvai, to resist : Plut. Phocion, p. 1370. 1. 10. ed. H. St. n)aavTos, he that has received a benefit is inferior to him who has conferred it : Aristot. Eth. Witii ciyaQuv : tis e\n\s vno rovruv ayaQuv neioeodai ; Lysias : whence uvrevTvaQeiv, to have a kindness returned to one ; ami ai'TevKoiijaai, to return a kindness. X. (XI.) To be in any state of mind or feeling : vfjoiorarov Ttao-yu) •n-pos rows tyikoaotyovvTas, uxrirep Trpus tovs \pe\XiSofj.epovs, Kai irai^ovTas '. Plat. Gorg. XI. (XII.) To do: Aristoph. Nub. 814. m tI ixv tis Ttadot npos aidpu)7Tovs /jirire epyu) /u/yre Xdyw ireiadijyai bvvafikvovs ; what can one do with, how can one act towards, men, &c. ? Galen. eiraOov r\ 'O^piKov, they acted, in a manner, like Homer himself: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 250. v. Schol. ad Eurip. Hec. 614. Spanh. ad Aristopli. Plut. 603. and Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. 902. XII. (XIII.) Both persons and things are said to suffer, ir&fT^iv, whatever of any kind happens to them : n ovbev beivov Traayere a-iro- povrres, it is no wonder that you are perplexed or at a loss : Ceh. Tab. [p. 6. 1. 12. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] v. Ml V. H. lib. ult. c. 47. And the phrase rl iradeiv especially signifies to die or to perish: Thuc. iv. p. 97. whence wados, death or slaughter: He- rodot. i, 13. But H iradiov may often be rendered why ; as in Aris- topli. Nub. 400/ TV fxadcjv is a similar phrase : q ri yap fiadovr' is tovs deoits vfipi£eroi> ; Aristopli. Nub. 1510. [1489. Bekker's edition printed for Priestley, 1826.] This latter form is used in oblique or indirect phraseology as well as in direct, 6 ti being substituted for ri; when it may be rendered, because : troXv fievrot, etprj, bu-aiorepoy tov vfjiirepou Trarepa rvTrroi/dt, o ti fiaQiov aotpovs vlels ovtios e) 7radetv 1) anoTioai, to impose the penalty , whether corporal punishment or fine. XIV. (XV.) Ylepi'ibe'tv and irepiopav, (and irepioipeodai for the future,) to see without endeavouring to prevent, to suffer, to permit ; ttjv t(Lv 'P(i)[jLai(i)i' apyfiv fit} irepiibelv kppijifjievrfv, Herodian ii. tooovtovs TtLv avfxtxaxwv tt € p to p q.v b o v \ € v o v t a s, Isocr. Paneg. ov 7repi6\pera( /u 6 Oelos aviinrov, Aristopli. Nub. bvvafxty irpoa- XafieTv 7repi6\pev, Ikwolov aavTw QoTpvs, ge- ' See Horn. 11. i, 491. Plut. Moral, iterate or breed out of her for yourself.— $ 834. B. ed. Wyttenb. and Demosth. J. S. Viger, N 98 n<>it~ttrOai. [Chap. v. ^ x. iroifjtrat, to include, to inclose, to receive within itself, Palaeph. 50. eKirobu)i> TToielaOat, to put out of the way ; to despatch, to destroy : Isocr. ill Evag. eVw tF)s yvadov iroirjcrfti rov ha.KTv\ov, to introduce or insert within: Xen. de Re eq. vi, 8. irotelaOui ks ' eavrov or kip' eavrw, to bring into one's power ; to reduce to subjection. And iroieladai eavrov en klpva'iav, to get himself into power : Herodian i, 9- But els eavrov iroiov/.ievos ra tovtwv a/iapTt'ifiaTa, is, taking them upon himself, making himself answerable fur them: Demostli. XI. (XIII.) "Epyov iroieladai is, to make it one's business, to endea- vour earnestly : Plut. Thes. Plat. Tim. So 7ra.v } and iravra, iroieiv, onus, to spare no exertion, to use all means to — : Plato Phaedr. p. 252. I. 44. de Rep. vi. p. 4S8. Rule 7 — 14.] rioteTffflat. 99 XII. (XIV.) YloielaOat, to account, to esteem, to reckon: evrv^fxa 7roie~icr0ai tuv Kmpov, to reckon the opportunity a piece of good for- tune: Plut. Pomp. 7rOjU7n)i', aW ov o-vfupopav to 7rpayfja Troiovfieros, Greg. Naz. Yloie'to-dai, to pretend, to lay claim to : tovto to fiadr]- [xa iroLovfxai beivos eivai, Plat. Theag. p. 128. 1. 17- efiavrov iroicviie- vos to jxaOr^fxa ehat ws evpnfia, Plat. Hipp. Mill. p. 372. 1. 27. XIII. (XV.) 'E£w\?? rai Trpvu)\7] woie'tv, is to destroy utterly : De- mosth. pro Cor. [p. 332. I. 21. ed. Reisk.] XIV. (XVI.) lioteTt- tivi Toy \6yov, to give, or to be, to him the cause or occasion of his discourse: Aristid. Panath. But iroielodat Xoyov tov fxi] tl di'oj/rws ?} fxaviKtas enreiv, is to take thought or care not to, &c. Philostr. de vit. Apoll. v, 35. And ttoXvv Troielcrdai \6yov AperFis, is to hold it in great esteem: Philostr. in Heroic, c. 1 1. As the signification of Troielv is so general, it often becomes a sort of relative verb, and stands for any other verb, to avoid its repetition ; as, jjis (bwctfuews) ii/mels oirorav tcpeiTTU) biafiipamo/jiev, (fjv fSovXrjdei'Tes pabiw av irooiaatpev), &c. Isocr. Paneg.* where it is remarkable that the relative ($v) is referred to bwcifxews, instead of being put in the neuter (c) and referred to the action expressed by the verb. Some- times iroielv, or bpq.v, (for they are both so used) represents a verb (or verbs) following instead of preceding ; as in this passage of Tliucyd. in which it is to be observed that the verbs represented by bpaTe, and following it, are, by attraction, made to correspond with it in form, instead of being put in the infinitive, as the construction would otherwise have required : ttws ov XPV ^avras afxvvetv ab-w, Kal pi), o vvv vpeis bpare, — tov koivov tyjs aoJTrjpias atpietrde, Kal ifie — bt airias e^ere : ii, 60. Aljua Troie'iv, npaTTeiv, or bpqv, to shed blood ; to slay : Polyb. xv, 31. Eurip. Or. 406. 1140. cf. Cuper, Obs. iii, ip. Timely with an infinitive, to grant, or to assume, or to suppose, for the sake of argument : Xen. Anab. v. p. 555. Also to force, to make, to cause to : k-Koino-av 'Ayijcr/Xaov eiraraywpriaa.i, Xen. Hell. vi. 7re- 7rou/(care tovs p/jTopas fieXeTqv Kal > See Polyb. iv, 16.— J. S. kuk&s, v. 1220.— J. S. w So xpVO"rov rt irpixTTfiv, to meet ivith x Add, ttoAAo, irp&Treiv, to be meddling: some good fortune: Aristopb. Plut. 341. Aristoph. Ran. 749. Siawpdrreiv, to de- Qdppec Trdvr ayada ireirpdyajxev, take flower: Plut. Moral, t. ii. p. 654. 1. 9. to heart: we have come off most fortunately ; destroy : Soph. Trach. 786. SiairpuTTecr- we are in high luck : Aristoph. Ran. 302. 6ai, to obtain : Xen. Anab. vi, 2, 11 . avv- — J. S. SiairpaTTeiv, to co-operate in accomplish- * The difference between Trpdrreiv, in ing : Isocr. Paneg. p. 113. ed. Battie. this use, and Spyv, is plainly marked in iKwpdrreiv, to destroy : Soph. CEd. C. the following passage; irpoaSSKa Se, 5pau> 1659.— J. S. nanus, Kaitov ti wpd£eiv. Eurip. Here § xi. RULE 1—5.] UpotnTotelcydai — TideoBai. 101 XX. (XXII.) YipoairoielaOni, to pretend, is often used ellipfically, so that what is pretended must be collected from the preceding words : opa firj tovtwv f.iev eyflpos fjs, efxoi be wpornToirj (viz. e-^Bpbs elvat) : it is to these present, I doubt, that you are really an enemy, and that to me you only pretend to he so: Demostli. pro Cor. See also the same oration, p. 270. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. SECTION XI. — Of THE VERBS avyicpOTelv, avpprjyvvvat, avpQpovelv, Ttdevai, rideadai, Tvy^aveiv. RULE I. IvyKpoTelv, which signifies properly to collide, to clap together, (and perhaps to Jorge out, or unite metals: v. Schol. Theocr. ad Id. xv, 49.) signifies also to collect, to compact, to unite into one body, and also to form or qualify by instruction or exercise ; as, ovytcporelv arpaTihv, a. ttotov : to raise and form an army ; to collect, and regulate the compotation of, a convivial party. avyKe- KpoTTjjjiepoi ra tov 7roXe/uou, thoroughly disciplined in military affairs : Demostli. Ol. ii. and cvyKetcpoTri/jeva 7r\i]p/ja.-a, well-disciplined crews : Polyb. i, 16. cvyKpo-eiv xopbv, to form a chorus ; to collect dancers and singers into a company, and teach them to move and sing in unison: Demostli. in Mid. p. 250. avyuporelv crvrotpoolay, to or- ganise a conspiracy. It signifies also to clap, in testimony of approbation ; 6 Ivpatcooios rrvt'etcpoTelro, Xen. Symp. viii, 1. and hence, to encourage, to sti- mulate: ovvetcpoTOW a\\os a\\ov fit) a-rroKafiveiv, Philo de vita Mos. II. (III.) IvfiQpovelv is sometimes, to arrive at length, by reflection and observation of circumstances, at a probable conclusion about the meaning of an oracle : Plot, in Themist. Ivfi^ake'tv also, and avp.- fiaWeodat are used in a similar sense : Paus. in Mess. III. (IV.) TiBeoBai, irpoaTtQeaQai, KaraTideadai, avyKaTmiBeaBai, with a dative, signify to assent, to agree in opinion : els eywye /*a- Xicrra ridefxai, Chrysost. ad Thessal. ii. 01 5' a\\oi TrpoaeTiBevTo, kcii KareKovfiovvTo {conformed) Trdvres els r?)i> iicelvov yrw/j,r]v : Pint, in Fab. p. 191. IV. (V.) Tideadat, with an accusative and an adverb of manner, signifies to manage, to administer, to conduct ; as, air e£ovai(os, or avroKpciTopiicios, tov TroXe/Jiov TiBeoBai. O'ieoQat yjp>l T >1 1 ' Qpdvrjtrtv to. irav- ra, 07rws av avrrj iibij y, ovtw TiQeoBai, Xen. Mem. i. Also (if inter- preted literally) to make for one's self; as, TtBeuBai pvrjji-qv rivqs, to make one's self a remembrance of something ; i. e. to remember it. defievos ayvafnrTov voov, having assumed, or having, an inflexible or obstinate mind : iEschyl. Prom. l6~3. V. (VI.) Tidivai and ridecrdai signify with logicians, to assume, to suppose, to hold or teach as a principle or doctrine, to assert as a position ; as, ol to Kevbv elvat riBevres, or ol to Kevbv TiBifievot, without elvai. TiOeaOai tov aywva, to institute, appoint, arrange, or give to the public, as a spectacle, the contest or competition : Greg, de Mart. 102 TiOeoOm. [Chap. v. § xi. VF. (VII.) TiOeoOai is, to account, esteem, reckon; as, bevrepov ■%p)) TiOerrdai rfjs typoiytrews t>)v vyieiav, we ought to reckon health but second to wisdom: instead of which, rWeaOai (or notelaOat) ev bevTei>a. Tc't^ei with a genitive, is said : v. Pint, in Demosth. p. 852. I. 14. Meyci or apikpuv Tidijfii or rldepai. Nap ovbev Ttdeodat, to reckon of no importance, to disregard: (with an infinitive in Flut. Demosth. |>. 352. I. 43.) 7ra|0a tto\v, the contrary. So ev ovbevbs pepei, or ev ovbevi XcJyw, or vttu Xoyo), riOeaOai : and ri)s Tpaywbias Troir/Tus ovbe ev Xdyw Tidr}, does not even reckon them as anything ; makes no ac- count at all of them: Aristid. Or. ad Capit. p. 550. els evep- yerrlas nQevai /uepos, to reckon as a benefit: Id. pro Quat. p. 326. els \6yov TtOerai, lb. p. 345. And TiQevai in this sense is some- times used elliptic-ally, as pfj tis avrdi — rideiij twv irrpmr]yG)v, lest any one shottld reckon him among the generals : Ibid. p. 251. 'Ev Ka\(p, ev alayjpw, TiQeodtu, to esteem honorable or disgraceful: ev oirovbrj Tideadai, to account deserving of serious attention or solici- tude ; ev abihr]/j.aTi Tideadat, to regard or consider as a wrong or injury: Time, i, 35. e£ 'iaov pev eytay ovbeTTOT av Oeiqv A.l)v, (or opyt- ieadai, to resent: d\\' ov Tiderai ravra Trap' vplv els aKpifiT] fxvripr}v, ol/b\ fjv wpoafjicev, opyfjv: Demosth. pro Cor. [But TiQeadat els ti, of a person, is sometimes, to be destined or appointed to some- thing: see KelaQai, Sect. viii. R. 2.] e|w Xayov Ti6e/jai QutKiwra, I except Phocion: Plut. in Demosth. p. 852. Trpds kuXov rideadat, to approve ; airb KaXov TiBeoQai, to disapprove, npus otwvou rldeadai, for olwrlSeodat, Athen. Deipn. i. p. 13. VIII. (XI.) TideoQai tci ovrXa, is — 1. to stand armed: QeaQe tci orrXa ev rajjei ws Ta^tara, Xen. Anab. vii, p. 395. tovs aXXovs eice- Xevae Tavra Trapeyyvav, kai rideuOai to. oirXa, alios (duces) jubebat eadem ad suos cohort atione uti, ac milites ordinare: y Xen. ib. avelwev b Ki'jpv^, e'i tis fiovXerai ^vpjJLay^elv, TiOeadai 7cap' ahrovs to. birXa, quits se rangeassent avec eux en armes: Thuc. ii, 2. avv avTols OTrXieleadat, Schol. IX. (XII.) — 2. to encamp, to fortify a camp: Oipevoi be irXnaiov y In this place, I believe, as in Xen. abstain from using them: rfj )v iroXiv Toiv M.iXr)olw}>, Kparovv-es i\br], ~a owXa riOerrai '. Time, viii, 25. irept fjiipos rov rely^ovs to. oirXa xaradeodat KeXevoas, Heliod. M\h. vii, 1. v. Herodot. i. c. 62. XI. (XIV.) Karar/0ea-0ai i:\eos, bulav, and the like, to acquire: Ttfxrjv or Srifxiav, to pay a Jine ; ^apiTas or \upiv tiv\, to please, to gratify a person ; els or irpos Ttva. djv yapiv or ti)v evepyeaiav, to confer a favor or obligation on one ; opyijv es Tira, to vent one's anger against a person: Xen. o-irovbiji> irpos nva, to be zealous for him, to interest and exert one's self in his behalf. XII. (XV.) Tvyxaveir, to chance, to happen, is construed with a participle; as, ecpij rv^elv rare ewv apa Arj/jiapyjrw, he said that he happened at that time to be with Dimarelus: Herodot. viii. eTvy^f'uopey TrepiTrarovvres, we happened to be walking : Ceb. Tab. Sometimes the construction is reversed, the participle being that of Tvyyaveiv ', i'liirep Tvy^arwv virea-^Ofirjv, i. e. i/i'Trep vnoayonevos rvy- Xa>'io, a Soph. CEd. C. 1490. v. Eustath. ad II. b, p. 505. and Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 35. Sometimes, but rarely, TvyxavuH- is joined with another participle ; as in Aristot. poet, i, J. With various particles; as, el ovrws erv-^ev, it may be, may be, per- 2 See Wessel. ad Diod. S. xii, 60. xx, 31. Add, 6e7vai Aelou, to make or render smooth : Aristoph. Pac. 1086. ri- Bevai Tr65a, to journey, to travel: Aristoph. Thesm. 1100. rtQiuai vopov, to make a law for others ; rideadai vofxov, to make a law which binds one's self: Xen. Mem. iv, 4, 19. aGerelv, with a dative, to disbelieve, to discredit : Polyb. xii, G. with an accusa- tive, to violate: Polyb. xv, 17. irpocrava- tiOzvcu, to ascribe, to attribute : ALsop. Fab. S2. Genev. 1628. ZiaQiaQai \6yovs, to pronounce, to deliver, to utter: Diog. L. in Socr. p. 57. 1. 28. and in Zen. p. 240. 1. 1. ed. H. St. form. min. inri- 0eo-0cu, to describe, to set forth: Diog. L. Prooem. p. 3. girir'tOeo-Gai, to set upon, to attack, witli iirl and an accusative : Polyb. ix, 7. ft 5' inr4 d(p6a\p.bv, Bx'w tpaiverai, (si sub oculo presseris rem objectam, geminari videbis : Gaza.) if you press an object under the eye, you will see it doubled : Aristot. Probl. Sect. iii. qu. 20. virodeo-- 6ai, to pledge: Plut. in Cat. Utic. p. 1398. 1. 23. ed. H. St. to suggest, to advise : Aristoph. Av. 1362. Eccl. 1154. irpo- xnrorideaQat, to promise: Longin. sect. i. — J. S. a Porson differs from Hermann here, taking rvyxdvwv t0 niean, if I obtained what I asked. "Sensus est, quampromisi, si ipse a Theseo id quod peterem conse- querer:" says he. — J. S. 104, Tvyxayeiv. [Chap. v. haps: Aristot. Etli. iii. c. 8. el rvypi, if il should so happen, if it had so happened. el o'vtu rvypi, suppose for example, say for instance: /Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 2S0. I. 14. [p. 432. I. 7- ed. Reisk.] and so el ti>x<>i without ovrto : Schol. Aristopli. ad Av. 1069. *Ac Tv\r}i perhaps : aipobpa ye ijiOnrre reus eXtrimv, av rvyi] '. Demosth. Ol. ii. p. 21, 3. Reisk. fii) oKvei avpirepityeptaQai atirw, kclv ovto) Tvyjj avveirtarevulai, and if need be: Epictet. c. 22. fivitcu av rvxy, when occasion requires: Demosth. Ol. i. i'i*u> bk 6\iyov varepov, eav Tvyu>, if chance permit, perchance : Plat. Theag. p. 12.9- I. 17- XIII. (XVI.) With ri and av : orav fikv noiuiatv 6 ti av tvx*1 eaaaros, Tapa\h rv es Kvpop vTrrjpfav, Arr. Exp. Al. iii, 27. XP e ' as rtl/ ° s vvapfai Kal (piXavdpwnias npos avrov, Plut. Pomp. — 3. with a genitive of the thing, and a dative of the person: 01 VTrrjpZav rrjs iXevdepias anaay rjj 'EWdSt, Andocid. p. 71. Reisk. — 4. with one accusative of the thing, and another of the person, governed by els oc irpos : £ia ras evepyeaias, as V7rrjp'£av els v/ias, De- mosth. de Fals. Leg. III. — 5. with an accusative of the thing and a dative of the per- son : ras evepyeaias as hjie'is v7n/p£are 'Ajivvrq, JEschin. de Fals. Leg. — 6. with a participle of benefiting or injuring: v/ms ohhev ttwttotc 6 To succeed, to answer: el tmrvyxd.- fortunate or wretched in, Eurip. Bacch. voito, if the plan should answer, should 508. Sievrvx^, t° he perpetually fortu- succeed : Lucian, de Merc. cond. p. 465. nate, Menander, Fragm. — J. S. a. ed. Salmur. Add avrirvyxdveiv, to c Add, vfipifecrdcu, med. without go- get in return, with a genitive, Theogn. .vernraent: to grow wanton and injurious : 642. avvTvyx&veiv, with a genitive : Aristoph. Eccl. 660. also Kadufipifau Sophocl. Phil. 320. viroTvyxdveiv, to without government, Soph. CEd. C. 1535. reply, to answer, Piut. in Ages. p. 1121. — J. S. 1. 8. ed. H. St. ivSvcrrvxeiu, to be un~ Viger. o 106 YffoarlWopajt. [-Cm a p. v. vwiip^afxev tcaKuis Troioiivres, Xen. Anab. v. [5, 7-] All that lias been said of inrapyus applies equally to Tcpavnupyw. IV. 'Tnap^eti' will) a dative, signifies, to favor, to be on the side of: b)~i\6s lorn — ko0' vfxCJv vnupZuv eKeivG), Demosth. de Fi.ls. Leg. vTT«p£et vf/iv »/ t/o) ttuXis, Xen. Anab. v. It is also put for elvai, and that too with a genitive case after it: rb> *; )s wv vmarkX- Xero, Philo/ VII. — 3. to remit or relax somewhat of one's full force or power ; to suppress or soften something of what one could say : ovbep vnoarei- Xajueros fxiXXu) ■noieiadai tovs Xoyovs, Isocr. de Face, ws vrpos 7re7rpa- Koras eavToi/s Ka\ arocnwrarovs avOpwTrovs, /U7]bev VKoaTeikafievov '. De- mosth. de Fals. Leg. finbev vnoarei^Xafxevf irpos iifipiv, Demosih. in Mid. having proceeded to the extremity of outrage. viroarelXaadai irepl (Lv v[xiv ev/ucpepetp yyovpiai, Demosth. Ol. i. In this sense a treacherous advocate is said vTrooreXXeodai. VIII. It is sometimes followed by a partitive genitive ; as, vno- (TTeXXeadat tijs -rrapp^uias, to remit in some degree one's freedom of speech or boldness : rfjs rpocpfjs vnoiTTeXXecfdai, to subtract from one's food: Aristot. in Problem. 'YTTOvreXXeodai sometimes signifies, to be inferior: top Ylbv vno- arAXXecrdai too Flarpos, Greg. Naz. Sometimes, to be deprived of part of ; to be shortened of: vTrocreXXeadai twp ayadOiv, Aristot/ d This sense, says Hermann, is derived o-reAAw, as Hoogeveen remarks, is, to fit from that of the active viroaTzXheiv, or adapt to any purpose, to furnish out, to which is properly a nautical term, to let equip. The following senses of some of down or furl the sails of a vessel: see its derivatives and compounds may he Hermann, ad Eurip. Hec. p. 165. faro- remarked: o-varoXio-ai, Eurip. Or. 1433. o-reWeiv in Polyb. and Plut. is, to go un- Pors. ffvppdtyai, Schol. avao'TeWzadai, der ; vnb tV irapoepetav inroffTeiAavres, to gird up, Aristoph. Eccl. 268. to d/'s- Polyb. iv, 12. vireo-TaAKeio-av inrb top semble ; to conceal one's disposition, \6e,ow. 107 SECTION XIII. — ON THE VERBS (palvopai AND (pipiv. Rule I. Qaivopai has often a signification of certainty and reality rather than of mere appearance : ebei rovrwv rua ku>\vti)v avrjvai, Demosth. pro Cor. ovk (nrtarwr vp~iv, &s ye poi rroXipu), Xen. H. Gr. v. V. (VI.) The imperative (pipe is used in the singular as a particle, with all persons of both numbers, and with the subjunctive, impera- tive, and in interrogations with the indicative, moods ; signifying, well, come, now then, well then, pray, tell me now, &c. as, (pep* "ibw ri nal rrpa^eis pe, Lucian, Vit. Auct. (pipe bt) rrepl rov \pr)fiaparos e'irro}, De- mosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 414. ) vvv, el KaKov eapev, ri yapeW ijpas ', Ari- stoph. Thesm. 795. [788.] (pipe yap, kl'qiv fjplv (pvaeis 'imrwv ayadiov ; iEschin. Socr. i, 10. VI. (VII.) ®epe, followed by an infinitive, is, suppose, put the case ; as, 0e'pe eKXelipai to ovopa T] rb prjpa, Apollon. Alex, i, 3. (pipe rtXeiovas evbs aypov erriKparelv, Id. i, 30. $epe elrreiv is used for olov, for instance, for example, so to speak ; as, fjbe f) yvwpr} Travruiv apa rwv (ptXoa6(pu)v earl, (pipe elnelv, rov FLKaroovos ev KparuXw. its era avayovori, (pipe elneiv rov Ai'a : Porphyr. laud, a Steph. in Thes. [t. iv. S2. e.] And with wv : ws (pipe elrre'iv, Nazianz. ib. so to speak. VII. (VIII.) The same words (pipe e'nrelv are used in anticipating an objection ; as, (pipe elneiv, aXka. vnepiityavos elpi : but you will perhaps say that I am haughty : Dionys. Hal. Arch, iv, 36. VIII. (IX.) Even singly (pipe sometimes means, for instance ; as, ml vovs, 6 (ppovifaetos oiKeios, a.(ppaivei rroXkatcts Kara, ri avpfieprjKOS, naparpaTreis ev vnepfiaWovaais, (pipe, awparos ctppwariats : and even stoph. Tliesm. 256. irepwTeWeiv, to to cherish, Demosth. ia Timocr. p. 744. palliate, to extenuate, Polyb. E. L. 93. 1. 4. ed. Reisk.— J. S. 108 4>fyw. [Chap. v. § xiv. the mind itself, which is naturally allied to sense, often grows foolish from some accidental cause, being unhinged, for instance, by ex- tremity of bodily diseases: Euseb. Praep. vi. p. 247- b. Sometimes olov is joined with it : ttoWcis — evpoiiev vnoOtiKas' olov (jiepe, ev^ijs — wept : as for example : Clem. Alex. Paed. iii. p. 260. epetv signifies also to ravage, to spoil: eajepov yap ctWrjXovs, Thuc. i, 7. IX. (X.) The passive ^petrdai with eSor ko\ws is to be prosperous or successful ; with kcikHis the contrary ; as, ev (pepoLievos ev orparif- yiais, Thuc. sncws cj>epo[.iev(j raj NW^, to JSicias going on very badly or unsuccessfully : Pint, in Alcib. yvovs — Ttiraacpepvrjv ainov eJi'ai tov (cokws (pepeadairu avrov, having discovered that Tissaphernes ivas the cause of his affairs being in a bad state : Xen. H. Gr. iii. p. 501. QepeaQui often governs an accusative; as, , to produce, to bring forth : Eu- rip. Androm. 622. ittcpepeiv tov ir6\ep.ov, to commence hostilities, to begin offensive warfare : Liban. argum. or. Demosth. irepl o-v/jL/xop. — iiupepeiv intransitively, to get the start, to be foremost : Horn. II. ty, 759. cf. 376. iit — ol to'is epyois TrXe'iarov cnre-^ovres : they readily fly to them, [to. koivo. ical Tra r£>v ovo^arwv] or take refuge in them: iEschin. in Ctes. p. 639- [ed. Reisk.] The compound vnocpdavoj is construed in the same manner. — The participle fyQaaas is found joined with another participle : X6Xv£e: Eurip. Med. 1169- v. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. p. 207- sq. Musgr. et Heath, ad Suppl. 1218. Sometimes the participle joined with fdavw is followed by >) signi- fying before, with an infinitive ; as, (pdairjre yap av -noXXaKis avbpairo- burdevres y\ riva nvQeadai f)/j.iwv, for you would be made slaves over and over again before any of us could hear of it : Herodot. Er. c. 108. avvTiQevruL (pQacai ri bpaaavres 1) iraBeiv, they agreed to be beforehand in doing something ere they were overpowered : Hero- dian i, 17, 16. 8 III. With an infinitive it usually signifies, to be able: oh yap (pdavet Ttpoaavajiaiveiv 6 Xoyos, cannot ascend: Philo de Legat. ad Caium. It governs an accusative of what is left behind, or not waited for : 8avei be re Kat rbv dyovra, gets before: Horn. II. xxi, 26l. IV. (V.) The optative of pQ&~ av roloSe ffvyKpvirrwv de^us, he means to 110 fyveiv, Xaipetv. [CHA P. V. S xiv. be rendered, forthwith, instantly ; as, ovk av (pQavots Xeyu>v, tell me immediately: Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 11. ouk ui> ty&npoire aKoXovQovvres, follow me instantly : Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 1. where Ernesti observes t hat this sense results from the primary one of anticipation ; because he who wishes to he before another must necessarily use speed. See also Demosth. adv. Timocr. p. 745. [I. 4. ed. Reisk.] etadv. Aristog. p. 783. [p. 782. 1. 16". ed. Reisk.] Plato Symp. c. 11. Pha:d. c 49. sometimes signifies to have naturally , to possess from nature ; as Herodotus says of the crocodile, yXCoaoav be p.ovvov Orjpiojp ovk fyvcre, ii, 68. So fpevas (fweiv, Soph. El. 1463. CEd. C. 804. The preterperf. necpvKevai signifies elegantly, to be constituted, gifted, qualijled, adapted, inclined, by nature; as, vvrto ravra itecpvKe, De- moslh. irefvKe yap >/ Avoiov Ae£ts eyeiv to ^aplev, rj b' 'Io-o/cparovs fiouXerm: for the diction of Lysias is naturally graceful; that of Isocrales affects to be so: Dionys. Hal. de Ant. Or. a\\o 7rpos aXXo 7T€^u(cer, Epict. Ench. c. 36". netyvKe fiiae'ir, Plato Phaed. p. 80. 1. 5. 7re0u/ca yyefjoveveiv. 7re, or whatever you like to call it: Plato Hipp. Min. p. 369. b Tijv TiTavo/ua-^iav iroitjaas, e'ir E,vfii)\6s eanv b Koplvdtos, ?] 'Apicrlros, j) 6'oris bifitOTe x al P ei ° v0 ~ )ua5o/.teros : or ivhatever the name may be which he prefers: Athen. vii. p. 277. See Plat. Phcedr. p. 273. I. 29. e'xaipe KoXaKevo/uevos, he delighted in flattery: iEsch. adv. Ctes. p. 627. v. Hor. Epod. 2. [v. 10.] Ev(ppaiveadaL has the same construction as yaipeiv. k When yaipeiv signifies to escape with impunity, its participle is generally used, but not always : AW ov ti -^aipujv bis ye 7n]/xoras epe7s, Soph. (Ed. R. 363. ov ti yaipijatav y eaei, Aristoph. Vesp. 186. See Soph. Antig. 75S. Phil. 1299- Herodot. ix, 106. The same is expressed by yeyrjOibs, Soph. (Ed. R. 368. and for ov xn/jowr, k\ouW inform liim that he cannot arm himself tention of doing anything quickly : thus, more quickly than the exigence requires ; aAAa jjAvtoi, v '• Dut when * l h as lts second tense, Plut. 874. And when the formula had once gaud ere, lubentiits facere, amare, solere, become usual in the second and third per- its participle cannot be used: x ai P 0Vres sons to enjoin or express celerity, it was ovo/xd^ovai must not be said, but x^pwvw natural enough that it should be employed bvufidfrvTes may. — J. S, in the first person also, to express an in- RULE 4.] Xpaadai. HI is often used, as in Soph. CEd. R. 41. [401.] — The verb x ai P e "'> and not its participle, is used in Aristoph. Plut. v. 64. ovtoi, /xh rrjv Ar//uriTpa, ^aiprjaets ert : and in Aristoph. Eq. 235. On ov ^aiptov, see Toup. ad Theocr. viii, 40. and ad Longin. xvi. § 3. Xalpetv signifies also to be content: Soph. Aj. 113. It is used in bidding adieu : dXX' 'idi j^aipwv, go, and farewell: v. Eurip. Phoen. 92S. Ale. 81 6. Hence figuratively, noWa elmvra x a ^P eiv T f aXq- 6el, bidding a long farewell to truth: Plato Pbaedr. p. 272. i. e. utterly neglecting it: tov Ma — x ai P £LV ecirras, Aristoph. Plut. 1186. ce fxovov eiri\pr)(j)i£v, tovs (iXXovs ew x n '-P eLV : taking your suffrage alone, I shall pay no regard to others: Plato Gorg. p. 476. And in bidding adieu to what is hated, it rather assumes the nature of an imprecation : rrjv cr>v be Kvirpiv 7ro'XX' eyw xaipeiv Xeyw, Eurip. Hip- pol. 113. xatp&Th) ttuXis, Eurip. Phoeu. 926. ya' l P eiv KeXeiuiv ttoXXcl tovs 'A^apreas, Aristoph. Ach. 200. Xaipeiv is a form used in the beginning of letters, like the English greeting: v. Lucian, pro laps. int. salut. p. 1 97. Schol. ad Ari- stoph. Nub. 609. Plut. 322. Diog. L. iii. p. 223. and Interpp. ad Thorn. M. Xpaadai, which is properly to employ as a means or instrument, is construed- -1. with a dative of what is employed, and an accusa- tive of the use, purpose, or end ; as, 7roXXa teat 'ttuvtoIo. expnaaro avTols, he employed them for many and various purposes : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 404. eyto be ovk e'^w ti xp>/<70juat TOiS T°vrov fxap- TvtTw, but I know not what to do with his witnesses : Demosth. c. Pliorm. p. 5f)0. 1. 44. v. Aristoph. Pac. 229- and 1239. ovk o.p e^ois a ti xp>;<7aio oavT(5, Plato Gorg. p. 485. I. 10. on ovk clp e^ois e&Xdojv o rt xpu> oeavTu, that if you had gone out of the city, you would not have known what to do with yourself, whither to betake yourself : Plato Crito c. 4. — 2. with an adverb and a dative : toIs Kivbwevovaiv ael Kexpfi^evos eirieiKws Kat tfuXavdpuTrios, behaving with indulgence and humanity to those who from time to time were put upon their trial: Plut. in Cic. p. 865. 1. 33. xP'l°^ at evyrw/uoiws eavrtS, to behave reasonably and fairly : Xen. Ages, ii, 25. aveyKXi'iTws wpos enrav- ras xpijaQe rw av/xfepovTi, follow your interest without accusation by anyone: Demosth. de Feed. Al. p. 87. I. 7- [212, 9- ed. Reisk.] ws aroXfjibis xP^fievoy ro~is Kaipols, as not having spirit to make use of opportunities : Polyb. iii. rw ipevbeadai Kal firjbh vyies Xeyeir eroijuios XPnrat, he employs falsehood and misrepresentation without scruple: Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 98. — 3. (4.) with ti in the following phrases, in which the dative governed by xP^^ cu is not expressed : *rape)(Wjue^ r/fids avrovs xPV a ^ aL KsJpw o rt av berj, let US offer ourselves to Cyrus to be employed in whatever may be required: Xen. Cyrop. viii. c. 1. eiriTpeirovTes 'AXe$ay§p« XP^ a ^ aL °' Tl fl°vXotTO, giving full power to Alexander to do what he pleased with them : \. e. surrendering at discretion : Arrian iii, 23. xPV a ® aL T0V ®' "' Tl "- v avros (3ovXr)Tai, to do whatever he will ivith them ; to use his own pleasure with respect to them: Isocr. Panath. c. 39- p- 254. ed. Coraii. — 4. (5.) with a dative only ; as, xPV^at t$ 0ew is, to consult the oracle of a deity : Arrian iii. c. 4. Apollo is said by Lucian 112 Xiopelv. [Chap. v. § xiv. e£a7rar£v rovs ■xpw/ue'vovs ahro), Dial. Jan. et Laf. — 5. with the same construction as in number 1. but signifying to answer : ttclvv edavfiacra e'i ti e'£ei tis ^pyfraaQai rw Xoyf avrov, Plato Phaed. p. 65. 1. 10. to'is 6' kv rip napovri Xeyu/Jierois ov% e£e«s (i re \pi)(yr\, Plato Euthyd. p. 287. '• 15. It may be observed that this is only a virtual or a consequential meaning; the literal signification being the same as that of the passages in number 1. — 6". with a dative of a person repre- sented as speaking, or quoted or cited ; as, Jj avros Xeywv y dXXw Xeyorn xpuj/jLevos, either speaking in his own person, or using that of another: Proc. in Plat. Polit. p. 389- Flirracw els fxiKpa cat ovk a£ia \6yov yprjactfieros, citing Pittacus as authority in trifling and unimportant matters: Pint, de Herod, mated, p. 858. — 7» with a dative of a defect, or vice, or other evil; as, apadla xpiiffde, you show ignorance, or act with ignorance : Thuc. i, 68. rijv fi£Qr)v biafdeipeiv to. re aujfxara Kal rets i^u^as T & v \PM\ikvtoV) (avrrj, viz.) that drunkenness destroys both the bodies and the souls of those who are addicted to it: Prod, in Plat. Remp. p. 3o9- 1. 50. yeipwvi Xpricafievov, having met with, or contended with a storm: Demosth. de Cor. p. 341. 1. 12. rw xeipi'i,

ra izivhvvf, to face the danger; x u ? e ~ iv T0 ~ IS 'Efipaiots eh paxnv, to advance against the Hebrews to battle : Joseph, p. 74. VII. (X.) With an accusative, signifying to hold or contain, and figuratively, to admit or be capable of: \pvKn)p nXewv 1) oktw KorvXas 1 Viger translates eh ra SirXa, x u P e ~ u > armed men, as, ra. '6irka for owXirai in armatus occurrere : but to. '6w\a signifies Xen. Anab. iii, 3, 6. iii, 4, 16. — J. S. Rules— 8.] THE PARTICIPLE. 113 \iopwv, Plat. Sjmp. p. 214.™* /JtTjbe rrjs ijXiKias ^wpoi/ffrjs eytcXrjpa rot- omov : or with an infinitive, when it signifies to be able : ova kavws to. 6ela vofjrrai ywpovuev. Xwpeu' is sometimes to spread : bofcu b' e^oipet — av' 'EWyvoji' Irparov : Eurip. Hec. 114. — To flow ; kywpei e/xov ra bdicpva. It is sometimes used impersonally; as, vv x&>pe7 yeveaBai tovto, it is not possible, &c. when it has often a dative ; ov y(wp^ H ot irepiira- tovvti, there is not room for me to walk. VIII. (XI.) The compound eyy^opelv is much oftener used imper- sonally ; as, icadoaov av ey^wpfj, as far as may be allowed or prac- ticable ; eft yap eyyupei, for there is still time enough : Plato Phaed. c. 65. (in which sense Xen. says, 6 ^povos ky-^wpe'i, de Re Eq. xii, 13.) Sometimes with an infinitive preceded either by an accusative : ov yap av uiira eve^wpet naica elvai, Plato de Rep. iii. p. 408. or by a dative : if ovk eyywpel. etc veas ev irovijpa'is Tpv^als redpa s, orav kleXdioatv, rj ovy^ vnofxevovvTas ctyas, T] pqblus \r)\p6fxevot (3la: they made light of it, as expecting either that the enemy when out in the field would not withstand them, or that they themselves would be able to overpower him by assault: Thuc. iv, 5. Trapa)v 'Adnvaitov : they having determined, when they had determined : Paus. in Ach. p. 398. So boicij aa v, Eurip. Suppl. 129. hehoypevov, Thuc. i, 125. oirires ovTht nepl [.iiKpuiv Kivbvvevofxev, e£o> abeuis noXXa KeKTTJcrQai : when it is in our power, &o. Isocr. Paneg. p. 132. So Demosth. adv. Phorm. p. 588. Eurip. Iph. T. 688. Heracl. 7- Hel. 1174. Here. F. 940. Plat. Synip. xiii, J. ical irapbv eipiivnv liyeiv, ovba/uov top TroXe/jov irporipeiTo : and when it teas in his power to remain at peace, &c. Aristid. pro Quat. p. 248. So apiafxevov, Wessel. ad Herodot. p. 244. beov, Demosth. de Cor. p. 353. I. 40. c. Phorm. p. 585. I. 45. bezant', Aristid. pro Quat. p. 342. and Ep. de Smyrn. p. 295. biatyepov, from biafepeiv, to concern or he of importance ; ey^wpovv, from ky^wpelv, to he practicable or possible; elp-qfihov, Aristoph. Lys. 13. evbe-^ojjevov, it being possible ; evbv, Lilian xiii, 38. %kov, Eurip. Ale. 292. /nerbv, Paus. in Ach. p. 398. ira- paa^or, — ev Traparr-^bv, when a good opportunity is afforded: Thuc. i. c. 120. v. Lennep. ad Phal. Ep. p. 30. sq. irapaTvybv, when an occasion presents itself ; when it is practicable : Thuc. i. p. 51. irpoaijicov, it being a duty, or incumbent, &c. Aristid. de Quat. p. 463. TrpoaTaydkv, it having been ordered: Lysias in Nicom. [p. 837. I. 5. ed. Reisk.] avy^pnGev, it being permitted, if it were permitted: Arr. de Exp. Al. i, 18. ^prjadei', Tuuc. iii, 96. The participle ov is understood, with bvvcnbv, Plat, de Rep. vii. p. 519- with avyyovov, JEscbyl. Ag. 893. v. Keen, ad .Greg. Cor. p. 15. 69-317. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 125. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 277. Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 389- seq. III. (VI.) A Greek participle may sometimes be rendered in English by a preposition and substantive ; as, viKq.v rows tplXovs ev Trmovvru, to get the better of, or surpass, friends in beneficence : Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 35. K.ap%r)boi>iovs eviKwv vaujua^ovvres, they conquered the Carthaginians in a sea-fight : Thuc. i, 13. or by the conjunction because, and a past tense of a verb; as, to be avfifia- Xfas ovofia v7repeftr](Tav, ovk e-mXeX^apevoi, aXXa rat ttjv eipxjvnv avay- KaioTepav 1) KaXXlu) viroXa/jfiai'oi'Tes elvai, they made no mention of alliance ; not through forgetfulness, but because they considered even the peace itself as more necessary than honorable : iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 284. [p. 460. I. 1. ed. Reisk.] IV. (VII.) Participles in conjunction with certain pronouns and particles ; as, rls, olos, ottoIos, oaos, irSts, irbdev, &c. form phrases which cannot well be literally translated; as, airoXe'ts trv ; tis &v ; n » And without interrogation : 5e7 3e &pX ei T0 ^ xaKus Xeyeiv : Demosth. pro fit Sftijai, rls tiv /cat rlvwv, paSlws ovrws Cor. p. 269. 1. 14. ed. Reisk. — J. S. Rule 2— 5.] THE PARTICIPLE. 115 you ivill do for me ? and who are you, to threaten me with that ? Aristoph. Nub. 890. [8S3. Bekk.] tivos 'iveKa ravr enpaTrev 6 v KtvbweiJcreTe biaXoyiaap.evoi, nor taking into your consideration what had been the former conduct towards you of the men for whom you icere about to engage in war: Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 259. •• 2. ed. Reisk.] eyfo aoi £evia.v 'We£avbpov ; nodev XctjSovTi, r) nQs d£- QevTL ; I object to you the friendship of Alexander ! by what means could you obtain the friendship of Alexander ; or how could such a person as you be thought worthy of it? Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 242. 1. 20. ed. Reisk.] So, out be Tfjs aperTjs, w KaBapfi'a, rj rols aols, tis /LieTOvaia ; [?} KaXwv] rj fxrj toiovtmv tis biuyvwais ', irodev Xaj36vTi, ?) 7r£is aliwQevTt ; Id. ib. [p. 26'9- 1. 27- ed. Reisk.] ri ervfijoovXeviov iirolet fieXrlovs 'A^drjiaiovs, r) ttCjs ciyiov Kai Tpetyuv etc vewv evdvs ; or by what mode of nurture and education from their youth? Aristid. pro Quat. p. 268. Polemarch. Kivbvvevonev ovk opdws tov tyCXov Kai eyQpbv Qeadai. Socr. ttms defievoi, u> noXepap^e ; in defining them how? Plato de Rep. i. p. 334. ij3\a\pe fie 6 belva to Kai to -rroajaas, such an one injured me by doing so and so: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 267. tbvto Xeywv boKe'i i/iol icaXws Xeyeiv, in saying this he seems to me to say ivell: Piat. de Rep. i. p. 331. In some such phrases as the preceding, participles have erroneously been thought to stand for verbs ; as, e. g. ov for early, in Plato Euthyphr. c. 12. Xafiovres for eXaftofiev, in Plat. Phaed. c. 19. Xafiovaai for eXafiov m Plat. Pha?d. c. 21. vo/ui£opTes for ropigovcn, in Xen. Symp. iv, 53. Whereas in such passages either a verb actually expressed is to be connected with the participle, as (ptXelrai (and also naaxei) with ov in the first passage, or one understood" from what has gone before ; as, eiricTTafxeOa with XafiovTes in the second passage, avapipvriaKovTai with Xafiovaat in the third, and eirifiovXevovai with vofiiiorres in the fourth. When a verb on which the participle may depend, is neither connected with it in the construction of the sentence, nor to be assumed from the preceding words, the verbeJvai must be understood ; as, 74 5' ov orevovres {f/fiev,) ov Xa^orres (e'iij/uev) tffxaTos p,epos ', in what part of the day, wherever we might be, did we not groan ? iEschyl. in Ag. 56i. vid. et 1520. V. (XI.) A participle in the plural is sometimes placed in concord with a noun of multitude in the singular; as, >; noXis airaaa KeyyvoTes ctKovovm, the whole city listens with gaping attention : Lucian, r)Xdov be els to lepov diiaaires irav to TrXfjQos, all the multitude having sacrificed came to the temple: Xen. Ephes. i, 4. v. Acts v, 16. So in the passage, in which Hoo- eyas: Plat. Fhasdr. p. 228. I. 36. deltas, geveen says a participle is put fcr an instead of being put for Sel^ov, depends imperative, ztsaaTov ityelfis dleifu, ap£d- on the second person of dieipi under-. y.ei>os airb rod irpwrov. Socr. Aei£ew 7s stood. — J. S. irpaiTov, & (ptXSrrjs, rl &pa % iv Trj apiarepa 116' THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. § i. VI. (XII.) The case of a participle is not always that which the case of some preceding word expressed or understood would seem to require; but an arbitrary transition is maiie from one case to another; as, ovbe rols avibtujAtvovatv kv reus arvvlats at,iovTi marTevetv, ws klm:aTMVT(is : nor even in those who adhere to them i?i adversity do they think fit to confide, judging them to act deceitfully : Aristot. vv irpoaeKTfOV vfTiv rols tovtwp Xoyois, eibvras, &c. you must not attend to these mens discourses, since you know, &c. Demosth. 01. Ireov av e'trj Oeatjofxevovs, we must go and see: Xen. Mem. iii, 11, i.P v. Brunck. ad jEseh. Prom. 217- ad Apoll. Rhod. i, 356". ad Aristoph. Lys. 179. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 33. Sometimes a par- ticiple in the genitive precedes a nominative case with which it should regularly have agreed : ravra e'nrovros avrov, ebo^e ti Xeyeiv rw 'Acr- Tvayei : Xen. Cyrop. i, 4, 20. VII. (XIII. XVI.) A participle is sometimes equivalent to an infinitive mood ; as, aKonov/xevos evpiaKov ovbafiuis av aWws tovto biairpn^anevos, I found, on consideration, that I could have effected this by no other means : Isocr. iVa oaa v7reo-%6fur)v ap-^o/uevos tov Xayov, bei£u) Treiroirjicws, that I may show that I have done what I promised at the commencement of my speech: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. Xv7njpos 'itrd' 1 &v, let me tell you you are troublesome : Aristoph. Ach. 455. vid. 459- a»d Soph. El. 294. The participles in these pas- sages are put in the nominative because they are to be understood of the subjects of the verbs. [See on the Infinitive Mood.] See Her- mann, lib. ii. de emend, rat. Gr. Gr. p. 145. The following are some of the verbs which thus take after then) a participle in the nominative, referring to their subject : ayykXKeiv, Theodorid. Epigr. 18. ayvoeiv, Phalar. p. 308. albeladat, Soph. Aj. 507. aiayyreoBai, Id. Ant. 540. avey^adai, Eurip. Med. 38. apveiodai, Id. Ale. Il6l. av-^eiv, Id. ib. 678. heiKvvvai, Or. 800. Med. 548. br^Xovv, Soph. Aj. 472. hiabeiida&ai, Herodot. viii, 118. etc/uuvOareiv, Eurip. Bacch. 39. ere)et£aff0ai, Id. ib. 47. evroeiadai, Eurip. Hippol. 435. ktyiveyeo- Bai, Id. Med. 74. kneiyeodai, Herodot. viii, 2. (which presently after- wards in c. 3. is joined with an infinitive.) einXavQaveaQai, Eurip. Bacch. 184. KaT€xciv, to remember: v. Casaub. ad Athen. i, 5. p. lp. [xavQaveiv, Lucian, Dial. deor. xvi, 2. t. i. p. 244. Herodot. iii, 1. bjioXoyeiv, in a strange construction, in sentent. gnomic, v, 438. iavTov ovbels ofxoXoyel tcctKovpyos Stv. UaveaOai has almost always a participle; seldom an infinitive: see Schsef. ad Schol. Apoll. Rh. p. 223. TretpdaOai, Herodot. i, 77- Troieladai /xeya, Herodot. ix, 111. TioieiaQai Xoyov eAaccrw, Id. vii, 156. noieiaQai P The accusative is common with verbals mosth. 01. ii. p. 21. I. 24. ed. Reisk. in 4ov : t'bv* $ov\6 /j.svov, &s eoucev, ei>- ovda/j.Sis airicrT7]Teov — Oeccpovvras inrb tt)v daifxova elvai auxppocrvvriv fj.lv 5mokt4op v\piv, &c. Polyb. iv, 41. ^reiSc^ (pwpdo-ris, Ka\ acrKTjTe'oc, hcoAaaiav Se (pevKTeov: airaXenrreoi', l-nihiyovra ecp' eKaOTCpovToos: PJato Gorg. p. 326. 1. 6. ed. Bas. 1. ^ M. Antonin. ad Seips. xi, 19. The cir- yap tovto fxkv, to %tjv dirSoov 5tj XP°" V0V > cumstance, that a verbal, in iov is equiva- t 6 v 76 us aA-qdas 'dvSpa evKTeov iaTiv: lent to Ss7 with an infinitive, explains Id. ib. p. 328. 1.5. fieyaAriv Sslktsov this construction : e. g. fxeyaArjv fciKvuvai rrjv /xeTa0oAr]V, eler (pepovT as, e£i6v- 7]j.ias SeT ty/v p-tTaQoAiiv, eicrtyepovTas, &c. ms, airavTa iroiovvTas iToip.ws: De- — J. S. Rule 6-9.] THE PARTICIPLE. 117 7repi irXeicrrov, Diod. S. i, 51. inro/jeveiv, Herodot. vii, 101. ^atVeiv arijieia, Soph. El. 24. Such verbs, however, have sometimes aa accusative of the participle with a reciprocal pronoun : awels kv a<{>vKr

a /j. e v 7] , Kal Kepboavvy ?/yj?crar' 'Afl;/i?j : Horn. II. ^, 247. v » Theocrit. iv, 60. avacrravres fcara^^f'o-acrQe, stand up and condemn me: Demosih. pro Cor. bia tovt 6bvvr)Qe\s, elr 'laws Kenai itvpeT-mv, for wbw}]Qri '• Aristoph. Vesp. 583. - IX. (XVIII.) On participles in general the following remarks may be added : — 1. A participle with ei/j.1 is sometimes used instead of the verb of the participle alone ; as, on awoibas re XeXvicores elev, gal abiKolev : Thuc. i, 6j. ovbev yap biaevb6fj.evot be ae rinvov, chastity. Ke/cTrj^e'cos ought to be sub- KTevovai Xwaas Kal aires eavTOV, afufx'irepoi KaQqvrat : but having put out his own eyes too, both sit: Lucian, Tox. p. 642. [88. c. ed. Salmur.] — 10. Sometimes a participle, instead of taking the case of a preceding substantive to which it refers* is put in the genitive absolute: ovk i\v ac a/jtyiXeiCTOs avQpwwois epis, warpiba fiev bibov- ti> eavrbv $x eT0 > Plut - in Cic - [P* l6%7- '■ 18 « ed * H> St *3 v< Plaf - Phzedr. p. 260. 1. 25. Horn. II. xii, 451. So eXijp is used : v. Horn. II. a, 356. V. Oepwv is in the same manner joined with verbs which signify some sort of motion in whatever manner ; and it conveys a sense of voluntariness, vehemence, precipitancy, fatal impulse : v. Hemst. ad Lucian. p. 349. seq. It has an accusative after it either expressed, as in most places, or understood, as in the first of the fol- lowing: hiwKOfievr] yap wo rfjs 'ArTiKijs, fepovaa (iavTr/v or ti)v eavrijs vavv) ivefiaXe vrfi ep>j)i> Trepieanqtre ra irpayfiaTa, to this state, by his rash and wilful conduct , he reduced our affairs : iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 474. ed. Reisk. tovto) (to a slave unfit for any ordinary employment) cpepovres vrrofiaXXovo-i tovs vloiis, [wilfully, recklessly,] Plut. Trep. iraib. ay. rrjv yyeptoviav Kara yrjv apbrjv cpepiov avedrjice 0/?/3cu'ots, [precipitately and hotly,] Msch. c. Ctes. p. 535. [ed. Reisk.] abucijoas be QiXimrov, KciKeWev cnrobpas, vTreflaXev eavrbv cpepiov Qrjfiatois, [suddenly, all at once,] iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 482. [ed. Reisk.] ftaXXov (poftrjdeis ovyyevi) Kai irpoafarov tyQovov, opyfjs rraXaias Kai flamXiKTJs, ravry cpepoov vnedrjicev eavrbv : voluntarily , by choice, advisedly: Plut. in Themist. ep6fxevos also occurs with a signification of impetuous motion : onus be rives roiis 'Adijvaiovs bta- cpvyoiev, (pepo/xevot eaitrvKTOv is tovs Alyivrjras '. Herodot. viii, Ql. and so in ix, 102. As to cftepwv, and iiywv also, which is sometimes used in a manner somewhat similar, see Horn. Od. p, [345.] II. p, [799.] Od. v, 96. Od. a, 127. Horn, in Boeot. v. 65. [II. /3, 558.] II. x» 350. II. xP, [596.] fbeuywv also is added in a similar manner : olyovTo cpevyovres, Herodot. ifX €T0 Qevyujv avv rrj arparic} iraay, Air. de Exp. Al. iii, 7- oi-xpvTo cpevyovres awoXiirovres r?)v iroXiv, Herodot. Er. c. 33. for tyvyov, ecpvyev : the verb oixecrdat adding a signification of speed, says Hoogeveen. So cnrobpas $x eT0 > Aristoph. Eccl. 196. and rpex^v : irplp t))v epirju KaXe'icrd', cnr ay £,aifjr]v rpex rtf.tujplais, Antipho. In this sense it is joined with superlatives, like ws and on: t] iroXis tcoivwria ris eon twv hfxoihiv, eveney be £wrjs rfjs evbe^o/bLerns aplorns : for the sake of the happiest life possible : Aristot. Polit. vii. III. (XL) It has a signification of plausibility or probability : erbey^ofiei't] vp6(pa, preceded by an adverb : oh yap to. pri/xara ras olicewTrjras e)v ttuXlv, uirobebtbicacriv hp.lv: Demosth. ep. i. p. 108. 1.40. [Here the expression is significative of the good will of Demosthenes towards the Athenians, shown by thankfulness to the Gods for benefits con- ferred on them. p. 1465. 1. 4. ed. Reisk.j v. Hor. Serm. i, 4, 17. KaXQs TToiovvTes -naat to~is ev T is opposed to KaXws or ei woiujv : v. Heliod. iEth. vii, 27.* TeXevrwv, literally ending, takes an adverbial sense ; as, TeXevrivv- res o'iot'Tui crotpojTaroi yeyorevat, at last they imagine they have become extremely vjise: Plato. Phaed. p. QO. 1. 21. TeXevrwv irapa\aj3u)v to fiifiXiov, &c. at last having taken the book: Plato Pha'dr. p. 228. 1. 12. v. and Plat. Pheed. p. 89. I. 40. Phsedr. p. 254. 1. 11. In the same sense, but with a different construction, aTraXXarropai is used : elwojv airaXXaynQt, say at last: Plato Gorg. p. 49 1. 1. 25. VII. Ti/)/w>', the partic 2 aorist of Tvyxavw, often signifies, com- mon, ordinary, trivial, trifling; as, rvyovres avQpwnoi, men of the common herd, everyday persons: (so 6 kviuiv, any one, Soph. (Ed. R. 393.) fj Tvxovaa £ri[xia, any, or a common, penalty: to Tvybv nrcutrpa, ever so trifling a miscarriage : Demosth. epist. ad Phil. the expression not as a graecism, but as condition than they : Dem. adv. Lept, the offspring of that laudable abhorrence p. 490. 1. 16. — J. S. of vulgar language, to which we owe, rf«- V To these participles may be added routing element, iorjire; watery element, avvixoiv : to avvi%ov, what is of chief or for water ; interesting female, for shop- paramount importance ; rbv tSitov rovrov lifter; being launched into eternity, for dobs, eXvo-e jx\v to yeyovbs ey/cA^/xa irpbs being hanged ; having the vital spark ex- rrjv olnlav, licavty 8e iricmv irapeo-x ero T vs iinguished, for dying, &c. &c. — J. S. irpbs t& peWovra Koivwvlas' Tb Se v inrupxovTwv otw rpoira) kuWigto. ajjivvelcrde clvtovs, Thu- cyd. vi. Ipwv be 6 Nt/c/as ro arpdrevpa dOvfiovv, ws etc tliv inrapxov- tu>v, kQapavvk re koi irapefxvdelTo : as well as the state of their affairs, as circumstances, would allow : Thuc. vii. ofxws be, ws en twv virap- \6vTwv,iboKei xprjvai fir) evbibovai : as far as their means, or condition, would allow: Thuc. viii. x e 'P ovs elvai rwv vwapxovrwv, not to make the most of one's means, ox favorable circumstances: Dem. Ol. ii. p. 18. 1. 12. ed. Reisk. and in the singular: to be vvv vndpxov irepl o-e toiovtov eanv, the circumstances or state in which you are placed: Plato Ep. iv. p. 320. I. 28. Kara avrov to virdpxov, Ari- stot. Eth. i, 10. In the same manner, ra itapearwra, iEschyl. in Prom. 216. in Ag. 10fj2. X. (XI.) 'Yirapxovaa Tipf), a fair or just estimation or price : a vTrapxuv tempos, the time in general of any event or incident : iva irpos top virapxavra Kaipbv eicaard OeupfJTe, that you may consider each transaction with reference to the time at which it took place : De- mosth. pro Cor. XI. (XII.) *£lv, the participle of elfil, signifies living, alive: eariv avTave\pi6s tov vvv ovtos 'A\Kij3idbov, Plat. Etithyd. p. 275. 1. 11. and 6 jut) S>v, he who is dead ; tov yap ova ovra a?ras e'iwQev eiraivelv, all are accustomed to praise the dead: Thuc. ii. and ol eaofievoi, those about to live hereafter ; posterity : Horn. II. (3, 119. The verb elvai itself is sometimes to be living: Heliod. iEth. iv, 12. Matth. ii, 18. and to elvat, life, Heliod. iEth. i, 29. ix, 6, 27- v. Tibull. iii, 5, 32. Virg. ^En. vi, 870. XII. (XIII.) The same participle signifies also an unimpaired or undecayed state: dpxv ovaa, a magistracy still in vigor and power ; 2 The following is a better authority t<£ crvyKGipevcp XP^ VC P> ra wroKeipeva rots for rvxhv, perhaps : izoia yap irp6 ovuav Trapiffravres vjxiv, iifiapravety : to err, in making the subject of deliberation appear to you different from ivhat it really is : Demosth. 01. iii. [p. 28. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] Hence to ov and to. oPTa, truth : Kara(JKe\pofiepovs, el ra ovra e£ayye\Aerai : to see whe- ther the truth were reported: Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 7. and 6 &>v Xoyos : — ov tov ovra eXeyev 'A^atois \6yov, the truth: Paus. in Ach. p. 419. to. 6)'Ta Xeyeiv is also, to say lightly : Plat. Theast. p. 179. In the dative singular r£ ovri is the same as optws, a-e^vdis, in reality, in truth. Ta oVra is sometimes, goods, possessions, property: tovs (pvyabas be avTaiv Ka.Tie.vai eir\ rots ^fjiaeai tu>v ovtiov, ore etyvyov : to return on the terms of having half the property they possessed when they were exiled: Arr. de Exp. Al. ii. c. 1. CHAPTER VII. THE ADVERB. SECTION I.— On the terminations of certain adverbs. Preliminary observation. — Adverbs of place take after them a genitive, either of more general signification, or more particular; as, irov yfjs ; in what part of the earth ? TcavTayov yijs, in every part of the earth : evTavQa Tfjs ijireipov, at this part of the continent : Thucyd. i, 46. nov tov TrpoawTTov ; in what part of the face? oOev ane^Ldas jue tov Xoyov, Aristoph. Nub. 1410. c Adverbs of time also take a genitive: dj/e riys ij^epas, late in the day: in Thom. M. oipe tov lieToirwpov, late in the autumn: Lucian, Tox. p. 49. see also Dionys. Hal. Arch. viii. ISA. V. H. ii, 23. Matth. xxviii, 1. Ttr^viKa ti~)s fifiepas ; what time of day ? Aristoph. Av. 149S. evTavQa. tov caipov, then. Rule I. Adverbs signifying in any particular language generally end in ot\ ; as,'E/3oat<7r*, in Hebrew ; 'EWr/vtort, in Greek ; Tw/xaVort, in Latin ; and this form is preferable to 'EjS/jcukws, &c. 6 'AUti rriv firj olaav avr iXax^v itfiv ejusmodi, quae irrita sit, et pro nulla haberi ouTij? 5-fiirov, Demosth. in Mid. p. 543. debeat, ideo, quod sit illegitima : says 14. ed. Reisk. Midias had failed of ap- Reiske. — J. S. pearance (oi/it a-K^vra) in a cause before c But '66ev is not to be joined with the arbitrator, and therefore eprt/xov SxpXe \6yov : ene'iffe 8', '6dev aireffx^s fie, tov SiKTjv. Exceptione agere sententias dicta? \6yov ^eVei^i : v. 1390. ed. Bekk,— -J. S. Rule 1—5.] THE ADVERB. 127 II. Adverbs in bbv have a peculiar elegance; as, ayeXrjbby, in troops; fiorpvbbv, in bunches; kiravafiXr)bbv, over the rest of one's clothes; \ew\ tovtovctl be elpivea e'/yuara Xevna eiravafiXrjbbv tyopeovot, Herodot. ii. superinjectim. H. St. in ind. Thes. L. Gr. — J. $.] o/.iodvy.aboi', unanimously, Acts Ap. ii, 1. cToiyr\bbv, in rows; ovotopfir)bbi' avA toix^v TtOeires, oiroos fi>) Sta^eoiro e-rrl ttoXv to x&fxa : p. 327. 1- 5. ed. Bekk. . (f>op^j.bs yap \plados, outis evaXXaZ, e^wv to TiXey/na ear/: Schol.] napavTabbv, standing by: Horn. II. o, 22. Theogn. 470. TceptaTabbv, standing round, all around: Q. Calab. x, 402. Pseudorph. Arg. 3l6. Karwuabbv, across the shoulders, over the shoulders: Horn. [II. \p, 500.] yvwfxribbv eirwdavopTo, suffrage by suffrage, vote by vote: Dionys. Hal. Arch, viii, 43. III. And so those in t\ or el : clkovit), without labor or difficulty : (literally without dust, used by athlefee :) Herodian ii, 14. unbpuTi, easily, (without sweat :) Horn. I!. 0, 228. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 9. cnrovnrl, without labor: [fifjvat £' intovrju, Plut. Alcib. p. 357- I. 20. ed. H. St. — J. S.] a ixeTaaTpe-KTl, without turning round, without looking behind: Xen. Symp. iv, 50. Phil. J. de Confus. ling. p. 255. aipotyrju, silently, without any noise, in Antonio, els ccivt. ii, 6. figuratively, without boasting; ay eXaarl, without laughing: Plat. Euthyd. p. 278. 1. 41. abaKpvrl, without weeping or tears: Hero- dian i, 4. acrrerajcrl, without groaning : Msch. Socr. dial, de Mort. c. 2. oi'atjuwrl, without blood: (and avatjuwrel,) Horn. [II. p, 497' Od. a, 148.] a/iaxnTt, without a battle or fighting : Dion. Hal. Arch, viii, 43. axponobqA, on tiptoe: Lucian, D. Mort. actcap- ba/uvKTt, (or aaicapbafxvKTe),) without winking : Xen. Cyrop. i, c. 27. ovofxavTi, by name: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 15. TtavoTpaA, or iravaTpariq., (TravdTpaTirj, Herodot. i, 62.) with the whole army. IV. Of those in ei are the following : akXavcrTel, (or aicXavtJTi,) without weeping; avrofioet, at the first shout or onset ; avTo\pei, at first sight ; iravavbe\, (or itacravbei, Thuc. Xen. Cyrop. i, 22. or Traa&vbl, Xen. Ages, ii, 19.) with utmost force or exertion ; ■jzavbyjiiel, publicly ; and, without exception of any of the people : Thuc. i, 73. one and all ; atcripvKTe\, without proclamation by a herald: [without intervention of a herald or messenger with the caduceus or symbol of peace: Thuc. ii. p. 219- 1. 3. ed. Bekk.] afiaxel, without battle or fighting: Thucyd. i, 143. dro/cet, without interest: Dio Ivii. iravoiKe\, with the whole family : iEschin. Socr. Dial, nepl nXovr. p. 26. V. Of the termination brjv, and having an acute on the penultima, are, avebrjv, which signifies first, laxly, loosely : and thence, at full speed, without check: iEschyl.Choeph.8O6. and remissly, negli- gently : Soph. Phil. 1153. and at full liberty, without restraint; eneibav fiovXwvrai avebr]v rols Trap' avrols %vyyeveadai ao(j)i, by choice of the richest ; ov yap fjiovov apiaripb-qv, uXXa ical rrXovrivb^v o'corrai beiv alpeiodai roiis apypvras '. not only on account of pre-eminence in worth, but on account of pre-eminence in wealth also: Aristot. de Rep. ii, 11. and Xoyabqu, with selection or choice ; Xuyabrjv (pipovres XiQuvs, Thuc. iv, 4. VII. Bcibr)v, step by step, slowly ; Polyb. iii, 65. opposed to bpo/xo), Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 62. The compound avafiab-qv, with the feet stretched upwards, the head hanging down : d Aristoph. Ach., where however by arafiabriv we may understand a higher place, and by Karafiabqi', a lower. VIII. kiappyb-qv is expressly : btappqbrjv cnrayopevojv, roiis virevdv- vovs //>) oreipai'ovv, iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 275. 'E7nypa/35>jv, of the same signification as Xiybqv, kmXlybriv, eTvf^avbrjv, ctKpodiyws, is super- ficially: v. Horn. II. , 166. and Eust. p. 1229. IX. 'EmTpoyabqu and kiribpoixabriv, on a run, whence figuratively, eiribpofxabrjv Xeyetv, cursorily. TJapabpofxabrjv has the same sense as kinbponabriv ; but nerabpofiabrjv is in pursuit, by running after : Mom. II. e, 80. KctTaXoyabr)i> is in prose: Arr. Exp. Al. i, 12. Plat. Symp. p. 277. 1. 14. X. Kpi/fibt)i> is secretly, and is sometimes used like an adjective; as icpvjjbijv korlv fj xprifos, secret : Demosth. XI. WpoTpoiT(xbr\v, precipitately I rrporpoirabqi' vpbr)v, promiscuously : yybqv and Ke^yfievus, at random. As adjectives are sometimes used adverbially, so adverbs have often the sense of adjectives : as, ?/ rrapavriKa ijbovi), present pleasure : r\ wj aXtfdws yf), the true earth: Plato Phaed. c. 58. 01 yvno(.b) s fiX6(jo s d Tn Aristoph. Ach. 410. ava$6$i)V vvv\ 8e ireivuv, avaPaS-nv ai/avavop.ai. — iroie'ts, 'E£bi> Karafidb'Tjv ovk erbs %- J. S. \ovs iroieTs. ava0. is on a lofty seat or * ^opdSrjv virb Terrapin? KeKOfxia^ivov : throne : in pomp and state. But in Ari- Lucian in Gall. p. 242. c. ed. Salmur. — stoph. Plut. 1123. avaPdb~rju is, with the ira p.01 (pdoyyct. Teirerai , besides its ordinary meaning, accurately, with nicety, signifies— 1. rigorously, severely. II. — 2. exactly enough ; just as much as may be necessary, and no more: to be icpavos irpos rfju irXr)yi)v ciKptfiws ual [xoXis avrea-^ev, tjjerre tGiv Trpwrwy \pavcrat rpi\(H)v ri)v irrepvya rfjs noiribos, the helmet just, and but just, sustained the blow : Plut. in Alex. III. — 3. parsimoniously, sparingly: as a.Kpij3eia is used for par- simony or frugality by Plut. in Pericl. "AXXws re mm'. The primary and proper signification of dXXus is ■ — 1. otherwise, in another way or manner, by other means: some- times, for other reasons, on other accounts, as i]v be ti bey drjpiov eVe/ca entfcaraiie'tvat, f/ aXXus ftovXrjdwcn biarpixpai irepl rijv Qrjpav : Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 11. — 2. It signifies, rashly, unadvisedly, at random; ws ervye, as Hesych. interprets it : to. — opdws fiovXevdevra. — rw rovs eviaravTas &XXws ypfaaaQai bieXvpapdr) : Demosth. Ep. i. p. 1466. [ed. Reisk.]? — 3. Hence, in vain, to no purpose, fruitlessly : as &XXh>s Xeyeiv, Plato Phaed. c. 64/'— 4. in other respects, at other times, independently of something superadded : 6 6' ayrivwp kar\ ical iiXXws' vvv av puv ttoXv fiaXXov ayi]vopir\aiv ei'ijicas : Honi. II. i, 6Q5. — 5. merely, absolutely, nothing else but; ol b' avriXeyovres, oyXos aXXws kcli fiaaKavia KaTecpaivero: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 348. [ed. Reisk.] ip/ovvTO elvai tijv ovyypas kcu oypXri eon, Theocr. xxi, 34. aXXws re, and besides, Soph. / It is strange that Zeunius should have 8' ovv eveica rat/ret epcoras ; Venus : &X\a>s translated these words, difficilis ipsis erat iipS/x-nv, it was a random question; Tasked restitutio. Thucydides gives a reason for no particular reason: Dear. Jud. p. why the removal was grievous to the 162. E. ed. Salraur. See also Plut. Moral. Athenians: Sick to ael eluQevai robs ttoA- t. ii. p. 111. 1. 14. ed. Wyttenb. 8vo. — Aoi/s ev rots aypoh SiaiTaodai. p. 242. ed. J. S. Bekker. — J. S. * Tf KivvpSfied' ciAAws ; Aristoph. Eq. s Secius, prave, perperam, says Reiske. 11. &\\ws, Si 'rav, liter eveis ; Aristoph. "AAAcos here appears to have reference to Pac. 1113. — J. S. dpOcos, otherwise than rightly. In the * Oi/'tco yap av rjfxels Sitcaicas KarayeXdi- following passage, it is, at random ; vva- fieda, els aWcas euxcus '6p.oia Xeyovres : rbs aXXcos irK.avdjp.evoi rives eirnvyxdvov- Plato de Rep. vi. p. 430. 1.41. ed. Bas.l. civ avrrj, Plut. Sertor. p. 1056. 1. 19. ed. See Toup on Longin. § vii. — J. S, H. St. and in Lucian : Mercur. tIvos Viger. r 130 "Afxa. [Chap. vii. CEd. It. 1110. Hence— 7. ctWws re Kal} especially ; literally, both in other respects, or on other accounts, and — . liXXais re travTws Kal Knaiyvi]T»is nuTobs, you ought to gratify them, both for other rea- sons, and because they are your father s sisters : iEsch. Prom. 637. roXfinriov rb uXifies eiiteiv, ilXXws re Kal 7repi uXnOelas Xeyovra: Plato Phaedr. p. 247. aXXws re rat el, Plato Kp. ix. ttuvtwv airo- arepeladai Xvirnpbv eoTi cat ^aXenbv, ctXXws re kuv inr' e^Opav rw tovto r) : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 227- 1*8. eel. Reisk.] dXXws re cat evreibr} is ovbeva ovbev evewrepiciov, Thuc. ii, 3. ohc ai]bes, dXXuts re Kal T})fbe rijv &pav. Plato Phaidr. p. 229. When cat is thus added to ilXXos 7e, the first member of the phrase, ciMws re, has respect to what we pass by without consideration or specification, and the second, cat, to what we urge or dwell on as most important; but in the form aXXws re, without teat, the principal consideration is signified by dXXws, the first member, relating to what is passed by or not dwelt on for the present being omitted and understood. So that a\Xws re, (literally, and besides, and moreover,) carries in effect the same signi- fication as aXXujs re cai, although by a different form of expression ; and where cat follows so separated as in aXXws re el Kal, and the like forms, it is not to be considered as a part of the phrase transposed, but as having no reference to dXXws re : ctMd yap av (pain ecc'iorry*" twv \pv\wv ttoXXu erw/xara (cararp//3etv, aXXws re el cat iroXXa ern fiiwn X Plato Phaad. p. 87. d. (133. Heind.) especially (literally, and more- over, and over and above) if it should live, too, many years ; tovs /o) fiondelv havovs, aXXws t eav wpbs tovtw cat dpaoe~is wai, navTa rpoKOV KwXveadai : Xen. Mem. i, 2, 59* o\\us re eireibi) irepl twv yvpvatrlwv twv tT]s tp v X^ s a-fificrfinrovariv, especially since, &c. Isocr. ad Nicocl. [p. 59. 1. 13. ed. Battie.] iiXXws re ovbk Koa/jlav olaav, Julian, Cses. p. 7« aXXws re ovbe wpnv eyw, &c. Id. ib. p. 30. IV. "A/xa is elegantly joined with a dative case; as, apa rw catpj, as soon as an opportunity offered, or, seasonably : a/xa r« 7rpw't, with the dawn; a/xa ry ecnrepa, on the arrival of the evening ; a/xa ttj a/tapr/a, in the very commission of the crime : Antipho Or. p. 664. [ed. Reisk.] a/xa rw yeXwrt, Plut. in Caos. p. 712J V. Also with a verb in the infinitive mood instead of a substantive: 01 yewpyol 7roXXoarw pnvl twv Girepparwv rr)v erriKapwiav Kop.iS,ovrai, cat oi»x dpa rw KarafiaXe'iv : and not as soon as they have sown them : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 270. 6 lefir/pos a/xa t<5 (3aaiXevs avabeix- dfipat, — bia (ppovribos eaye : as soon as he was made emperor : Hero- dian iii, 2, 9. a "d with an indicative mood followed by cat and ano- ther verb expressive of something following immediately on what is signified by the first ; as, a/xa biaXXaTTOvrat, cat tT]s ex&pas rfjs irpo- yeyevypevns etuXavdaiovTai : as soon as they are reconciled, they for- get their previous enmity : Isocr. Paneg. v. Lysias p. 820. [1. 9-] ed. Reisk. v. Virg. Mn. xi, 864. Sometimes there is an ellipsis of the verb, as el o'ierai, fjplv napa twv Qewv, a ev^bpeda, yeveadai av Kal J "A/to yap r<§ Artftoo-Bsvei Kal o xoprjybs the choregus was outraged : Dem. In vfipi£€To,for at the same time with De- Mid. 525, 8.— J. S. mosthenes (in the person of Demosthenes) § iii. Rule i.] 'AfxeXet. 131 a/j.a, the moment we pray, together with our prayers : [Kal t't/ua r« ev^eadai j/juas : ] .ZEschin. Socr. Dial. Trepi ttXovt. p. 50. and some- times re is added to ciaa, as a/ia re SmWarroj/rat, (fat, &c. VI. With a participle, kch following with another participle ; as, a/na yeXu>i> re rat epvdpiuJv, .ZEschin. Dial, ii, 11. or with fiev before one participle, and be before another following : &pa fxev ™ Krr/fjiMvi \api$.6nevos, cijia be tov Nai/cwcXea riLv fiera ravra eveKev vwoTroiovfxevos, at the same time, and — : Heliod. iEth. v, 16*. Or with one parti- ciple, a verb following without rat : as &fta yap rotavra cnretXaiv nXr)- yrjv evereivaro niKpav, with these threats he at the same time struck, &C. cfyza yap rw tov awfiaros avdei Xt'jyovrt, — o'iyerai cnronTafxevos : for as soon as the bloom of personal beauty begins to fade, he flies away at once: Plato Symp. p. 183. 1. 42. So a/ua t$ airy aa elvai fiovXevtra^evov : in truth these things also resemble the contrivances, &c. [in answer to an enumeration of several instances of Providence in the constitution of animals ; so that afxe^ei expresses a confession.] Xen. Mem. i, 4, 7. r/^iov yap tov ■nXovTov Karacppovelv bibaaKovra, rrpwrov eavrbv Trape%eiv v\pt]X6repov XTifx/xuT^v afieXei Kal Trparriav ravra biereXet: and in reality, in fact, he constantly acted on this principle: Lucian, Nigr. t. i. p. 65. [p. 39. A. ed. Salm.] afieXei irepiepyla bofciev elvai -jrpoairohjais Xoywv Kal 7rpa£eiov f.ier cvpoias, in reality : Theophr. Ch.* h TlvQSfievos 8e avOis aodevus %X elv av ~ Ka ' KaBiaas ntap avrcp, ^aro rr\s x ei P^ s ' rbv, e0a5t£ei> btySpevos : Kal twv Ka\a>v eicelvov 5e elirdvros, '6ri vvv 6 irvperbs airo~ tivi 7Tfpl dvpas anfivTriaev doeAQbv 8e, Kex&pflKW, 'AME'AEI, nafilov, eatji ovfififjvat, such, for example, as, &c. Aristid. de Quat. p. 422. II. (VI.) 'Ai'Tixpv, over against, vis a vis, and avriKpvs, openly, are sometimes, by orators and poets, used one for the other. [KaravTiKpv tTjs 'Ifirjpias, Diod. S. v, 17 '. Herm.] l III. (VI!.) Botli, but, oftener avriKpvs, are used by Homer for quite through, through and through; as, amKpvs be bC av-^evos 7]X0ev aKbiKT] : (which is expressed by biafiirepes and biaxpu also.) So in Thuc. olo/ievoi TrvXas (tov rei^ovs or ri)s woXews) rets dvpas tov oIk^jxu- tos elvai, Ka\ avriKpvs biobov es t6 e£w : and that there was a thorough- fare, a way quite through, to the outside of the town: ii, 4. IV. (VIII.) "AvriKpvs, as a military term, signifies in front, in the van, and is opposed to Karornv, in the rear : ol fiev avriKpvs eirwvres, ol be Karomv : Dion. Hal. iii. V. (IX.) It may sometimes be rendered undisguisedly ; as in ov Kpvipa ml bi evXafleias rrjv eavrov yvio\XT)v airo(paiv6fj.evov, aXX' avriKpvs kcii dpaaews : Dion. Hal. viii.™ Sometimes by the adjective palpable, or glaring ; as in avriKpvs biafioXij ravra, (underst. kariv :) cest une pure calomnie que cela. n VI. (X.) In later writers it has a signification of proportion, rela- tion, or conformity : ras uev dXXas ycipiras ov tG>v irpay/uaruv avriKpvs elvai avfiflefirjicev, equal to, on a par with, in proportion to : Aristid. in Exord. Panath. to. vvv ye, avriKpvs tTjs HioKparovs /j.eyaXo\pvxlas, ov% iipiraoe tov Kaipov PovXtuiiov: but now, matching (or rivalling) the magnanimity of Socrates, he did not seize the opportunity , although suffering extremity of hunger : Themist. Or. ix. VII. (XI.) It is sometimes, in truth, in reality, properly, truly: [evidently : manifestly :] irapadeuevov be tov deov fxovov avriKpvs ovra, Euseb. Praep. 1 1 . avriKpvs XpionaviKws, aXX' ov^l 'lovbainQs $wv avairefyvev : Id. Demonstr. i. Sometimes directly, straightforward : ra^ora avXXafiuvres, ayow- aiv avriKpvs ws atroKrevovvres : Lys. adv. Agorat. p. 497- [ed. Reisk.] kciXXiov i)v avriKpvs irapa r<3 KaXXnrTrw KaraXnre~iv to apyvpiov, De- mosth. adv. Callipp. p. 1242. [1. 22. ed. Reisk.] VIII. (XII.) It signifies also expressly : i\ji)8appevas yap dpr/ws evpioicopev Xee'as abacas, Soph. Aj. 25. Socr. airoXel KciKtara. Streps. a\\' (5 'yaff, airoXtoX' dpr/ws : Aristoph. Nub. 724. [7l6*. Bekk.] . Texvr) signifies two things, art or skill, and craft, artifice, or fraud: hence two adjectives, a.Tex v0S > unskilful, and drex^s, candid, open, 'Earl BcSkiSos xpyvfd>s &VTiicpvs Kiyuiv has cited under Rule 11. In all the uses els toss NecpeAoKOKKvyias, Aristoph. Av. of avriicpi) and &vTiupvs it is very easy to 962. expressly. So the word signifies also trace a relation to the primary meaning, in that passage of Isasus, (de Haguiae over against or opposite, derived from the Hered. p. 282. Reisk.) which Zeunius preposition avrl.—J. S. 134 'Arpt/aas, &c. [CHAP. VII. § iv. guileless. From arex>os comes the adverb arfyrws, inartificial fy, un- skilfully, clumsily; and from dre^i'iys the adverb arexvws, which signifies — 1. guilelessly, openly, candidly, sincerely: tovto be arrXuis, Kai dre^fws, kcu 'laws evi/Ows, ej^w nup ifiavrw : Phil. Phzcd. C. 49. — 2. really, truly : ootyov ye tout), teal yepovTi irpootyopov e^e.vpes a.Te\v(os ev ! ws ovbev arexvws byies eanv ovbevos ! Aristoph. Plut. 302. ovb' av bieXexBetrjv dre^vdis rols aXXots, Aristoph. Nub. 424. Bp&vruiV arexvws 6 ti xPy£° vtTl > Aristoph. Nub. 452. v. Nub. 437. Also precisely, just : >)) At" eywy ovv utex^ws enadov tovti wore, Aristoph. Nub. 407. also plainly, evidently: KaTibelvol,ews, dre^»ws, Ka.ipq.biws: Plato Euthyphr. 5. II. 'Arpeyuas and urpe/Lia have nearly the same signification; the latter is used by writers after Homer, as Eustathius observes, but by Homer only when the metre requires it, as in II. o, 318. They signify not only without motion, steadily : and gradually or gently ; but also accurately, regularly, in due order and place, methodically ; as, toIs XpoviKols bonel. fiaXXov Qovicvbibi)S ovfxfepeadai, naiirep ovbe avrols arpefxa (Tvprarrofieyois : although the chronology itself is not accu- rately adjusted : p Plutarch, in Themistocl. p. 125. III. "E^e arpe/jas is a phrase used by Homer and Aristoph. keep still: Nub. 200. — stop: ex' arpefxas'.avTOv oryd'' eiriax es T0V bpofiov : Aristoph. Av. 1200. Hold, (to a. person speaking:) &kovoov ?'/cV nave twv TracpXaafxarMp' e^' a-pe/ua : Aristoph. Av. 1244. q Stay, make yourself easy : ex arpe/jas' Knt tovto yap ia.aofxa.1 aoi : Lucian, Charon, p. 141. "Ex eiv * s joined with a-pepta also : a-pe/iiav e^etv, to remain still, Xen. Cyrop. vi. p. 165. Av, (which Hoogeveen conjectures to be properly the neuter of the adjective ays, i. e. avros iu the dialect of the Lacedaemonians and Cretans,) signifies — 1. els tovttiow, backwards, back ; as, av epv- aav, Horn. II. a, 459. they bent back the neck of the victim : and av epvovra, drawing back the string of the bow : Horn. II. 6, 325. — 2. once more, to give another example, on the other hand, on the contrary : Tavra juev 6 nap' ifxov Xe£eC rols be Trap" v/jlwv vfieJs av eiria- TeXXere 6 ti vfuv boKel cvfxcpepov elvai : but you on the other hand, or also, instruct your ambassadors, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 30. ovbafiws ye TaTrtt) efiavTov eis ttjv twv apx Glv fiuvXofjievwv rd£uv — ovbe eh ttjv bovXeiav av (on the other hand) efxavTuv tuttw : Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 7 and 11. v. § 13. ovb' eanv oiibevl twv rjfxeTepwv exdpwv Tpoiraiov ovbev ckj>' rifxtiv yj/Tiv b' av (on the contrary) airo 7roXXwv : Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 4S0. [1. 20. ed. Reisk.] See Plat. Phaedr. p. 251. de Rep. iv. p. 420. Aristoph. Vesp. 57/ — 3. It is put for -naXiv, again : P Perhaps arp4fj.a has here its ordinary to interrupt another. — J. S. sense : the chronology was not settled on r In Aristophanes, a Boeotian being such a firm basis as to remain undisturbed asked whether he will take back from and uncontroverted. — J. S. Attica earthenware, or apuee, (a kind of i In this sense Plato often uses the small fish,) in exchange for iiis own goods, phrase, when in liis dialogues something answers, aepvas r) Kepafiov ; aAA' %vt e/cer occurs to one speaker which induces him ah\' '6 rt Trap' afilv p.i) 'art, ra5e 8' ah iro\v : Rule 2—6.] AZOi, AbrUa. 135 see II. a, 540. , 394/ for be : Horn. II. A, 3(57. flnd v. 10S. where it answers to fjev. It appears to be put for br), then, therefore: Horn. II. /3, 493, 618/ AZdi is, in that place, there: e. g. Horn. II. e, 296. But aZdis (al- tis in the Ionic dialect, or in the language of Homer,) is — 1. back, back again, II. k, 62. e, 257. — 2. (3.) on the contrary, contradic- torily : elireiv — ws (jXajSq re eari rw epwueva kui kpCovri, Kal avdis, uis fieytaTov tu>v ayad&v Tvyyavei ; Plato Phaedr. p. 263. — 3. (4.) again, a second time: aXX aZdts aZ rvnTtjcro/uai, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. Md.\' avdis (and paX' av) is a phrase used when what immediately precedes it is to be considered or understood as said twice, by which means it becomes more emphatical ; as, o'lfxoi yuu\' nZdis, v. /Esch. Choeph. 876. iboii jua\' avdis rovdi' erepov there again! another blunder! Aristoph. Nub. 670. as if one should say, there, there! — 4.(5.) hereafter, at a future time: nav /d) irapavTiK, aZQis elai ^piici/iot: Eurip. Or. 907. ovb' aZdis aZ 6. and so in Attic writers. IV. AvTUa in its most common acceptation is, forthwith, presently ; in which sense it is opposed to vvv by Plato ; vvv fiev — rfjv evbalpova itoXiv irXarrofxev — • airim be n)v evavriav (ncexpofieda : de Rep. iv. p. 420. and when the interval between the present time and that signi- fied by airiKa is to be represented as exceedingly small, fiaXa, or hri fiaXa, is often added to amiKa : dp' oiad'' on aiirovs yfids avrina fiaXa bei)oei fxayeadai ; Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 8. [v. Demosth. in Aristog. p. 778. 1. 25. ed. Reisk.] u V. VI. But it signifies also present, at the present time; as, 6 avrina (j>6f3os, at ain'ra ffbovai. And so the compound 7rapaur/ca : rr)u irapavTitca iiovyLav, Demosth. de Feed. Alex. p. 215. [ed. Reisk.] rrjs TcapavriKa iibovfjs, Id. Ol. iii. p. 34. [ed. Reisk.] 'Er 7w 7rapavTttca, at the present time, for the present. In this sense it is opposed to what signifies any thing future ; ovtios >/ irapavrix ybovy) ical pamiLvr\ fie'iciov ttr^uei too nod' varepov avvoiaeiv fieXXovros ! Demosth. Phil. ii. Ach. 903. ^5i/ troKKovs ixBpovs e%eiv ; Aristoph. Eq. 207.— J. S. ovW av a.s Trenaibevfievov. avriKa yewfxerpiav uej^pi fiev rovrov c^tj beiv fiavdaveiv, Zoos, &c. Xen. Mem. iv, 7, 2. v. Ern. and Hindenb. also Xen. (Ec. xix, 18. Cyrop. iii, 1, 29. Callim. in Jov. 76. Particles are sometimes added : avTka yap, el fiev elpi]vri boKel, &c. Xen. Hier. 7« and iEschin. Dial, ii, 24. avrUa ye 6 fiev "H\ws ovroal, ovb' ooov Kvy)aaaQai to ovs (7rjjy. RULE I. AvroQev signifies — 1. eij avrov tottov, thence: b rrarrip b rsbs X er0 avr b9ev : (ec tov bev/juorripiov) Demostll. adv. Androt. p. 614. [ed. Reisk.] irodev, JLvdqpe, , r\ efibv eivai (pfj ; kfibv brfXo- voti. elra, ov fxev i\v Trap' kfiov hiKnv — Xujie'iv, — e£,eXnres' ov b' eyw fxev adaios, — rrj noXet b' — avaytcr) tu>v ye br](Xoaiq ireirpaynevbiv uerelvai Tfjs bo^ns, evravda a.Tn']VTr)Kas ', opa fxi) tovtwv ue> eyQpbs ys, epos be icpoa- •n-oiy : Demosth. ib. [p. 268. 1. 29. ed. Reisk.] epfip6rTr)Te, elra vvv Xeyeis; to a supposed physician, who, after the death of a patient, should say what ought to have been done: wrongheaded fool ! and is it now that you tell us of it? Demosth. ib. p. 308. [I. 5.] ed. Reisk. ciXX' abiKws r)p^a ; elra Ttapiov ore fie elarjyov ol Xoyiaral ov KaTijyopets ; [Demosth. de Cor. p. 266. 1. 8. ed. Reisk.] See also Demosth. ib. [p. 259- 1. 23. ed. Reisk.] raura bi] ToXfias Xeyeiv epfaviLs ijbrj irpbs i]fxds ; elr eyu> aov (peioofiat', and shall I then spare you ? Ari- stoph. Ach. 311. iEacus to the shade of Xerxes, elra ae, d> ku6- ap/ua, t] 'EXXas ecpptrre — ; and was it you then, miscreant, such a contemptible shadow as you, that Greece dreaded? Lucian, Dial. Mort. t. 1. p. 413.? v. ^1. V. H. i, 34. and (V.) without interro- gation : elra tovto aev ovy\ Xeyei to ^(pio-fta' el be, &c. et cependant, and yet: Demosth. pro Cor." Etra expressing a consequence : KXrjn'jp el/xi vrjaiwrucbs, ical bvko- (pc'iPTtis, ical Trpayfio:robi rptaKaKo- out', e7rei8^ — 7]vayKacr87] iirl -tt}v vavv airii- ^aifiwv, elra Aevubv a/xirixet ; and do you vat, i\6a>i> TjOeXriae fioi Staoe^aordai aiiT7]v : put on white ? and yet do you put on Demosth. adv. Polyd. p. 1215. 1. 28. ed. white? Aristoph. Ach. 1024. — J. S. Reisk. avT69ev re r$ /3a z Elra tup irpSrepov yeyevriiiivwv av- irpbs clvtov oiKtlws ivirvxe, Ka\ depairevo- Spwv ayadaiv /ue'ftvijtrat : and yet, notwith- /j.4vcf> ypa) rovrov (/xvdov viz.) and trnovbris ayopeveis, *■£ upa b>) rot eiretra [then, an inference ;] deal 7juo ebet ; Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 297- '• 21. ed. Reisk.] eiretra bfjrn ju' e^evliere ; and yet, notwithstanding that the mistress of the house was lying dead in it, you received me and entertained me with- out mentioning it? Eurip. Ale. 822. see Eurip. Hippol. 330. 440. eiretra iralbas j^pi) ojvrevetv teal rpetyetv ; and yet, after all this, are people to beget and rear up children ? Aristoph. Vesp. 1128.* It sometimes signifies so, therefore, (things being so,) connecting the different parts of narration: evff A'ias fxev eiretra kqt aairiba ■naiToa ei(TT}v vvfy: Horn. II. o, 49. \p, 818. See II. a, 505. v, 586. Od. a, 106. It is placed between a participle and verb in the same manner as elra : (see the notes on elra :) fxi'i [xoi and where I pray c Yet, nevertheless, notwithstanding : can it be better suspended as an offering, ovk eaS" tineas ov vavrias er, S> £eve, Sffrts than, &c? Aristoph. Plut. 938. — J. S. y' aicovaas Zti redv^Ke Upcoreas, eireiT d 'AAA.' ep.iras ecpepe Katchv a\ts, &tskvos ipwras, ev8ov ear %\ '^dmios : Aristoph. &v : Eurip. Ale. 909. fj.edvaifj.ev eixiras Thesm. 884. tovto Stjt' ovk ayx^vrf, 5' o# ris hv xpaiaeie fiov : Eurip. Cjcl. K&iretr' iyca 55jt' evBaSl arpayyevopai ; 533. / £' ap' oveipos, enel tov fivQov liKovae : Horn. II. /3, 16. v. II. 1, 92. and when used in this sense in oblique phraseology or narration, an infinitive some- times follows it: 2fo/0as yap tovs No/za5as, ewe/ re afyi AapeTov eafia- Xe~iv es T))i' ^wpjjr, /xera ravra fiefiovevai uiv rltraadat : Herod ot. Er. c, 84. and in the same circumstances eireibr) also is followed by an infini- tive :/ kneibri be yeveadai eirl rjji ohla rrj 'Ayaduvos, but that when he arrived at Agathon's: Plat. Symp. c! 2. [p. 177. 1. 2. ed. Bas. 1.] In conjunction with ra^tora, evdews, and the like adverbs, it may be rendered, as soon as ever. — 2. because, seeing that, since, for : /uijj /tie kteIv, ewet ov% ouoyaarptos "Esropos elfxi '. Horn. II. , Q5. dappei, {ufjrep, enel rols Xeovaiv avro'ts i]br] ^wtjOtis eifii : Lucian, Dial. Ven. et Cup. In this sense it is often used very elliptically : in the Ranee of Aristoph. Bacchus and his slave Xanthias having exchanged clothes, they are both scourged by iEacus to discover by the effect of the lashes which is the real god ; Bacchus, on receiving a stroke, exclaims, "AirdXXov, os itov ArjXov r) YlvB&v ex^isl Xanth. flXytjaev ovk ijnovaas ; Bacch. ovk eyu>y, enei 'ianfiov 'lirvtljvaKros avefufxvrjcr- KOfi)]v. Here eVet refers not to the words immediately preceding it, ovk eytvye (IjXyriGa,) but to some understood, 1 exclaimed "AttoXXov, &c. because I recollected an iambic of Hipponax. Socr. a\X', w Tr6vr)pe, ravra y* eW ovk appeva. Streps, ovk appev' vjuv eariv; Socr. obbajjiuis y. kirel ttws av KciXeaeias kvTvywv 'Afivpia ; Aristoph. Nub. 689. After e7ret, el ravr eoriv appeva is to be understood. So el abiKos eirj [y] is to be understood after en-el in Rom. iii, 6. and et bvvairo TeXeiwoai, in Hebr. x, 2. It is thus used elliptically before the imperative mood also ; espe- cially when what is spoken of appears so certain that the person addressed may be defied to dispute it : to yap " ovk e-%(o ti xpwfiai," ti Trore Xeyeis, d> Aiovvaobwpe ; 7j brjXovort, ws ovk ej(0) e£e\ey£at avTov ; kirel (for, if that be not the meaning of the words) ei7re, ri 001 aXXo ' I have followed Hermann in this in- had said these things, — &\\o (jlIv obSev terpretation. There is the authority of airoKpidrjvai rbv irpo eliteiv, '6ri v6p.os icriv •nrjs by Zeunius : and in the passage here — • iirepuT-rtaas Se, ei S'lKaios abro'is koX referred to, Hesych. explains efj.Trr)s wcrel Ka\a>s %x wv & v6nos (pcdverai, iireiS)} by Trdvrus 6/jt.olws. — J. S. rjaat irdvras tovs StKaaras, elire7v '6ti, f — Soksiv updrunov sfoai, irefiipavras &c. Demosth. in Timocr. 766. 1. ed. ■npls"Amiu>va, iicuvov iirepcoTav. — eneib'T) Reisk. — J. S. eipr}K4vai Tavra, and that when they 140 'Ewetb)). [Chap. vii. § vi. tfcoel tovto to pijfict, tv " ovk ^w o ri yprioonai toIs Kayois." Plat, ill Euthyd. p. 287. 1- 21. And presently afterwards, eirei airoKpivai,for (if it be not so) answer me, &c. So «rel bibatyv, Soph. El. 353. cf. Aristopli. Vesp. 517- 'E^el is frequently joined with various particles; as, e7rel apa, otherwise, as a conseque?ice your children are unclean : 1 Cor. vii, 14. 'Eirei ye, since truly : Sferrijju', knei ye rovb' etyairTOfxm toitov : Eurip. Hel. 563. eneiirep, seeing it is so, that — : Eurip. Hel. 1253. l675. Plato de Rep. v. p. 452. eireiirep ye, since truly it is so, that — : Plat. Phacd. p. 114. evel ovv, seeing then, since therefore: Hebr. iv, 6. eirei rot, for really, for in truth: Eurip. Heracl. 508. 744. and interrogatively : eirei toi o'iei fxe o.vtov ovrws ixv wore Kopvfiavnaaai, (Is — ; Lucian, Epist. Sat. t. iii. p. 408. 1. 86. As to eirei roi ye, Zeunius says that eirei reasons, rol confirms, and ye urges ; and he cites Demosth. Phil. i. [p. 40. 1. 17. ed. Reisk.] but the reading in that passage is, it seems, rather doubtful ; [see Reiske's note ;] and Porson affirms that the Attics could not employ toi ye without the intervention of some other word : for which reason, in Eurip. Suppl. 879* instead of e7ret toi y ovbev alria (a£ia) iroXis, he reads eirei toi Koblev a^la iroXts, on the authority of Mss. See Pors. ad Eurip. Med. 675. It is observable that, after particles of time, and especially after eirei, the Greeks frequently insert in the apodosis or reddition (in the chief correlative proposition of a sentence) the particle be in such a manner as to produce an anacoluthon, to render the parts of the sen- tence not grammatically consecutive ; as, opcj, opq ravr' cut -)(p6vos, eirei fxev erepa, to. be ■nap' fifiap avdts av^wv avw. Time sees, sees always, these things ; after adverse events have occurred, changing for the better those which immediately succeed: Soph. (Ed. C. 1453. So e7ret ibv — , bie^eXQovTas be — : Herodot. ii,. 32. enel be — eboKov/.iev ovk av aXoytos rw 'Pw/uvXip irpoaa.vafirjvai' — (jkottovvti be fjtoi — etpaivero, &c. Pint. Thes. 1. e7ret be irpos Kivvav — , etc b e tovtov, &c. Plut. in Pomp. p. 1134. [I. ult.] ed. H. St. See Her- mann, ad Horn. h. Ven. 229- p. 107. ad h. Cer. 409. 'Eireibi) signifies — 1. after, after that, ivhen ; with an indicative mood ; as, eireibi] yptstfjievois a/ieivov to airobveadat tov avyKaXvn-eiv irai'Ta Ta Totavra etpavw, kcii to ev toIs ocpdaXpols bi] yeXo'iov kfyppvr) : Plato de Rep. v. p. 452. v. Eurip. El. 20. Thuc. i. c. 11. and c. 13. With an optative mood eireibi], like all other similar words, is construed, first, if the words contain the thought either of a person different from the speaker, or of the speaker himself, but of which he speaks as of that of another : i]deXei> elaievai, eireibi] ctvoix^in ' he wished to enter when the doors should be opened. So»;0e\oi', /wished, may be said. Secondly, if what is signified is not a certain time in which something was done once for all, but a repetition of something wont to be done ; the reason of which is, that the optative requires some one of many things, or repetitions of things, to be contemplated ; not one certain and determined, but any one whatever: irepiefxevofxev ovv hcaarore €(i>s avoL^deh) to bea/xwTijpiov — . ave^yero yap ov irpui'i. Eire ib fj be avotxQeir], ijdfieu napa tov 2wKpar?7 : but when it was KULE 2—6.] 'Eirdv, &C. Ill opened, we used to go in to Socrates: Plat. Phged. c. 3. [p. 23. 1. 6* ed. Bas. l.] With sucli words as ehdews, Ttt-^iara, it signifies, as soon as ever: eTreibr) evdews tjoQovto, immediately on their perceiving : Xen. Hell. iii. eiretbrf ra^iora eyxpariis eyevero tov apyvpiov, the moment he got possession of the money: Deinosth. eTreibr) irpwra toid)v ev opeaai \6\onrev, from the time when first — : Horn. II. a, 234. — 2. Seeing that, since; always with an indicative mood: eTreibr) Xoyov bvvafxis rvy-^avet xj/v^ayuiyla ovva, Plato Phaedr. p. 271. eTreibr) TervxriKare biatyepofievio, iEschin. Dial, ii, 13. v. ii, 26". iii, 6. 'ETret- bliwep, since truly : eTreibrjTrep o'l y e/jTrpoedev Xoyoi oh irepl tovtov boKovai (rot elpr\ d\\' eirteiKus tov&, oirep bvcrfxaj^wrarov eon rwv QiXittttov tt p ay fxcirwv, ml fieXTiarov rifiiv : Demosth. 01. i. cela va le mieux du monde. [nearly, pretty nearly , fere.] Sometimes tolerably well: eirel av£Xafiev eavrbv, ical eirieiKws eu-^e to crwfxa : Demosth. speaking of Philip recovering, [ws yap — 6 $paa- Twp — aveXaflev avrbv, nal ea^ev eViet/cws to aSifxa : Pseudo-Demosth. in Nea?r. p. 1364. 1. 27- ed. Reisk.] V. (VIII.) — 4. satis, in a considerable degree: to fiev aZfia ovk ehdvs ovbev TTeirovdev, aXX , eTieiKws av^vbv eirifievei -^povov '. but Iflsts a considerable time, for a pretty long time: Plato Phaed. VI. (IX.) — 5. circiter, about, pretty nearly: Xafifiiivovaiv nZv fiev In-new, els tovs eTriXsKTOVs, emeiKws to rpirov pipos : Polyb. vi. 142 'EntnpooQev, &c. [Chap. VII. § vii. This sense Plutarch in Lycurg. expresses by ttov fiaXiara : heal ttov fjiaXtara X' Kal p. VII. (X.) — 6. candidly, sincerely, without disguise or deceit: ovkovv tooovtov [xep hfJ-~ lV *' s T v npoadev ireirepapTai' o yup err/xep, ewiei- kws wfxoXoyqrai : Plato Alcib. i. [for we have pretty nearly agreed as to what we are ; for we have come to a tolerably satisfactory con- clusion as to what we are.] SECTION VII. — ON THE ADVERBS eiri-rrpooBep, elye, fj, ft, (WITH THE PARTICLES ANNEXED TO THEM,) AND »/§»/. Rule I. 'EirlTrpoaBep elvat, with a dative, is the same as eiwrpoa- 6e~tv,z i. e. to obstruct the light, or the view of an object ; and gene- rally, to obstruct, to stand in the way of : eotice itavTt\ ^aXevbv elvai, Kai bvaBfjparop ioTopla raXrides, otuv ol fjev varepop yeyopores top ypuvov eiriTTpoaBev ovra. ttj ypuaei tuip irpuy/uaTwp e^iocn : Plut. in Pericl. 'EniTrpoadev is used also in signifying preference : tt)p ihiav eyBpav eKinpoaBep "Koieiv too tu>v oWmp eva^ij/xopos, to pay more regard to his own private enmity than to the glory of others: Polyb. E. L. 74. to twv fiaaiXewp XvnireXes eTriirpooQev yiveoBai too Ibia trvfifepovTOS, that the king's interest was preferred by him before his own: Id. ib. 41. E£ye, composed of el and ye, is a word of approbation or com- mendation : evy kiroiy)uas avajurycras fxe, you did well to remind me: Plat. Phaed. c. 4. eiye, on f.ie virefivrjaas : it is lucky that you put me in mind: Thecphr. Ch. irepl XaXtds. In Aristoph. Strepsiades, on hearing that he ought to call a hen aXenrpvawav, exclaims, aXeKTpvaivav l evye, vri top 'Aepa ! excellent, by the Air! Nub. 667. It is sometimes used ironically ; as by Socrates to Callicles, who praised a life overflowing with every kind of pleasure : evye, w /3eXrtore* biareXei yap tiowep ijp^w, &c. well done ! bravo ! in Plato Gorg. p. 494. 1. 24. Ewre (yvre Ionic) signifies — 1. as; just as: icapiraXifitos avehv TroXtijs aXos yyvr 6\iiyXr), Horn. II. a, 360. v. II. y, 10. , 9,37- — 2. when, h after : Kq,rrBXu~iatv e^aipes, evre ae icai tovtwp juoTp' eireflaXXev exeiv. Theogn. 356. v. Hes. Op. 430. 448. 564. Theogn. 840. II. (II. III.) 'TI is — 1. a disjunctive particle : 6.XX' J) 7rcipapoi>e7s ereor, 7} KopvfiavTiys : either — or: Aristoph. Vesp. 8.' Traoa pep av- Qpwirov i^«x') (pvaei reQearai to. ovra, rj ovk av -f/Xdev els robe to cwov : otherwise it would not have come, &c. Plat. Pheedr. p. 249. *7 beipop ye av e'irj, otherwise it would be a very hard or grievous thing: Demosth. adv. Boeot. — 2. expressive of deliberation or doubt : /uep- s See Toup on Longinus, § 32. — J. S. in giorno, come la neve al sole, si consu- h Evre x i ^> v &s tis KaT€TareeTo,Theocr. mava. Decam. Giorn. 10. Nov. 7. — J. S. Id. vii, 76. a simile borrowed from Ho- * *H Kal Kara yrjv,?) teal Kara 6d\ao-s Se x i ^ v Karar-finer' ev anpoirS- kffffaiBrivai, if) koI kot' a/x^Srepu : Herodot. \0KTif opeaffip, — dis rrjs rfjKero na\a ira- vii. — J. S. pyjia ; Od. r, 205. So Boccac : " di giorno Rule 1—3.] *H, &c. 143 ju»/p<£e 5' C7re«ra Kara typeva teal Kara dvfxbv, T] Trporepu) Albs v'tbv epty- bovTroio biwKot, rj oye rwv irXeovwv Avkiwv curb Qvfibv eXoiro : whether — or: Horn. II. e, 671. (This form 7) — rj is almost peculiar to epic poets; Attic writers make ?^ correlative with -nb-epov or el preceding.) TJjs Troias fiepibos yereadai rijv noXtv efivvXer' civ ; Trorepov rijs ovvai- rias ru>v (TVfxfDefiriKOTbJV reus "EXXtjai Kaicuiv, r) rrjs irepiojpaKvias ravra ytyvbfieva ; whether — or: Demosth. pro Cor. So Xen. Cyrop. iii, I, 12. ofj.ev el erebv KaX^as fiavreverai r)e /cat ovk\, Horn. II. j3, 301. Sometimes it has no preceding correlative : ecjs nXovrelv, t) irevrira Ttoiels ', Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 12. V v'iet ra fj.eya.Xa abucrj/jiara, &c. Plato de Rep. vi. p. 49 1. — 3. Comparative: aXXov tov, rj tovtov ye eVeica, eiprjvris vvv e7rifli/aeire ; other — than: Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, \7> arparriyol TrXeioves ?) fieXrioves, more numerous than good : Aristoph. Ach. 1077- *H is often thus used without any other word denoting comparison ; as, rl bei/ras (underst. a.XXo) rj /nr) 7rddv aicrjtcoa, i\irov ILuncpovs rTjs KaXfjs, i) 'Avaicpeovros rov oo, rj ecu 'jroi, which are very rare, see Schaef. ad Schol. Apoll. Rh. p. 321. Sometimes nimirum, nempe : Horn. II. e, 724. 842. ") affirms, yap gives a reason, and av relates to a following verb : ovribavolaiv avaaaeis' >) yap av, 'Arpeibrj, vvv varara Xwfiyaato : Horn. II. a, 232. r) yap, for assuredly (understand, if it were not so, were it otherwise,) Xwfii'jaato av vvv varara : you would now have committed an outrage for the last time. So, ravra /jev ov tyavep&s irpoaedrji^e ru pi/yuara* ?j yap av, vironrevaavres avrov elvat e^Opov, eepvyov : for (underst. if he had,) they would assuredly have suspected him for an enemy, and have fled: Chrysost. de Provid. ii. T H fju)v is a form of solemn asseveration : " tifioaev, ?) prjv wpafciv aboXws rijv elpijvrjv : Xen. H. Gr. iii, 4, 6". v. Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 47. r Hnov expresses a great assurance of certainty ; as, (VII. VIII.) y'jTrov ^aXe7ra»s av rovs aXXovs avdpcjTrovs netaai/jii, on ye [xt]be vfids bvvafjai neideiv : undoubtedly I should have great difficulty in per- suading others, &C fjirov av, w 'AyXa'iraba, el ye nXaietv erreipufjieda ae note'iv, otyobpa av r/fi'cv efie/ji yiverai, f/vov irepi ye rov pjjre eaXwicoros, fxrire Kareyv(i)a[xevov, rravbeivov ypaQeiv : as- suredly : Demosth. in Aristocr. In arguing from what is less cogent to what is more so, 7j irov, if what precedes is affirmative, signifies much more : (IX. X.) as, el riov a\pv^wv ovbiv eo-0' oaiov iq.v aicpirov' ■tjTrov rov avOpwTTOV ye ovra uvvaiov /cat beivbv avev Xoyov koi \p>'i) is interrogative : 7j olv olds re earai — ri)v opoiorrira — biayiyvwaneiv ; Plato Phaedr. p. 262. With yap: (V.) ii yap, fiovheadai &f u.era aov, avdpbs and infamy: so ardently do I aspire after ayaQov yevop-evov, kolvtj yrjv iTrieaaaOai all that is great and honorable, as the fXttWov ii) £"jjv per' alaxwofievov alaxwo- desert both of you and of myself:" — the fxiwr}- ovrws iyi> Kul ae twv KaWlarccv na\ words of Panthea to her busband Abra- epaurV f/|fwKa : " nevertheless, great as dates in Xen. Cyrop. vi. — J. S. you know my affection for you is, I swear § viii. Rule 1—3.] "Hbt), &c. 145 nectedly at the end of a sentence: ri b>j obv ovros a/uap-ai>ei, ical arexvov notel, XeKreov' i) yap ; must not I? Plato Phsedr. p. 263. beivol, ws eoinev, etffi Kara tov cov \6yov, kch iroXvrpoKoi' ?'; yap ; are they not? Plato Hipp. min. It is to be observed that 7] yap is used in many sentences which take an interrogative form merely for the sake of emphasis, as they in reality involve an assertion : Callicl. ouc alcxpvrj els TOiavra iiytov tovs Xoyovs, a> Hibxpares ; Socr. ?) yap eyw ayto ei'Tavda, & yevva~ie ; i) etcelvos, os av ; Spa i]br) 7rapi)X9ev, Matth. xiv, 15. v. Horn. II. a, 251. — 3. Sometimes it signifies the term of commence- ment : icavTevQev fibr) irarayos ffv tu>v aaicibuyv, Aristopb. Ach. 538. v. Matth. v, 28. — 4. It designates a remote indefinite past time: r/Sq yap nor eyw teal apeioaiv, rieirep vfj.lv, avbpaaiv v tov Mi- Sdl-eiv, airovlirj if. — fiaKiffra Se aide to. Kr), w$ epol boKel, irai'Tos fxaWov ovrvj : Plato Phaed. C. 17- tmvtos paXXov llpa ^v^*/ addi'urov /cat uvojXeQpov '. lb. c. 56. ij nat'Tos fjtaWnv ovrws e\ei, uonep rore flfuv eXeyero; Plato Crit. c. 10. and in answer, iravros ye fxaWov : Id. Phaid. c. 11/ V. MaXAo*' is often defective after certain verbs, when rj alone follows them : u as, fiovXofjal oe inrievai, y itapovra pa8vpe~ii'. And so after BeXio. redvavat vopi£ovoa XvotreXe'tv T] $rjv ; Andocid. Or. de Myster. p. 62. ed. Reisk. It is elegantly construed with the genitive of the participle beov : paXXov toD beovros, more than is Jit : Plato Gorg. p. 4S7. It takes ri after it : ecpvXdrrnnei' civ &oirep to dpyvptov, teat fxdXXav Ti; and somewhat (i. e. in some degree) more:' /Eschin. Dial.de Virtut. VI. Of fxaXiora it is to be remarked — 1. that to. pciXtora signifies, especially, principally, chiefly.™ VII. — 2. MaAtara, especially with numerals, signifies nearly, pretty nearly, almost exactly ; as, ev TeooapaKw-a paXiora ij^epais, Time, ii.* In this sense the enclitics 7tjj, ttov, toi, ttws, are frequently joined with it. See Wessel. ad Herodot. viii, 65. p. 647. VIII. — 3. MaXiora fikv and el be pf) are often used correlatively ; when pdXio-a fxev relates to what is sought or required in the first place, and preferably, el be uri to what is considered only as next best to that : onws fxaXiora pev virepj3aXe~iode icai ijpds Kal rovs trpooQev evKkeia' el be pi), 'lore, a»s vpiv, ai/ pev viKwpev vpds apery, >/ v'iKr\ aloyyvr\v tyepei, ij be firra, eav ijrriopeOa, evbaipoviav : Plato Menex. p. 247.^ IX. — 4. MdXiora, sans faute, without fail; enl be~nrvov, olpai, icXrjdels es n)v voTepaiav, pdXiora i\lfa, es. ov prjv a.X\', el rovro rowvrSv eon ra. pdXiora, however, even if it is ever so certainly so as he says, o vS/tos Se Xeyei ravavria, &c. Demosth. in Androt. p. 595. 1. 9. ed. Reisk — J. S. x MoAiffTa avpiravra ravra. els efifio/i-f)- Kovra pvas irapaZeSwicaoi : Demosth. in Aphob. i. p. 815. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. rovrwv rrjv rip)]V airoarepet pe, paXiora raXav- tov : Demosth. in Aphob. ii. 839, 19. — J. S. v After el Se pr], one would have ex- pected something of the following pur- port, " that you may at least equal us and them." An example more obviously ap- propriate is in Demosth. de Cor. napa- naXecovciv avrbv, paXiora pkv rfyv vrpbs rjuas opSvoiav Siarrjpuv Kal ras ovvQ-i)Kas, el Se prj, irpbs TO fiovXevoaodai Sovvai Xpivov ii) ir6\ei : p. 282. 1.18. ed. Reisk. also in Demosth. in Mid. p. 5G4. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.— J. S. s This appears to be the meaning in the anonymous example of Viger, iravrbs fxaXXov irapa. tovto 7] vikt] juefl' i)p.S>v ye- voit av, which he translates, hoc modo fucilius qvam alio quolibet, &c. I think he should have translated it thus : hoc modo, certo certius victoriam consequi poterimus. — J. S. ' Tco ovtl yap iravrbs u.a\\ov ra, ye pi\- para ovk e^efxadov rr)v pevroi oiavoiav oX e ^ 0v aTrai/Tcoy — Sieipi : Plato Phsedr. p. 196. 1. 6. ed. Bas. 1. really ; I assure you. — J. S. u See Hermann's treatise on Ellipsis, p. 707.— J. S. v Hoogeveen translates it adhuc magis ; that, according to Hermann, is not the signification ; but he does not say what is. I have given what appears to me to be the meaning. — J. S. "* In another sense : iyh Se otopai p\v oiixi Xeyeiv avrbv raArjOrj, paWov Se oiSa § ix. Rule l.] Mera#. 147 X. — 5. It is often joined with the dative plural of the article, and preceded or followed by bfioiws, to signify equality as to something superlative: eivovv eve evprjarere rw rrXriQei rols fiaXtcrd' oLioiws, you will find me as hearty a friend to the people as those who are most so: Demosth. de reditu suo, p. 1473. 1. 11. [ed. Reisk. Epist. ii.] So on the contrary rols tJKiura b/uoitus, or bfxoiws ro'ts rJKitrra, equally with those who are least so, may be said. Nearly the same is ex- pressed by us ovbkv xpfifia : see C. ill. § xiii. R. 4. A phrase of a similar import is ev ro'ts fiaXtora, as, ev rots fxaXtara aotpos eanv, he is among the wisest. MaXtara however is not construed with ev ro'ts : the phrase is to be understood thus, ev rots roiovrots ovat naXttrra rotovros : for where a declinable superlative is used, we find it in the case and gender of the noun to which it relates, 2 as ev rots wpwroi be 'Adrjvaloi rbv mbrjpov Karedevro, Thuc. i. 6. And 70ts, it seems, is to be considered as neuter, since it occurs with feminine nouns also: rijv btciXetcrov aKptfiovva (?; Xefys 'laoKparovs) ev ro'ts iruvv (a superlative is not indispensable in 1he phrase) rrjv koivtiv Kal avvrjdea- TaT-qv, Dionys. Hal. de Isocr. 2. The sense of the phrase therefore is, among the things which are such, eminently or chiefly such. The following are examples : to lepov rovro ev ro'ts fidXtara ap^a'tov, Paus. in Ach. p. 403. volios ovros TleptrtKos ev rots fxaXiara i/7r' uvtuiv ^vXarroiievos, M\. V. H. i, 31. Kal ov% rJKiara 'Adrjvattov ae, aXX' ev ro'ts fiaXitrra : Plat. Crit. c. 14. ev ro'ts fxaXwra. 'AOrjvaiwv eyib wlio- Xoyr}Kbjs rvy^uvu), lb. "Ewk parous epaarijs wv ev rols {xaXurra rwv Tore, Plato Symp. c. l. a SECTION IX. — ON THE ADVERBS fxeratv, fiixpt, priv, fxbvov ov, fiG)V, vat, vyj, vvv, ot, oiixot, olye, bfiov, bfjtws. Rule I. Mera^v is elegantly joined with participles in any case, with the signification of inter and gerunds in dum in Latin, and of while, during, in the middle of, &c. in English : fxeratv iraa^utv ev, "KoXe/ne'tv irpbs avrbv eneyeip-qce : while receiving kindnesses : Isocr. in Evag. p. 396". ebdvs e^avaaravres fxeratv betirvovvres : in the middle of supper: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 284. ed. Reisk. rt's civ eir/ rotovros larpbs, bans ru> vonovvrt (Jtera^v acQevovvri fjtrjbev ovfiflovXevoi ', during his illness: JEschin. c. Ctes. p. 306. 1. 28. KXetros — bv v — J. S. 'EWrjvcev (TvvSoku— ; Isocr. Paneg.p. 110. Add that ixaKiara appears to be used 1. 1. ed. Battie. — J. S. sometimes for paKkov : (see note r, p, US Mexp*. [Chap. vii. § ix. fierulv Xoytov, -ires elaiv ot woXe /.louvres tKelvoi ; Luciau, ill Charon. So in Mort. Dial. t. i. p. 27 1. in fi»- arap, J trulpe, fuera^v \6yuv, dp' ov robe })i' ro berbpov, t(/>' on-ep >'/ye$ ?//^a$ ; Plato Phanlr. p. 230. II. Mera£v, w?7/t ; /uera^u row ^uvarov ro (jurerov ey^ovres, Plut. in Thes. p. l. [p. 4. I. 5. ed. H. Stepli.] To fiera^v oafi&arov, the following or next sabbath : Acts Ap. xiii, 42/ III. (III. IV. V. VI. VII.) Mexpt and a X pt, (which latter, according to Eustath. p. 1062. 1.52. is derived from /iexP«>) before a consonant, pe%pis and c'l^pts before a vowel, (Mceris says /ue^pt and a^p* without a are Attic,) are used in signifying the extreme or furthest bound or limit of things ; as, /j*XP 1 rou ^aporTos, until the present time ; pexP 1 Tiros ; till when ? k^^iaaaQe, tovs /ut"X ot n &*" re Kai TerrapaKOPra krwv avrovs efjifiaiieiv : that such as were under forty -Jive years should go on board in jierson, and not serve by substitutes: Demosth. Ol. iii. a XP l r '? s OaXdoarjs, as far as to the sea ; to. irepl to aw/xa fxey^pi Xoeias ti)s \lvyfjs TrapaXu/jifidveiv, so far as they may be requisite for the benefit of the mind, and no farther : Epict. c. 46. fteXP 1 7C " biKaiov, as far as the rules of justice allow: Thuc. iii, 82. pex? 1 tov fiwfxov 1° ^ ne en d °f ltf e » F^XP 1 tov Xoyov, or tov Xkyeiv, as far as words go; fxexpts ov > until: v. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 35. iii, 5, 27. Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 118. ed. Reisk. eyeveTO be i] biwtis pexP 1 ^pos to. oprj, quite to the mountains : Arr. de Exp. Al. c. 6. /care&iu>£a^er axpi Trpbs tovs (ptjXeous, Luciau V. H. i. f*exP ls ^ ws eyerero, until it was morning: Plato Symp. p. 220. I^xpi- ttov Kul eTTibaKpvaat, even to tears ; fikxP 1 & ev P°> quite hither, as far as this ; juexpts ei'Tai)6a, hitherto, to this place ; fiexpts exOes, until yesterday ; juexP" 'Iva \pavcreie, until: Callim. in Dian. 28. ^XP l ^oppu), a long way, to a great distance, or for a long while : i*exP L ^painr, until the day before yesterday : Synes. ^XP l alj/xepov, until to-day. Mexpt, while, as long as: ^XP l h^ oXiya i]biKov{xriv vtto tovtovi, — ov fiapews e, h*XP is ov oktoj nvpyiov : as far as eight towers, to the amount of eight towers: Herodot. i, 181. In such passages the writer appears to have changed, iu going along, the mode of construction with which he set out : intending e. g. to say pe^pis ov oKrib irvpyoielirl, for the last three words he afterwards, with greater hrevity, substitutes oktu> vupyiav. It is to be remarked that jxexpis does not occur in the tragedians : see Hermann's preface to the Hec. of Eurip. p. liv. c Mijv is — 1. confirmative; auxppwv fxi)v o ye toiovtos, (the true philosopher, who bestows all his care on his mind,) kcu ovbafxfj fiXo- Xpr][.iaTos, Plato de Rep. vi, p. 485. Orest. cat fir)v rob' epfas, bis Oavelv ov yaZo^m. Pylad. a\\' oib' eycb prjv: Eurip. Or. 1116'. — 2. adversative : boKe'i debs uev avrjp ovba/xuis elvai, de'ios fiijv : Plato Sophist, c. 1. and it is opposed to /je»' in the same chap. [p. 96. 1- 13. ed. Bas. 1.] MoXis usually signifies, scarcely, ivith difficulty: whence it is joined with other adverbs of kindred meaning ; as, ayairrjTws cat fi6\is, aicpifluts teat fxoXis, on which see Bast, and Schaef. ad Greg. Cor. p. 169. s. Next, it may be rendered at length: fiiaodels ttoXXcl kciv- Tifias, fxoXis eBvaev avrr'iv : Soph. El. 575. Then, for a little while; a\\', w yepaie novs, eirioTtevaov fibXis : Eurip. Troad, 1275. [perhaps, although with difficulty.'] 'laws yap Sc fioXts -Kpofiaivova V TV X T l> Graty KaAws: Eurip. El. 402. Ov fioXts is, non parum ; not a little, very, quite: 8eXovuav ov poXis icaXels, Eurip. Hel. 341. v. jEschU. Ag. 1091. Eum. 867. Movop ov, or fiovovov, and fibvov ovyl, or fiovovovyi, signify very nearly, all but: ovs cv [xovovov irpoaicvve'is, Aristoph. Vesp. 514. 6 — Kaipos fiopoyov^l Xeyei (pwvijv cupiels, Demosth. 01. i. Muc, compounded of ^uj) interrogative, and ov\>, (or the Ionic 3>v,) is an Attic particle of interrogation, in Latin an forte? It is occasion- ally joined with each of its component parts, with /uj) pleonastically ; and commonly, though not always, the questions asked with it, as well as with juj), involve a negation : ri be ; ol ry\v ijbovriv ayaBbv opiz.6fievoi, fjitov fir/ ri iXarrovos irXavr)$ efinXeoi twv erepiov, ?) ov Kal oiroi avayicagovTai b/ioXoyelv ayaOa elvai Kal Kara rai/ra ; again : are they, who define good as being pleasure, involved in at all less error and inconsistency than the others? or are not they also obliged to confess the very same things to be both good and evil? Plato de Rep. vi. p. 505. c. [p. 432. 1. 49- ed. Bas. 1 , d ] eav be Lv evl eyyevrirat abiKia, fiwv yu») aTToXe'i rr]v avrf/s bvvafxif, ?i ovbev y\Trov e£et ; M.t]bev t\ttov eyerw, tyr/ : will it lose its force? Plato de Rep. i. p. 351. and with c Add &XP IS > quite, entirely : aficpoTepa avu&aivei Si] avrols, oJ/xai, 5no\oye7>' aya- Se Tevovre Kal oorea \aas avails &xpts 6a. elpai Kal kuko, Tama. This I mention air7]\oiir), eav i^r) ffiw, (Aristoph. Pac. 214.) tis &vBpwTros, os ovre e'lXrjcpev ovSev twv mentioned by Hoogeveen and Zeunius, Snifxoalbiv, &c. Id. ib. p. 414. 1. 6. — J. S. Rule 3.] N»), Nv, NDy. 151 the addition of other particles; as, val by, Horn. II. a, 286. val firjv, Oppian, Hal. iii, 482. i. e. ovrws bij, Hesych. Ni), though apparently formed from va\, differs from it in never occurring either without a case/ or in conjunction with pa, and it always affirms, concedes, or asserts: vr/ tov Aia, Aristoph. Ach. 751. vr) AlaJ Kal tov 'AttoXXoj, Demosth. Phil. iii. vfi rrjv "Aprefiiv, (the words of a woman,) k Aristaenet. Ep. xi. vq rovs Oeovs, aXr/dF]— epio: Demosth. Phil. ii. It appears to be sometimes used ironically : l nXr/v el /ui} tovto \eyovrrt, vrj A/a : Demosth. de Chers. [p. g\. I. 26. ed. Reisk.] Nv m and vvv are used in poetry only, and appear to signify — 1. an indivisible point of time, as in Horn. 11. -^, 485". and e, 311. at once, instantly. — 2. illation : -nice b' en ' 'Apyeioiai kukov jSeXos' ol be vv Xaol 6v7](jkov ewaaovTepoi : wherefore the people, &c. Horn, II. a, 383. awcroy vvv avrov, (the gold) /u^6' epa twv nXriviov '. preserve it then — .* Eurip. Hec. gg6. [982. Pors.j Nvv signifies time either actually present, or bordering on the present. Its use with a present tense is so common that there is no need of any example: with a past tense its meaning is lately, just now; ovkovv onep vvv npovQejxeQa atcexpuadai — anemeov : Plat. Phaed. p. 25$. and in this sense bij is often joined with it ; wv vvv br/ eXeyov : Id. Phaed. c. 16. v. and c. 19. 22. <&c. Eurip. Heracl. 235. With a future, presently, forthwith, immediately : ihttcitov bij ae npoirepovo-t vvv ol eniriibeioi, Plat. Phaed. c. 4. cf. Iliad e, 279. John xii, 31. Nvvl differs from vvv in no other respect but in being construed with a present tense only: Eustath. ad Horn. p. 1840. Nvv, when employed in inciting or urging, is joined with the im- perative mood: Xeye vvv, Aristoph. Vesp. 30. aye vvv, 'iwfxev : Id. Pac. 851. Tridoi vvv, Eurip. Or. 1101. It is often placed in contraposition to certain preceding words; as, to 7rp\v, Tore, or other particles signifying past time : Eurip. Or. * It is without a case in Lucian : x a ~P e > conducting them : Dial. Char, et Menipp. 3) irdrep 'Epfirj. Mercur. vtj Kal av ye. — J. S. Dial. Pan. et Merc. X a ^P € » ^ Evv, with an eye to which, with a view to which, &c. Panath. p. 92. t. i. ed. Jebb.P V. (X.) 'Ofj.ov, together, is sometimes nearly, about: bjxov nevra- Koaia errj, Dionys. Hal. Ant. R. iii. p. l6'3. 1. 39- erwv bfxov ti ■xet'TctKoaiwv, Id. ib. viii. p. 530. 1. 18. v. Demosth. adv. Aristog. p. 785. 1. 23. ed. Reisk.? "0/.io)s is thought by Hoogeveen to be properly the same as 6/uotws: r see 1 Cor. xiv, 7. Next it signifies, although, nevertheless, yet, notwithstanding: (see Eurip. Or. 679.) and commonly answers to kciitoi, Kaiirep, el cat, ws, &c. in a preceding member of the sentence. Those particles, however, are often absent ; as, — 1. in a sentence con- sisting of one member only ; els to. fxt]bev 001 ^p^aifia, oyuws eic TroWijs rrjs ireptovvias ayaXtaiceis : Lucian, adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 115. — 2. when a participle goes before : Aa/j.a^os /xev rnvra elnwv, opus irpoaeQeTO teal avros rrj 'AXtcifiiabov yvwfirf : Thuc. vi, 50. — 3. when d\\' opus follows : Kat yap ot (TTparriyol, i\e' d\\' Sfxws to Ke jx\v tfdrj sent: tovs dirXlras vvvpevl avzXojxtvovs Kal iraKai vetbs bpov (TTii%oov av %v aoi GUittTC amzvai ird\iv, oif/caSe, ffKoirelv 8' o ttjs c/xtjs, et fii], &c. Sopliocl. Phil. ti av irpoypdcpoofxev iv rots mvaiciois : Ari- 1218. 'Opov is to be joined with vehs, not stoph. Av. 448. — J. S. with trot, for the person indicated by aoi * According to Weiske, ofyio: is not a was not to go to the ship with the compound word, poi being not a dative, speaker. — J. S. but a mere elongation. Pleon. Gr. — r 'Opus, in like manner, equally, to- J. S. gether, has a circumflex on the last sylla- O'4tot expresses anger also : ofy*', &s ble. See the treatise of Cyrillus or Phi- TeOf^let, Aristoph. Ach. 590. — J. S. loponus. 4s pev Uvras aaivei opus oi/prj p Whatever obscurity there is in the re Kal ovaaiv uptporepoio'iv, Hesiod, Theog. passage arises from olye (which is a rela- 771. eS Se e/caaTa adavdrois Stera^ev tive word) referring to something follow- 6/mws, Kal iirecppatie rtpds : Id. ib. 74. ing instead of preceding it. — J. S. ' — J. S. § x. Rule l— 3.] "0*rij, "Ow*. 155 ellipsis, according to Hoogeveen, is as follows: a.XX\ el s be follows : Ceb. Tab. p. 219- [p. 44. 1. 5. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] — 5. when o/jios §' ovv follows: S/iiios 5' ovv iravra ravra yaipeiv eaaas i)Xdov, Plato Ep. ill . — 0. so before ofxias fxerrui, however, which very often begins a sentence ; e. g. Demostli. adv. Nausim. p. 991. [1. 21. ed. Reisk.] SECTION X. — On otrt), owov, oirws, ottotuv, otciv, ore, ovtw, pabiws, tifpa, iraXiv, irep, Trpiv, pa. Rule f. (I. II.) "Otttj may be considered as a dative agreeing with 6Sw understood. It often answers to tuvty] (bbu, viz.) preceding or following; as, to. Trefil Alepjj, tuvtyj Ireov '. Plat, de Rep. ii. It may be rendered — 1. in the part where, where- soever, in the way in which, where : ony boKul, elae(3aXov els to arpa- revfj,a — : Thuc. ii, 100. ov icai ol pvuKes ano(nraona.Ta avcMpvauJai, owrj av rv^uai rTjs yi}$: Plat. Phaed. c. 6l. which way : Horn. II. ij, 507. — 2. whither, whithersoever : ire/japei 6' OTnrtf ere Kpabir) dv/uos re KeXevet, Horn. Od. £, 517- ireptayovras orrn av avrai beiKvvwatv, Ceb. Tab. c. 6. tovt rfbri, onn aTrofii'iverai, abriXov : Plato Phsedr. p. 3. what it will come to, in what it will end. Uo7 and iiiroi denote mo- tion towards a place, as iro~i fxoXw ; whither can I go? but -try and o-rry signify both that motion towards a place, and also at the same time remanence in the place towards which the motion tends, as irrj crw; whither can I go and stay? Hence Euripides uses both words together : vol., tcqI (pepofxat; i. e. properly, towards what place, to what place, am I borne? See Schol. Eurip. ad Hec. 1075. and Hermann, ad Eurip. Here. F. 1236. — 3. How; in what way; in what respect ; by whatever means ; as, /j.a6e~iv, oiry e^ei : Plat. Phaed. c. 35. Xeye, oiry bi) ov% iicaruis, sc. (jmiverai elptjudai : Plat. Phsed. c. 26. enei- vov tov KaXov e'ire irapovoia, e'ire Koivutvia, e'ire brry b>) icnl birus rrpovye- vofxevt] : Plat. Phred. c. 49. "Ony denotes the means, orrws the manner. See Plut. de Anitn. Procr. p. 1023. vvv ae, o-rry re Kal onus e^w, TtfxCj : HL\. V. H. i, 38. o-rry av rrapeiKy, ai//o/a, ' T£ X^aojxev befxas, Eurip. Viger. u 154 "Oirws. [Chap. vii. ^ x. Ipli. T. 118. i. e. as Poison lias remarket!, eKe'tve oirov. See Pors. art Hec. 1070. and in another manner in Ipli. T. 113. bpa be y t'iatit rpiyXOtfuvv, biroi Kevbv be/aas Kutteu'cn, which Seidler rightly ex- plains, oirov Kevov eortv, utire evrnvdui be/jas Kadelvat'. v. Seidl. ad Ipli. T. 348. — 3. In argumentation it is, seeing that, since: ijirov uvtos ye ■jroWa ex ei > orrou "Y e k " f " hP L ^ >v eKc'trrrcj) ronaura bebtoKev '. Xen. Cyrop. viii, 4, 31. Kai ri aot toy 'Qpfea f/ rov Neai-floi' Aeyw, oirov Kai K/ iroXis avro'is -^pr/aerat : Lysias adv. Alcib. i. p. 520. [1. 5. ed. Reisk.] birtus eyw irpos belirra, b irapeXr)\vOu)s pov foios uiras fiap-vptov av yevoiro'. Lsician, in Lapith. t. iii. p. 434. v. Iliad /3, 252. Ari- stoph. in Pac. 131. — 2. in order that, that: eiripeXeladat bet, oirws ai re e&ortat at b'ies, &C. Xen. Mem. iii, 2, 1. oiru/s pev ravra eE,ere,epol peXi'iaet: Id. Cyrop. ii, ], 15. In both these significations birus, when a thing present is spoken of, takes a subjunctive mood after it:' avros aot ^vpirpodupijaopat belfat birws av pe bibd£r]s (now) irepl rov baiov, Plat. Euthyphr. C. 13. ovk k\ti) eywye oirws e'iiru), I'd. ib. c. 12. See the example from Lysias. ravra aot airb iroXXwv oXiya irapeQejirjv, oirws /uadrjs, (now) olov avbpa. irapuXnribi', AifiXov eariys '. Lucian, ill Lapith. p. 437- oirtos, a. pev iiynOu eart, irotwpev : Xen. CEc. vi, 11. When a thing is spoken of as the thought of any o»e, owws pro- perly takes an optative ; and that usually after past tenses, because then the optative can signify what is past, inasmuch as it indicates the thought to have been present at that preceding time denoted by t lie past tense : oh% ottojs wfeXy'iaat ri]v iroXtv bieioijOr), d\\' oitojs ri Kepbaivoi : Lys. adv. Phil. p. 881. [I. 15, ed. Reisk.] et iraiv iroXvv, * "Oirov, in which : ySov 5' virb ri, \povov eaKOTrei QiXoxparris, ottws av apima evavTtwQeit) rfj elpyjvrj, ovk av, &c. Demostli. de Fals. Leg. p. 345. ed. Reisk. tovt eirpaTTor, — oirws TCt^iara Kal KctKiar airoXoi/j.e6a '. Aristoph. Ach. Jb6. cf. Iliad rjv ere FIr/ya<7ov £tii£ai irrepbv, ottws tipaivov ruls deuls rpuyiKWTepas : Aristoph. Pac. 135. you should have mounted Pegasus, that you might have appeared more grand and pompous: i. e. by which being done, you would have appeared, &c. but he did not mount Pegasus; wherefore he did not appear more pompous. These rules apply to ottws when fit/ is joined to it : £ine- firfcrav irpwra piev to, fjiaKpa Tti^r) eXelv 'Adtjrotovs, ottws pr/ eTrij3orjd>iX olos t eaofiat, viz. fiXenrear, but I doubt I shall not be able : Piat. de Rep. vi. p. SOD."' When ottws means as, (sicut,) it properly takes an indicative, but in oblique phraseology a subjunctive and optative. In the second sense above mentioned, ottws is construed, hut very rarely, with an infinitive : bel r/^as TreipaoQai, ottws ws fteXnara to, TTponljKOvra biairpa-readdt : Xen. (Ec. vii, 29- cf. Xen. Hist. Gr. vi, 2, 20. Diod. Sic. t. ii. p. 467. and 408. and Wessel. on the latter passage. — 3. (VI.) Before ottws in both senses, opa, or v Kivet (ppivas, — ottws pr) aov reason why it would not have done. Nor yevos — irav avaarpfyu Ainu) : Aristoph. does it appear that he had any design of Av. 1239. — J. S. 156 'Onorav. [CHAP. VII. § x. &ye, is understood, and it takes an indicative of the future after it : * ecu ottu>s fxoi fj>) epels, and take care you do not tell me : Plat, de Rep. i. to. )v KapboirTjv : how ought I to call it? how? why, r))v Knpbo7TT]v : Aristoph. Nub. 677. v. Aristoph. Vesp. 48. Thesni. 210. — 5. for ws or on: dW 67710s fiev eyto a^dofiai Tpex o-uis, ob-% on, ov\ olov, may each be ren- dered, sometimes not only, sometimes not only not, and sometimes much less ; although properly ou^ onus is ovk epoj oVws, — ov-% on, ovk epio on, — and av% olov is ov to'iov olov. See Tyrwhitt. ad Aristot. Poet. p. 12S. and Lennep. ad Phal. p. 235. ov yap onus firj to awfia vj3pi$ecrdai tivos — ujeade yjnfvai, dXXa Kai, &c. for you not only, &c. Demosth. in Mid. p. 386. [p. 518.1. 1 1. ed. Reisk.] ovfnTaons tF]s iruXeios koivovs bel yoreas -ovs TrevrjTas yyeladai. Kai TrpocijKei rovroirs ov-% owcos, iav r\ ttoXis bibuxiiv, afeXeadai n : [not only not to deprive them of any part of what the state gives them, — but, &c. two accu- satives after ayeXeadai. Zeunius has mistaken the sense :] d\\' el Kai firjbey i\v rovnov, aXXodev aKoixeiv omos firjbevos ovres evbeels trepi- otydtjtTovTat : Demosth. Phil. iv. p. 142. [I. 6. ed. Reisk.] dW ovy_ vinos vfilv tCov avToft n eirebioKev, (he not only has not, &c.) a\Xa Kat tu>v v[X€reph)y ttoXXci vfrjprjrai : Lysias adv. Nicom. p. 862. [p. 863. 1. 13. ed. Reisk.] So ov% onus ^cipiy avrols e\eis, dXXa fitcrdwaas ceavrbv Kara rovnavi TroXtrevn : not only not: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 331. in fin. obbe fj.vrjfiovevcreiv lofirjv tov Aia, o^ oirws {much less) Kai rrjXiKavTa ayavaKTi]rjeiv : Lucian, Prom. Clytamin. ovkovv 'OpearrjS Kai av iravcrerov ru.be. Electr. TTeiruvfxeO' fjpels, ov% ottws ue TTavcrofxev : nedum ; so far are we from being able to, &c. instead of being able to, &c. Sophocl. Ei. 796. — 9. "Ottws with a genitive and e^w : ottivs >/ 'Adqvalot bvvaueios, 1) AaKebaifiovtoi e^niev rvxvs: prout ; according to the degree of power of the Athenians? or of good fortune of the Lacedemonians: Aristid. Or. in Rom. p. 352. z 'Qirorav, ichensoever, when, compounded of oirore and av, is never joined with an indicative mood, except in the future. It is construed x Xcfrtrccs 7tot' i^afiirpevcro/xei' tovt iiuev J. S. Kav8r]\lov, Aristoph. Lvs. 289. Kai rovd' z Add ft-iras, in ickatever manner, in Sttojs ix^ tyevcrtTai' ^.rjS' — avaSucrerat : De- what manner soever : iyi> TrapeAriAvOa, niostli. Epist. i. p. 1466. 1. 17. ed. Reisk. Tnarevaiv ovk avrbs a£lu>s rav ti/juv irevpay- ■ — J. S. nevcw elirelv 5w7]creadc,i, aWa to. irpay- y MeTa Tavff, ottoos (when) vcpv kyevzW para, '6irws av tls elirri, SiKaia (pafelcdair : vlos oiirool, — irepl rovv6/xaros — iXoidopov- Demosth. Prooeiu. p. 1454. 1. 6. ed. pedai Aristoph. Nub. 63. ed. Bekk.— Reisk.— J. S. RULE 4.] "Orav, "Ore. 157 - — 1. with an optative, when a thins; is spoken of as the thought of some person, and so orav is construed in jEschyl. Pers. 448. Also with a past tense of the optative, when a thing is spoken of as having often occurred: oirorav yovv avayKaadeirj i-iet', a7roXetV X*1 V hpu" <{>i}) vvv, ore ovtws 6£,€ids oot viraKovu) : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, fj. — 3. With an optative or sub- junctive it signifies, whensoever, as often as, if ever or at any time: eicaXei be ccti erifia, o~e Tivas 'ibot toiovto tl 7rori]Tus, o navTas efiov- XeTO TTotelv : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, 30. v. Horn. II. c/>, 323. — 4. It often signifies, since, seeing that: ore b)) tovto 6 "Epws eauv del, Plato Symp. p. 20G. ore to'ivvv tovO' ovtws eyei, Trpoay'jKei irpoQvpiDS eQeXeiv iiKoveiv : Demosth. Ol. i. [p. g. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] — 5. 'Ore fiev, ore be, are put for itore pev, ttots be, at one time, at another time: ov yap ore jutv aXXois, ore be aXXots, ueyuierat reus yv>(als 6 iraph tov deov ■Xpvaos, 6.XX' del ~o~is avrols : Aristot. Polit. ii, 5. v. Apoll. Rhod. i, 1270.* And in the same sense, ore p.ev, aXXoTe be, Iliad X, 64. cf. II. a, 599- and -ore fiev — uXXotc be, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 20. and eV0' ore, — ore, Soph. Aj. 56. and rore — dMore, Soph. El. 739- Some- times ore jiev is omitted before ore be, as in Iliad p, 178. and also ore, or rore, or aXXore, before aXXore, Soph. El. 752. Trach. 11. Eurip. Hec. 28. — 6. "Ore /jij is put for el /u?), unless, except : Horn. 11. v, 319. 7T, 227. Od. ir, 197. 'Oirine signifies — 1. forasmuch as, seeing that, since, with an indi- See Aristopli. Plut. 567. Ljs. 770. xP^lt laT ' iirpdrTetrBe' rore 5' &s irapaZ6vTo$ — J. S. dt&Kere : Demosth. in Nausiui. p. 989. 1. * So tots /xev, rorh Se : rore f.iev yap, 6. ed Reisk. — J. S. us ovk o.iroStddi'Ti, S'ikols £\ayxi> J) eiruwovvrtav thus ctKOvoi, ov% j/rror yero unraptat'Odveiv raiis tuiv \ey btefiauov to. vpia: Xen. Cyrop. ii. init. VI. (VIII.) The meaning of uv.ht is often rendered less determinate by the addition of ttws or -kov ; as cjru> thus, in some such manner as this ; nearly in this manner. VII. (IX.) T/js7s be (tv-u> ttws drev itp(\y]xdrwv Xaptfie'ivere eh tcls copras, so ohne Umst'unde : [but you receive the public money simply, unconditionally , without rendering any service in return :] Demosth. i. Philip, [p. 14. I. 28. ed. Reisk.] (See note g in the following page.) VIII. (X.) Ovrws in some phrases, as in ov-ws ovaio, e. g., is used in a sense similar to that of the Latin made animo, having reference however to what precedes ; as, ovrws ovaio avye rr/abe rrjs tyiXoirovias, courage ! go on and still further increase this diligence and in- dustry If IX. (XI.) It sometimes answers to c/Vws or Cos preceding : i]/ji oeli' bjias vols '0\vv8iots ($or)>)fAv , nt-u virws tis Xiyti tcaXXiara Kai rax'ffra, ovtojs apkonei fxoi'. Demosth. ()!. ii. X. (XII.) With pqbiajs : — dp' ovv pqbiios ovrn) Traprjirnpiev, tovs eiri- rvftor-as fxvQovs anvveiv rovs ira'ibas ', thus recklessly: Plato ii. Rep. e Uavra p.lv &vep(0irov ovjo, itpoaZoxviv Set, 6-n6re kcu iych p\v vcp' vp.u>v airlav ex» — : Xen. Anab. vii, G, 9. d Since, seeing- that, with an optative: f) Be Sjoi'/crjfris {family expenditure, house- hold expenses,) o-vx"hi OTT0T6 Seoi rov- t6v re kcu avT7}v rpecpeiv, teal iraiSdpia rpla, — kcu 6epairalvas Bvo, koX o!k4tt)u 3;a- kovov, &c. Pseudo-Dcmosth. in Nea±r. p. 1359. 1. 9. ed. Reisk. With a past tense of the optative : 6tt6t€ ti atceudpiov rov Becrtr6rov vcpeAoi , iyd> ere XavQdveiv eiroiow del: Aristoph. Plut. 1139. With the JEol. aor. Aristoph. Plut. J 019. 1 aor. pass. Plut. 1145. 2 aor. act. Ar. 512. 1 aor. mid. Eq. 1343 — J. S. * napa TrpoaT&TTSiv (pevyeiv, bpQSis eX 0V ecrri: Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 644. 1. 8. ed. Reisk.— J. S. / Ovtoos ovaio is sometimes a form of entreaty, being properly a conditional good wish: ®eop6iroXl, (prffftv, outods ovaio, X^P LV ov fwcpav alrovo-n Bbs, penBhv dvrenriiv : Lucian, de Merc. Cond. p. 492. A. ed. Salmur. ovtws ovaio, irapaXa- fiovcra r qiti poi : Id. Dial. Mer. p. 709. D. and in the plural: liteTevai, avrifioKSi ■xpbs irai^wv, irpbs yvvaiKoov, irpbs rwv ovtwv bp.1v ay aQSiv ourws ovaiffOe rov~ Toiv, p.)) irepiiSrire p.e — : Demosth. in A- phob. ii. p. 842. 1. 9. ed. Reisk. With the first person of the same verb ovtcos is used in a form of protestation, the phrase being still properly a conditional wish : Sxrivep avap.vnx ovrws — ujs '. (Twariov, ei itore, irpb cvojxwv fjXlov KarciKXivofievos , ov-% ovrto bin cKT^okiai', us hia ro fruif.ia : not so much through occu- pation, as, &e. Pint, in Cic. p. 864.5 XI. (XIII.) 'Pybiios without vvrw occurs in this sense : vtuv vfieis o ti av rvxy pqbitos xpriQigrirrde, Demosth. Phil. i. XII. (XIV.) 'Aypov TaXavTov p^bi'ivs aliov, an estate worth full a talent, or well worth a tahnt : L>sias. XIII. (XV.) 'Pqbiws e\etv, to be well; pqov eyeo', to be better. XIV. (XVI.) 'Vqbiov, followed by if, for fxjov : pc/biop mofievos av-ov K'iTiiXvrreiv rifv buictfuw iroXe/uovvros, ij to (Tthfia. XifipeaOai 0rt, a poeticle particle, is — 1. whilst, as long as: aXX' ayer, otyp (V J'ljt dot] ftpcLais ts 770ffis re, /jivrjaofieda (Spiofjrjs : Hoin. Od. k, 1/fJ. If duration not yet finished, and of which the end is uncertain, be spoken of, otppa is joined with a subjunctive ; as,.o0pd ris cwn, &c. Theogn. 1139. cf. 971. If past duration, with an indicative; as, o', 141. cf>, 55S. e, 557' Opp. Hal. i, 1 66- iii, 551. and 573. Sometimes ocf>pa answers to br\^a, a long time, preceding, as in Horn. II. e, 5SS. — 3. that, in order that. In this sense, like other particles of the same signification, it is usually conslrued with the subjunctive mood, if any thing present is to be indicated : aXXu trot, w fjtey araibes, a^i eairo- fxed', otypa av-^aiprjs: Horn. II. a, 15S. But with the optative, if a thing be spoken of as the thought of a person, and if a past tense goes before: eyeivaro — ovpavov aarfpoevb' — ci^p' eirj /uo/a'ipf acri Oeols ebos avfyaXes ulei : Hesiod, Theog. 128. However, a subjunctive mood also is construed with it after a past tense, either with or without ai> or k£v : [i. e. if what is spoken of in the subjunctive still continues :] with key, as in Apoll. Ill), i, 852. without it, as in Pind. dt'ipevcre — oypa eparai, Pytb. iv, l60. and in Apoll. Rh. evrve — cxpp' — vootov S In addition to what has been sail of veovs; Socr. &~oi:a, S> Oav/iidcrie, ass ovrw ovrws, it may be observed that it has some- y' anovaai : Plato Eulhyphr. p. 1. 1.28. times a signification of simply, barely, ed. Bas. 1. ovroi /xlv a,Tri8avov d filv merely; when words are to be taken in orpefiAwQels, s.evocpwv, ode, 'lirmas, oStoj: their most common or limited meaning ; in the ordinary manner, without the acldi- when things are spoken of in the strictest tion of torture: Lysias in Agorat. p. 478. sense, excluding every thing unessential, ed. Rei-k. TrpeaQevr^v 4k /JovAtjs riva or unusual, or not necessarily or ordinarily Xafi^dvojxev, yvc&pifiov ovr coat, with concomitant: avdypayf/uv arifiovs elvou. whom ire had a mere common acquuint- rovro 5' icrrlv ovx h v <* v ovrwai ris (p-q- unce, art 8' r\v roiovrns ovk elSSres, De- aeiev artjj.iav,~\. e. not ariixia. in its ordi- mosth. adv. Zenoth. p. 885. I. 5. ravTnv nary acceptation; Demostli. Phil. iii. ]>. to fxev irpu>Toi> ovtqictI viveiv, (in an 122. 1. II. ed. Reisk. ion 8e tovto, ov- ordinary manner, without the accom- Tacrl p.lv o.Kov(rai, on the mere hearing; paniment of the indignities afterwards without scrutiny, \6yov two. %x ov ' 6 » Se mentioned,) rjvdyKa^ov, — ws oe -rrporjei ro ris axjTO aKpifiws Qerdtrsie, ipevSos Uv %v irpilyixa, kcu oieBep/xaiyovro, &c. Demosth. Qaveii) : Id. adv. Lept. p. 4G2. 1. 11. So, de Fals. Leg. p. 402. 1. 20.— J. S. tj ita\ iroiovvru ak (prjoi StaipQelpnv robs l6o UuXiv, &c. [Chap. vii. § x. 6\ecr(TT), i, 15. [It is construed with a future indicative after either a present or a past tense] YlaXiv, (in later writers naXi,) is — 1. back, backwards: Horn. Od. »;, 143. v. Galat. iv, 9. hii^vai ndXiv, to give hack, to restore : Horn. II. n, 1 l6\ term iraXiv, Od. 1, 225. and ijicetv iraXiv, Aristoph. Ach. S20. to return. — 2. again, anew: Horn. Od. r, 533. — 3. con- trariwise, oppositely : ovti oy ciXrjdea cine, ttclXiv b' oye Xutero fxvQor : Odyss. v, 254. cf. Iliad h, 357- opyinrm re aZ tvoXXovs afia beii'ds avi/p yey ore, ko.1 vaXiv otpyovf.ii.vovs enybutv KtjXelv : Plato in Phsed. p. 26'7- v. Ceb. Tab. p. 176. [p. 16'. I. 8. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] Hep appears to be akin to the preposition -n-epl, and to signify nearly, about, [rendering t he sense of words to which it is joined less determinate, and resembling sometimes the addition cunque in Latin.] Examples may be seen in Iliad ty, 410. 441. Od. p, 13. a, 353. Plato Phred. p. 235. Iliad 1, 301. Aristoph. Ach. 1049. 559. II. b, 259- Theogn. 270. This meaning, or effect, continues in its compounded state; as in wairep, ynep, oirep, biorrep, &c. [The following German interpretations are given by Hermann, immer, immerhin. Xeyei, enrep Xeyei, btKata ttuvtu : was immer er sagt, ist gerecht : [Aristoph. Ach. 559-] ynep e w * e er a uch war : [Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 4.] wo-rrep, ivie audi, wie dock, wie etwa ; e'itrep, wenn under s ; evda nep, wo immer; oxpe irep, e/unrjs ijXvdev : immerhin, (\. e. zwar,) spat, dock kam er : [Apoll. R.h. i, 251.] av S' tiXkovs 7rep Uavaxaioiis eXeaipe, erbarme dich immer (doch) der andern, [yet, at least: II. 1, 301.] It may sometimes be taken as an adversative particle, and be rendered although: see II. a, 275. di]vat ; how can he but be? &c. Lysias adv. Agorat. c. 24. [p. 510. 1. 6". ed. Reisk.J v. Plat. Phaedr. p.* 243. Demosth. Ep. 3. p. 118. init. [p. 1485. 1. lo". ed. Reisk.]-> T\ws yap; and nws yap civ ; are used elliptically after negative sen- tences ; as, Tiov api(7T6v6vrwv ovk av av irore yevoio' tcQs yap ; (or ttuis yap av ;) 6 ye Trpbs bvTivaovv KaTaTreirTT)yws dvbvvov, i. e. ttu>s yap av yevoto; And ttu>s yap ov ; after affirmative sentences; as, etcelva uev a£ia j^apiTos ical enaivov npivw ttSjs yap ov ; for how can I judge otherwise? of course I judge them so: [from Demosth. de Cor. p. 325. I. 20. ed. Reisk.]* l III. ITws, even not interrogatively used, retains its accent, when it signifies in some certain manner, emphatically ; as, ov xpeyerai 6 h Pisth. irZs yap av tovtovs 5o/ce?s 4k- i. e. Kiav, exceedingly : Eurip. Tph. A. (pvye'tv; Euelp. ovk oIS' Vitus av : Aris- 1590. v. Aristoph. Plut. 742. It is used toph. Av. 355. — J. S. in a figurative question instead of an * n<2s ov Kal ^o(poK\4ris avTe\af$ero rod assertion in Aristoph. Nub. KavTavda QpSvov ; ' how came it to pass that — why ? irws otecrde fiov ttjv KapSlav 6pexSe7v ; upon Aristoph. Ran. 787. Chrera. Kal ircas this my heart was ready to burst with yrj Kal Oeoi- irais yap ov; Kara rrjs ira- av av fxoi \4£eias ape Xph ^4yeiv ; Eurip. rpidos : Demosth. de Cor. p. 273. 1. 28. Hippol. 346. Has, at what price ? vcos — J. S. ovv 6 Tvpbs iv Boiutots &vios ; Aristoph. 1 The following senses of ir&s used in- Equit. 480. How a yoke of bullocks at terrogatively may be added: ttSos SoKets, Stamford fair? How a score of ewes now? a figured question, expressive of admira- Shaksp. P. 11. Henr. IV. iii, 2. Ilaiswith tion ; KaK rcov aio'loiv fiarpaxovs iwoiei, an optative and av : Kal TtSis iff aypfy drjr irios SoKels : most cleverly : Aristoph. Nub. &«/ eAdoip.' is -ndhiv ; Aristoph. Lys. 912. 881. KaAxas, ttws tioKus X a 'P WJ/ > %$ : Arislot. be'i yap irws pev elvai koivcis Kryaeis, o\ws b' Ibias: Aristot. de Rep. ii, 5. And when in this sense 7rws pet — n-wx be are opposed ; in one manner, in another manner ; or in some respects, in other respects, Themis t., custom retains I lie circumflex, although analogy requires irtos pev, ttuis be, and try pev, ■ktj be, partly, partly ; ore pkv, ore be, -Kore p.ev, irore be, m (Procl. in Plat. Tlieolog. I. i. c. 4.) and the circumflex is retained also when nws signifies hoiv, in what manner, without a question ; as, ei))rovv — to nibs areXojtnv avrbv, Luke xxii, 2. cf. vers. 4. and 1 Thess. iv, 1. Acts iv, 21. But when it signifies indeterminately, in some manner or other; some how; in a manner; it hecomes an enclitic, and loses its accent ; as eyw be tovtov tov rpoirov ttws elp? uel, Aristoph. Plut. 246.™ irepiep^erai yap ttus uel ij/ulv o av virodwpedu, Plat. Eu- thyphr. p. 11. "AXXojs ye ttws, /Eschin. de Morte c. 1(5. p. 370. apuxrye ttus, in one, or some, way at least: Plat. Phaedr. p. 228. Ylov signifies — 1. where? as ttov yrjs kar'iv ', — 2. whither; ttov gov to Qeov eKe'tvo ypiro/jov cnreXijXvde ; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 3. So in the New Testament, ttov is often used for tto'i," as John iii, 8. vii, 35. xvi, 5. viii, 14. — 3. (IV.) for irCos : ttov be rraibeias aoi depis pvtjadi]- vai; Demosth. pro Cor/ Tlov retains its circumflex accent even when used materially, as, to yap ttov ai-o re kari rt, Kai en ciXXo tl beT elvat wapa tovto : Aristot. Physic, iv, although analogy would require it to be written ttov. Uov as an enclitic — 1. signifies anywhere, or somewhere: noWr/ e\7rts, — iicel, e'iirep ttov aXXodt, Krrjaacrdat tovto : Plato Phaed. p. Gj. See Iliad e, 193. p, 446. ovbe kuXov evravda ttov Kelardai, Lucian, Dial. Nept. et Nereid, ecet be ttov 6 "Apyos flovKoXe'i, Id. Dial. Jov. et Merc. — 2. It is used in speaking of things with some degree of uncertainty and caution, probably, perhaps, as I guess, if I mistake not, &c. voawv ye Ka\ irovwv — etc prjviparwv ttov deaiv ev rial yevope- rwv, Plato Phaedr. p. 244. See Iliad , 83. e, 473. [II. /3, llfj.] The primary signification of ra^a is quickly, speedily, soon. q See Horn. Od. a, 251. Polyb. Exc. Leg. 6. This is its only sense in Homer. Next it signifies perhaps, and is used as synonymous with 'laws by Plato in Phaedr. p. 205. de Rep. v. p. 451. Aristoph. Vesp. 280. iEschin. Socr. Dial, i, 2. To augment its signification, it is m Reizius says that irore yikv, irore 5e it signifies, why, wherefore ; iro7 \evicbv ought to be suhstituted for tots fiev, Tore 'lirirov; Aristoph. Lys. 193. trot yap Kal Se, in Xen. Symp. viii, 5. but I have %pr\v avajxeivai ; lb. 526. also how, i.e. already, in note b p. 157. given an ex- how do you mean? ixav Bepfibv fy; — trot ample of rore jj.ev, rore Se, so used, from Bepp.6v ; lb. 383. As an enclitic it is put Demosth. in Nausimach. p. 989. 1. 6. ed. for irons : a\\' erepa iroi ariceirreov, Ari- Reisk.— J. S. stoph. Eq. 35.— J. S. ; " I have given this example of irccs as P Kal (ity et ris imeivo viroXafifidvet' an enclitic on the authority of Brunck's ttov 8e yevoiro av ravra; ri KtaXvei nape edition. In Viger the verse is cited as a Xeyeiv rls 8' av airoKrelvat. XapiSimov ; proof of a signification of irois, which it Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 638. 1. 17. ed. has not, at least in that verse. — J. S. Reisk. — J. S. As 7rot is only thus incidentally men- 9 Taxa 8' eiffofxai 'yd: Aristoph. Lys. tioned, I shall take the occasion to ob- 1114. aiirbs yap Qetaiv rdxa: Id. serve that, besides its common meaning, Thesm, 66. — J. S. Rule 4, 5.] Tews, T fl. l6"3 joined with other equivalent words ; as, 6 fie? yap nept irai'ra abtKos, rax a.y, el tv^oi, koX tovtov r/bcKei : Demosth. pro Phorm. p. Q6\. [1. 15. ed. Reisk.] rii^a §' av "i ^ seems probable indeed, it appears so; efiotye r Taxeoos for rix a : rjQpoiaOricrav it pea- ' Tews is also, in the mean time, mean- fielwv rrArjdos ctarb rrjs c EAAa5os, 'oaov ov while : fiovAecrde Srjr' iyw reus birrw rh raxeos irpdrepov: Polyb. Exc. Leg. 46. icpea ravrl fievwv, v/xe7s 5' ire ; Aristopli. Ernest, as hardly ever before : temere, i. e. Av. 1689. (1687. ed. Bekk.) and so in fere. The comparative darrov sometimes Pac. 846. Eustathius on Iliad a, 193. means, formerly, before : enoi^, Aristoph. Nub. krAw. — J. S. 66.— J. S. 164 Qukow, &c. [Chap. vii. hoKel, it seems so to me, that at least is my opinion ; eon ravra, it is so ; dav[xaordJs, surprisingly so ; kcu yup eon tovto ye, yes, or / do, for it certainly is so ; Kal /uciAa bi), without any doubt ; Kal opfjws ye, and rightly too; Kal ovbev ye KwXvet, and nothing hinders, and there is no reason why it should not be so : Kal itaw ye, entirely so ; Kofxibri akv ovv, yes quite so ; /uaAa ye, certainly ; /laXiora ye, most certainly ; va\, a\ndtj ye, yes, it is true ; r>) At", eywye, I do truly ; iipdws, rightly; ovrus, just so, thus; Truv-uirnciv fjiev ovv, and most unquestionably too ; iravi/ aev ovv, certainly ; TravreXios fxev ovv, and completely so too ; irdvrwv /uaXiora, beyond all doubt ; 7rws yap ov ; and 7rcJs f ov ; to be sure ; [see ttcSs, and t lie notes.] o'jjubpaye,most entirely ; t'i \xi\v • aXXct ri \iy\v ; to be sure, why to be sure ; vneptyvm bi), inrepfvQs /uiev ovv, exceedingly, wonderfully ; tyrjfil eyw, I affirm it. Sometimes assent is expressed by a repetition of a preceding word ; as, to ov%v6>v icnl aAAwi> Trpoobeqoerai — * it is answered ov%ru>v pev toi: Plato Rep. ii, 371. and to npwTov 7jv — ■ l\v yap: Id. Theast. or by a word not before expressed, but agreeing with a preceding one ; as, dp' ovk avaytct] — ; is answered by 71-oAAj) ye, (amy/07 viz.) Plat. Parmen. VI. (VII.) Of the second class are, abbvarov, impossible ; ijKiord ye, not at all ; kuI ttws, how can it ? to be sure not ; /ud A/a, followed by dAAd, (when the formula is both negative and corrective,) or by some particle of denial : Pisthet. juwv evBv XleAA?jVjjs TrereoQai hiavoel ; Sycoph. /ud At", dAAd KXr'jrrjp elfii— : no indeed, I am a sum- moner : Aristoph. Av. 1422. see also 1427. pa &i' ovk iywye, not I, faith;' (lit At" ovk e/xoiye boKel, no indeed, I think not ; w ov yap, and ov yap olv, no, I grant, or agree ; x ovbafxGn, by no means; ovbau&s onwffovy, by no means whatever; ov bfjra, no indeed: Eurip. Heracl. 508. Hel. 1244. ovb' birwonovv, not in any degree, not by any means ; ovk eoiKe, and ov tyaiverai, it seems not; *ovkow eywye, no indeed, I do not ; (but ovkovv, therefore, is affirmative.*) ov ud rbv A/a, no, by Jove ; ov poi boKe'i, I think not ; ov ttciw, not at all; 7rJ5s yap, how can it? See ttws, and the notes. *Ovkow is the same as ovk ovv. 11 — I. Men. 00ns be Ttfiq, ujjrep' ; Orest. evbal/.iwv efv. Men. ovkovv ov y. you therefore are not so. Orest. ov yap fx avbdvovoiv at Kami: Eurip. Or. 1606. [1623. Pors.] — 2. Kauol yap i\v iroff ovtos £%0iOTos, — dAA' avrbv e/iiras ovr' eyw roiovbe poi ovkovv aTifiaoatfx av : I would not indeed, or / would not on that account : Soph. Aj. 1336. — 3. ovkovv oveibrj rabe kXviov pvoei reKva ; will you not then, &c. Eurip. Or. 1238. [1236. Pors.] — 4. ovkovv yeXms fibtoros w With respect to jua being not negative Greek particles when thus cited apart in itself, Zeunius refers to Em. on Xen. from the sentences to which they belong Mem. iii, L3, 3. add Brunck on Aristoph. or refer: in these answers, yap and yap Lys. 465. as to its not being affirmative, odv refer to the interrogator's anticipation In the following passage I suppose vi] that the answers would be what they are. should be substituted, h>&yKi\v olaav av- These particles are never used in this man- ro7s Kal vavfiaxelv Kal ire^ofiax^", Kal /xa ner in answer to questions really put for Ata reixoixax^iv : Plut. Alcib. p. 376. 1. the sake of information. — J. S. 19. H. St.— J. S. y See Aristoph. Plut. 342. 889. also x It is a hopeless task to translate 71. Thesm. 226. — J. S. I xii. Rule l, 2] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 165 els exdpnvs ye\$v ; and is it not, &c. Soph. Aj. 79. see v. 1051. Eurip. Orest. 1622. Ovkovv" signifies therefore, without interrogation ; although this signification arises from the negation contained in it. In order to understand rightly the passages in which ovkovv occurs, it will be necessary to remember that the Greeks have a peculiar mode of beginning sentences with interrogation, and ending them without; as, 0I0& o bpaaov, i. e. bpaaov — olaB 1 o ', oiaff ws yeveaQw, i. e. yeveaOw, olaQ' ws', When, therefore, one says, ovkovv, orav 5/) fxij adevw, neTravfTO/.ini, (Soph. Antig. 91.) this is virtually, irenavoonac ovkovv ; shall I not ? So ovkovv to fxev re)/i'7js re Kal are^vias \6y10v 7repi tKavws e^eru), (Plato Phzedr. p. 274.) is, licavws e^erW ovkovv ; and ovkovv a\Xa to biaby/ia eatrov fie e\eiv, (Lucian, dial. mort. x. t. i. p. 366.) is, u\Xa to btabrj/ua eaerov fxe e%eiv' ovkovv; will you not? Now he who puts a question for tiie purpose of urging a concession, as nonne? forms a conclusion on what goes before; and in many passages it would be a matter of indifference whether such a question or the word therefore were employed ; hence it comes to pass that ovkovv may often be so translated. SECTION XII. — Of adverbs which have a peculiar ENERGY AND AGREEABLENESS IN NEGATION; AND EX- PRESSLY OF THOSE OF WHICH pri IS THE FIRST IN CON- STRUCTION. Rule I. A negative adverb is sometimes put after a verb, with which it is construed, instead of before it; and in this case it is sometimes the last word of the sentence, and used elliptically : v. Pind. 01. vii, 86. e/xe be "Awros Kal MeXiros airoKTe~ivai fxev bvvavrai, fi\a\pai b' oh' (bvvavTai, viz.) Epictet. Ench. II. Two or more negatives are used in Greek to deny more empha- tically ; as Cicero's words, (de Fin. iii. c. 15.) quamquam negent nee virtutes nee vitia crescere, although they deny that either virtues or vices increase, may be rendered in Greek by a like plurality of negatives : Kai toi ov } fu) ravra Xeyu>/j.es, Callim. h. in Cer. 18. ' v. Virg. JEn. xii, 189- Sometimes, however, although seldom, a plurality of negatives affirms; as, fjtr) ovv bia Tavd\ wv iifxas ovtujs i^tiirarrjcre, /j)) boTU biKtiv : let him not, therefore, because of that, go unpunished for the de- ception which he has practised against us : Demosth. And ov% iJKiara is very much, or very greatly. III. A negative is used interrogatively for affirming more emphati- cally ; as, 70 be ye /jr)v irtis ov oau>s 7rpos to yevva~iav eyv*a ; who can doubt that this resolution was magnanimously formed ? or that this sentiment was a magnanimous one: Xen. in Ages, ovk eyw ae elbov kv rut KriTry fier avrov ; John xviii, 26. And with a future tense interrogatively for commanding : ov navarj fiapfiapu;a. fjfxlv qbuv ; Lucian, Lapith. t. iii. p. 445. i. e. cease to sing, &c. ovk ana^eis ebQvs ec tov avfiirorjiov ti)v yvvalm ; Plut. Apophth. p. 180. IV. *M>) ov, pi] ovk, and fxi) ovy\, with a participle or a noun, signify unless : ovk av ovv a^iOTtiaTOs e'irjv Xeywv, firj ov-^i irporepov airos avels, olos elfit: Lucian, Catapl. t. i. p. 645. See Soph. CEd. R. 12, 220. al 7r6\eis ttoWoi kv $w(cewy, jxij ov xpovu) kci\ TroXiopKiq.: Demosth. de fals. leg. p. 379« '• 6. By using the two negatives /uj) and ov, the writer has made the passage signify that those towns might be taken ; but that there would be need of time and siege : had he used /j^ alone, he would appear to have reckoned it certain that neither time could be spent, nor a siege decreed, and therefore to say that the towns, since tliey could not be besieged, could not be taken. Examples with juj) alone may be seen in Soph. Trach. 592. Eurip. Heracl. 283. Troad. 402. ^schyl. Prom. 503. Xen. Anab. vi, 4, 19. V. Sometimes kcl\ is added ; as, ov yap av"Ecrwp avr/pedr], /*?) ovyl kcu Tpotas avTf (rvfjnreaovarjs. VI. These particles are sometimes construed with an infinitive : enl yap rij 'Eperp) ov has more of douhtfulness, mildness, delicacy, less of decision, of positive asseveration, than /u>) alone : see iEschyl. Prom. 106. Xen. Hist. Gr. v, 4, 32. Cyneg. v, 31. de Rep. Lac. vi, 2. Demosth. Ep. v. p. 1490. 1. 15. Xen. Mem. iv, 8, 9- Soph- Aj. 727- iEschyl. Ag. 1178. Soph. Trach. 621. 225. (Ed. R. 236. Xen. Anab. iii, 1, 13. Cyrop. ii, 2, 20. Soph. (Ed. R. 1232. Plato de Rep. i. in fin. p. 354. B. Soph. Ant. 96. Of this passage in Plutarch, (in which fir/ alone is joined with an infinitive,) eibelv be rjjs (iceivov irapovoias ra irpayfinra, jx)) tijv aplaTt]v eyeiv btadeirtv, the meaning is, that nothing but his presence xvas required to put affairs in the best possible state : Vit. Cic. p. 8S2. As to other moods, /ji) alone, with the subjunctive, optative, and indicative, expresses apprehension of an affirmative, pi) ov, of a nega- tive : bebottca fjjj Qavi], I fear he will die; ebeboiKeiv p) Qavot, I feared he would die; beboiKa pi) Tedvvue, I am afraid he is dead : [v. Aristoph. Nub. 493.] beboiKa fxij ov darrj, I fear he will not die ; ibebotKeip /jti) oil davot, I was afraid he would not die; beboiKa fu) ov redvrjice, lam afraid he is not dead. With an ellipsis of a verb of fearing or doubting : /uj) ov^ clott) ?} »/ opdfj irpbs aperr/v, lest this be not the right road to virtue : Plat. Phaed. c. 13. So, aXXa juj) ov tovt y yciXenbv, davcirov eicvyelv, aXXa ttoXv yaXeTtuTepov i:ovr}piav : Id. Apol. c. 29. VII. M?/ and ov are placed before some verbs, which in interpre- tation they must follow. Those verbs are chiefly Xeyw, (pr}fu, tyaaicw, 7rpocnrotov/uat, d£iw, btKalto : as, 01 fiev (paariv tovs 0eous abucelv ciXXi)- Xovs, oi be ov tyacuv : but others say they do not : Plato in Euthyphr. c. 9* ovk efr) avrbs, akX etcelt'ov arpaTij-ye'iv : he said that not he himself, but, &c. Thuc. iv, 28. See Horn. II. rj, 391. eav be p) irpoawoLiirai v/nas aKoveiv, but if he pretend not to hear you — : iEsch. in Ctes. [p. 590. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. hfiSv..'] So, bel be, d r'lbkritrav, fjij TrpooTroielodai: to put up with it, to appear not to be sensible of it : Thuc. VIII. So before djjtw : vfias, w arpaTiwrat, ovveicaXeaa, ovk a^tiLv ra prj beiva ev oppubla e\€tv' for afyibv ovk, &c. Demosth. [not from Demosth., but from Thuc. ii, 89. p. 352. 1. 17. ed. Bekk. bpdv ifxas, to avbpes fTTpaTtwrat, Tretyofiti/uievovs to ttX^Bos tG>v evavTitoV, \vve- KaXeaa, ovk c\Ztu>v to. fiij b. &c] And before dvwyw, I order, fre- quently in poetry. In antitheses some preceding word is omitted before pfj ; as, eeiv } for Kai fif) KciXuJs yp. Id. ib. p. 258. 1. 35. IX. Mrj yap ye, and (at) yap §>), are deprecatory formulae ; as, tovs evarade'is irpoaipelirdat to. /3e\riora b baifiiov ovk a7ra : * p) bijra, u> iravrmv efiol wpocTcjriXearare : Synesius. Sometimes at the end of a sentence : oh* av rrore irarpo- boOelaav Karaiayvratfii r>)v evbofyav' fit) btfra. And with a pronoun after it there : pjtJe y eXarrovs (jxZ/iev avrovs ruiv avrnraXurv yevecrOaf p) b)~]Ta iifieis ye : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 432. XI. * Mi'iti, p'/nye, p/rt br), p/rtye br), ovroi ye, ovrotye br), fit) on, firjon, fir) on ye, p) on br), fiyrotye, fit'jroiye br), signify much less, much more, not only not, &c. cyw be koli kv ro'is Oearpois opw rovs dywviGTas vizb rdv iraihiov Trapotyvofievovs, fir'in br) vrro ye twv iXwv : much more by friends: Plato ad Dion. Mtjti ye bq, Demostli. 01. ii. kyw be ovb' dXXov rivii ij^iovv av ravra 6veibi£eiv, pyroiye br) YiXarwva : much less Plato: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 368. pyri yovv, (f. p/7-01 y ovv, Herrn.) iElian, H. A. iii, 23. V. H. xii, Q. xiii, 1. fieyaXas 01 irpeafivrai ras Sqfiias kirayovai, kuv en? oXiyurv fiaprvpwv rovro iraQr) ris, ovn ye (ovrot ye, Herm.) ev rqXticovrois decirpois : Lucian, Anach. ii, t. ii. p. 890. abbe onoaoi rives avrols elaiv ol fiaaiXels, efieXXov evpijaeiv, fir) on n)v arpanav, much less the army : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 429* a «oX \6yto kanv ciKoveiv ovtc emrepnes, fir] on br) epyo) : much more: Plato Pheedr. p. 240. With d\\d following: ok av fifiels aoQaXws epyaCoifieda ju?/ on ti)v tovtojv, ctW ovb' av rqv ijfierepav '. we could cultivate safely, not only not the land of these, hut not even our own, or we could not cultivate safely even our own land, much less,&c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 21. oibevi av p) on irpolica. boiqs, d\\' ovb' eXarrov rqs alias Xa/3wj/ : Id. Mem. i, 6, 11. And interrogatively : av yap av TtpoaeXQois fir) on irpds rroXiv, aXXa rrpbs olriav, ortov Ktvbvvos Ttpooeanv : iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 298. The difference between fir) and ov is that ob denies a thing itself, fifj a thought of a thing. Hence ov is used absolutely, and indepen- dently of any foregoing verb either expressed or understood ; c ovk ean ravra : whereas with p) there must be either expressed or under- stood some verb significant of thought, suspicion, will : p) ravra yevnrai, viz. (pofiovfiai. p) rovro bpaorjs, viz. opa. Sometimes it is rather the thought or will itself that is understood, than any par- ticular verb expressive of it ; p) icevde. From this primary and constant difference between p) and ob is derived the distinction made by grammarians, that ov denies, and p) forbids. Ov roX/iqaeis, is, you will not dare, to one who we know has not audacity enough to do so and so; p) roXfiqcrets, is, dare not, to one who in our opinion is audacious enough to do what we know the former will not do. Hence it appears too why p), not ov, is joined with conditional par- 6 The following is an example from a * On p.r)re followed by p.r], and ovre much better author : /it] o~rJT, 8> iravres by ov, see Schffifer on Bos, note 7, under 6eo\, jiwjSels ravff vp.Zv iirivivamv : "De- the word K6\ttos. — J. S. mosth. pro Cor. p. 332. 1. 18. ed. Reisk. c v. Aristoph. Eccl. 1000. andBrunck. —J. S. -J, S. Rule 10, 11.] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 1G9 tides ; el fit), eav fit), orav fii), on /it) : for by their very nature these particles indicate that something is proposed as a supposition or thought of some one. And in the same manner the relative vs is used with fit), when we intend it to have a hypothetical signification ; ris be bovvai bvva-ai erepw, a fir) e^ei avros ', Epict. Ench. 31. i. e. who can give things to another, if he has them not himself? Had he said, a ovic k\ei avros; the sense would have been, the things which a person has not himself, how can he give to another? When fir) is joined with participles, as is very frequently the case, the sense is properly, if there he such: v. Soph. CEd. C. 1154. b ■marsviav els civtov oh KptveTat' 6 be fit) iriffreixav ijbt] Keicpirai, on fir) treirictTevKev els to brofia rov fxovoyevovs vlov tov deov: John iii, 18. 'O fir) ■Kiarevhrv, is, if any one believe not ; for fit) indicates an imagination or supposition about some person or other not believing; but 6 oh 7n(TTevb)v would be meant of some certain individual who would not believe: v. Eurip. Bacch. 251. Polemo pro Callim. 47. p. 1(5, 13. (122. ed. Orell.) and on ov netriarevKe would have been intended of some one person in particular; whereas on fir) TretricrTevice is said as the thought or imagination of some one, whether it be said about a person who really did not believe, or about a person supposed to have not believed. EtSes, <*5 TaXt'ivi], \des, ola etvoittaev ri"Epis wapa to belnvov ev OerraX/a, bion fir) xai ab-r) eKXrfdrj es to avfiiroaiov ; Lucian, Dial. Panop. et Gal. Here fir) is used to signify the reason as existing in the thoughts of Eris, instead of stating it barely as a matter of fact ; which would have been done if ov had been used, and not fit). But as a thing may often be expressed in either manner, it is not strange that in places exactly alike sometimes ov is found, sometimes firj. In these cases much depends on the custom of any author. Lucian e. g. is fond of putting on fir} even where he might properly have put on oil. In Aristoph. Thesm. 1$. fir) is not put for ov : it refers to the preceding order of Euripides ; and the nega- tion is not simple and direct, but regards thought; for aicovco and bpu> are subjunctives. But even in direct phraseology, the Greeks, when they do not simply deny a thing, but indicate that it appears deniable, employ fir]. See Lucill. epigr. 102. in Brunck, Anal. t. ii. p. 338. Pausan. ix, 1, 3. Hence fir) comes very frequently after verbs indicating the thought of any one : see Pausan. ix, 8, 2. After some verbs, which in their nature signify nothing but what depends on thought or will, fir) is almost always put, ov scarcely ever; as, after ofivvfit, even as to something past: Xen. Anab. vii, 6, 18. v. Horn. II. t, 258. seqq. II. o, 34. seqq. Mr) is put with an indi- cative of the future, 11. k, 329- seqq. And what is strange, ov is construed, although very seldom, with this verb ofivvfit, even with respect to something future: Theocrit. xxi, 59. v. Eurip. Hel. 841. As to the use of fir) and ov in opposition of negations and affirma- tions, it may be easily understood by recollecting that ov simply denies a thing itself, fit) denies it as thought. The Greeks say )s I) fir) ; for this reason, that they do not say (pt)fii fit) elvai tovto, but 01/ (j>i)fit eJrai. 7 is prohibitive with a future indicative also, especially with interrogation ; p) my ar£%ei, p-qbe. beiXLav apeis ; Soph. Aj. 75. v. Soph. Tr. 1183. and Eurip. Heracl. 272. which verse ought perhaps to be taken interrogatively. Also elliptically with an infinitive : ftr) anoppenfievdai, ciXX' enl ttciuijs op/xfjs to biKaioy uno- btbotai: Antonin. els eavr. iv, 14. In expressing a wish fxij is joined with an optative : fit) yap a'tbe baifioves deiev fi acpwvov rrjobe tyjs apas en, Soph. CEd. C. 864. Further, by accurate writers, and espe- cially by the Attic poets, it is joined with the subjunctive mood after a present tense; as, otcvw pn) fxaraios jj/luv t] orpuTela yevnrai, Demosth. OI. i. p. 14. beboiK ey&> pi fxot /Je/3>/K?j, Soph. Phil. 493. ex cod. ap. Brunek. for bebotica. has the signification of a present tense. With the optative after a past tense; "Hprj be /jiey avcre, 7repibbei(7aa 'A^tX^fV, /u?/ fxiv cciroepareie peyas ttoto/xos fiadvbivtjs '. Horn. II. 0, 329- With the indicative of any tense, when something is signified, which really has been, is, or is about to be : beibcj pu) bi) TTavra dea vrifxep-ea elirev, I doubt the goddess told all things true : Hon). Od. e, 200. rvi> be (j)o(3ov/j.eda fit) a/iiporepwp fip:aprr]Kafiey, Thucyd. iii, 53. See Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 342.* Sometimes, when the mind of the speaker is agitated, no verb is expressed with ju>y : /ujy* aXXa. /not bos ev fxovov kvXiokiov/ do not send me away 1 do not refuse me; or the like : Aristoph. Ach. 457. M>) is often subjoined to the particles iva, otzws, e' £re, &c. v. Aristoph. Vesp. 70. 141. Ach. 722. Thuc. iv, 8. iv, 4. It is sometimes an interrogative particle : fxr/ nt) boKovfiev aot ovk cimy- Ka'ia emora bteXrjXvdei'ai ; Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 486. And in indirect interrogation, or inquiry, and when it signifies whether or not, it is joined with a subjunctive when something present is spoken of, with an optative when something past ; but with an indicative also when d v. Aristoph. Lys. 733. Thesm. 870. with p^ : viz. epireiroi-fiKri. — J. S. and Brunek.— J. S. / Kotv\(>k. 171 the speaker wishes to intimate his belief of the affirmative; see Soph. Phil. 30. Eurip. Ale. 1130. Plato Gorg. p. 67. b. Soph. Ant. 1253. Lueill. Epigr. 115. M>) is added superfluously after certain verbs ; especially after verbs of denying, prohibiting, preventing, avoiding, refraining, &c. as, tov Traihiov apvovfiivov /iij a.Tropej3\r]Kevai, the boy denying that he had dropped them : Lucian, Lap. t. iii.* airayopevo) yuj) voieiv enK\r)- aiav, Aristoph. Ach. l6S. elpye fxrj fiXatjTavai, Piat. Phaedr. p. 251. r}b\afi(UTo pi) ou)<2,etv serves for interrogation ; yap in reality assigning a rea- son for something preeecling, either expressed or understood : see Aristopli. Plut. 856. ov yap ravra fieyirrid eariv ; Plat, de Rej). vi. and with some expression of anger; ov yap kyj)7\v yepovra dvbpa. dneXOelv tov fh'ov, Trapa-^wptjaavra rols veois ', Lucian. III. It is sometimes used without interrogation to confirm a prece- ding negation ; as, ovk loorifioi, a> yevvaiorare, ov yap : Lucian, Dial, ftlort. IV. Ou yap dXXd in Attic writers is for : the expression is in reality elliptical, ov denying, yap assigning a reason, and aXka affirm- ing something different: 5 /u>) o-Kunrre //, w 'beKty'. ov yiipfaXX e^w KaKws : Aristoph. Ran. 58. also v. 498. 1180. and ov ratf dXXd, v. 527. Phaedr. ov br) to y ehos. Socr. ov yap, d\Xd tovs fj.ev ev ypd/j.- fiacn Kr/TTovs waibids ytipiv cirepei re Kal ypax^et : Plato in Phaidr. p. 276* See Acts Ap. xvi, 37. V. Ov yap rui dXXd has nearly the same sense, ye being added after some other word ; and in this phrase rot confirms the negation : ov yap rot dXXd tovtov ye tov \6yov ttoWuiv br] Kal iroWaKis a.KT)i:oh)s del 8avfj.d£ denies, ydp refers to fii] yiyvwoKovaiv, I say " to those ivho do not know him," for, &c. Tiov in some degree qualifies the denial. "Av has a signification of possibility or feasibility, which is here denied by ov.] IX. Ov[j.evovv, in one word, signifies — 1. atqui non, but not, and yet not : ov/uevovv 7/v cine'iv erepf, but no one else was allowed to speak: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 333. 1. 25. A — 2. truly not; not in- deed : 6 QpaavKXijs 6 fiX6ao, Ok. * 173 XI. Ov fir/v, but not ; not however ; ov nrjv ovbe, but not even, or but not either ; ov fxijv d\\' ovhk, however not even, however neither ; ov fii]v a\Xa, but however ; ov fievroi aXXa Kai, and ov fif/v aXXa rat, but however, yet notwithstanding. These forms serve for correction or rectification of something going before ; partly denying what has been said in too unqualified a manner, and partly introducing what is to modify it : ovtw fxev Ttjv A'tyvirrov 6 Kcutrap eyeipwoaTO. ov fxevroi sat aXXa (ov fxevroi aXXa cat, Hermann.) rrj K\eo7rdrpo;, rjcrTrep eVera Kai e-rreiroXefjiriKet, eyapio-aTo: Dion, xlii. p. 205. ov /x?)v dAXd tca'nrep tovtwv ovtws e^ovruv, ecrrtv rj napaKivbvvevoeiev av 6 7roXiriicds avrjp a\paodai rf]s KaXov/jtevqs irepiavToXoyias '. Plut. de sui laud. So ov fir/v ovbe : ov fxt/v ovb' el ovvayopevovai rots V7r' eyuou Xeyofievois, ovb' &s 6p8&s irepl rijs eiceivov bvva/jews yiv&oKovniv : Isocr. Paneg. p. 134. XII. Ov^ iJKKTTa is an extenuating expression for fxaXiara, chiefly, principally , most of all : eyw /jbevroi ov% rjiaara tovtov eveica ras yvval- tcas UTreTT€/u\pa, Plato Phaed. c. 66. fiiyas deos earlv 6 "Epws — TroXXayJj fxev rat aXXtj, ovy_ ijiaora be koto. Trjv yeveaiv '. Id. Symp. c. 6. rav- rais b% x olov, ifirov ye Kai. v. Arrian iii. p. 142. Athen. xi. p. 505. Philipp. ii, 12. where {iovov is added, and /u>) \xovov fir/ is in Aristoxen. (ap. Stob.) (oare firj /xovov p.rj <2r)re~iv, aXX', el bvvarov, juijoe elbevat ttjv rotavrijj' cvvova'iav : Serm. xcix. p. 542. vid. Jacobs, animadv. p. 295. XIV. Ov-^bpqs; (literally, do you not see?) is commonly used by the orators in a parenthesis and ironically, for olpai, videlicet, for- sooth : ciyaOfj be (ov% opas ',) Tv^rf avfj(3e(3t.toKO)s, Trjs efxijs uis avXr)s Kctrriyope'is : Demosth. pro Cor. Tcavv yap irapa tovto (ovj( bpq.s ;) yeyove ret rwv 'EXXijvwv icpuyjxaTa, el tovtI to prjfxa, aXXa fii) tovtI bie- Xexdrjv eyu) '. Id. \bJ XV. Olbe by itself may often be rendered not even; ohoi be, ovbe elxes, avayvZvai tr' eTt ; so you thought, 152. 4. Non chk mille, ma piu di did you, that because you had on buskins cento milia, la basciava. Boccaccio, I should no longer know you? Aristoph. Decam. Giorn. 8. Nov. 7. Non sono tra Ran. 556. Here oZv has reference to the noi in nuraero d'uomini, non che di cit- supposed thought of the person addressed, tadini. Guicciardini, 1. 7. — J. S. — J. S. i Add ov repeated, not that not ; ov * Non che in Italian corresponds with fici.u ovk £94\ei, not that he is not willing, oi>x 'in exactly : Nulla speranza gli con- Kwpa Se fiiv ovk airoAvei' Bion, Id. i, 96. forta mai Non che di posa, ma di minor On ov ph, see Em. on Xen. Mem. iii, 13, pena. Dante, Inf. c. 5. Fece tremar la 3. Brunck on Aristoph. Lys. 465. On terra il compagnone, NoNfcuE la sala, ov fj.7], Brunck on Aristoph. Lys. 704. — tanto ando giu grave. Ptjlci, Morg.M. x. J. S. 174 Ovbe. [Chap. vii. § xiii. ypu^avros t/vou, tuvto. iroieiv 7)deXrj/rav : Demosth. pro Cor. See also Demosth. 01. i. [p. 12. I. 14. ed. Rcisk.] Mr}be also has the same sense; Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 228. I. lrj. 17. ed. Reisk.] Ovbe is sometimes repeated for the sake of emphasis: ovbe yap ovbe rbv nov eralpov bel TrapeXOelv, Plato in Phaedr. [p. 214. 1. 36. ed. Bas. 1.]* XVI. M/?iie and oibe are sometimes followed by av t'i n, or bnovv, yevoiro, or yevrjrai, or iroirj, or the like, to signify exclusion of all possibility ; as, 01 be apuarewt rpo^oi irovf Ka/jupOevres, ovb' av, et ti yevoiro, T)]v el, ap^s bvvaiiTO av Xafielv evdvwpiav : not even if all imaginable devices were to be tried: Plut. irepl naib. aywy. ws ovb' av briovv yevrjrai, irepiawaovros ex rf]s avrov bvvaareias iroXtv, not even, let what may happen, not even in any case: Nazianz. ii, in Jul. XVIT. Ovbe els, firjbe els, and fxrjre eh, are used instead of firfbeis and vvbels, as being more empliatical : hfxoiv roivw ovb' av els ovbev &v Ibia rtvl bait], ravr aipeXoiro naXiv : Demosth. c. Lept. So yujjSe erepos for fjiriberepos, Plut. Symp. 1. ix. p. 742. Sometimes ovbe is put twice in the phrase, but with some word between ; as yto) yap on rroXts, aXX' ovb' av lbiu)rr)s ovbe els ovtljs ayevvijs yevoiro '. iEschin. C. Cte s . p. 280. And sometimes els, or ev, being one of the component parts of ovbels, or ovbev, is repeated with its compound : eV re ovbev Kareorr} 'ia/xa, Thuc. ii, 51. So Heliod. /Eth. ii, 27. extrem. XVIH. Ovb" eyyvs, and fir}b' eyyvs, (which latter is much more rare,) signify far from it, nor any thing like it: e-^ei be ov^ ovrta ravra, ovb" eyyvs: Demosth. in Mid. p. 389- 1. 30. and ttoXXov ye bel, or ttoXXov ye teal be~i, has a similar sense; il s'enfaut Men. Interro- gatively in Plato, Leg. vii. ftovXeade £r)fiiav rols ^j) noiovert ypcKJxvfiev, rj ttoXXov ye bet ; XIX. And also ovbe ttoXXov bel, in which the negative applies to what precedes rather than to ttoXXov bel : ov yap ravra cut' eKelviov yeyovev, ovbe ttoXXov bel, nor any thing near it ; nor any thing like it : Demosth. de Fals. Leg. (j>avrio-erai yap ovbe ttoXXov bel rrjs yevrj~ oofxevtjs a£wv alayivris, Demosth. adv. Lept. XX. And in a similar signification ovb' oXiyov bel is said : but in this phrase the negative is not referrible to any thing extraneous : ovbe ye 'iaov karlv abiKrjfxa, ovb' oXiyov bel : Demosth. de Fals. Leg. * See H. St. Thes. ii, 1537. D — J. S. END OF PART I. PART II. CHAPTER VIIL THE CONJUNCTION. Of conjunctions in general, it may be remarked that, although they properly connect similar parts of speech, they are sometimes found connecting different ones ; as a participle and a verb : Uepuas be olba — aya\fxaTa /lev, ko.1 viqovs, kcl\ fiojfxovs, ova eV v6[iu> 7roiev[xei'ovs ibpverrdai, dXXd Kal rolai iroievtri fxwpir]v eTri(pepovo~i : (for eirHpepov- Tas,) Herodot. Clio c. 31. An adverb with a substantive : Qvaias brjpoaiq re kcii ibiurai duovaiv, (for Ibiq,) Paus. in Arc. p. 522. 1. 6. A genitive case absolute with a complete sentence or proposition, vooot re yap eitt&Sovro kcit du^orepa' t>7« re Spas tov evtavrov tclvttjs oiktijs eV j; aadevoiiatv ardpiairoi jUaXiora, feat to ywplov aua, eV w eoTparoTrebevovro, eXwbes icai -^aXenov i]v, (for tov ^b)plov e\u>bovs kuI XaXen-ov uvtos,) Thuc. ii, 47. v. Ter. Phorm. v, 6, 46V SECTION I.— On the conjunction d\Xd. Rule I. 'AXXd is sometimes put after fxhv, instead of be : ra fikv TroXXd caw dXX* eVi tov AeceXeccou ttoXc/jov, &c. Demosth. adv. Androt. p. 597. [I. 25. ed. Reisk.] v. Horn. II. tt; 240. It is used both in proposing objections, whether interrogatively or otherwise, and in answering them : ri yap (3ovX6/xevot ^ere7re^7re Upon', % ko.k- Plaut. Asin. ii, 1, 7. but such a construc- rave Be\\epo(p6vTriy : Iliad £*, 164. nunc tion is often required by the sense, as in cujusjussu venio, et quamobrem venerim, Cic. Philipp. ii. c, is. §21. and in the dicam : Plaut. Amph. Prol. 17. See passage from Homer.— J. S. also iii, 2, 24^ quin tu abs te socordiam 1?C 'AXX«. [Chap. viii. § i. you have sent for them ? for peace ? but that was in the possession of all before. For the war then ? but you yourselves were deliberating about peace: Demostli. pro Cor. p. 3l6. 1. 17. See Cic. pro Arch, p. c. 4. [§ 9.] pro Plancio [c. 4. § 11.] II. In answers it often signifies concession or assent ; as, dXX' el re Xeyere, Kal noiijauj Taiira, why you say well, &c. Xen. Anab. vii. III. Sometimes c'tXXd is, at least : ei fit] izdai bvvarav dXXd caret v\as, Aristot. et fit) otuv re 7rept tjfiepav rr/v Trpwrriv, dXXd tt} bevrepa ye -netpareov e"£evpe~iv rijv Ibeav tov irvperov : Galen, ad Glauc."' eiri- orafiai yap npioTOV fiey 'AQqvaLovs, el teat fir/ iravra. fied' i/iwc elmv, ctXX' ovv vrrep ye tFjs eavTwv deal ira- Tpijjoi, avyyeveade. y aXXa vvv ! now if ever : Soph. El. 411. But dXXd ye, thus elliptically used, sometimes signifies even : at Aaice- haifiovimv firjrepes — dXX' avrai ye atyttcofievai to. rpavfiara avruiv (of their sons who had fallen in battle,) eireo-KOTow : iEl. V. H. xii, 21. as if he had said, they were not accustomed to send others, dXX' avrai ye, &c. IV. 'AXXd fit), or dXX' ohy), is put for ov he, which would be a barbarism: el tovto\ to pijfia, dXXd u?) robi bieXe^drjv eyw : if I made use of such and such an expression, and not such and such : Demosth. pro Cor. V. (VI.) *AXXd yap is sometimes interrogative, but much oftener affirmative ; dXXd still retaining its adversative nature, and yap inti- mating a reason for the objection or opposition signified by dXXd : et eyui fya'ibpov ayvow, Kal efiavTOV eTriXeXrjcrfiai' dXXd yap ovberepa eon tovtwv : Plato Phaedr. p. 228. dXX' ov yap 'eireide' (i. e. Xerxes could not prevail on Artayntas to receive any thing else instead,) btbol to spdpos : Herodot. ix, 109- The nature of these phrases is made appa- rent by a small alteration of the puuetuation : ctXX', ov yap eireide, bibol to irore "Bifx-Kavras A. tv' aXXa. tovto Kardavovo-' exw avrovs : Id. Phil. 1041. ab 5' aXXa aeSev fi.vT)fie?ov, el (ij) rols i/iols ireiffQris rovde XPV$ e > ^ ^ * v °-pv, aXX' iv XSyois: vers. 1239. — J. S. ywaiKwv x 6 P ff ''' eKirvevaai /3iov : Eurip. n 'Ayddwv, eireity aavTbv eiriSovvai dX\' rj, ttXi)v el, and TrXj/y eav, are except : ov yltp avBpvirov vyiaciei 6 larpevuv, irXrjv dXX' yj Kara ovfifie{3r)Kos : Aristot. Metaph. i, 1. IX. (X.) 'AXXd rot, but, but however, but truly: Eurip. Hel. 750. and so dXXd fir/v. This latter too is but in the sense in which but is used in assumption, as in the minor propositions of syllogisms : el yap elm (iwfioi, elirl rat deoi' dXXd ju/yv et towvtwv iibovwv evetca ; Plato Phaedr. p. 258. 1. 42. v. Demosth. Phil. i. p. 45. I. 13. [ed. Reisk.] adv. Phorm. p. 585. I. 47- [p. 909- 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] jEschin. in Tim. p. 1Q1. 1. 42. [p. 156. 1. 9- «d- Reisk.] Herodian iii. c. 10. i, 13. Aristoph. Ran. 1105. 229- Plat. Apol. c. 5. Sophist, p. 225. Luke xii, 51. Isaeus de Aristarch. Hered. p. 261. [1. 8. ed. Reisk.] Plat. Phaed. p. 97. Apol. p. 34. Heliod. v, 2. Sometimes when these particles are thus joined, the meaning of each is apparently and obvio jsly the usual and ordinary one ; as, epol ovbev £7rto-/jjuatVerat, dXX' ?} {but either) tS aufiarif {jlov, rj (or) rw Krq- P 'fly ovk wyaQ6v £ hofaply, &c. Epict. Encli. c. 24.. So Theogn. 485.' But dXV jji (V.) is truly, of a certainty, in truth : uXX' j), to Xeyu/ue- vov, w avbpes, eyu> ical Trap' 1 vp.lv Kai Trap' erepois TrXeioari, irenovQa to Tijs yXuvKos, utottov m\ napabolov irados : Dio Chrys. The phrase is sometimes used in questions, j) being then interrogative, and d\Xd still adversative; as, to Phaedrus saying nepl tus bUas Xeyerai ko.1 ypatperai, (>/ priToptKi) re^vr) viz.) Xeyerai be icnt irepi tcis brjfirjyopias' eVt irXeov be ouc aKrjKoa : Socrates answers, dXX' ?) tus Nedropos re kv be YlaXafirjbovs upi)- koos yiyovas ; have you then heard only of, &c. Plato in Phaidr. p. 26l. So ciXXa on, and dXXd rj oti, except, except that : o be irapa Trobas €Trote~iTO Kivbvvov, ov% erepov i)v, a.XX' 6-1 naaiv iariois r/ vavs e^epero : Synes. Ep. XI. (XII.) Before verbs in the imperative mood dXXct is hortatory ; as, dXX' avotye ty\v Qvpav ! Aristoph. Nub. 183. 01 [xkv avTiKpvs km- ovTes, o't be kotottiv, dXX' 'ire avv noXXrj Karatypovijaet en' civtovs : Dion. Hal. hi/ And it is sometimes elegantly thus used, when a transition is suddenly made from previous discourse to cohortation, its signifi- cation appearing to be, but enough has been said, or but arguments enough have been adduced: see Horn. II. (3, 139. «, 274. 393. 210. 337. Eurip. Iph. A. 903. Hel. 1672. It sometimes follows comparative adverbs instead of 7} : tov ratyov eTTKrrifxOTaTOV (^eXafujSavov), ovk ev w Keivrai fiaXXov, dX\' ev , and that av, if, is always 9 'AW' ?), profecto, truly, really : a\\' /xdcrei (jloi ; Eurip. v)) Af &AA' &piar' fy Tpix6f3poortss robs \6 Aristoph. Thesm. 260. Well: &A.A& a\\' fy irpb Seiwou ttjv fii^apKW KareSo- irparr', el aoi Sonet: Id. ib. 216. There- pai: Aristoph. Ach. 1111, 1112. See fore, then; noting an inference or conse- Brunck, who refers to Valck. on Hippol. quence : tovtI itovr\p6v a\\' virairoKivr)- 932. &AA' % x a ^ K ' l0t/ exeii' ti : Eurip. r Ueivricreis, aAA 5 enaviffrwr Aristoph. vr] top A? a A. A. a tcair iT-fiSeia irdvv, and Plut. 539. vfjLerepov evrevdev epyov S> a very proper one it is too: Id. ib. 259. vdpes' aAAct Tats &/mu eiepeis; Bceot. 6V ear av* ctyaOa Boiwrols a7r\ws, opiyavov, yXa%oj, xpiadws, OpvaXXibas, &C. Aristoph. Ach. 873. why I bring truly all that the Bceotians have of any value, if indeed all those things are reckoned valuable. The meaning of v. 241. II. p, will appear, on accurate examination, to be, certainly the Trojans will get the body of Patroclus, whether they be about to offer any other outrage to it, or to throw it to the dogs and birds. In this first use av often resembles the Latin addi- tion cunque : oaoi av, as many soever as ; o av, whatsoever ; ov av and 67rov av, wheresoever, in tvhatsoever place; ore av, when- soever ; onus av, in whatsoever manner, &c. III.— 2. (III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. X.) As to the potential use of av, (which is termed bwrjriKos,) it is to be remarked that it properly signifies possibility without actuality. With the indicative mood of different tenses : u ravra b', el fiev Traprjv, Xeywv av v/uds ebibaaKOV : I would have taught you : Demosth. Ep. iii. p. 117. ovbev av, wv vvvl 7reTroir}Kev, ewpafyv : he would have done — : Id. Phil. i. ov 6 Mapavas, el to. bixaia at Movcrat binaaai tfdeXov, aitebeipev av : would have flayed: Lucian, Dial. Jun. et Lat. See Theogn. 436. ical vv k en irXeovas A.vki, which is that of 395. &AA' ovk &v zo-ti o-vKocpdurov Hy- two of his MSS. also, to be as good as fxaros, but there can be no ring or amulet that of his edition.— J. S. for the biteofan informer : Aristoph. Plut. » With the indicative present : ott' o 885.— J. S. ISO "Ay. ' [Chap. vin. [p. 13. I. 6. ed. R.] el anioToiriv, ovk av utottos eirjv : Plato Phaeclr. ]). 229- ovk ay if.ws e'l-q, fie cannot be my son : licrodot. Er. c. 6'3. v/j.1v yap, e'iirep Kal ueTplois tcareatcevaarai tu twv vo/jIojv, us twv KaXXio~rwv ay e'ir} vofxuiv : — must be, is, &c. Plato de Log. i. tovtm apyvptov fiev irpoei- fxrfv ay, Vh£ : Lycophr. vs. 9* x w P 0ls a,/ e ' ffw crvy Ta X ei > Soph. El. 1498. But sometimes av is joined with the imperative mood itself; as, (ptXyaarov jue av, Aristoph. Ach. 1200. [*Av softens the command, and gives it more of the civility of a request.] It signifies choice or volition : iroaov av irpia'io, wore tt}v yvvaina v The position of Brunck (in his note yv&p.t\v exoiev, evrvxh s ^'1 V *7^ : Eurip. on Aristoph. Eq. 400.) that the optative I^fen. 1207.— J. S. mood in its potential sense is always ac- Wf Nihil notius usu particulse av con- companied by av, may he refuted by many ^Eturali cum indicativo in narration ibus passages; e.g. ov /j.y yap n naicwTcpov 'Mfk significatur non tam res facta, quam aAAo irddoi/ii, ov8' e'/ kzv toD TraTpbs\^aRs fieri potuit, aut fieri solet : ideo ex- airo(pdi.iJ.evoLo irv9oifj.r)v, Horn. II. T,,32'ljKTimiturper/i?r6,/o?'i> omk% rjyeTr av, prajire solebat: [Aristoph. Vesp. v6dev Kari&iv SeicdTT) is yalav 'IkoWo 269.] Brunck. ad 1. c. — J. S. Hesiod, Theog. 723. d\A.' ovk av /xaxi- x Dem. airirov. CI. iSov. Dera. eioir'' o-airo- x*■ rji ovk av, fiaffiXrjas ava arofi eyjav, ayo- pevots : Horn. II. a, 250. IV. (XI.) In its potential use ay has sometimes a signification of the future, with different moods and tenses ; with the future of the indicative ; ^ as, ovk eanv ottws ovk av a^ebov anavra Kaica ireiadfxeda, Isocrat. in Areop. V. (XII.) With a future infinitive ; evofxiae tovs uev tovtwv oXiycj- povvras tv-^ov ay koi ruiv fiei£6vwv KaTatppov^aeiv, Isocr. in Busir. p. 448. VI. (XIII.) With a future participle ; at/r« bij, ws fxaXa (j>tXopovT)- tikws av befyuHTOfxevos dirrjVTi](Tev. VII. (XIV.) With the infinitive of the present; boKel fxoi ddXa irpondels, uaXurra av iroieiv (for i:oiii. vi. ev r£ dacpaXel i'/bq eaofxai, ws /xrjbev civ en kukov iradelv '. (for weitjeodai) Xen. Cyrop. viii. IX. (XVI.) With a participle present: eVel eyvcj ovk av bwa/uevos ttjs irvXetjjs Kpare'iv, (for bwrjcrofievos.) X. (XVII. XVIII.) As to the participles of the aorists with av, they cannot have any signification of the future, but must necessarily signify past time. If ever they seem to be used of the future, they are rather employed to indicate the shortness of the time in which any thing is completed ; for the participles of the present have a signification of some continuance or length of time. In the phrase ovk olb' av el ireiaai/ut, Eurip. Med. 940. Ale. 48. av is out of its place, as it belongs to the optative: I know not if I can (or shall) persuade. SECTION III. — On the third and fourth uses of av. Rule I. — 3. The third use of av, called irapairXripwuaTiKos, or expletory, is when it is redundant. This it properly is, only after a considerable number of parenthetical words ; in which case its repe- tition is of some advantage to the sense: see Soph. Ant. 46(5. In other cases of the repetition of this conjunction, the second av is so far from being a mere expletive, that it has a peculiar energy and grace. Excepting the case of parenthesis, av can be repeated in the same member of a sentence, only if the first av belongs to the prin- y 'Apes ye tovt' av ey<& iror' o^o^ai ; fieQa rw QiXIttttu), for k\pwp.eQa av : Demosth. 01. i. The Attics seldom omit av, if that can properly be said to be omitted or defective, which is not necessary or indispensable: for it is not true that dV is a necessary particle. It only renders language which is uncertain in itself, still more doubtful. Of this its service the Attics are very fond of availing themselves; so that they even repeat it several times together for the purpose of modifying or limiting expressions in various ways. The poets however often omit it : see Horn. II. ft, 340. Pind. 01. iii. extr. xi, 21. Pyth. x, 95. iEschyl. Choeph. 592. Soph. El. 800. Ant. 604. Aj. 921. Eurip. Iph. A. 1210. [See note v, p. 180.] *Av is seldom used with a verb fol- lowing el with an imperfect or aorist. SECTION IV. — ON THE CONJUNCTIONS apa, apa, AND ye. "Apa and apa differ in this, that by prose writers and epic poets apa is used in interrogation ; by the other poets, and especially by the dramatic poets, apa if the first syllable be short, and apa if long, z See Aristoph. Thesm. 196. Ran. 572. .'581. Nub. 1396. Ach. 218.— J. S. Rule 1—4.] "Apa/Apa. 183 whether in interrogation or in the signification of therefore ; but in the signification of perchance, perhaps, apa with the first syllable long will scarcely be found, because, as this meaning is less emphatieal, less stress is required on the accentuated syllable in pronunciation. It is to be observed besides, that apa used for continuation or con- nexion of narration, especially after fiev and be, is most frequent in the epic poets, but not so in Attic writers. "Apa, signifying therefore, and without interrogation, is never placed in the beginning of a sen- tence : but interrogatively, and with the signification of ergone, it is so placed : v. Auacr. li, 1. 2. 5. has then? so then? See Hermann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 142. Rule I. "Ap' ovv is never put without interrogation at the begin- ning of a sentence : ap' ovv only is so placed, and that interrogatively. See Hermann, ad Soph. Ant. 628. ed. Erf. min. II. It is very frequently subjoined to some other word, and has then nearly the same signification as ttov, or 'laws : el uj) apa kv t£ 'HAvcr/w 7reb!(j> to 1*v\i-k6giov ouvenpoTelTo, unless perchance, &c. Ari- stid. III. It signifies therefore: rjbo^ricrev cipa el ju>) to. ofiota yevvalws eveyicoi, Appian. So evvorjaov apa : vouv apa Trpuae^e. IV. It is sometimes used ironically; e. g. e£ei ap avdpwiros det \a.[ial peirwv ttjv ttoXiv eXe'tv avTofioel, SO then. But one of its chief uses is in the conclusion of syllogisms : el yap elai fiutfjioi, el a l /cat deoi' aXXa [xi]v elai (Hwfxoi' elalv apa n.al deoi : therefore there are gods too : Lucian, in Jov. Tr. 6 Troirjrris //lu^r^s 1 6 jjufiriTris rpiros airo rrjs aXrjdelas' 6 7rot7jr}}$ apa rpiTOS airo rfjs aXt)- deias : Procl. in Plat, de Rep. p. 405. 1. 30. a 5 Apa is used in interrogation, and usually when an answer in the negative is expected, num? but sometimes when an affirmative answer must follow; jie? see Eurip. Ale. 341. 771. — 1. By itself: dp' ovru) flovXei ij/juv CbpiaQai vvv irepl tov baiov Kal tov avoaiov ', Plato Euthyphr. c. 11.* — 2. followed by ?'j : apa to oaiov, oti oaiov eon, s iroiel rows avQpwnovs — ; Plat. Euthyd. p. 292. dp ovv ovk apidfirjTiKt) fxev, a "hpa, therefore, then; 8ia tovt ap' b ~*Kp' apfioaei fioi; Answ. v\) A? aA\* avrov Kal »ca\' %v ra 5pa.fj.ara, Aristoph. apior' ex« : Aristoph. Thesm. 260. So Thesm. 166. apa, truly; ris rwv Kara. 263. — J. S. ■KpwKTOv h~eiv6s io-Ti tV r4xvr)v ; ap olS' c "*Apa it?j Soks7s (do you think) \vr^pi' 'Kfivvuv a\\' 'laws apj>^ff€Ta«. Id. Eccl. avrfi Tavra tov v — then, therefore : ovk Sp' a?jKas, Si 'yaff ; cwroaipov(nv, Id. ib. § 54. Te often follows ctXXa /uj/j', (cat /ur)v, ovhe pij>>, oh firjv, but with some other word between pr/v and ye : Pors. ad Eurip. Phoen. 1638. Te is repeated in the same member of a sentence, and not inele- gantly : see Soph. (Ed. C. 977. Plato Phaedr. p. 241. 1. 36. Mev ye are very seldom joined by the tragic poets. Te in this union refers to and confirms what precedes, fiev relates to the very thing spoken of with it: see Aristoph. Nub. 1380. 1171. VI. (IX. X.) The difference between ye hrj and yk toi is, that hi) simply confirms what is modified or limited by ye, whereas rol indi- cates that what is so modified or limited is opposed in some manner to what precedes it: kX&tttov to xpijp-a Tavhpos' oh Kal ao\ hoKei, 10 'XeKrpv&v ; vr) tov AC, eVt/jvei ye toi : Aristoph. Vesp. 928. he nods however certainly ; i. e. although he does not answer that it appears so to him too, yet however he nods at least : fxedu tovs eice'tOev, ti wore Kal Tvyyavovai hiavoovuevoi : Plato Leg. x. and opposed to fxev : wpoaoiKos yap daXaTva yjopq to fikv nap' eKa/TTrjv fj/iepav i]hv, jxaXa ye fxi]V ovtios aXfivpov Kal iriKpbv yeiTOvr}fia: Plato de Legg. iv. p. 705. 01 fiev hi] Uepaai ovroiba efiavr<5 ao(jibs wv : Plato Apol. p. 21. So ou yap bi) xpevberai ye, Id. ib. Xeyovcri yap bij — , Paus. in Arc. p. 457 • and with rot : b yap rot Xuyos >)i>, 7rep« ov bterpifio/nev, ovk oIS' Svrira rponov IptjjTiKos'. Plato Phaedr. for truly: see Soph. Tr. 1228. Eurip. Heracl. 436. 534. 7l6. Q06. Hel. 02. Here. F. 101. Aristoph. Lys. 46. II. It is used ironically; 6 as, ov yap airb rovrtov bpfxrjoas, airaaav peXXeis KaTuXafieiv r>)v yupav : you, forsooth, setting out with these means, &c. III. Tap is used in interrogation,* and may have place in any question, because, i" know not, or tell me, or the like, is always understood. Whence the Latins say quisnam, and nam quis, ami the Germans denn : see Hermann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 1Q2. b S' lepsvs avros eorijKei' rj/uayfxeros, Kal avarefivuv, kcu to. £yKara efcaipwi', Kal icapbiov\K(Li>, Kal to alj.ia rw (3oj/ju) irepiyewv , Kal ri yap ovk evoefits eirireXwis ; Lucian, de sacrif. 13. t. i. p. 136. ri yap irenXoioiv aBXio'v Kpvirrei Kapa ; Eurip. Here. F. 11QS/ 0'iei yap, <5 Kvpe, iKavbv eivai tcaXXos atdpunrov avayKaCetv rbv p) fiovXofxevov Trparreiv 7rapa rb fleXnovov ; Xen. Cyrop. v. Orest. rov yap cHovros ovk eariv racpos. Electr. r) £17 y a P aV//p ; Or. e'Ltrep ep:\pv%6s y eyo). Ei. 1) yap ov Keivos; Soph. El. 1221. v. Horn. Od. ic, 501. Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 16. And with an expression of indignation: rb yap cwriXeyetv roXpa.v v/uas, eKeirr/v ebei ; ov yap ofieodfivai rfjv Kapbiav n)v ruvra. reKovoav ; Chrysost. in c. 15. Ep. i. ad Cor/ It often occurs in answers; when it must be referred to something not expressed, f as to va\ or ov, e. g. which are usually omitted : ovk e Legat. kcu Sijr' erpvxo/xeda — eft apjxa- p.a£wv /xaA.9aitS)s KaraKeipievoi, airoWv- /xeuoi. Dicasop. crT)v re Kal veav, Phid. evt\ yap effTt Kal vea ris 7]jJ.epa ; Aristoph. Nub. 1161. ed. Bekk. igitur: et sic semper in interrogatione, says Brunck. — J. S. s There is no note of interrogation in the edition of Brunck, (vs. 593.) and it is translated vosne mihi ansos contra- dicere — / J. S. h Ov yap, by itself, parenthetically, is very frequent in Demosthenes ; e. g. Sfioi6i> ye (ov ydp ;) rovro rols irporepois, &c. in Androt. p. 616. 1. 16. ed. Reisk. KaXa. ye (ov ydp ;) tk yeypafx/J-eva — , ia Aristocr. 673, 19. eijvovs ye (ov yap;) arrAois vpuv — : Ib. 674, 14. '6jxoiov ye (ov ydp;) ols efxov Karriyopet ; de Cor. 272, 14. All these passages are ironical — J.S. t An ad suam revertetur antiquam vilara alicubi honeste tractatam ? At hie quidem ante oculos vestros quomodo vixerit, scitis omnes. Auct. ad Herenn. iv, 4. where there is another reading, Nam for At : on which Ernesti say?, Rule l — 6.] Flip, A>/. is? evdevbe — Xiyerai 6 Bopeas ~r)v 'SlpeiOuiav apnacrat ; Socr. Aeyerat yap : Plato Phuedr. p. 229» "Eari yap ovtu is a very frequent answer in Plato : and yap is sometimes equivalent to on, because : i'lpero avrbv (Zoilus) tis twv 7re7rathev[j.eru)v bia ti kokiLs Xeyei 7rdiTas* o be, noiijaai yap Kaiuiis fiovXo/jevos ov bvva/Jiai : Ml. V. H. xi, 10. ov yap trxpXlj, J lujKpares : Plato Hipp. Maj. [p. 345. I. 31. ed. Bas. 1.] So Piut. de audiend. poet. p. 15/ In the following the answer is interroga- tive: (pofie'iTai tis fxerafioXiiv ; ti yap bvvarai x w l°' s fxeTaj3oXf]s yevetr- Oai; Marc. Anton, vii, 14. Tap refers to then he is unreasonable, or the like, not expressed ; and when it occurs in an answer, it is often to be referred to something not expressed : 'AvTifavijs 6 K(t)/ja)C0TT0tvs ibs aveytPtdOKe Tiva rw fiaaiXel 'A.Xet,avbpo) twv eavrov Kwfik>bi(Hi; (b be bijXos tjv ov 7ra.1v ti airobe^ofievos) bel. yap, efrjoev, w fiumXev, tov raDra anobe-yojievov inrb avjjifioXbJv TtoXXatiis bebentfrjKevai : A then. xiii. where yap is to be referred to it is no wonder you do not much approve of what I am reading, or the like; and Herodotus begins the speech of Dionysius thus : hirl fypov yap Tfjs anpiis, &c. Er. c. 1 1 J V. A?) in prose never begins a sentence or member of a sentence ; in verse it sometimes does, but not in Attic writers ; it signifies, certainly, surely, ivithout doubt, of a certainty, truly, &c. v. Plat. Euthyphr. [p. 1. 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] de Rep. v. p. 455. Aristot. de Rep. i. p. 185. It also signifies, now: Aristoph. Nub. 700. Vesp. 1059. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. Hesiod, Op. 414. Iliad , 143. 450. And in this sense it is joined with jjSq sometimes in the same member of a sentence : Eurip. Suppl. 780. Troad. 235. Kvv §/} with a past tense is, just now, a little while since: Plato Gorg. p. 455. VI. Besides its very common use in continuation of recital, in which it is usually rendered igitur, then, (a use common to it and bF/ra, and re bi t) ) when joined with /cat it signifies i]br], now, by this time, already ?' as, Ta.be b}) naibojv Kal bi] (pOifieviov doTu (pepeTat, Eurip. Suppl. 1114. v. ^schyl. S. c. Th. 478. Aristoph. Pac. 942.* v. Heind. ad Plat. Cratjl. p. 109. and with a future tense, forth- with : £7rt tovtovs fjfxe'is Kal b>] crTparevao/jieda, Xen. Cyrop. iv, 4, 11. Kal b>) is used also in asseveration, indeed: and some other words are often elegantly inserted between these particles ; as, tovto Elegans ; intellectapraecedente negatione. F. 1245. — This verse is quoted by Lon- — J. S. ginus, § 40. where Toup observes that i "Hicovaas avTTJs to Bpaaos ; Answ. it is quoted by Plutarch also, De Stoic. i\ev94pa yap eifu, Aristoph. Lys. 379. repugn, p. 1048. and De Comniun. See also Ach. 598. — J. S. notion, p. 1003. but he appears not to J Tap rot : — t'l 5' av yvvalices (ppovtfiov know whence the verse is taken. — J. S. ipyaa-alaro, — KpOKCcra. (popovaai, Kal Ke- h "Ev £ 3e ravra ifiovXevoVTO, Kal 5r/ KaWeetrlcrfievai — ; Lys. ravr' avra yap- fiaaiKevs — KcsTe'cTTTjo'ei' evavriav rty (pa- rol KaaB' a adxreiu npoaSoKZ, ra. KpoKto- Xayya : Xen. Anab. i, 10, 7. twv Ti'Sia Kal ra /j.vpa, &c. why these are the alo~xi KaK&v k a I 5 7? KeAvfitvas : Demosth. adv. Lept. S71, kovk4t eV8' 'fan T60I7. Eurip. Here. 476,27. — J. S. 1S8 VUp, A?/. [Chap. vin. apa tiZ kXevQdpa irpeirei, Kal tu> biKala> br'i : and a just man too : and in the phrases, xal tv br) fxtyioTov, and what too is most, or above all, Ka\ tu bi) TrpovpytaiTarov, and what is of most importance, and the like. Aj), on account of its augmentative power, and its use in amplifying by some accession what has preceded, often follows superlatives; as, tcivrjcris yup avrr/ fieyicrTTj b r) to'is "EXXrjatv eyivero, Thucyd. i, 1. and also words having the nature of superlatives ; and when there is a progressive heightening in representation : Kal 6 Oe/X!oroic\>7s eTreXdiov ~ois AaKebutfiovluis evravda br) (pavepurs eiwev, &c. Thuc. i, 91. So vvv ye br) ttuvtws, Aristid. Semi. sacr. i. p. 506*. rove Si), and t6te br) tot€, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 320. Cyrill. c. Jul. ii. p. 311. in Latin turn vero : v. Curt, iii, 11. Ov. Trist. i, 3. [77,79-] And so ovtu br), then at length. This amplifying or augmentative force is apparent also in the form kcu br) kcu, and, moreover ; as, kcu br) Kal avomov tovto yeJ VII. (IX.) At) is used in exhortation : irpoaye br) Kal cnconei, Plato Phaedr. p. 229. see p. 260. and Judith xiii, 11. Also in inter- rogation, prithee, now : ttCjs br) ovv tovto Xeyeis ; Plato Phaedr. p. 265. ■7rov br) jjlol 6 Trals ; Id. ib. p. 243. ret 7ro7ci br) tclvtci ; Id. de Rep. iv. p. 421. Xeyets be br) ri ; Id. Phaedr. p. 242. v. p. 259- VIII. (XIII.) It is used by itself ironically; see Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 521. IX. (XIV.) It occurs in the phrase avriKa br) ixuXa, immediately, at once, presently.* Atjttov and brjnovdev signify doubtless, of course; and also ironi- cally, to be sure, forsooth : [xe/jivricrde yap brjirov : v. Hebr. ii, l6. av brjtrov rrfkiKOS o)v, kcu tutv avbpeiOTaTwv civ trepiyevoio. eKf.lro ye br)Trovdev airavTes eirlaTaade: Demosth. de Class, p. 76. 1. 50. p. 187- [I. 27. ed. Reisk.] v. Aristoph. Plut. 140. Vesp. 295. &fjdev, — 1. signifies awo tov bij (i. e. &. t. vvv) forthwith, instantly : Eurip. Or. 1 1 10. — 2. It has an affirmative force, but rather in deceit and simulation, than in declaration of truth; v. Eurip. Or. 1320. Heliod. iv, 4. Hence it signifies ostensibly in Heliod. and is op- posed to to a\r)des '. dpr/vuv ovk knavero, brjdev fxev rwc e?ri aol, to & aXrjdes tUv ktf iavTrj : i, 14. See Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 521. It may often be rendered, forsoot h, as if. Ai/ra — 1. appears to be put for br), now; as, Kal bfjra biaXefy/jai irpbs ore, Synes. — 2. It is used in exhorting, beseeching," 4 obtesting ; Xafiov, Xafiov bf]Ts koA.- inroirXecos, &Wa re TroAAa iirL\ey6/xevos, KicrTots imo§j\fj.a(n KeKocrfj-Tj/xeva e'ir] ai)T

v toi Svo to, fxeytara. ra £v\a, ol ir6Ses 5^. Lucian, Adv. Ttavroiv iovra ■KoKi^.iwra.Ta : Id. 1. vii. — Indoct. p. 542. B. ed. Salmur. — J. S. J. S. m Mtj 57J0', i/c€Teywo-': Aristoph. Thesra. * Sometimes, To give an example at 751. — J. S. § vi. Rule 1—4.] El,"liv. 189 — 3. in questions, tandem, prithee : Aristopli. Vesp. 1171. And in affirmation or asseveration : lo/jcpares, mdevbeis ; ov brjra, ?) 6' os : Plato Syrup, p. 218. Indeed, truly : v. Aristopli. Vesp. 13. SECTION VI. — ON THE CONJUNCTIONS el, rjv, aV, eav, AND THEIR CONCOMITANT PARTICLES. Rule I. Et and ijv, in their most common sense, of if, are, like av and eav, used convertibly. But the use and significations of el are much more extensive than those of the others, as it will appear hereafter. II. Et is used for eWe, I wish ; either by itself, as in Soph. OZd. R. 863. or, as is most usual, followed by yap, as el yap yevovro, — o, ri eyw aoi ev Kaipw av yevoifi-qv av j^p^aifxos : would that ! &C. Xen. Cyrop. vi, 1, 38.' See Horn. II. /3, 373. Od. y, 205. r, 309- v, 239- Lucian, Dial. Mer. iv. t. iii. p. 287. in Prometh. [p. 118. c. ed. Salmur.] Et yap in this sense is very often joined with &eXov, ea o' obic o\h\ e'i decs ktxiiv, Horn. II. e, 133. iittpei, el to. irpoaijKuvra eraorois airobtbovres, to vXov KtxXov irowvfxev : Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. See Soph. (Ed. R. 584. In this sense it is sometimes followed by y, as, ovbe oiba, el cKJttKo/.ieros es 'Plojjltjv oj-peXrjcev av ri 'Aycuovs, */ KanStV c(j>imv eyerero fxeiSloviov apyr) : whether — or : Paus. in Ach. p. 420. V. El in its conditional sense is joined with the optative mood, when it is indicated that what there is a doubt about may possibly be, or be about to be : el be tis tovs KpnTovvras rod irXtjQovs eir aperi/v Trporpeipetev, afjuporepovs av wfeXt)aeie : Isocr. ad Nic. p. 32. el — fieX- Xotev fxov KdTuyeXqv, ovbev av eir) arjbes : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 3. Also, for greater modesty, when, if propriety of language alone were con- sidered,, rjv with the subjunctive would be the right phrase; as in /Eschyl. S. ad Th. init. and Dionys. Hal. de constr. verb, in fin. libr. v. # Hermann, diss, de preecept. Atticist. p. 11. for *V vv *'h the subjunctive expresses expectation that something will be or will not be, but el with the optative only doubt and ignorance as to its pro- bability. It is joined with an indicative, when thai, about which there is doubt, is left in absolute uncertainty, as to its being or not being ; except that the indicative of the preteriniperfect, preterpluperfecr, imd aorists, often signifies that a thing is not or was not. With the future, el b' v /ney, ws alei ti fxe'idov twv vttapyovTwv be~i 7rpuTTew, eyvuihcos ecrrctt. vfiels §' ws, &e. Demosth. 01. i. p. 13. [t. 12. ed. R.] el tovto yevriaerui, ib. [I. 18.] el be Oarepov tovthsv oXtyw- pweTe, otcvaj, &c. ib. p. 14. [I. 9.] VVith the present : el yap elcri fiwftol, el and so si in Latin. See Ter. Eun. ab ink. Hor. iv. Od. 15. Virg. Eel. x, 65. It is sometimes suppressed : yeyove n Kara rt)v ope^iv, &c. Epict. c. 21. ? v. Ter. Eun. ii, 2, 21. and Liuacer de Emend. Struct, p. 409. Eustathius takes ei to be put foret7rw civtios eifxi, Kal et 7rupi ^Upas eoiKev; Horn. v. Soph. (Ed. R. 302. but in (Ed. R. 305. et nut firj kXvcis rujib' ayyeXwv, is, if perhaps you have not heard it from these messengers. Et apa, et ye, eiVep, et brj, eiirov, or eav and i)v with the same par- ticles, if indeed, if truly, if only, if perchance. VII. Et be and eav be signify but if ; and there is sometimes an ellipsis after them; as dappei, (pijireie rts av ov yap er ovbev vfipiaQiitrr]' eav be, (underst. / should be again outraged) Tore opyieiode, vvv (Hpevres ; Demosth. in Mid. p. 415. 1. 50. After el pev also, followed by ei be, there is often an ellipsis of the apodosis which should answer to the protasis to which el pev belongs; as, d\\' ei fxev bwaovai p Also, ad Vesp. 190. Ran. 59-1. For '' Add, that et is put for en-el, since, for, examples of various constructions of eisee in Aristoph. cnrevSe Trp6o~0ev is ttSAiv, nal Aristoph. Ran. 1374. Eccl. 407. Plut. fioi)6€i r-ff 0e£. e I it6t avry /xaWov f) vvv, 583. Lys. 149. Av. 1223. Eccl. 191. S> Adxns, apv^nev ; Lys. 304.— J. S. Lys. 111. Ran. 533. 585. Plut. 1037. s 'Ev 5e to> Ueve^evop rod nxdruvos, el Eccl. 791. 794. Nub. 870. Av. 163. Kal //.sra. waidius rh irpcara yeypairrai, 197. Vesp. 1405. Ach. 1196. Eccl. 162. roaovrSv y' taropias evecriv, &c. Plut. —J. S. in Pericl. p. 300. I. 27. H. St. 6 'Ayi}o-i- 9 Even with the punctuation here given Aaos, el /eal (jltj (pQovepls i\v, nyde fix^ro by Zeunius, ei can hardly he said to be ro?sri/j.cofjt.evoi.s,ci.\Aa) commonly signifies unless ; in which sense it frequently has euros before it ; as, euros el fit/, vj) Ata, rrpbs ruv virep ' AXovfjoov \6yov 6 'AvTHpavtjs cat touto neirai^ev : unless indeed, &c. Plut. in Demosth. p. 850. 1. 21. But sometimes it is simply if not ; as, avy- yywfirj, el fii] fiera kcikicis, bo^rjs be /uaXXov afxaprla, — roXfjtatfxev : Thuc. i, 32. And, as el by itself is sometimes that, (see Rule 3.) so el [x>1 is that not: ayavatcrwy ovv 6 OvaXepios, el prj mareverai {that he is not believed) iravra Trparreiv evetca rfjs rrarplbos : Plut. in Popl. IX. Et be fii) is otherwise : cat ?iv fxev fyfifirj ?/ irelpa' (underst. KaXws ay eirj : see R. 7-) ct be juj), MtruXrjvat'ots e'nrely vavs re napa- bovvai, icat rel^r) KadeXelv : Thuc. iii, 3. 6 virep v/auiv ypa^as fir) iiyeiv kv rip rroXepu) rtpbs tov QiXiirirov oirXa' el be fxij, (underst. tis raj vofio) 7rei0apxj/r)s yevijaerai, e'iirep e£ «PX'' S ^ e ' to. iravra yiyveadai '. Plato Phaedr. p. 245. since. 1 XIII. "[lairep yap e?r' aairibos kvkXwv els a.XXi)Xovs efifiefirjKOThJV, ire/jnrros els o/ucpaXdv irXr)pdl bta iravrwv o KctXXtaros' e'iirep r/ fxev 'EXXas ev fieaa iraat]s rfjs yijs, ?/ be 'Arruj; ttjs 'EXXabos, rrjs b' av iroXetos ofitjwfxos (rj dfibjwixos, the Acropolis, Vi«.) : Aristid. in Panath. p. 171. Here Vi»er interprets e'iirep, sic ; Hoogeveen supposes an el- lipsis of the apodosis answering to the protasis beginning with wairep, &c. as (tov avrov rpoirov bta iraawv KaXXiorri etrriv') e'iirep, since, &c. E'iirfp followed by d\\a, Iliad (j>, 577. XIV. Ei7rep apa occurs elliptically in the middle of sentences, or members of sentences ; as, to. iravra, ical to itav, ical to reXeiov, oh Kara rrjv Ibeav biafepovaiv" dXX', e'iirep apa, (if indeed they do differ,) ev ry vXr} : Aristot. de Coelo x. 6 be Zeis — ri fi/jas rivvvrai, aXX' ovk (e'iirep apa) (if somebody must be punished) eavrov ; CEnom. ap. Eustb. Praep. vi. And el apa is used in the same manner by Diogenianus, ib. p. 265. and el ecu apa by Sext. Emp. and so eav apa. El b' apa is used elliptically by Attic writers in the beginning of a member of a sentence, in the sense of otherwise : irepiatpedels ovtos ra ovra, "taws fxev ovic av vfiptSof el b' apa : (otherwise ; i. e. but if he should continue to outrage people) eXarrovos altos earat tov [MiKporarvv irap' vfxiv : Demosth. in Mid. E'j're repeated is either — or; whether— or : el be tis — eiridvfiol aKoiietv, e'ire veu>repos, e'ire irpeafivrepos, ovbevl irwirore ed6vr), Xen. Anab. i, 3, G. icai Kara. irepioUav ttjs tcSMws : /Eneas Coram, iav /xev yiv6(TK0>ffi tV fyiv tov avQp&irov, Poliorc. c. 22. — J. S. u> eav Se'r/ airoSoiivai, roaovrov /xovov irotelv : § vii. Rule i.] Te, Km'. I£)5 'Eav re — er'u' re, whether — or, (see R. 14. on etre,) Plat. Euthyphr. c. 6. and in Crit. c. 12. ear re — eav re, — r\v re — j\v re in the same sentence: Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 17. In the same manner ixv re — ay re are used ; and rav re Kav re, Etyn). M. p. 202, 19. SECTION VII. — On the conjunctions re and rat, and THEIR CONCOMITANT PARTICLES. RULE I. Te — rat, is both — and: av?)p oijvs re n)»> Stayotar, rat -o cio/j-a eppwfierojs e^wi'. Sometimes the part of a sentence, in which re and ml occur, is connected with a foregoing part by another rat preceding; as, aipoven rsyp Qupeav, Kal tt\v re iri'skiv Karenavaav, Kal ra evovra efcTropOtjaav : Thuc. iv, 57. V, 56. See Virg. iEn. v, 619. Ov. Met. iii, 2(55. When re and rat are joined in the same member of a sentence, re is copulative, and rat augmentative, even ; as, '/ in Eurip. Ion, 137S. aud, as Hermann thinks, rightly. Kcu re, Horn. II. a, 521. Theogn. 662. Te is sometimes used in the same manner as eha and K§ra after a participle, then : see jEschyl. Ag. 97. Choepli. 554. and Hermann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 180. Te often precedes apa in interrogations, as in Horn. II. a, 8. But the contraction of toI apa should be written raprt : Soph. CEd. C. 1442. El. 404. Aristoph. Nub. 1157. * The connecting particle here is 5e, which may, and perhaps often does, happen, not T€. Te gives a slight shade of uncer- So in those beautiful verses cited by De- tainty : for the words do not contain a metrius ofPhalerum, § 106. positive, peremptory, assertion of one O'lav to.v volkivQov kv ovpeai irot/xeves &v5pes particular actual fact, but a general repre- Yloaal KaTatrrei^ova-i, x a l xa -' 1 AE' TE irop- sentation, by way of simile, of something vv\ irapdoyeoQe, Demosth. pro Cor. v. Dem. in Aristocr. [701, 7- It-] III. It commences a parenthesis, for the purpose of connexion: aWiov be tovtcjv, — (kcii /joi, irpas deuiv, vrav eveKa rov /3eAr«orou Aeyw, eaTM -irafjpijaia,) ac : Demosth. de Chers. It signifies but, (as the Hebr. 1,) 1 Thess. ii, 18. Acts x, 28. Ec- clesiastic, xli, 13. Tob. iii, 10. Rev. ii, 2, 9. It is, like be, opposed to jueV : Pind. Pyth. ii, 106. And so rein Pind. Pyth. ii, 60. is opposed to per in v. 56. v. Pyth. iv, 443. 445. Nem. viii, 51. 53. IV. It is used in interrogation or doubt in the beginning of a sen- tence, or member : ri epovfiev, eav tis ij/jas avaKpirr)' Kal tis avQputirwv to fxr) ov bo^aaei ; Plato Theaet. p. 1 88. I. 37. Kal bwrjadfieda, to 'Epfiij, bit' byres — ; Lucian, in Charon. V. When ov fiovov is followed by a\\a without Kal, there is a gradation: in which case the Latin writers also use sed without etiam: t/nariov rifjupieaai ov fiovov (j>avXov, iiXXa to ai/TO depovs re Kal ^ei/nwvos : Xen. Mem. i, 6, 2. v. ii, 7, 6. Oppian, Cyn. i, 159. VI. (VI. VII.) Kal often indicates a degree of doubt, and espe- cially after rl irore, or ri alone : ti Trore koj, KaXeaai \pr/ ; Xen. H. Gr. ii. p. 468. ri yap Kal fiovXofievoi fieTeirefiiretrd' av avrovs — ; Demosth. pro Cor. p. 3l6. 1. 17." The question ri xP'l Xeyetv ; merely asks what must be said, without expressing any doubt whether any thing ought to be said : but j-/ xP r ) K <*i Xeyeiv, is the question of one doubting not only as to what must be said, but also whether any thing ought to be said : what must be said, if indeed any thing at all is to be said ? e't n irpaaaetv OeXeis is, if you are willing to do any thing ; el n ko.1 irpaaoeiv QeXeis is, you will scarcely do any thing, but, however, if you are willing to do something. VII. (VIII.) Kal is sometimes rendered atque, as : v. Duker. ad Thuc. vii, 71. p. 494, 71. Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 50, 2. p. 534. Kara ravTct ovtos re i]\r)ae /cat Kidapa Kpovadeiaa, in the same manner as: Paus. in Att. Traaijs tv^wv Trap' avrov befyuxrews laa Kal iraibwv 6 rifiiwraros, as much as, equally with — : Greg. Naz. ov^ b/ioiws biatceivTai tt)v e£iv teal ore bylaivov, as when they were well. Similem sibi videri vitam hominum ET mercatum eum, &c. Cic. Tusc. v. [c iii. § 9-] VIII. (IX.) Kal, ac, atque, than : e//0i<7ua, Lys. adv. Agorat. p. 466. ed. Reisk. Kai fioi KaXei tov ra^iap^or, lb. p. 499- v » P> 474. [1. 4.] 493. [1. 3.] Demosth. pro Cor. p. 243. [I. 7. R.] ib. p. 253. [I. 9- R-] k q i tus irarpaav yaiav ov awaai BeXto ; Eurip. Phoen. 907. v. 1357. Or. 1110. Tab. Ceb. p. 203. Lucian, in Solcec. t. iii. p. 575. Virg. Eel. i, 27. Kal sometimes intends, or has an augmentative power: os vvv ye Kal av Art irarpl fiu\otro, Horn. II. e, 36'2. even with Jove himself : o'virto yadov Kal eVa avbpa, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 18. See Theogn. 342. Iliad ^>, 268. It imparts something of indefiniteness to the signification of words, as cunque in Latin, and soever in English: juaXa ijbri irapetyvXarTov o, tl Kal jieibiaaeie : Lucian, Lap. t. iii. p. 428. ebpaaev 6 tl bfi Kal ebpaaev, Heliod. v. init. [See Rule 6. and also Chap. II. Rule 2.] Kal has sometimes the same meaning as KaiTrep or Kav : 7roX\a fie Kal awievra napip-^erai, although: Theogn. 419- v. 1114. Horn. 11. a, 663. 1, 651. u, 171. Aristoph. Plut. 945. Luke xviii, 7. cf. Valck. ad Phcen. Eurip. p. 98, 99. It is sometimes explanatory ; [being nearly equivalent to the French savoir, and to the English, that is, namely, that is to say ;] avrap o /3?/ 7rp6s bwfxa Aios Kal fiaKpbv "OXvfxttov, Horn. II. v, 398. see Horn. H. Apoll. 17. and it very frequently connects an adjective with ttoXvs preceding: see iEschyl. Ag. 63. Soph. Trach. 1277. Hermaun. ad Eurip. Hec. p. \62. w " X. (XI. XII. XIII.) Kav (Hermann, de emend, rat. Gr. gr. i, 8. p. 36. is icai av, and perhaps, although or even perhaps: or Kai kav, even if ; or Kai kv, and in. Kav iravTairaaiv enraibevros wv, ro'is KO/xiby Trenaibevfievois eavrov avTnrapafiaXXei : even though, tovto be kolv Trals yvoit], even a child might know : Plat. Euthyd.p. 279> '• 38. V. Mark vi, 56. el Trepl eras re^vr] KaXws i^iaravro Xeyetv, kciv irepl Tutv aXXwv anavrwv '. also, or even : Plat. Ion, p. 524. tovtwv /jev Kay a\pato, Kav 'ibois, kclv rals aXXais alad^aemv a'loBoio : you can both touch, &c. Plato Phaed. c. 25. p. 97 • *>• "aj> pev, eiXafiovfxevos tovto, w Add, kcu, and yet, why : Anus : fiZv Koifii^eraL ; &c. Plat, de Rep. ix. p. 462. €>e fjjTeTs: Adol. ir6dev ; Anus : Kal t\\v 1. 30. ed. Bas. I. In fact, in reality: b dvpav y' ^par-res: Aristoph. Eccl. 977. Kal avvifr-n, Plut. in Theraist. p. 221. In place of aAAa: ovxl o /j.ev \av8dvccv 1. 7. H. St. and in C. Mar. p. 772. 1. 11. en irovnpSTepos yiyverar tov 8e fxi) \av0d- — J. S. vovtos, k a I KoKa^oiiivov, rb ^\v Gnpttcdes 198 Ken. [Chap. viii. § vii. /.») Xeyio -a Trenpayfitva e/uavr ' s omitted; [see § vi. beginning of R. 4. 9-] ovros e/iol TroXeuel, kuv fxijitd) fiaXXij kul ro^evtj: even if, i. e. even although: Demostli. Phil. iii. J). 115. Ki'iv yue (jtayrjft enl pi£av, o[j.ws ert Kapirofopiirno : Epigr. ttclvtu Kivelrai, Kav pfiy/ua, Kav arpeuua, uav aXXo tl tiHv vtrap^ovTwv oadpbv y : whether— or — or : Demostli. 01. ii. p. 24. [1. 6. ed. Reisk.] Kav 6i, even if perhaps : ko.v el -aura navTa v-v,\>yev, Demostli. de Fals. Leg. Kav a/refietav tl KOTayivioaKy tis tlov Tre-pea^ev^ievLov avry, lb. teat biciKplveaOcti Kal avyKpiveoQai, Kal \pv\eadai Kal Oepuaiveadat, Kal Ttdvra ovtlo, kclv el fji) ^Qiofxeda tols ovouafftv evtct-^ov, dXX' epy

) Kai aov fjbeios av ■nvdoifirjv. Kal br), with some other word intervening, is often and more, and moreover, and — too, and what is more. Xenophon, after saying that Astyages had made up a great hunting party to gratify Cyrus, pro- ceeds, Kal fia(7i\u:tos brj irapuv uvtos, uirriyopeve fiijbeva (3dXXeiv, Ttplv Kvpos efxir\ri(T'ddrj Otjpwv : Cyrop. i, 4, 14. Kai bij is employed in stating something supposed for the sake of argument : Kal b>) TeQvaac tis ue befcrai ttoXis ; well, I will suppose they are dead: Eurip. Med. 3S8. kqI br) bibey/iac ris be fiot r«p) jue'j-et ; iEschyl. Eum. 883. and with a participle : Kal brj rpenofievot, 7roiovs ?i 'nnreas r) TofyWas J) 7re\raoras i] (lkovtiotcis, avev Itttuov bvres, bvvalfxeQa av ) sometimes signifies at once, forthwith : [see Rule 6. Sect. v. of this chap, and the note on the first part of it.] ws, eav irpo-epos tis e'inoi ra 7rpo<7oV0' eavrJ irepl aXXov, Kal bi] ravif ovrws e^nvra : Demostb. pro Cor. [p. 318. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] tovovtov x On Ka\ 87? «al see the last part of note there. — J. S. Rule 6. § v. of this chapter, and the Rule 11—16.] Kai'. 199 v-rrenrwv, err' av-bv rat S>) rpe\popLai : Gregor. So atque, Virg. Georg. i. [v. 203.] XIII. (XVI.) Kru ironical, followed by ye by : rat bij\6v ye b>) on — fiaitofjiai, Plato Symp. sub init. XIV. (XVII. XVIII. XIX.) Ralph are joined in Horn. II. t. ves- ical fxev tis re Kaatyvrjroio (povoto ttoivtjv, t) ov naibos ebe^aro redvetwros : and yet: v. 628. But some other word commonly intervenes between them [and then each retains its own usual signification]. Ral pijv signifies and truly, and moreover : rat fj.i\v TavraXov elaelbov, &c. Horn. Od. X, 582. v. 593. also, but, but indeed, but yet, and yet, atqui. See Eurip. Suppl. 1010. and Markl. Iph. A. 1619. Aristoph. Lys. 559. 131. Eurip. Iph. A. 20. Kai ni)v, el ri tG>v uWwv, wv vvv\ cW/3aXXe Kai biefcrjet, y teal ctXX' oriovv abiKovvra. jue vfxus ewpa — : De- mosth. pro Cor. '[229, 25. ed. R.] See Demosth? ib. p. 3l6\ [232, 25. ed. R.] ib. [249, 4.] ib. [247, 15.] ib. [257, 17-] Kai fn)v ical rar' uvto tovto ci.£i6s elfii errairov Tv^e'tv/ Plato Svmp. See also Demosth. pro Cor. p. 348. 1. 15. [309, 12. ed. R.] mi pr/v evayx/is ae kci^row, atqui, why, I was lately looking for you : Plato Symp. [p. 176. 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] XV. (XX— »XXV.) Rai tol is quamquam ; and yet; however; although indeed; koItoi ti ao irepl ravra eis u>v, Greg. Naz. v. Aristoph. Ach. 617. XVI. (XXVI.) Kai yap rot and rat yap ouvare,/or truly: Kai yap toi 77 a(7i to~is "EXX?;(7iv ibei^are eK tovtwv — * Kai yap obv vnoypuv iravTav avT(S toot iv T7f (TT7)\t; yiypairTar &c. Id. adv. Lept. 477, 25. ' See Demosth. in Mid. 563, 8. in Aristocr. 655, 7. 689, 9. &v tis jSoi'AT7Tat v6\jlov Kaivbv TiOevai, if fipixV tov Tpdxv^ ov £X WV vo/j-odeTel' — Kai yap toi Kaivovs fj.\v ov ToXfxSxn TideaBai vd/xovs : Demosth. in Timocrat. 744, 9.— J. S. 200 Me»-, \e. [Chap. viii. § viii. XVII. (XXVII.) Knt uv and *ai jut), not, and not : 0a/po/uai toIwv eyo) ylipnos rerw^rjfcwt rare, nal oil fie/Ji\pews, ovbe rifiupius : Demosth. pro Cor. teal fx>) ravra fiova wv eartv eifxapfieir] ; Diogenian. ap. Euseb. Prajp. vi. SECTION VIII.— On the conjunctions ^ev and be, and THE PARTICLES JOINED WITH THEM. Rule I. Mev is not put after the relative o$, as quidem is put after qui : the Greeks rather say oirrts, oanep, os bi), os ye, and the poets oore. It is sometimes used without be, in the same manner as quidtm in Latin.* II. (II. III. IV.) Mev* and be are almost always put correlatively in parts of sentences having some reference or opposition to one another ; as, ovros fxev r//uas (pevaxigei, i/fxels be vk evqdelas avrbv VTrepoTrovbaSetv f]fiaiv olofieda. tovtov be ciXXo fxev ovhev, irepl be rrj \eipi xpvoovv ba.KTv\iov tyepeiv : Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 359- ijye'iadat rffv vT\aov tcivttjv — aXXo fiev ovbev elvat (5ao~iXei ^priaifirjv, — tT]S o avrfjs apyfjs e7rtre/x £ff i ua : Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 49. v. Aristid. de Smyrn. p. 292. Epict. Ench. c. 62. QerraXol be vtt avayKt\s fxev, o/xws be efxrjbiclov: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 298. ijbe yap yvvri bovXi] fiev, eipT]Kei> §' eXevdepov Xoyov. although a slave, yet has, &c. Soph. Trach. 62. Sometimes these particles indicate celerity : to fxev eireaev, ^ be e%et baaa: M\. V. H. i, 2. speaking of the spider seizing quickly the prey which falls into its web. It is to be remarked that fxev and be are not always to be trans- lated ; and also that they frequently connect different parts of speech ; as may be seen in some of the foregoing examples. The following may be added: nepbovs fuev evetca, ra /3e\r«fxai Kara Tovrovt top ay Siva Aiaj^ivov, bvo b\ avbpes 'Adrjvaloi, kcu [xeyaXa : Demosth. pro Cor. [226, 13. ed. R.] See the beginning of Isocrates's Paraen. ad Demonic. IV. (VI.) In enumerations, recitals, &c. these particles are often simply connective : iravra fxev ituvov, navra be Kivbvvov vnofieveiv : 6 In a question without Be following ; affirmation : S'alza, e gridando va, ch' e vyiaiveis p.4v ; Aristoph. Av. 1214. why, suo pensiero Di pianger Si, ma non morir are you in your senses ? — J. S. da vero. Baldovini, Lamento di Cecco, * Mei/, when opposed to 8e, is ex- &c. — J. S. pressed in Italian by Si, but with more of Rule l— 8.] Mev, Ae. 201 Xen. edepaneue fiev to. (ruifiara, edepaweve be ras \pv%as : Gregor. ws anavTO. fiev y^aXKov, airavra be tyolviica QaiveoQai : Xen. Ages. ii, 7. cf. Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 25. iii, 8, 10. Anab. 460, 6. 46-5, 3. 475, 9. 479. 4S0. Cyrop. 270, 3. 276, 21. 286, 22. 290, ult. V. (VII.) Sometimes the opposition expressed by fiev and be is carried on with a climax through several negative members, the word joined with be in the first member being repeated with fiev in the second, and that with be in the second, with fiev in the third : ovk eirrov fiev ravra, oi/«c eypa\pa be' ovbe eypa-^a fiev, ovk eTtpeafievoa be' ovb' eirpecrflevva. fiev, ovk erreirra be (drjfiaiovs : I did not advise these things without writing a psephism about them ; nor write the pse- phism about them without going on the embassy; nor go on the embassy without persuading the Thebans : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 339- 1. 10. [2S8, 8. ed. R.] VI. (VIII.) The omission of something is frequently opposed to the doing of something else : ov to fiev irpos aXXyXovs ayuviieodat ■3rapaXet7reiv, erepa b' oru kukov ti b&oofiev $rjre7v : Demosth. pro Cor. and in that case the first member is to be translated into Latin by a substantive in the ablative absolute with a participle passive. VII. (IX.) Very often, especially in enumerations or details, be is many times repeated after one fiev ; as, bpys iravra^ov fiev £(v 'Lmrtav. yjrovov pev bi] — rjav^iav r)yov '. Arr. Exp. Al. i.'p. 31. X. (XII.) Mev roi is significant of assent, affirmation, asseveration : i] /ecu epe ovv, i(pr] f] yvvi], beijaei ravra iroieiv ', ber)aei pev roi, ^r]fjL be 6 fxvdos tied avQpunrov tivu $ilvlav to ap-^aloP yeveadai 7raw KaXijv, XaXov fievTOi ye nal OTWfj.vXr]v : Lucian, Euc. Muse. 10. t. iii. p. 97/ See Diod. S. v, 73. But when another word intervenes between fievrot and ye, the latter appertains to the word immediately preceding it ; as, avrjp ^.TrapTidrrjs, ov fxevroi yeveos ye tov (oacriXtjiov eujv : Herodot. viii, 42. Te ixevToi has a signification similar to that of fxev toi ye, certainly however, Eurip. Ale. 724. (727.) Rhes. 589. Heracl. 593. 637. 1016. KTe'iv, el bo;ce! aot' bvatcXeuis yap ov Kreve'is' fiaXXbv ye fxevroi rois e/jLols -neidov Xoyois : however you will certainly do better to be persuaded by my words: Eurip. Hel. 999. MevTav has the same significations as [xevrot alone ; for av belongs to some verb : biicalws fievrav enredavov, Demosth. pro Cor. v. Soph. Aj. 86. and Hoogev. de Partic. p. 697- seq. XIII. (XV. XVI. XVII.) Mev ovv is used in transitions, to preserve d In this sense it is sometimes correc- Bas. 1. But in the following passage tive also, and qualifies : vvv de ra neyio-ra. fxevroi ye has a different sense : jl t.v ovv tuiv ayad&v t](uv ylyverai Sta. fiavias- 9eia enrot irpbs ravrd tis, Sre roiavra ttoiwv 85' /x4vToi SJtrei StSo/xeV^js : Plato in Phsedr. avaicxwru ; Mnesil. kovttu fiev toi ye p. 201. 1. 51. ed. Bas. i. — J. S. ireiravfuu : and what is more too, 1 have e Kal Key over 1 ixev ri, ov fievroi ye Saov not yet done: Aristoph. Thesru. 709. — olovTM : Plat, de Bep. i. p. 372. 1. 3. ed. J. S. 204 Ae. [Chap. vm. § viii. continuity; often in the beginning of recitals, and, as /xev bf), with reference to some preceding words, arid with some signification of conclusion from them : iroXXa /xev ovv eytoye eXarrovfxai Kara tovtovi tov ayuiva Alrj-^ivov, bvo b\ avbpes ' AQrjvaioi kv ebiwKe fxovov, Karr}y6pr}oev Ala\lvt)s, &c. Id. ib. v. Demostb. 01. i. [15. 26. ed. Reisk.] After many prefatory remarks Lucian begins his enumeration of long-lived per- sons : 'ApyavQwvios /xev ovv, Taprrjaitav jjaaiXevs, nevrt'iKOvra kui etcarov ert) fiiiovat Xeyerai : Macrob. [635. b. ed. Salm.] For explication of something preceding: aypmcrrov fxev ovv Xeyt>), a avdpwire, av tIs el, avTaTTOKpivofxevos rw 0ew ; Rom. ix, 20. It may be re- marked, by the by, that in the Ionic dialect /xev wv and [xev vw are used for /xev ovv : tovto \xev vvv to opos towvtuv eariv, and Tretyvtce fxey wv >/ x^ptf avrr] ovra) : Herodot. ii. A This u>v often separates prepo- sitions from the verbs with which they are compounded : air u>v ebovro, — /car' cov eicaXvxpe, — ev dv enaicrwaav : Herodot. ii. v. Schaef. ad Long. p. 417« s. XV. (XXII.) Ae is enclitic not only when it is employed demon- stratively, as in obe, rjbe, robe, but when it coalesces into one word with ro'ios, with tooos, with rrjXtKOS, making rotoabe, roaoabe, rrfXiKoabe, and also when it performs the office of the preposition els, or the like, as in o'kube, in ayopijvbe : Horn. II. a, 54. in ovbe bofxovbe, Horn. Od. a. Hes. Scut. Here. 38. and in such words signifying moral tendency, or the final cause; as, fxrtri o/3ov§' ayopev, Horn. II. e, 252. XVI. (XXIH.) It is sometimes an adversative particle, but : rj /xev bovXos, ovk ean tpiXia irpos avrov' jj b' avOpwiros : Aristot. Eth. viii. il fiev 6\po7TOir)rtKr) ov fxoi bone~t reyyr\ elvai, rf be larpucri, (underst. boKel Te-^vr) elvai,) Plat. Gorg. And in this use it elegantly concludes a sentence : eyw 001 ep5> arnorov /xev, vt) rovs Qeoiis, aXrides be : Plat. Theag. p. 130. tov aotybv fxr/ elvai jxev enradij, [xeTpiovadfj be : Diog. / Thucydides is speaking of Themisto- Cleon. cmofivl-dfxevos, 3> Arj/x, ifiov irpbs cles ; nothing is said about the place of his t\v KetyaX^v airo^iu. Isic. efxov [ikv ovv, death. The words immediately preceding ifxov [xei> ovv. Aristoph. Eq. 911. — J. S. are, Xeyovfft 54 rives ual eKovatov tyapnaiccp h Add ye /xev, however, however in- aizoQavelv aiirbv, activarov vojj.lara.VTa elvai deed: avraicT 'Q.iteavov Ka\ Tr/ovos ei-ey4- iiriTe\eo-ai ^affiKet, a imeax^ro. — J. S. vovro Trpeo-^vTarai uovpai' iroWal ye (xev e Euelp. eVl ri ydp jot* eneldev tfyes ; elcrl Kal &\\ai : Hesiod, Theog. 363. See Pisth. "v b.Ko\ovvoh\s i/xoi. Euelp. 'iva /xev Hesiod, Scut. Here. 260. 171. — J. S. ovv KKdoijj.1 (xeyuAa, Aristoph. Av. 341. Rule 14—19-] Ae. 205 L. v. and is put after ov fxovov, with ctXXa sal following it, when it requires some preceding words to be understood : as, roiavrrji' e%et , IdoBar the whole army, araKrois oiploiv iiriTre- lxto-8o(popu 5 4 : for he receives pay : Aris- oeTcrOou, Id. ib. i, 8, 2. iro.p4xei Se — not toph. Av. 584, — J. S. twc 6vo[i4vcov airb ttjs iepas voLiris AcLxos, •>' Kai orpaTTiybv 8e avjbv cta-e'8et|e, Kal rwv Q7]p^vop.4vwv 54: Id. ib. v, 3, 10. &c. Xen. Anab. i, 1, 1. iSoKow oi —J. S. "EAArjves, Kal irdvres 8e, and indeed all, 206 "On. [Chap. vm. § ix. It is employed as a connective particle even when discourse has been interrupted by the words of a second person ; as in ^Eschyl. Pers. 480. Eurip. Or. 383. ed. Porson. It is used emphatically in answers, and wilh something of an adversative signification: eyw be ye bexofiat, Xen. Hist. Gr. iv, 1, 18. See Erf. in ed. min. Soph. GEd. R. 480. And also in questions ; as, ct7re pot, w Kpirtav, nvi>as be rpetyeis, 'Ira, &c. Xen. Memor. ii, 9, 2. Iliad a, 540. , 481. Sometimes, where be might perhaps be expected, yap is rightly used ; that is, when some thing, instead of being opposed to another, (in which case be would be used,) is only added to confirm that other. See ^Eschyl. Ag. 767. The interrogative particle bal (which Hoogeveen supposes to be compounded of be and civ) — 1. is used in expressions of surprise or wonder: ri bai ; av r'i Xeyeis ; Aristoph. Ran. 1454. cf. Nub. 1273. Av. 225. Ran. 558. — 2. ri bai ; is what else then? Chrem. airovaiv ovtc apyvpiov 01 yprjaroi. Car. ii bai ; Chrem. fiev 'i-airov ayadbv, b be Kvvas Brjpevrwas : Aristoph. Plut. 156". See Aristoph. Plut. 905. Av. 1451.1640. Nub. 491. Vesp. 1212. Ach. 764. The tragedians also use bal in the same manner, although according to Porson, Med. 1008. they refrain from using it at all. It appears to be the right reading in Eurip. Iph. A. 1444. Cycl. 449. Hel. 1262. El. 244. 978. But bfi is to be substituted in Iph. A. 1448. El. 1 Il6. TEschyl. Choeph. 900. Xen. CEc. vii, 17. — 3. ri bai; is quid porro? [It must be rendered variously in English, according to circumstances, and, but, well, &c] In Aristoph. Av. the Epops. after inquiring about the wishes of one person, proceeds to ask a second, ri bal av ; and what do you wish for? 136*. So ri bal av rifxr)S : Philo Leg. ad Cai. p. 770. See Matth. xvi, 21. But in oblique re- cital, when something past is spoken of, the optative mood is used by good writers : 01 6' 'IvSot elaeXOuvres eXe^av, on ire/a^eie cr£ero : Pseudode- mosth. p. 1396, 4. And especially when the words of any one are recited in direct phraseology, and not in oblique : ovbe yap efye tcaXws elwe'iv, (in, ciXX' e^ovaiv 6 be'iva cai 6 be~iva : Demosth. in Leptin. on Xeyets, on irXovaws eljii : Rev. iii, 17. [Here, if the second on were translated, the person said to be rich would be Christ himself, the speaker of the words on Xeyets : whereas the person really intended is the subject of the verb Xeyeis, i. e. the angel of the church of the Laodiceans. See Chap. v. § i. R. 16,] III. (V.) Sometimes the compound bion is used instead of on, that: bion be ra\eojs v) Kpr/vt) fiia, there was nothing which was not one fountain, there was nothing, except that there was one fountain. ko\ ovt eirl dewpiav 7ra»7rore Ik rijs iroXews etfjXdes, on fir) airaE, els 'ladfiov, ovre aXXooe ovbafioae, el fjt{] iroi arparevaofievos : Plat. Crit. c. 14. And in the same way on with superlatives, &c. may be explained : evbalfiuiv o»s on fxaXiara e. g. was originally and properly said : i. e. His o ti fiaXiara ebbalfiov eon. Afterwards, through negligence, and inattention to the nature and proper meaning of the particle, on apiaros, i. e. ayadbs o»$ 6 ti aptoTov, came to be said ; on fieXnara, in the best manner possible; on Ta^tara, as speedily as possible; otws — on fieyioTif ■npotyaoLS e'irj tov iroXefielv : Thuc. i, 126. ottojs eaovrai on apiaroi, Plat. Euthyphr. init. See Plat, de Rep. iv, 420. ypatyiav on ra^os, as quickly as possible: Hippocr. Epist. ad Hystan. "Ort fir) Kot is, except that, or nay, nay even : tovs eXeyxovs be ov ciecfivyev, on fir) ical fiaXXov tovtois eavrov vnodels r)yv6r\aev, nay, he even, &c. Greg. Naz. i. contra Jul. p. 479- Also, although, how- ever : oaov be els baifiovas epoi, biewrvaafiev, on fir) ko.k tovtv toiwv rets 7rctVT)yvpeis KaTaaTrjaavTiov, bucuiws eTratvov/j.ev(x>v, &c. Isocr. Paneg'. eireibii toiwv eTrotrjaaro Ttjv elprjvnv i/ ttoXis, evravda 7raXtv aKe\paa6e, &c. Demosth. pro Cor. See Dem. pro Cor. p. 347- [308, 5. ed. R.] ib. [243, 2.] ib. [260, 6.] ib. [262, 11.] IX. (XI.) — 5. Hut, or now : ov toiwv eiroirjaas ovbafxov tovto, Dem. ib. p. 3l6. faivo/xai toiwv eyw -^apiros rerv^Kws Tore, Id. ib. X. (XII.) It ushers in a recital or topic of some considerable length : eyw pev toiwv eypaipa, j3ov\evwv airoirXe'iv rijv rciA^Vrijv rovs trpeofiets : Demosth. ib. SECTION X. — On the conjunction )payioyou : Dinarcli. adv. Demosth. p. 9- [1. 4. ed. R.] The indicative of the preterperfect cannot be joined with these particles, any more than the indicative of the present, of which the signification is comprehended in the preterperfect. With the future indicative these particles are joined, in construction both with past tenses and with the present: see Horn. II. , 314. rj, 3.53. Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. Revelations xxii, 14. 1 Cor. ix, 18. In this sense 'iva is sometimes elegantly suppressed: ciAAa ri by) iroiuiiuev ; ?} ivepi hvtGjv tovtwv fiovXei biafxvdoXoywfxev ', Pint. Phajd. c. 14. v. Anacr. Od. xii, 1. xxxii, 24. "Iva and 6(j>pa are by the more recent poets very frequently put after verbs of commanding : v. Hermann, diss, de set. Orph. Argon, p. 814. It may here be observed that 'Iva, besides the signification of that, in order that, which it bears in the passages above cited and referred to, has also that of where, and whither: cvk apa opdtos e\et Xeyeiv, 'Iva yap beos, evda cat alb Us' aXX 1 'iva pev albws, evda nal beos, &c. Plato Euthyphr. c. 13. el iiv erepos tis tottos avornwrepns, 'iva e^v airayeiv tovs etc bea/jwrrjotov nXe-KTOVTas els eaelvov av tovto to Brjpiov airayfiijvai : Dinarch. adv. Aristogif. p. 81. See Lysiasadv. Pancleon. p. v 73l. [1. 2. ed. Reisk.] Iliad v, 478. e, 36"0. k, 127. Air. Exp. Al. v, 2. Lucian, adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 101. Time, iv, 4S. and of ore, ivhen : Aristoph. Nub. 1235. John xvi, 2. xii, 23. xiii, 1. "Iva ri ; why, wherefore ? is an elliptical expression for Iva ri yevit]7ai in construction with a present tense, and iva ri yevono with a past. Sometimes it is used with a verb following : iva t'l be tovto bpdrov ; Aristoph. Pac. 409- v. Aristoph. Nub. 1194. Matth. xxvii, 46. 1 Cor. x, 29. Ivari ravra Xeyets ', Plato Apol. p. 26. v. Id. in Symp. p. 205. Sometimes ihe verb is to be assumed from what precedes : rets irvpvas KaTatravryai fiovXofxai cnral,aiTaaas. Bl. ivari; Aristoph. Eccl. 7'8. In the same sense tbs ri is used: ws ri jjl iaropels robe ; Eurip. Phcen. 624. ws t'l bi) robe ; Id. Or. 79±- II. 'f!s and ware often require an infinitive mood : fijuels en viot ware togovtov irpay^ia bieXeaOai, we are as yet too young to, &c. Plat, in Plot, rt's ovrws avepaaros fjv, ws airoKreiveiv to ku\6v eKelvo fxei- paiciov \ m so— as to : Lucian, Dial. Merc, et Apoll. See v£l. V. H. xii, 1. flpabvs elfjit teal ^wXos u/us rj/iwv avTiKa b>) fiaXa aKoXovdtjirorTwv tu> twv virevavTiwv VTpaTaj, that ive zvere about to, &c. v. Plat. Crit. c. 14. Phsed. c. 2. c. 4. c. 24. Xen. Mem. ii, 2, 13. So wrnrep, Ceb. Tab. c. 12. It is construed in this manner also in another signification, that of quomodo, how : eri be Trparepov {cLvafivr)adr]Te viz.) ws eyovrwv twv ■Kpayjia.TWV avrov KaTtbe^aade, Isocr. de Bigis p. 689 p It is joined in a similar manner with accusatives also, vofiid,wv or the like being understood : kcu evyero be 7rpo$ tovs Oeoi/s cnrXws Tayada, Add, that ware appears to have the r 'ils is used for o-nus, how, in other sense' of vipote in Polybius : yevofievris constructions : fori yap, tori ©-nfiaiovs Se fxeyd\r]s e^ovffias irepl rovro to fiepos, raireivovs iroieTw — Kal irdvv ye pqov us 8% were Kara t)jv ij\iKiav aKfiaioos %x ovros £J W veipdaofuuvphs vfias eiire7v : JJemosth. avrov, Kal Kara, cpvcnv oiKeias StaKeifievov, pro Megalop. p. 208. 1. 9. ed. R. en KaOdirep ebytvovs aKvAatcos iirifiovov avrov ro'ivvv, Si &vdpes 'ABtjvcuoi, rfyv StoiKriaiv awi&t] yevioSai t^v irepl ras Kvvnyeaias avaipel, ri)v 0' lepav Kal r)]V oaiav. ws 5e, 6pp.-fiv : as being in the vigor of his age : iyw tppdou: Demostb. in Timocrat. 730, E. Peiresc. p. 123. ed. Em.— J. S. 25.- J. S. > 212 'Sis. [Chap. viii. § x. hih6vai, d>s roi/s Bend's mWiirra el&oras : Xen. Mem. i, 3, 2. v. i, 2, 20. Eurip* Phoen. 1470. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 1\. Fisch. ad Well. p. 387- se(|q. In Soph. Gvl. II. 5:>6. voftiCuv or the like is latent in ibwy, and on it &s with tin- optative depends. IV. '[Is, ws ye, ws b>), (is owr, ws yoiiv, sometimes signify for, i. e. considered as ; or considered with reference or regard to : 7\v be oube abvvaros, ws AaKebaifxdrios, elvely : nor was he ineloquent for (i. e. considered as) a Lacedaemonian : Thnc. iv. avrjp, ws bij rare, for those times, (considered with reference to the age he lived in,) ko/uxpos ttov xn\ aerrelns. And rejiipyov e£,T]Kpifiw), kut avdpwTrov : he finished the work with great exactness for a man, the limited capacity and faculties of human beings being considered. 'lis signifies when, whilst : ws eyewpyewfxev ev rrj Na£«, edfirevev eice~i nap' »//i7r : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 4. v. Luke xii, 58. John ii, 23. When, as soon as: ws & ovk tftieXov, — xeipeiKwfmra fiaXofievos irpos 7-J7 iroXei, Kttl fx^nvrffiar'' eVicTi/oris, eiroXwpieei : Demosth. pro Cor. [254, 25. ed. R.] mais comme Us ne le von Invent pas, &c. In this sense it is elegantly repeated, to express the celerity of an occur- rence : ws eltV, ws fxiv paWov ebv j^oXos : as soon as he saiv them, immediately, &c. Horn. II. r, Hi. ws elb\ ws aveiraXro : 11. v, 424. ■%ws "ibov, ws efxcurji', ws /.toi irepl 8v/j.6s laefrQn : Theocr. ii, 82. ws "ibev, ws efjavr) : Id. iii, 42. So Virgil, ut vidi, nt peril, ut me mains ahstulit errov : [Eel. viii, 41.] '[is is often expressive of a wish ; in verse, by itself; as, w Zt;, ws XaXvfiwv irav anoXoiro yevos : Callim. Jupiter, ut Chalubon omne genus pereat : Catull. v. Soph. El. 126. q But in prose e'ide ye is often joined with it, or ye alone, some other word intervening: ws et0e ye icai e^ejjLeaai bvvarov i)i>, Lucian. ws e'irj ye rovmv iifiiy eivat, &c. Synesius. So the Frencli que: que plut a Dieu ! que fusses-tu Men loin d'ici ! It is often used also in exclamations, and has an augmentative force : ws air/nt paXa rets yvuQovs aAyjyerere ! Aristoph. PdC 236. raiid' ws eyavwdnv ! h\. Ach. 7. ws ere fiaKapi8o/j.ev ! Id. Vesp. 1266. , s rayicrra is some- times, cs soon as ever; ut primum : ws be fifxeprj Tayiara eyeyovee, Herodot. i, 11. pr. So i, 65. 80. 141. 213. And in the same sense Polybius says ws daaaov: K.apyr)bovioi yap ws Qolttov KarearricravTO r« koto. tjjv Ai/3yjjr, evdeojs 'ApiXKav k^nireareiXav : ii, sub init. Sometimes ws and on are conjoined before superlatives, when ovrws may be understood : dvfxoeibi] juev br] ypfj iravra avbpa elvat, irpqov be ws on /jaXiara, ut quam maxime, [in the same degree as what is most so,] Plato, eanv ohros (oiirws,*Reiz.) ct. 'fls (or oaov) may be put in the same manner after the adjectives Qavjxaaiov, davfiacrrov, apiyavov. 'fls follows even substantives in the same manner, ion being expressed or understood before it : ye\ws ead' ws ypwjieQa rots Ttpayfxaviv, Demosth. Phil, i, p. 17. I. 32. for yeXolov ws, or yeXoiws ws yjj. & c - Thus when ws follows a substantive or adjective, Ian is to be under- stood : Qavfia, or davfiaarov, (eoriv) ws ■ypa.rai toIs 'ltttiois: when an adverb, eyei : Oavfj-amws (e'xet) ws ^pdrai, &c. and when, as in R. 8. ws precedes the adverb, the ellipsis is to be supplied in some other manner: eppijaei rovs ws d\>j0ws biKaaras, Plat. Apol. p. 41. i. e. obnos bacaaras ovras, ws aXrjduis 6vofJ.dS.oi av tis, or the like. X. (XI. XII. XIII.) 'Sis, in the same manner as on, is sometimes prefixed to the words of a person recited in direct phraseology, just as they were spoken, and not in oblique : rti^es ovv i\aav ol napa tovtov Xoyoi Tore prjdevres ; why, ws ov bel 6opvj3elcrdai raj irapeXrjXvQevai QiXimrov e'tcrw FIvAwV earai yap a-irai'd' ova flovXead' i/ftels : Demosth. pro Cor. where ov bel d. &c. are the very words of iEschines : other- wise the construction might have been ojs ovk av beoi, or ws ovk ebei. In Demosth. Ol. iii. [38, 19- ed. R.] where ws is thus used, there is a transposition, the order, as to signification, being ovk eanv ottov eyw t i7rov, ws bel ve/ieiv toTs fxribev itowvgl to. tojv iroir)Jye be itoXXclkis tovs HvpaKov- aiovs ws e7ri arparelav Kal (pvrelav, for e£»;ye r. 2. e7rt (pvreiav, ojs £tvI '.214 'fls. [Chap. viii. § x. aTpareinv : Pint, in Apophth. So watrep : ayovai yap uywra irevra- CTqpiKOV Mrj7T€j> K'li TCtls MoUTfUS, KCll TO)"EpWTl, for 76) "EpW't W(T7T€p Knl rals Movants : Id. 'Epwnic. init. ws lurpw, irapabebwuevui aenvrbv rw kmorarn: to the trainer, as to a physician : Epict. Ench. c. 35. So olouel, /El. V. H. i, 1. And ws in this sense goes before ovrws, (see Chap. ir. R. 13.) v. 1 Thess. v, 2. XI. (XIV.) 'fts in ihe sense of quod, that, after words signifying proof of evidence, as reicptipiov, crr)fxe~iov, anobei'frs, is joined with an indicative mood : as, airubeiliv be 7rape (or Haa, or ocrov) einaadi, Tenpaipetrdnt, vTroXnftelr : as far as any one. may conjecture, &c. ws epoiye boicelv, as 1 think : ws e'nrelv, so to speak : r ws e/xe ev ji€jjivT)aBai ra b ep/urjvevs /not eapev areyvov re /cat evre^ror elraf, Ph&dr. vravTwv ye irov paXiara' ws vvv ye \pt\ws 7rws Xeyopev, oiitc eyovTes iKara napabelypara : Plat. Phaedr. p. 262. v. Eurip. Phoen. 12&7. r Here another phrase may be noticed : raves ; Her. kukcov ywaiKuv e'icroBos (S Or, tras oSj/ to5', sis etiroi tis, ifyfidp- aird Maav : Euvip. Androm. 930. — J. S. Rule n — is.] Hs. 215 Or. 1103. Sopli. El. 370. Usually in the beginning of sentences or members: ws vvv ye ovber gov yevoir av evTeXearepov, S. Chrvs. in c. vi. ep. ad Rom. XIV. (XVII.) r £1s is put before etao-ros : 01 b' ovv ws eKaaroi "EXXijj'es, Kara iroXets re oaoi uKkrfKwv tyvieoav, kcl\ Zv/nravres vorepov n\r)6ei'res, [ovbei> 7rpo twv 'Ypoixwv hi aadevetav nal afufcinv aXXyXuiv adpooi evrpagav.] Thuc. i. p. 3. [e. 3. p. 7- ed. Bekk.] i. e. pro se quisque, ws eKaaroi Tvy\aiovm or ervyov. tiui ol fxer eirXafiiBrfaav ws eh-aoroi, Thuc. v, 4. v. Schaef. ad Lamb. B. Ellips. p. 602/ XV. (XVIII.) '[Is fxev, — ws he are put in different members of sentences: eXafot twv X6s ov, aXXa tov iarpov : Aristot. Polit. i. Also when d)s follows the word to which it relates, it is accented, as 6ebv i!>s, Horn. Od. r, [bpvo^ovs ws, Od. t, 574:] "floirep ri; is a demand of an example: as what for instance ? aojeXovres tov eptoTos ti eibos, ovo/uixiofiev to tov oXov eirtrSevTes ovojxa, epioTa' tcl be uWa aXXois KarwypLoLxiiQa ovbfxaaiv. wawep ti ', ifyb' eyw. "iloirep Tobe. Olaff oti, &c. Plat. Synip. p. 205." CHAPTER IX. THE PREPOSITION. Of prepositions in general, it may be remarked that by poets and Ionic writers they are often separated widely from the cases governed by them ; as, avTap vno \diov a/xepbaXeov Kovafitcie irobiov uvrtav re Ka\ ittttiov : Horn. II. /3, 465. eodXwv pev yiip a7r' eodXa ixadiiaeai, Theogn. 34. ev yap ae ttJ vvktI tovtyi avaipeoiiai, Herodot. Er. c. 6ty. See Ter. Andr. iii, 3, 6. Ovid, de Pont, iii, 3, 46. Hercid. ep. ix, 69. In Attic writers also fj.ev, yap, bri, ovv, &c. are inserted between prepositions and their cases, as ev pev elpijvy, &c. Prepositions have often been erroneously added by transcribers, see Bruuck. ad Eurrp. Phoen. 828. aud often interchanged, as 7rapa and itpb, v. Berg!, ad Alciphr. 3Q5. A preposition is sometimes repeated, but not by chance or negligence, nor tautologically, the first being in place of an adverb, v. Herodot. ii, 176. and Hermann, De Emend. Rat. Gr. Gr. *Ar in II. \p, 709- for rivet, i. e. avw. "ev b' virepas Te, tcaXovs Te, 7robas t evebrftrev ev avTtj : Horn. Od. e, 260. *Ev be is in place of an adverb ; to explain which the poet adds, according to his custom, ev avrrj. In some phrases and passages, however, one or other of the prepositions is redundant, as, anb fiofjs evenev, tivos ylipiv eveca, aii(pl a ovveKa. v. Diss, de ellips. et pleonasm, in Museo Antiq. Stud, i, I. p. 202. So a preposition is sometimes redundant, when a substantive performs the office of another preposition : 'EreocXeous davovTos ct/i^' eTVTaaTOfxovs irvXas abeXcbov \eip\ YioXvreiKovs viro, Eurip. Suppl. 401. On the other hand one preposition sometimes serves for two nouns, * Kvpos 8e, bpuivrovs"'E.K\7]vas viKuvras dot. mat. 1011, 22. ed. R. — J. S. to KaQ* avTobs, — 0118' &s effo^ dii&Keiv : v Add the following phrase : Qwttov, % Xen. Anab. i, 8, 15. v. iii, 2, 14. 011 Sis tis av dSero, more quickly than one ix7\v aX\' el koI jUTjSev toutwv virrjpxev could have thought it possible, fiereoopovs rjfMP, oi>5' ws x a ^- e7r " v ecrT ' "yvwvai wepl ££eic6fj.i(rav ras afjid^as, Xen. Anab. i,5, 8. avTwv — : Demosth. adv. Spud. 1032, 19. o'l re aKovTiarai fipaxvTepa i\k6vtl^ov ?j &>s ed. R. els tt)v olaiav ovS' &s clad Qaa Qui ii^iKvelaQai tSiv otyei'dovrjTaii', Id. ib. iii, 3, tovtovs ri^iutreVf Demosth. adv. Ba'ot. de 6. — J. S. § i. Rule 1, 2.] 'Auf. 217 being joined with the last only, although equally applicable to the first : vl be veoL fioXirijv re tcu is yopov ivrvveotie, Callim. h. A poll. 8. v. Ruhnk. in epist. crit p. 130. Valck. ad Mosch. ii, 13S. ad Callim. p. 17S. seq. Hor. Carm. iii, 25. 2. Lastly, one individual preposi- tion sometimes appertains to two different cases: npos i)u> re icai rov Tavaibos, Herodot. iv, 122. See Wessel. SECTION I. — ON THE PREPOSITIONS d/t^t, ava, avev, aPTi, otto. Rule I.— 'A/i^i, (in epic poetry d^is) in the poets and Ionic writers signifies, with a genitive, about, by, and on account of; with a dative, about, on account of, and around:® but ap! u>bS]v eyovai, Arr. de Exp. Al. C. 11. 6 fiev Kva£apr]s afjcpl hemvov el^ey, was at supper : Xen. Cyrop. v. Elvat a/jl ravra ijnav, Dionys. Hal. ix. p. 642. I. 14. Kara vopovs — , tovs a.[x(j)i dvaiav vy? 'EWr'ivw xaraaTadevras, about, or concerning, sacrifice : Id. vii. p. 479. init. II. With the same case it signifies about, h e. nearly : aniywv 7 v s 'Pwjurjs a/jrfl tovs rptaKorra orabiovs, Dion. Hal. i. p. 73. b 5. ane- Quvov u/uv be iroXiru/v cifMpi tovs rjjxiaeis fidXitr-a biefQaprjcrav, Id. x. p. 677. 1. 4. elvai afityl be^a err], to be about ten years old. Before enumerating the significations of d/i^i in composition, it may be remarked generally, — 1. that words do not always receive any additional or different sense by being compounded with prepo- sitions : hence the compounded and the simple have been frequently interchanged by ignorant copyists. See Brunck, i'nd. ad Aristoph. in v. preepositiones. Bos, ad Thorn. M. p. 683. Brunck, ad Aristoph. Lys. 408. 1010. 1220. — 2. that the same preposition in the same compound word may have a different import in different passages : avayeiv e. g. may signify sometimes to lead back, sometimes to lead upwards ; aveyew sometimes to hold back or restrain, sometimes to raise, &c. 'A/u^t then in composition signifies — 1. encompassing, environing, surrounding, enclosing, circuition ; as in ufupifiakXeiv, a/jKjjiTidepai, a/AOiirepiarpecpeaOni. — 2. on both sides or parts ; as in afxcftopevs, a vessel with tivo handles ; aptylfiios, afj. avnypafeiv, avariBeadai, avabe^eadni, dva;rXetv. — 3. putting off, tendency backwards, delaying; as in avafiaXXeiv, avairivreiv, uvievai. — 4. separation ; as in ava^wpelv, to depart. — 5. It intends x See Horn. II. j3, 250 — J. S. served that in the passage here referred y *Hv 5^ a^idays twv ifiuv i\uv els to, avh. els eKaaros twv irvXiivwv i\v ef elvai, %v evda.be aywvoiv elvat, to be worth them all: Plat, instead of: air ayairris iiiaos ev^aaQati v. Schaef. in Liban. epist. 1398. And in the sense of comparison, equality, permutation, preference, it is frequently joined with the verbs aya-rr^v, alpelaQai, be-^eadat, aXXdrreiv, riQeerdat : cut* iravros ayadov Tidefxevcjv, exelvov top iivbpa ebiropelv, preferring before, &c. Dionys. Hal. x. X. Sometimes avrl signifies, on account of, in return for: elrd ix iptor^s, avrl noias aperies a.£,iu> Ttfxdadai I Demosth. pro Cor. avd' uv rffv eirap^iav EKaiaooe, Ttfxcoplas viroiieveiv tcls eavepov, openly : Thuc. i. airo airovbrjs, seriously, earnestly, zealously ; airo TavTOfxdrov, and d«ro Tv-%r)s, fortuitously ; airo tov cppovifiov, discreetly, prudently. XII. 'Airo tov fieXrioTOV, and airo tov KpariaTov, signify, with the best intentions, honestly, sincerely, with good faith : Dionys. Hal. * Add, that avri sometimes signifies griefs; griefs for griefs, instead of the succession : reOvai-qv 8' d \xi\ ti Katcwv &/x- usual alternation of joys and griefs. — iravfia, /xepi/xvuv evpoi/j.r)v, SoirjS 5' avT 1 J. S. auwv avias : Theogn. 344. griefs after 220 'At™. [Chap. ix. § i. i. p. 62. vii. p. 4/0. Sometimes irav-bs is added to fieXriarov : airb TraiTus roil fieXrirj-ov, Id. iii. p. 140. iv. p. 221. On these phrases and (Wo ruv biaKei^thov, see Leopard. Emend, i, 21. XIII. Preceded by the article it signifies conjunction, connexion, relation: 01 airb (f>iX(>ao(f)ia>i, the philosophers ; erepios /jet' yap 'Etj- KOvptj) boKel ra irpayfjara eyeiv, ereputs be to'is airb ri)s Erocls, {to the Stoics; literally, to those from the portico or porch,) erepus be ro7s airb Ttjs 'Anabrj/nias, (to the Academics,) erepws be vols airb tov Ilepi- 7ra-ou, to the Peripatetics : Lucian, de Parasit. 01 airb H\arwvos, the Platonists, the Platonic philosophers: Clem. Al. Str. ii. p. 384. 1. 29. ot aoj a'lfiaros irat>res, Kad' exarepov yevos, to re irarpuov, Kai fjt)- rpwov, kindred, kinsfolk: Philo de Legat. ad Caium. And when the article is in the neuter, icara is understood before it : to be onto tTjs fxvTpos (but on his mothers side) iKvdrjs, JEsch'm. c. Ctes. p. 299. 1. 10. fiaaiXevs fueyas ilToXeualos — -ra uev airb iraTpbs, 'HpanXeiivs tov Aids' ra be airb jj.rjTp6s, Anoyvoov tov Aids : Monum. Ptolem. Euerg. 01 airb tTjs fiovXrjs, the senators : Herodian vii, 1. 01 curb rov irXijOovs, the plebeians ; 01 airb r&v alpeaewv , the heretics: Clem. Al. Str. ii. p. 383. 1. 30. 01 airb twv 'Adqvaiioy "laves, the Ionians descended from the Athenians; oi airb iraibeias, the learned: Epitom. Athen. i. cf. Casaub. ad Athen. i. c. 11. 01 airb twv /ueynXwv TtfirjfAaruv, [the men of great fortunes :] Aristid. ap. Thorn. M. p. 854. XIV. It is used in speaking of persons who have ceased to be in any office or employment : ireptTv^ovTes twv into inrareias — rtv\, con- sular men, men who had been consuls: Herodian vii, 1. ol airb Tijs crparnyias, those ivho have been generals, [or who have been praetors ;] 6 airb rrjs irpea^eias, who has been ambassador. XV. Allied to this sense is that of after : airb beiirvov, immediately after supper ; airb iraibwv, after boyhood, from a boy; airb irapay- yeX/xaTOs, upon the word of command ; airb (raXiriyyos, at the sound of the trumpet ; airb tov iroXe/jov, after the war, at the end of the war. XVI. As irapa is very seldom nsed in speaking of inanimate things, except in poetry, (irapa vijwv, from the ships: Horn.) so airb is very seldom said, especially in prose, of animate things ; as, rows efcXeXey- fxevovs airb rov Qeov, by God: Clem. Al. Str. ii. p. 389- 1- 7- V. Matth. xi, 19.. Mark viii, 31. 1 Macchab. viii, 6. 12. ix, 15. and Jens, in Fere. Liter, p. 16. seqq. The following senses may also be noticed ; moral source : air' opdijs Kai bacaias koi abiatydopov tijs \pv^fjs iravra fiot ireirpaicrai, Demoslh. pro Cor. p. 355. 1. 12. See Eurip. Ion, 1313. fi air' dXX>;Xwv oxpeXeia, Plat. Ep. xiii. p. 360. 1. 13. through, on account of , because of : evbo£oi airb Xoyov Kai ooias, Liban. Epist. 20. v. Thuc. iv, 130.* form or manner of pro- 6 Bhe\vTTOf.iai rhv hiirpeov anb Nekav- A v. 151. — J. S. Biov, on account of Melanthius : Aristoph. Rule 13—17-] 'Aire. 221 ceeding: ax' etVayyeXi'as KpiveoQat, iEschin. c. Ctt'S. p. 441. [440, 13. ert. R.j means: axo xoiwv ^ir]v vdftuv ovic e'i\ria.t>(t> axo TaKavTutv e^i'iicoi'Ta, Demosth. de Cor. p. 256. [I. 24. ed. R.] See R.'s index. c from, denoting place : KaTufialreiv niro tov opovs, Mark ix, 9. xapiov diro YiKeXias., Msch'm. Dial, ii, 1. and twv lixxiuv 7jK0VTi$ev, Id. i, 4. beaxorqs early axavTiov avdpwxuiv ct(f>' fiXiov avtovTos f*e%pi bvo/jevov, iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 522. [1. 11. ed. R.] It is sometimes used periphrastically, and needs not be translated ; as, to ax );juew>-, our : Herodot. ix, 1. v. Wessel. p. 693. to axo aev, thy : Id. vii, 101. XVII. "Axo, with an acute accent on the penultima, signifies sepa- ration, absence, distance, incongruity, unsuitableness, disagreement, estrangement, &c. ws axo ttjs yfjs eyevovTo, when they were at a distance from land: Xiphilin. in Pomp. Hence the superlative airw- tcltu), Plut. de anim. procr. v. Bast, ad Greg. Cor. p. 210. s. axo Tpoirov, absurd, preposterous ; xpbs Tpoxov, the contrary ; ovk airo rpoxov, not without reason: Plut. in Caes. p. 734. 'iarai hk ravra ovk axo tov Trpay/iaTos, not foreign to the purpose : Demosth. adv. Timocr. p. 701. [I. 23. ed. R.] axo gkoxov, far from the mark ; axo tov el/corns, at variance with probability ; uxo naipov, unseason- ably ; axo dufiov, unacceptable, disagreeable ; axo dvftov /uaXXov tpoi ecreai, Horn. II. a, 562. axebei&v axnai fiaaiXevs, on xavraxatriv avrw aire Ovjuov Kal aXXorpia >/ /jieXaiva xprityos : Themist. Or. de Theodos. clem. v. Diog. L. i, 100. In the same sense axo yvw/uns : Kal Tf Aii tovto ovk axo yi'wfxr]s ?jv : Julian. August, in Caes. 'Axo in composition signifies— 1. separation; as in axoflaivetv, axopdXXetv, axoridecrdai, axobibpaoKeiv, axeXavvetv, axobrjfielv, axei- xelv ofiiXiav, axoyiveadat axo rivbs, axofiiados, axoppi)Tov, axooTpa- T-qyos. — 2. restoration, restitution, recovery; as in axobibovai, axo- Kadtcrravai : Demosth. p. 256". [1. 4. ed. R.J axoXapfiaveiv, Lys. p. 590. [I. 4. ed. R.] p. 609. — 3. accomplishment, consummation, and consequently desistance ; as in axoTeTeXecfieids, Xen. (Ec. xiii, 3. axepyagecrOat, axocpoiTqv, Lys. Fragm. p. 38. ed. Reisk. axo- fxaxeadai, Id. p. ]48. v. Valck. ad Herodot. p. 122. 706. ad Theocr. Adon. p. 203. ad Moerin p. 401. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 246. Wyttenb. ad Eel. hist. p. 339- Huschk. in Anal. p. 56. et in indie, in v. axoKXaietv. — 4. place, office, situation ; as in axv- yeios, opposed to xXeoiTt Kara tov KXvbutros, Lucian, Lexiph. t. ii. p. 338. cf. Dorv. ad Char. p. 106. axoTeXewi, magistrates: Polyb. x, 21. xvi, 20. axofiaxeoVat l/c twv xXoiwv, to fight from the ships: Polyb. viii, 6. axodewpelv, to watch from a place of observation: Polyb. E. L. 65. — 5. imparture, communication, participation ; as in axofiepigetv. — 6. instrumentality ; as in axoKX-qpovv, to elect by c *Os a7r& fffimpas Saxaprjs vfias apicrrl- Aristoph. Eq. 538. — J. S. £wv ax4xip.xey 7 at a small cost or expense: 222 Aici. [Chap. ix. § if. lot; Pol^b. ii, 58. — 7. materials, that from which any thing is made ; as in airofteXi, Dioscor. a-rrouefjuuripevos, Athcn. — 8. Il in- tends or augments the force of words; as in ('nrnxpiitrdai, unrHire'iv, inroKaXeli', axoToXnq.v, inroduv/JuSeiv, airofivr^poveiie.iv, &c. — Q. It has the force of a privative; as in curorifios for artfjos : v. Toup. ad Longin. p. 367. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 250. air6 or X ei P" v > ^X e "'' ls not on 'y *° hold * n the hands, or handle, but also to be carefully employed upon ; to manage with care and attention ; (pofiov/jievoi yap bta x et P^ v eypvvi uaXXov Tr)v TToXtreiav, Aristot. Politic, v. ret re tuiv tynyayuv bia X ei P° s e^eif, Thud, ii, 13. III. WpotjojiiXricrai iravrl rw bia xapiriov r/iriaraTo, affably, cour- teously, complaisantly, engagingly : Xiphilin. in Julio, of Cleopatra. bi airoppriTwv 'etireiv, secretly, under injunction of secrecy: Dionys. Hal. viii. p. 482. I. 31. Kal uvpiovs aXXovs bia Kevrjs dve- irXaTTOfiev iju'iv avrols (puflovs, causelessly, vainly : Dionys. Hal. vi. p. 346. 1. 20. IV. 'Ev -rravTi bi aOvfilas eyeveoQe, you were dispirited, you desponded: Dion. Halic. vi. p. 399. 1. 49- biba£u) 7rws ?/ x^P a ^ l ' ciatpaXeias yerotro, in security : Id. xi. p. 700. I. 41. bi o^Aov yty- veadai tivi, to be troublesome to him : Plat. Alcib. i. to yap bia fxeaov xwpiovov ttoXv, between: Dionys. Hal. p. 688. 1. IS. wore — fiijhev av yeveadai to bta ueaov, aXX' i]TOi to b-nuoTiKov cnroXuXevai ■n-Xrjdos, T), &c. so that there would have been no medium, no middle condition ; but the one or the other extreme of the alternative would have been unavoidable : Id. vii. p. 451 . I. 4. V. Ata, with a genitive, and the verbs e^w, Xaufiavio, Tideuai, and the like, forms many circumlocutory phrases; as, cV alcrxyprjs e^eiv, to be ashamed to; fiaQovaa be ?/ fiovXi] tovto, bi a\axvvr\s to irpayna eXdfie : thought the affair disgraceful to themselves ; were ashamed of it: Dionys. Hal. vi. bi eX7ribos ex €tv i t° ex V ec ^ or hope: v. Herodian ii, 1. rfjs 7ro\c-ws eTrapx^vra Toaomutv eriov bta Tip.rjs re Kal BavuaTos e^ere, you both honored and admired, or wondered at : Herodian ii, 2. (pepovat bia uvi\ fxns, they remember : Rule 1—6.] Am. 223 Id. ii, 2. K&fiol be bt everts can, I wish or pray for it: Id. ii, 10. 'AvaKpeovra — bta tnrovbrjs i)ye, valued or made ''much of him: ISA. V. H. ix, 4. Ka\ f} aXXr) be iratja. arparia it o'iktov to Trpdy/xa e\a/3ev, was moved with pity at the affair: Diorfys. Hal. x. p. 6?0. 1.39- rriv nayeipttcriv /ja-^aipav bta \etpbs eyuv, holding, grasping: Id. xi. p. 720. 1. l6. bta fTTOfjtaros e%etv, to talk much of: bt airius ex €lv > to accuse, blame, find fault with: Id. iii. p. 148. 1. 36. it airlas elvat, to be blamed or accused: Id. i. p. 56". I. 33. it dxfte- Xelas rideadai, to convert to one's own profit or use : Id. vii. p. 446. 1. 12. VI. Aia with a genitive signifies space, duration, interval: bta fiiov,for life, through life: Dionys. Hal. iii. p. 187. •• 37. v. Fisch. ad Piat. Pliffid. c. 20. ap%6fievos re icai bta reXovs tvvto eTrepap- Tvparo,from first to last ; always, to the end: Plat. Sophist, p. 237. bC ij/jepas, through the whole of the day: v. Valck. ad Herodot. p. 443. Wessel. p. 604. it erovs, during a whole year : bta ievrepov erovs, every other year [through a second year] : bta rpirov erovs, every third year [through a third year] : bta fxaicpov, at a great distance : oh bia panpov -rjv 'Vw/j.tjv vnoyeipiov k\etv eXniuavres, soon, at no distant time: Dion. Hal. iii. p. 254. 1. 35/* en-etra bta arabiuv jxaXiffrct kt) irevre ava(pntv('>nevos, a river disappearing under ground, and reappearing at a distance of five stadia: Herodot. vii, 30. arrb be tovtov bta e'uoa't kov arabiiov a\Xos irora[.i6s, at the distance of twenty stadia: Id. vii, 198. bta fipnyewv tlne'tv, in few words ; bta 7r\et6ru)v e'nrelv, in many words ; bt" oXlyov, at a short distance : Thnc. vii. p. 515. bia beica be errciX^eiav irvpyot y)aav fxeyitXot, at every tenth bastion or bulwark: Time, iii, 21. Kwfiat bta ttoXXov, at a great distance apart ; davfxaSetv to. bta rrXeicrrov, things very far distant: and 01 bta nXeiorov, Thuc. iii, 115. /uaXa Trpeapurrjs pot ebo?ev eivat' bta -^povov yap kqi etiipaiceiv avrbv, for it was a long time since I had seen him: Plat, de Rep. [p. 371.1. 23. ed. Bas. 1.] Some- times bta is omitted before 'xpovov : ttoXXov ypovov, Xen. Agesil. ii, 23. e bta tooovtov, at so great (or at so little) an interval. It is often used adverbially with a genitive; as, bia ra^etov, quickly: Thuc. i, 8. bta ftpay^euv, briefly: Plat. Tim. [p. 473. I. 8. ed. Bas. 1.] and bia fipaxyrarwv, ib. p. 89- bta Tayovs, speedily : Thuc. ii, 18. it' airexdeias, inimically : Plato Theag. p. 130. 1. 12. It is employed periphrastically with a genitive signifying the instru- ment: at yiovat at bta tov v oXiywv woXiTeiat, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 489- [1- 27- ed. R.] )/ bia tG)v opKtov nioTis, iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 600. [1. 1. ed. R.y d Tin&ov Se &ov\olp.t]V av a£ioi{jLevov them : Aristoph. Pint. 98. — J. S. *rlv ep.ov opaadar Sia /xaxpov yap y x«P«> f Add that Sio; denotes succession : & permanent, lasting : Eurip. Hecub. 320. pev %p6vos 8$) Sta XP^ V0V vpov^atv' i/xol, ed. Pors. A(a is sometimes, through the Soph. Phil. 285. But Brunck explains whole extent of a place: Karearparoire- Sta xpitvov, aliquantisper, for a little Severe Sia ttjs twv ' hfynrlvaiv irdAews, while. Aia, with : Ppovrr] 5' efipdyn 5 i* Polyb. iii, 77.— J. S. ao-Tpamjs, Aristoph. Nub. 583. Br. 574. « TloWov yap avrobs oux idpaKa XP<$- Bekk. — J. S. vov,for it is a long time since I have seen 224 Els. [Chap. ix. § ii. VII. Ata with an accusative often signifies instrumentality: $w- kikov avtTTt'a'Tot ray TToXeftnv, oi> bt' tjue, ov yap enoXtTevof.irjv iru) Tore I Demosth. pro Cor. |». 31.5. I. 17- rf]s kudubov bi exelvov Tvyun>, Dion. Halic. p. 305. I. 21. abbe yap vTrobiiuara eyei bia tov j^uXKea, ovb* vTt\a bta t6v atcvrea : Epist. Encli. c. 31. V. Hon). II. 6, 510. Aris- loph. Plut. 93. And see Chap. vm. § vi. R. y.? Aia is often elegantly construed with the neuter article and an infinitive: b£eiv irpos, &c. — 2. completion, accomplishment ; as in bianepav tov fiiov, Xen. CEc. xi, 7. biairpaTTeiv, biepyageodai : Pol) b. iv, 22. biaTTiTTTeiv irpos rim, Polyb. iv, 86. viii, 21. bianpiretv, De- mosth. l6'3, 15. biaXoyiHecrdai, Id. 1236, 17. — 3. duration or tract of time; as in btaTeXelv, biafikveiv '. ovbev abitcov biayeyevrjfiai Ttoiuir: Xen. Apol. — 4. dispersion, division, distribution; as in bt- ayyeWew, Demosth.p. 163, 8. biavifieiv, biabiboiai, buaTaodai, biaano- irtjoai: to be silent one and all: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 381. biaana- traodat, ib. p. 312. biaTaTTeiv, btaTrojXiiaui et btaTwrpaoKeiv : ib. p. 92. btaytyvu)(jketv, biaboicif.iageiv : Xen. (Ec. xix, 16. — 5. separation: as in btaKadi$eiv, Xen. CEc. vi, 6. bia^wpiieip, ib. viii, 11. bta- Zevyvvvai, Demosth. p. 1399, 11. btareixiceiv, Polyb. viii, 27- — 6. secrecy, privacy; as in biabvvai, Demosth. p. 1045, 25. biaKXa-nj]- vai, Polyb. ii, 62. — 7« It intends or augments; as in biayuviyv, Po- lyb. iv, 10. bwfjLupTvptodai, Id. i, 37. bivfiwodai, Demosth. p. 320, 7. bianvvdaveadat, v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 67O. biiayypiieu- 6ai, biaKVkipv, btaQeppaiveaBai, bie^tevat, biaKuXvetv. — 8. It signifies eminence or excellence ; as in bie^ecr, biacpepeiv: v. Reisk. Animadv. vol. i. ad Dion. Chrys. p. 153. — 9- diversity or contrariety ; as in biayopeiietv, opposed to avvayopeveiv in Isaeus. v. Harpocr. — 9* contention for superiority ; as in biairiveiv : v. Hemst. ad Lucian, t. i. p. 444. a. Valck. ad Theocr. x. p. Cj5. ad Herodot. p. 379. Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 379. Tyrwh. ad Arislot. Poet. p. 215. Cattier. Gazoph. p. 70. VIII. Els governs an accusative only. Wheu it is joined with a genitive, an accusative is understood ; as, els $bnv, underst. bouov, to the infernal regions. eTreibav olv elrteXdu o'ikabe els euavTov, into my own house : Plat. Hipp. Maj. els kiovvoiov tov ypafifiaTikov elarjXtioy, I entered the school of, &c. Plat. Amat. init. els 'Aficpiapaov, into the cave of Amphiaraus. It sometimes signifies/or, in, in the per- formance or solemnization of ; Kpo re yafincwv, kcii is a\Act twv lepwv S Et ri y' ZffTi Xayarplv ko.1 tiu\bv, t) toph. Plut. 145. —J. S. X^fnv avdpdiroiiTi, 5ta ae^lyverai : Aris- Rule 7 — 11.] E2s. 225 vofitSerdi t vhan y^prjadat : Time, ii, p. 111. It is often omitted, when it signifies motion to a place ; and so in Latin, see Virg. Mx\. i, 6. iv, 164, 165. and usually after verbs signifying division ; as, Xeyovres, t]i> : Paus. in Ach. uuderst. epovra, pertaining to: k as also in Xiyeiv els to fieXTMJTOv, and elnelv eh ayadov '. Horn. II. 1, * TV Se yyv — ovtois iK\nrat>8r}vai, — i This sense of els may be expressed Sxrre KapTewv virepfi&Wov eis Upas nKridos by for: For tusks with Indian elephants QivtyKtlv, in due season: Plut. in Mario he strove: Dryden, vol. iii.p. 426. War- p. 763. 1. 22. ed. H. St.— J.S. ton's edition, 1811.— J. S. * Nsvovd^TrjKev avrbv is ra irpdy/jLara, h I should construe is avyypwpip with 1 reformed or corrected himself in nrapexerai, affords for, as subjects for, de- matters: Aristoph. Vesp. 743.— scription.—J . S. Viger. 2 F 226 TAs. [Chap. ix. §ii. 102. i/yoTifxai tvivvv tvui'Twv fiuXirrr' els tu Trpuy/jn elrai, Tovrtdv fiuprvpas nupeyeoQai, to be pertinent to, or promotive" 1 of, the matter in hand: Demosth. pro Phorm. XII. Ylapievai, and napeXOeli', els rbv bTmov, els t))i> fiovX>)i>, els rovs bixaaras, to address the people, the senate, to come into court, to trial. Ets is put for ap(p\, about : rptrjKovTopot fiev els hiaKoaias Kareaicevaa- dqcruv, Zosim. Hist. ii. For 7repl, about, at, near : ro~is els tov "\aTpov (pvXuTTOvcri arpaTiu)- rais, Id. iv. It is put for Tpos, to, before accusatives signifying persons; as in Horn. II. a, 100. 431. 389- o, 402. p, 709. Od. X , 479- Joseph. Arch, xii, 2, 5. eXdfov els riju ejii)v fxr)Tepa, Isaeus de Apollod. Hered. p. 169. R. ufiKvov/uai els tov k/yuerep&> o'ikio es ael ava- ypaxros, Thuc. i. ets eVeim, or elffeweira, or es to. eireira, for the future, henceforth ; els avpiov, to-morrow ; els Trivvarepnlav, the next day, the day after ; els rpirrjv rj/jepav, the next day but one, the third day, the day after to-morrow: Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 268. vpaxQn^ir- Oai be ovk els /xaKpav, a\\' els tj]v eKrrjv eirl be«a tov ' A.vderjTr)piG>vos fj.r)vbs: not at a distant time, very soon; on the sixteenth of the month Anthesterion : iEschin. c. Ctes. ijtceiv — els ti)v oeXr]vr)v, to come at new moon : lb. els ty/v fxearju^piav, at noon ; els onore ; at what time ? els TptaKoarbv eros, in the thirtieth year from such a time; or, within thirty years. n But els" bvo, els rpeTs, &c. is two 1 EItts7v els KaAbv, to say well: a\\' 8e«a (irjvas, within ten months: Poljb. els KaAbv o~v r' eTiras, ol Be y' aprlcos Kpe- Exc. Peiresc. p. 119. ed. Ern. — J. S. ovTttirpoo-o-TeixovTa o-qp.ali'ovo-i jj.oi : Soph. » Els Svo, a military term, two in rank: CEd. Pv. 78. — J. S. <5 5e KAeapxos riyelro /tenets Svo, iiropevero m See Supplement to Johnson's Die- 8e &A\ore ical &\\ore irpio-rdfj-evos : Xen. tionary, published in 1819.— J. S. Anab. ii, 4, 14.— J. S. " TlpoBoQivTiev twv Trpiinuv iTrinXuv e is Rule 12 — 15.] E& 227 and two, three and three, &c. npuirov per fiyovTO tu> Ait Tavpoi irayica- Xoi els reaaapas, Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 6. 'Es with re, eare, signifies as long as: eare fxev v es to ea-^arov, aged in the extreme, in extreme old age: Lucian, Here. Gall. Also with nouns, and with adjectives not in the superlative degree : ets vTrepfioXrjv, extremely, excessively ; els Kaipov, seasonably, opportunely: and in the same sense Katpdv alone: Soph. Aj. 34. 1334. els ko\6v ijtceis, opportunely : Plato Hipp. Maj. els KaXbv elirelv, to say rightly or well : [see note I, p. 221.] els beov, commo- diously, conveniently, opportunely ; els fxaKpav,far off, a long while, at a distant time ; ovk els jucu-pav, presently : Demosth. de Cor. p. 318. els TeXos, absolutely, utterly ;P also completely, to the end, until death, for ever: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 460. els ra TroXXh, gene- rally, for the most part ; els oaov, as much as, or as long as : Avti- o\6vTes els oaov evebe^ero avbpeihis, TeXevTalov Travres biecpBdprjaav : Herod ian vi. ets oaov fiev yap inrb brjuoKparlas rd 'Pwfxalwv biwiceiro, Id. ii. els awnv, altogether, absolutely, always, invariably : Epict. ? es oXiyov, slightly, cursorily : aireTreipaQr} es oXtynv rijs TrpoafioXi]s, Arr. Exp. Al. ii. but with eXdelv or a verb of similar signification, and an infinitive after it, it signifies, to be within a little of; to have a narrow escape from : es oXiyov cupineTo tt&v to arpc'iTevfjia twv 'Adrjvaiwv viKrjdrjvai, Thuc. iv, 129- ■ els irXeov, more at large, more fully : Tavra /nev br/ Kal es nXeov eirk^eiaiv avOis fioi to. es 'Apica- bas, Paus. in Ach. eXvirrjaav be Kal els trXeov tovs 'Ay^aiovs, still more: lb. p. 413. Ets robe is, hither ; [and to this point, to this pass.] Note also that a person condemned to pay a fine is said, els apyvpiov KaTatprjtylgeadat, /Eschin. in Timarch. and that ets is some- times, after, i. e. in imitation of: KaTeaKevaafievos els tov upyalov pvdfxov, Diod. S. v, 58. v. Musgr. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 1483. to awpa irpos tov ijXiov els to Aldioiretov ein-^pavavTes, Lucian, Bis. Ace. 6. P Taiv 8e vavwrjywv els reXos aTreipow virapxeiv: Polyb. xi, 13. — J. S. ovrwv rrjs irepl ras irevritpeis vavnriylas, 1 "OpKOV TrapairTjcrai' el pev olovre, els &c. Polyb. i, 20. and in the same sense awav, el Se pfy, in twv 4p6vtwv : Epict. Kara rb reKos: 5tck -rb pi]ff vScop Karb. End), c. 44. — J. S. rb t4\os ev avrr), pyre tt)v aypiav uAtjc X 22S 'Ek. [Chap. ix. § iii. biciKoaftovpevos els 'UpaicXia, and oirdre uonolro els Atocncovpovs ; Philo Juil. p. 10.93. b. v. Eurip. Hec. 1160/ In composition els signifies — 1. motion into; as in elaievai, elou- yetv, cloirepiretv, elo 17. Theocr. Id. xxii, 29- Demosth. p. 907, 5. [elaatpiicvovfjievoi, 1. 4. ed. Reisk.] — 3. publication ; exhibition or pro- pounding, &c. in public; as in elotyepeiv Katra baifiovia, Xen. Mem. ab init. et Apol. § 12. elokyeiv nva, Polyb. E. L. 93. elafepeiv yvLfx^v, Id. ii, 6. elaepy^eadai, Id. iii, 44. elar)ye~mdal n, Id. vi, 1. — 4. acquisition, as in eic;7ro/ : v. Cattier. Gazopbyl, p. 73. SECTION III. — On the prepositions Ik or t|, and Zv. Rule I. 'Ek before a consonant, l£ before a vowel, is used with its case (which is always a genitive) adverbially ; as, eic rov 6bov, by sudden onset, assault, irrup- tion ; ex 7rapa\\{i\ov, i. e. 7rapaXXiq\ws, comparatively, by comparison ; [also, similarly ; by parity of circumstances or reason ;] eic wpoaipe- oetjs, on purpose ; Ik Xa8paias eniQeaeus, by secret attack ; Ik tov em-nXelarov, for the most part ; l£ knifiovXfis or evehpas, insidiously, treacherously ; etc rod evOeos, rashly, precipitately ; ex rov 7rapa-^prjfj.a, Ik tov napav-iKa, l£ vnoyviov, Ik tov ahroo-yebiov, at once, extempore, inconsiderately ; eic tov actpaXovs, cautiously, securely ; Ik rrnpaaicevfis, designedly ; [premeditately ;] etc rov aveXniarov, and cnrpo cnroWv/jievovs, Thuc. ii, 53. irapeKukei dappelv fxev eic twv i]bi] ctyioiv koXwv KeKivbvvevfievwv, km ore irpbs vevtKtjfxevovs 6 dywj/ veviKnKoaiv avrols eorai" Arr. Exp. Al. ii, f. where on has the same signification [i. e. the construction might have been nal ck tov — tov aywva, &c. with an infinitive] : eK tov; on what account? wherefore? Eurip. He!. 92. Sometimes, according to, in proportion to: ex twv evovrwv, ck twv bwuTwv, ere twv evbe^o/Ltevwv : to the best of one's power : see Epict. Erich, c. 44. Aristid. t. iii. p. 270. in which sense Ik twv ovtwv, Zosim. i, 2. but eK twv evovrwv yjprjaofjiai Tf \6yf, as the nature of the affair requires : Demosth. * For bia : Ik TocravTijs eTrifue\eias, by so much care and attention ; eK Tov-ov tov \6yov, by this method, or by this way of reasoning ; Ik daXaaaijs, by sea ; etc iravrbs or navros rpoirov, by every method ; [and totally, or all together ;] to which is opposed etc fxepovs or p.e/uwv : el £>' ovk eK tov ttclvtos, d\\' eK fiepovs eiraiveffopeda : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 899- [by the great ; in the gross ;] eK toiovtov tov rpo-Kov, in such a manner as this ; Ik filas, by force : Soph. Phil. 563. u The following is the interpretation of happen to lose, they suffer no inconve- this phrase offered by me in my Commen- nience. — J. S. tary on Demosthenes published in the " I suppose the passage alluded to is Classical Journal : Videtur figura ab Us the following : &AA.' inrb ttjs tovtovI tov desumta, qui supervacanea tantum ex for- xaAejrou fi\aff(f>rjfiias not o-vKoQavrias els tunis suis in discrimen commit tunt ; qui- towvtovs \6yovs ep-TrinTeiv avaynd£opai, bus vel amissis,jacturam non ita magnam oh in twv 4v6vtwv &s tiv Svpu/xai jue- faciunt. I suppose it is a figure taken rpuorara xpvcofiai : de Cor. p. 312. 1.20. from persons venturing the superfluous ed. Reisk. as far as the occasion or cir- part only of their fortune ; which if they cumstances will permit. — J. S. 230 'Ek-. [Chap. ix. § iii. V. 'EKTrohiov™ or Ix Trohwv, (literally from before out's feet,) be- sides the sense mentioned in Cli. v. § v. It. 8. signifies with el vat, yi- veoQai, loraadai, or iroielatiai, to be killed or destroyed, [as we say, to be put out of the zuay :] ov ■noXXals vaTepou rifiipais eKirobwv 6 kclko- baifiwy yiverai, Philo de Legat. ad Caium. to /xetpuKiov en izobibv yeyei'Tjrai, Id. ib. 'Ek is put for ev, in: etc 7rapara£ews Kparelv, in pitched battle: Po- lyb. ii, 19. In Thuc. vi, 32. b aXXos SfxiXos 6 ck yf/s is opposed to 6 vavriKos SficXos: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 10o\ Cic. Ep. iii, 9. Caes. B. G. i, 43. but in Horn. II. t, 375. tpaiveodai e, Id. p. 45. etcKeicrdui, Id. p. 458. kcTiQevai, Polyb. xv, 9. — 8. It intends or augments; (v. Valck. diatr. p. 167. Musgrav. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 259.) as m erf™- Xl^etp, M\. V. H. iii, 33. ix, 41. eKKayx&cieiv, Xen. Symp. i, l6. e«- Xoyio/Jtos, Polyb. x, 6. e^aKpifiovv, Id. ii, 56. e&vicpiveiv, Id. E. L. 141. eKdepcureveiv, iEschin. Or. p. 24, 15. — 9- continuation or per- w rtopex' etaroSZiv, give me your place ; Soph. (Ed. R. 997. 'Ek vvktIs, in the stand out of the way ; make room: Aris- night, by night: teal yap 4k vvktos, ef toph. Vesp. 949. — J. S. rivos Stoiro 'Acrrvdyrjs^ irpwros rfo-ddveTO x 'Ek, upon : Kadii/xed' &Kpouf e« irdyoiv, Kvpos, ical irdvTwv aoKVoTara aveirifSa : Soph. Autig. 411. by: $>v oiiVeX* V K<5- Xen. Cyrop. i.— J. S. pivdos e£ i(.wv TraAai jj.ci.Kpav a.TccaicilT', Rule 5— 9.] 'Ev. 231 sislence ; as in kKTpktyeiv, eKreivetv ras ^elpas. — 10. It is redundant ; as in klafiapraveiv : v. Musgrav. ad Eurip. Iph. A. 333. Fisch. praef. ad Well. p. 13. VI. The preposition kv is construed with no other case than a dative; which, when not expressed, is to be understood; as, kv ktovvcov Tpaywbovs kBeaaaade, Deinosth. de Pac. [p. 58. 1. 24. ed. R.] uuderst. kopTaaijiois yj/uepais.^ It is used for kirl with a genitive, before; as, kv ToaovTOis fxaprvai: ev to7s ctKaarals, or biairrjrals. biabiKa^eaBai ev tlgi twv larpOiv, Plat. Leg. 11. TrpoTeQeiarjs be fiovXijs kv to~is twv vewv ijyefxoai Ttepl Tijs vav- fxa%ias, Diod. S. xi, 12. 'Ev, during the office or magistracy of: kv be tovtois tihs vofioQerats fii] BerrBe vo/nov fxrjbeva, Demosth. Ol. iii. So, kv tovtois vtvoltols. VII. 'Ev with its case is used adverbially: kv tovtw, meanwhile ; and in this sense kv J is correlative with it : kv tovtw, then, preceded by kneibav and orai', Xen. de Re Eq. vii, \J. x, 13. kv tovtw, there- fore, (a Hebraism,) Acts xxiv, 16. dvaara kv rayei, quickly, Acts xii, 7. v. Rom. xvi, 20. Rev. i, 1. Kinrotyavw ye vr) At'a, ws kv biKr) a' ervTzrov, justly : Aristoph. Nub. 1335. [1332. Br. 1314. Bekk.] cf. Plat, in Phaedr. p. 278. 1. 40. kv bkovn, kv tcmpy, kv Ka\)v AaKwviKijv x&P av fiXawTetv (for injuring it) kv KaXXiarw be rijs avTtirkpav {]ireipov, Xen. Hist. Gr. vi. kv tovtw tt/s irapaoicevfjs ijaav, in this state of preparation, or were thus preparing : Thuc. ii. [c. 17-] And sometimes a dative besides of the person or thing advan- taged, &c. vpb tov Bearpov, ical ov ttvlgiv kv KaXtp Tijs Bias ecrrai : and where all will have a good view : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 267. IX. 'Ev signifies, at, near : 'Ena/j.etvwvbas OTe krpwdr) kv Mavrivelq, JE\. V. H. xii, 3. f]TT7jfievos kv MavTtveiq, 'nnronayiq, Xen. H. Gr. vii. p. 645. v. Perizon. ad iEl. V. H. ii, 25. Bach, ad Xen. Ages, ii, 23. kv apiGTepq. fiev eywv to. ^.oybiavwv opt), kv be^iq be avrov tov TiyprjTa : Arr. Exp. Al. iii, 7. on the left, on the right : kppifxevos kv irocrt, at, JE\. V. H. i, 16. v% Dorv. ad Char. p. 200. 418. ed. Lips. For els, to: cnroaTeXovvTes ottXitcis kv 2t«reX/a,Thuc. vii, 17. p. 449/ V Wolf understands va$ or eoprf. A3 stood.— J. S. theatres were dedicated or consecrated to z "Clixovro 5e ev rots oxvpois' Xen. Bacchus, perhaps Osdrpcp may be under- Anab. iv, 7, 12. where see Hutchinson, 232 '!•>. [Chap. ix. § Hi; X. 'Etri^e/pjjreov v/iwv e&XeaQai ti)i> biafio\i)v, f\v ev TroXXy XP (>, 'V ?\ere, (of," or from, a long time,) tciutt)V ev ovruurl dXiyy yjpoyf,{in so short a time:) Plato Apol. It signifies also within, wlien thus go- verning nouns of time : ev irevre yfiepais eftoqOi'iaaTe avrols, jEschin. c. Ctes. p. 286". 1. 35. v. Ml. V. H. i, 6. And also process of time : ev 8' nvre xP ()t 'V> ^ nen after a time : Pind. P}th. iii. XI. 'Ev al is sometimes when: to yevos to tuiv Opatcwv, ev $ ttv Oapcrtjerri, QoviKtoTarov eas civtovs (ev w <7a0e<7-ara 'laiviav Kal 'EXXt'jo-rrovrov evdvs ely^ov ol 7roXefiiot,) Tbuc. viii. c. 86. p. 612. Tip toiovtu) trpoaeKeivTO, ev uSnep kul p.a- Xmtto. oXiyapyjia en bq/xoKparias yevojxevr) cnroXXvTai, Id. viii. C. 88. p. 615. XII. 'Ev and its case are joined with ehai, and verbs of similar signification, in various forms; as, ev elvai, to be in fear : v. Cic. Catil. i. c. 7. [§ 18.] Hor. Epod. i, 17. Hence efjfofios [Luke xxiv, 5.] and efupofiovpai. "EvTpo/jos, of kindred signification, is in Acts Ap. vii, 32. ev arTouari, and more elegantly ev Xoyois, ev ^r\[in, elvai, to be talked of , to be celebrated : yeveaXoyovvTes avrov two rfjs ev to be shaven close to the skin : Theophr. irep\ /unpoX. [p. 59. 1. 2. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] /El. V. H. ix, 10. Hence?) kv xPf Kovpa, close shaving, called also iptXi) Kovpa, and in poetry Kovpa i,vpi]Krjs : and b kv yjm Kovpias, one so shaved; and in one word lupins. Figuratively £vpe~i kv ^pu is said of what is very dangerous ; chiefly in poetry. XV. Ov iTplv }} kv xpu) tov Kivhvvov aTckoTr] Tovbiav av jxayfiaai irpbs ras (nriXabas, not before he had been in the greatest danger: Synes. Ep. iv. In this sense a thing is said kni £vpov aKfArjs taraadai or e'xe<70Gu, for, to be in a very critical situation: Horn. II. k, 173. Theogn. 557. Herodot. Er. c. 11. kv XPV paxeo-dai or na.yr\v aw- a\pat, hand to hand: Plut. in Thes. XVI. Hence kv \pw, near, or close: kv yjpw ael irapanXkovTes, Thucyd. ii. c. 84. p. 155. This is expressed by stringere and radere : Virg. j£n. v. [l63. 170.] kv j(Pf T V J"'FP' irpoffurrafxevot, pressing close to her through fear: Lucian, in Zeux. [632. D. ed. Salm.] % kv \po) irpds to. (3tj3Xia awovaia, a close acquaintance with books: Id. adv. Indoct. t. i. p. 102. 1. 57. ed. Amst. 01 kv ypu v avhpwv tovtuv elvai, Andocid. de Myst. p. 20. [1. 1. ed. Reisk.J v. Valck. ad Hippol. 324. ad Herodot. p. 241. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. C. 247. ad Eurip. Med. 231. Aristoph. Lys. 30, 31. For hia, through, by means of: & Luke Ai0

tpvij KotXijv Ivplav, Polyb. E. L. $2. bc- yeoBai kv TrapaKaradi'iKr) v raXavra, Id. Exc. Peir. p. 131. Out of: eirivov kv Keporiiois Trorripiots, Xen. Anab. vi. p. 370. kv apyvpy */ xP va Tiveiv, Lucian, de Merc. cond. [485. e. ed. Salm.] v. Cup. Obs. ii, 8. et Burm. ad Phajdr. Fab. 25. From : rovd' vfias bia (ipa\kwv j3ovXo/jai bibc'i^ai, ov% ws ov /je/uadriKO-as Kal k v rols kv upxrj eiprifxh'ois, aXX' iVa, &c. Demostb. adv. Leochar. p. 1098. [I. 18. ed. R.] 'Ei> yevet is, related, of kin : Eurip. Ale. 903. Sopb. Qui. R. 1016. ol kv yevei, kinsmen, relations. 'Ev o'lvit), over wine, over the bottle: v. Valck. ad Callim. Fragm. p. 15. 262. 'Ev eavTy (or perbaps more properly kv eavrov) elvai, to be in one's senses: v. Abresch. ad iEsch. p. 173. seq. Dorv. ad Cbar. p. 409. (508. ed. Batav.) Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 950. kuittiv ovk kv avrov, Aristoph. Vesp. 642. With the genitive o"ikg> is understood. See Cli. v. § v. R. 9. and note c p. 80. In composition kv signifies, permanence or commorancy ; as in kfXfxeveiv Tciis airovbais, Xen. Ages, i, 11. tous bUais, Plat. Crit. c. 12. rols opKois, Lys. p. S70. to'is tottois, Demostb. p. l65. [1. 1. ed. R.] kyoiK€~iv kv xaip^, Xen. CEc. iv, 13. eyyeios. — 2. into ; as in k/mfiaiveiv els rijv daXaaaav, Lys. p. 11 6. kvTpifieiv, Xen. (Ec. x, 2. ky^keiv, kfxflaXXeiv, kfiirtTrreiv : kvrera/ikvos els to epyov, Xen. CEc xxi, 9« k/j.j3i(3d$eiv els rrjv bucatocrvvrjv riva, Id. ib. xiv, 4. — 3. suitableness , conformity ; correspondence or coincidence; as in evbiKos, ewofxos, efifxerpos, kfXfxy'ivia. — 4. obligation ; as in evopicos, Polyb. vi, 47. — 5. participation or possession ; as in efKppwv, e/xfxta- 60s, evre^vos, evoucos, efxneipos. — 6. It has the same signification as with its case uncompounded : e. g. evri/j.os, kvvirvtov, kvvoe'iv, ev- bo&s, kvaywvios, evbrj/xe'tv, kvobws. — J. It has a signification of abate- ment or diminution ; as in kvbibovai, v. Foes. CEcon. Hipp, evwfiov : cf. Casaub. ad Athen. Deipn. p. 60. eyKtppos, kfnropfvpos, eyicXwpos, e/uniKpos. — 8. It signifies similitude; as in evdijpos. On this signi- fication and that in No. 5, see Interpp. ad Eurip. Troad. 524. Abresch. ad iEsch. p. 314. et in corrigend. p. 659. — 9- It often indicates that something is done in a certain place: ywplov knirribes kvarparonebeveaQai'. v. Wessel. ad Herodot. p. 538. Abresch. Diluc. Thuc. p. 256. It is to be remarked besides, that verbs compounded with kv are sometimes joined with a genitive case ; as, kfifiarevetv narpibos, Soph. (Ed. R. 825. v. Brunck. The reason of this is that kv has the force of evbov. On kv in composition see Cattier. Gazophyl. p. 76. SECTION IV. — On the preposition km. Rule I. (I. II.) 'Enl is put before genitives signifying power, dignity, charge, office, employment ; as, ol eir d£t«o-ews and kfyvalas, persons in magistracies, or high stations ; krr\ tu>v avopprjrtov, a pri- vate secretary ; ol kirl t&v elaaywyiixwv kui k^ayiayiyanv, superin- Rule l — 5.] 'Etti. 235 tendents of imports and exports, or of customs ; eit\ riLv ItthttoXwi', a secretary ; ol enl twv tKerripibiv or 'iketikwi', les Maitres des Re- quetes ; and the like. Sometimes wv, or reray/zeros, is added; and in Acts Ap. viii, 27- %v precedes the preposition. II. (III.) It is used in speaking of equal distribution of numbers; as, eVt rpiwv, or reaaapm', TUTTtodat, three and three, or four and four ; i(f evbs, one by one ; [eirl Teaoapwv ra^afieyoi rets vavs,~\ Thuc. ii, 90. In the same sense Kara fxlav. [See § v. R. 8.] III. (IV.) In a tactical use, en-l tpaXayyos ayeiv, TrpoajoaXXfiv, &c. is (paXayyrjbbv, or eirl Keptos, or Kara Kepas, to advance or attack ivith both wings extended or opened ; Ibovres Kara ptiuv enl tceptus TrapuTrXe- ovras, with the wing extended or opened: Thuc. ii, £)0. c Bdflos, the depth, i. e. the middle body as it were of the phalanx/ is said eVt TCTTapwv or eirl otCTw or e7rt wXewvwv, &C. TraparaTreadai or iroieiaBai, to be formed with four, eight, or more, together in each rank [file]. Hence v7rep' avrwv biereXeaav ovres, in their own territories, within their own bounds: Zosim. i. speaking of the Atheniaus and Lacedaemonians ; vvktos yevofievrjs, ecf eavrwv eyevero ra arparoTreha, retired to their own respective quarters or camps: Id. iv. A city which is independent is said elvat or iceladai e' eavrfjs. 'E eavrov is said also of what one has peculiar or apart : elyov yap ical olrot e(f eavrwv fiuvnv 'Yinrofxa^ov, Herodot. Calliop. c. 37- v. Valck. ad Herodot. p. 634. V. (VI.) It is used with its case adverbially : err dbeias, securely, * 'As Uu el eKeye, p.iav KaraKoXovdomav e In Polybius the simple verb Kepav is, t»7 erepq- tovto yhp t£> eirl itepws KaAei: to open or extend the line of battle beyond Schol. p. 357. ed. Bekk. — J. S. the wing of the enemy : xvii, 20. — J. S. d The depth of a battalion is its extent / 'O XapiSv/xos, Sia^as els tV XsppSvn- from front to rear : it is determined, there- aov £, generally, summarily : Dion. Hal. ii. p. 124. 1. 6". en ordjxaTos, nominalely, by name: Julian, Misopog. non longe ab init. ttoXXukis npbs k/jie bielyei knt tj-^oXfjs, at leisure: iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 301. For among, or beyond, (pree,) v. Aristid. Panath. 1. i. p. l6S. [This sense is very questionable.] VI. (VII.) 'Etc' avafx(piv, Sti, &c. Id. X. p. 641. 1. 20. VII. (VIII.) But in km twv lepQv d/iouat, km is stir, upon: ret km twv iepwv (TvvofxoXoyrjOevTa to'is TrarpiKiois -trpos robs brjfiOrtKobs, Dion. Hal. xi. p. 728. I. 35. lepa Ovvavres, wfioaav km twv kfiirvpwv : Id. iii. p. 154. 1. 27- s opKia. re/movres, avroi re irpwrot aruvres em twv rofiiwv, ojfiocrav, &e. Dion. Hal. v. init. having immolated victims for the purpose, they solemnly swore, standing over them (or over the entrails) : v. Stanl. ad .ZEscli. Eum. 486. VIII. (IX.) 'Em often governs a genitive even when it signifies motion ; as, enl rfjs \wpr\s flabigeiv, frequently in Herodot. towards or through the country; em rov arparonebov KaTaflavn, into the camp: Dion. Hal. i. .p. 45. em rfjs yT]s, to the ground: Zosim. iv. em QpyKTjs exw.oet, to Thrace: Id. ib. cf. John vi, 21. But in this sense poets usually employ a dative ; as, em vavalv eXavveiv. With a genitive of nouns either proper or appellative, it signifies time: (v. Valck. ad Theoer. x. id. p. 115.) em Aape/ov rov 'Yv ifjLirvpwv, super focis : but Suidas evidently has in Sophocles, zi>8vs Se Set- interprets to. Zjxitvpa, to Kouofieva lepe?a, oas, i(i-nvpuv eyev6/xr)V Bw/JLo?) e7rl jxavreffiv e'irjs, Xen. Cyrop. i. p. 25. 1. 32. elpl be enl tu> fiovXop.evw, at the mercy of every one : Plat. Gorg. p. 508. 'I. 29. In this sense it is elegantly joined with noielv : eav c' enl rw bijfjKp noirjvwrri rrjv npoal- peaiv, but if they put the choice in the power of the people: Dion. Hal. iv. p. 216. 1. 22. niivra to. koivo. en ifxol nenoiyjKaai fxovw, Id. viii. p. 506. 1. 22. ov jujjv oye hypos ev, k(f> §5 re ftrjbev en napatavelv aiiTovs, Kai enl t£, &c. Dion. Hal. x. p. f545. 1. 15. aKovaare vvv, e' ols av nore biKaiois avTrjs tvxuhti; on whatsoever terms, &c lb. v. Andoc. 25. 1. noXXaKts 6 Aapelos elnev, ovk av edeXijaai \a/3etJ> eKarov Ba/3u\wras enl tu> /u?) Zwnvpov e-^eiv oXoKXrjpov : on the terms or condition of not having, &C. Plut. Apophth. Atoyevrjv neldet — a.(pievai to. ywpia enl toXcivtois nevrijKovra Kai haTov, for a hundred and fifty talents: Paus. in Cor. p. 100. navTodev tovs enl Xoyois boKi/MorctTOVs en\ avvTa^eaiv ovk evKaTai\iirirov d)v6(iaa , ev : Plut. in Demetr. reTv&cvfiivcas ovtws, & /3ov\erai Siairpd- p. 1630. 1. 6. 7. ed. H. St. — J. S. |ct<70ai, avWa^wfiev avTqi, /cat ravra ecp' m Upbs ravTa. KA.eW /cat iraXafidadio, rifuv Svto. ; and that too when his enier- Ka\ irav eir' £fj.ol TeKTaiviaQta : against prises are against ourselves, tend to our me: Aristoph. Ach. 660. iylb ex<*> 7ra pa own detriment: Demosth. c. Aristocr. cod iirl toTs orpcmctfTais oiiSif, Xen. p. C65. 1. 15. ed. Reisk. Seealso p.723. 2-10 'Eth. [Chap.'ix. § iv. eV civrjJ Ti ftepiov ^ovUivtoh'. Tiberius thirsting for his blood : from ori}v, to be eager for slaughter : Philo de Legat. ad Caium p. 774. 1. 32. eneipov be airaynpevoyros, nal raXavra enarov eir t KrjpuZai'TOS avTys eV avrbv opyijs irapaXveiv, Time, ii, 65. More seldom in the signification of rest ; as, KuQl$eadai en-t ti)v ea- riav, Time, \.° XIX. (XX.) With a reciprocal pronoun and iroielaQat it signifies to get into one's power ; as, ti]v ttuXlv e(f eavrbv iroiftoaadai. Some- times the verb governs the reciprocal pronoun, and eirl the accusative of what is gotten or attained ; as, iroirjo-apevos re avrbv eV ktyvo'iav , Herodian i. c. 9 XX. (XXI.) KXtVetv, ffrpecpeiv, kiriarpefyeiv, irepioiryv, eirl bvpv, is to turn to the right, because the spear was held in the right hand : e' })viav and eV aairiba, to the left, the left hand holding the reins and the shield : eiriorpeibas eirl bopv, /cat to. Kevrpa irpoo-fiaXtov rols 'tirnois, els irXayiovs efjfiaXXei: Dion. Halic. iii. p. 190. 1. 13. i\oav be Kirycreis, — ca0' 'lttttov fxev, nXiueis £(f ipiav, koX ttuXlv eirl bopv : Polyb. XXI. (XXII.) 'Eirl iroba avaya$,eoQai, and avaywpe'iv, is, to give ground, to retreat : a.XX' enl iroba ave-^aiovro, iraiovres cat iraibfie- vol'. Xen. Cyrop. vii. p. 178. eirl iroba ave^wprjaav fiaXXofxevoi, Id. Anab. v. p. 349- fxaXa ineSofievot, uveyjoprjoav eirl iroba'. Id. H. Gr. ii. p. 477. 'Eirl moreover signifies end or purpose : ijkio eV avra ravra, Plato Theag. p. 122/ To eirl is, as to what regards, as far as concerns : rovtr efi evrv- X o"ire, Eurip. Iph. A. 1557- v. Hec. 514. Ale. 666. (669.) Valck. ad Herodot. p. 342. 'E<£' era rerayjuerot, ranked side by side, without any others behind : Hesych. in 6yp.os. 1. 4. Or ip.o\ is tbe true reading in amount of cost or expense: rhv irpo?ica Aristoph. Av. 543. See Classicaljournal, 6, & (underst. t6kw~) &yovrss, Deraosth. SiKaffoieu 67rl rais olniaiffi ras Sitcas : Aris- de Fals. Leg. 372, 1. at a great sacrifice, toph. Vesp. 801. also to: iirl rovrcp to our great loss and detriment : see 303, ovTca irape(XKevaa-p.4vos rjei, &crre, &c. Xe- 1. 13, 20. 22. ed. Reisk. — J. S. noph. Mem.i, 3, 5. v! Ernest, ad Xen. ° KdQi£' iwl Kcinrrjv, to or at the oar: Mem. iii, 2, 3. Also the instrument ; or Aristoph. Ran. 197. i'£» eirl Kcinrvv, upon the means ; or the manner ; with: oarea the oar (by a wilful mistake of the order :) \evna. &obs SoXiy iirl t4x v V evO€riaas ib. 199. — J. S. «aT60ij/c6, Hesiod, Theog. 540. It is used p 'Eirl rl irdpeare Sevpo ; Aristoph. Lys. in specifying the rale of interest, or 1101. — J. S. Rule 18—21.] *Ewf. 241 It is used in denoting duration of time : ebyovv rr)t' yrjv em bvo f}/j€pas, for two days : Q Thuc. ii, c. 35. fiuetov yaXa mveru) em TeauapaKovra ff.fiepas, Hippocr. de Nat. Mul. p. 568. cf. Acts Ap. xiii, 31. xvii, 2. xviii, 20. xix, 10. Luke iv, 25. e(j> r/fiepav yap e/c rrjs avta iroXews e^pwvTo (o~lra> viz.) for each day as it came, for the present day only, and no more : Thuc. iv, 69. en-2 -^povov, for some time, for a while: Horn. II. (3, 299- Luke xviii, 4. ef' oaov, so long us. [In the passage of Thuc. i, 4. kXv,for a long time ; en oXlyov uvrtay^ov-es, for a little while : Herodian iii, 7- But inl iroXv signifies very much in Epict. and sometimes also vehemently, sharply ; and generally, summarily ; as, ws be curXws eiVeic, kcm pr} Kaff euaarov uXX 1 ws em tto\v : Isocr. Paneg. p. 421. Like km tto\v is km f*eya, vehemently ." Kareaeladi) to rei^os em fikya, Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 33. [perhaps, to a considerable extent.'] See also c. 33. km irXeov, further : em irXeov be ovk ata'iKoa, Plato Phsedr. p. 261. (enl nXeov, ob ampliorem fructum: Aristot. Poiit. viii, 5, 20. em jjiKphr, it). 31. Reizius.) irepl {.lev ovv rijs Aaicebaifwviwv TroXireias em Toaovrov elpt'jadoj, so far : Aristot. de Rep. ii, Q/ In composition km signifies — 1. hostility, against ; as in kmrpkyeiv y^iopav, Polyb. iii, 6Q. kmtpepetv rivl iroXejiov, Id. xiii, 18. kmrei-^i- S.eiv, Demosth. see Reiske's ind. kiroiicobo{ie~u>, Polyb. ii, 46. kmp- prjTos, of bad name or character ; q. d. spoken against. — 2. succession, subsequence; as in kniyovot, Polyb. v, 65. Imyiyvofxevm, descend- ants, posterity : Demosth. p. 689- [1. 16. ed. Reisk.] Plat.Phaedr. p. 245. 1. 5. ol kmyiyvojxevoi tovtui aofioral, who succeeded him: Herodo!. Eut. c. 49. rov kmyiyvofxevov depovs, the following summer : Thuc. iv. init. rfj emyiyvojxhrj h^pa, the following day: Id. iii, 75. ImirXeeiv, Poiyb. i, 50. (paXayiZ, eirciXXijXos, Id. ii, 69- tf. em- yewrjuaTiKov in Ciav. Cicer. Ern.~— 3. approach, accession, to; as in emarpefeadai els -^uipas, Xen. CEc. iv, 13. eirepyeo-Qai km tijv fiovXtjv, Polyb. Exc. Leg. 65. emfotT^v rtvl, Ml. V. H. iii, 18. — 4. addition or adjection, over and above ; as in kmbtbovat, Horn. II. t, 148. £m~ perpelv, Polyb. iii, 119. kmayyeiv, Xen. (Ec. xi, 13. eTrkrjjroe tpiXoi, Id. Ages, i, 36. em>l-apupTave).v, Demosth. p. 1215, 25. [not there, in Reiske's edition, but knelaixaprriTeov is in Demosth. in Androt. p. 5^5, 10. ed. Reisk.] kmovv/ula, emicptT))s, Polyb. iv, 3. 5. motion to a place, to, into ; as in kmareXXeiv irpos riva, iElian xiv, 1. kmaicrjvovv em Ttjv oiKiav, Polyb. iv, 18. enciyeiv, kmnefi- ireiv, embr}/jieh>. — -6. elevation or ascent, up, upon; as in emfiaivetv . em -dv 'imrov, JLschin. Dial, i, 4. v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 172. 443. « But in the following passage £n\ Svo r Add eVi tSkov, at interest : davettrd- -r)fj.4pas is, at two days' notice ; appointing fjavos lya apyipiov izapb. XatpeSrifiov toS the time to be after two days: exetevev avafpAvarlov wivreKaiSena /ivas eirlrSicov, zlo-ayy4\Aeiu fxe, kcu rovs irpvTaveis irpo- $>s erv% ev & v € '*' 2r)CT(^, eiroydoov : De^ ypdcpeiv avrcp t^v Kpicriv enl fivo rifiipas, roosth. adv. Polycl. 1212, 1. ed. Reisk, us adiKovvTi, &c. Demosth. adv. Euerg. at eight oboli of monthly interest for each et Mnesib. p. 1151. 1. 29. ed. Reisk. — mina: i. e. according to our way of reck» J. S. oning, at sixteen per cent.-~J. S. Viger. 2 H 242 Kara. [ClIAP. IX. § 5. e-n-nroXaieiu, Xen. CEc. xvi, 14. — 7. abode or commorancy ; as in eiriyetos, ein-^opios. — 8. the efficient cause ; as in i-mdavuTos, km^iijuos, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 57. kiri^api, Id. Hier. ix, 4. — 9- liable, subject, exposed; as in eni<]>6ovos, Xen. Symp. iii, 9. eirairios, enibtnos, Demosth. p. 1074, 1. [ed. Reisk.] eniKtvbvvos, Polyb. x, 13. — 10. aptitude, fitness, suitableness; as in enlyafjios, Demosth. 1009, 4. [1009, 14. eel. R.] enlicatpos, Id. 234, 14. [ed. R.] — 11. coercion, restraint; as in enk-xeiv. — 12. continuance or duration of lime ; as in e(pr)fxepios, continuing for one day only; ktyriiiepa, ephemeral ani- mals ; enireios, Polyb. vi, 43. Demosth. p. 649, 16. — 13. vicinity, juxtaposition ; as in e7rt6a\aW 2wKpares, ardphtTTos el, to. ye roiavra, as to such matters : Lucian, Dial. Mort. t. iv. p. 44. ro jxeaov rfjs rifxepas, in the middle of the day : Theophr. v. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 58. III. In philosophical writings chiefly, things which exist only in appearance, as the rainbow, are called ra tear e/jifadiv : those which have a real and substantial existence, ra KafJ viroa-raffiv. Ka7a is, as, according to, after : levai Kara tovs aXXovs, in the same way : Herodot. ix, 53. according to, in respect of, on account of, in signification of the cause: vojxiSiovTes rijv llpumav 'AOrjva/W, Kara to vnrjKoov, elvai : Thuc. iv, 99' k(it avro tovto ovk ayaaat YlwXov, in, in regard to: Plat. Gorg. p. 482. v. Matth. xix, 3. and Kvpk. Obs. sac. ad Y. ~c." on account of , in signification of the end, purpose, or object : atyiZflvrai be kotcl deav eni tovtovs ttoXXoi t(Lv Zeriov, Dion. Hal. viii. p. 482. 1. 27. 01 be £evoi koi 6 aXXos oyXos Kara dear riKev, Time, vi, 31. tuiv e/jiropwr KarJ' laropiav 1) y_peiav elarcKpiKvovjuevbjv : Aristid. Panath. fades be tcara ti ; Aristoph. Nub. 238. [Answ. fiovXofxevos /xadelv Xeyeiv.] Kara xparos (as avh uparos) [see § i. R. 3.] is, by force, violently, imperiously, with a high hand: ical ouoi iLiKeXwv kcitcc icparos ap^opevoi vwo HvpaKOvaiwv, Thuc. iii. See Plut. Apophth. p. 17<5. In the same sense Kara to KpaTepbv, powerfully, mightily : Acts xix, 20. IV. It signifies, towards, over against, facing ; as, KelaOai kcit cti'dToXas. Also, by, or every : Kara noXets Ka< Kara Kw/xas. Kaf avhpa. Kara Ke Aristoph. § xvi.— J. S. ' Eq. 660.— J. S. * Viz. opKovs iroie1cx8ai Kara toiv Qeaiv, w Add Kara, in respect of: Ka.6l£ei Sh p. 86. Bekker's edition, printed for Mr. rbv arparbv — iv r6ir(p kclto, toov 68&>v Priestley, in 1826. In the Schol. 2co- apiaTair^vK6ri— : Plut.inLucull.p.908. Kpdr-rjs yap iv t£ ij8 ra>v KpT)TiKu>v, 1. 29. ed. H. St.. — J. S. wrongly. We know from Athenasus, h. vi. x v H\9ev (els Seobs v K&vdapos) Kar l%- that Sosicrates wrote on Cretan affairs. — 8pav aerov, Aristoph. Pac. 133. Prax. J. S. fiaicapla. y" &p' y woAjs esnai To\om6v. ■ v Hii^aro rois 6eo7s Kara enaT6[ji.firis, Blep. Kara r i ; Prax. itoKkGov ovveica. Plut. in Mario p. 768. 1.12. ed. H. St. Aristoph. Eccl. 559. Kara tt)v Kviaffav rrj 5 s 'AypoTipa Kara, x i ^' i0>v vapyveffa zlaehfavde, Id. Pac. 1059. — J- S> 244 Kara. [CHAP. IX. § v. alone, to or by himself ; as, kqB' eavrbv irjv. ovbels yap eXoir &v m&' civtvv -KavT t-^eiv/ Aristot. Etb. ix. Hence to ku& avru in philoso- phical writings, that which is in one certain thing alone, and as alone: Aristot. airbs kuB' eavrbv eZiirXevae, alone: Plut. in Cic. p. SSO. I. 47. expressed by tear' Ibiav in Matth. xiv, 20. ohic eu-i rovTuv avro ko0' aiird (of itself, in itself,) naXbv obbev, Plat. Svtnp. p. 181. and in the same sense, ov yap fxovov iipus to kuB'' avras e\ouatv (7} re cnofpoai>vr) Kal >/ bitcaioavvr), viz.) Isocr. Nicocl. p. 63. Knfl' r)vvxiav is, at leisure, taking time: Time, i, 85. - V. Kara /j.iKpbv e-rrnrXelov is, more and more : Kara /uiKpbv Jjrrov, less and less. These expressions are equivalent to eiwrXelov e, in a single line, one ship following another: Thuc. ii, 84. 6 kuB' eh for eh eicna-ros, every one: Horn, xii, 5. els Ka6' els, one by one: John viii, £)• Sometimes in one word KaBels. Ka& els for Ka6' eva is numbered among solecisms by Lucian in Soloec. t. i. p. 577. ed. Amst. Sometimes ko0' eva and ku&' ev y Ka\ws, OTirj tear' ifiavrbv, kou fieO' owS' e%ou(ra: ev8elas $i6o~ovs tov vSaros e$ erepov Xtyo/Aai (rbv (iiaGbv viz.) Aris- rb ire\uyos : Thuc. ii, 102. p. 378. 1. 11. topb. Vesp. 786.— J. S. ed. Bekk.— J. S. 2 Tev/A.a (of the Achelous) « The French phrase pied d pied, by iffri p.4ya ical iroAv ical QoKepbv, a" re vrjaoi which Viger explains collato pede, appears irvKval, Kal aW-fjXais rrjs irpoo'X'io'ews rep to me to be rather equivalent to pedeten- fir) (TKe5dvvv(r0ai avvSefffioi yiyvovrai, ira- tim, cautiously, gradually, gingerly. — paWai- Kal ov Kara, crro7x ov nelp.evai 7 J.S. Rule 5 — 8.] Kara. 245 have a signification exactly opposite to that mentioned above, namely, together: Kad' eva binavTes yevofxevoi, Dion. Hal. i. p. 3J. 1. 21. llva /ui] Kad' eva navres yevopevoi, koivov e^eveyKrjre (car' avTuv iroXe/uov : Id. viii. p. 486. 1. 21. SXlyovs twv 6K ttjs Kojfirjs tpQaaavriov Kud' ev yeveaBai TrupaXafiwv, Id. i. p, 66. airo^pyjv olopevai T))v oheiav bvia/jtv, el Kad' ev al rpets (7rdXeis) yevoivro, fxiav aipfjaai ttoXlv ov fieyahriv: Id. ii. p. 101. 1. 26. VIII. Kara tvX0os is, in a body, aOpooi : trvve\86vTiav Kal -S>v ev reXei Kara tt\?j0os els to joovXevTTjpiov, Dion. Hal. vii. Kar' SXlyovs is the contrary, few in number, few together: en re rmv avTo/j6Xu>v to irXfjOos eKCMJTOTe, el tea) Kar SXlyovs, npovibv Tr)v bvvajiiv yvfyvev : He- rodian v. c. 4. § 8. few at a time : ol he (TTpariwTai to. [xev Trputra VKiayyovvro, KaT oXlyovs be ave^wpovv, Id. vi. c. 9- § 5. kut' oXlyovs yap ical ev iroXXols eavrovs biaaireipavres eXrjtrrevov, Zosim. iii. Kara ttooov is, in some measure, in some degree : KaraTcioTevaavTes rats Ibiais bvvapea, Kara ttouov ebQapaCJs el\ov : Polyb. ii. p. 92. Kara is used to signify proportion or comparison : buipa ov kotu fiij\a Kal aTe Tiva rj Kar avdpwirov aofiav oofyot elaiv, Plat. Apol. c. 5. yaXeirwrepov fioi boKu> aet- govs, ») Kar efiavTov, Xeyeiv Xoyovs : Demosth. de Vectig. p. IT' 5 - ['• 9- ed. Reisk.] pr) roivvv Kara t6v Kvfiepin'iTrjv Orjs airbv, put him not then on a level with the pilot: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 383. — simi- litude : bjxoXoyoirjv av eywye ov icara tovtovs elvai pr}Tu>p, Piat. Apol. c. 1. It serves to form a circumlocution instead of a genitive case: al Kara to awfia emQvpiai, for al tov o-wjuaros e-jnOvfiiai, Plato Phaed. c. 32. With a noun, (usually a proper name,) it notes, — 1. possession, or what belongs : 6 Eevov rpiaKovra, in the reign of the thirty tyrants : JEAmi, V. H. ii, 11. Kara be ruv Kara Kpv'iauv ypovov, but in the time of Croesus : Herod, i, 67. (But Kara ypovov is sometimes, in due time: >'/ be Kara yjiovov eretce Koprjv evfxop(pov, Plut. TrapaXX. 'E\\. nai Tw/z.) Ol Kad' rjuas avdpwnoi is not only the men of our time, but, of our condition: v. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 94. rovs Kad' rjuas tottovs, the regions in which we dwell: Phalar. p. 224. c In composition Kara signifies — 1. against: as in KarayeXyy rivos : KarayivwaKeiv twos davarov : iElian, V. H. iii, 47. Karaipevbouaprvpely — naratypove'iv — KaraviaraaQai — tivos : KararoXu^y rwv 7roXeuto)y : Po- lyb. iii, 103. — 2. descent; bringing, throwing, or keeping down, as in Karaflaivetv, Kanevai eWAtbov : iEsch. dial, iii, 20. Karao^^y, KadeXicveiy yavs : Polyb. i, 21. Karaaeieiv to. rei^rj, ./Elian, V. H. ill, l6. KarafiaWeiv rtya els airiGriav, Plat. Phsedr. c. 38. KarawaTelv, Xen. GEc. viii, 5. Ages, i, 15. — 3. return or restitution ; as in ran- evai, Lys. p. 212. [1. 7. ed. Reisk.] tcadobos kwipnviav, Hippocr. v. Foes. CEcon. KarepyeaBai oinabe, Lys. p. 497. [1. 12. ed. R.] Kara- nXe'iy, Demosth. p. 886. [1. 4. ed. R.] KaraTropeveaBai, Polyb. iv, \J. d Karayeiy els rf)v oUelav, Id. ib. Karaywyrf errl ri]v fiacikeiav, Id. E. L. 128. Karabexeadai, to receive back: JEschin. Or. p. 15. — 4. fulness, abundance ; as in KaTeibwXos tzoXis, Acts Ap. xvii, l6. rarci- tyofios, Polyb. i, 39. iii, 108." Kadvbpos, Id. v, 24. Karauovos, Id. xvii, 12. Karaope~ty to. inap^oy-a, iEschin. Orat. p. 45. icara- bwpoboKe~iv, Lys. p. 808. [1. 9. ed. R.] KaraXeiTOvpye'iv, Isaeus p. 240. Kadnnrorpu 498. fierafxeXiTe^dai tivi, Horn. h. in ApolJ. 197- fieraTToie'Mrdai Teyvr}s, Plato Politic, c. 29. — 5. interval, inter- position, intervenue, intervention ; as in fiera-nvpyiov, Lys. fragm. p. 16. j-ierafxa.S.iov, II. e, 19. fieTabpofiabr]v, lb. 80. fieTahopmos, Od. b, 194. — 6. in ; as in fieTaxetpigeodai, Xen. CEc. xiv, 2. fxeToiKos, Demosth. p. 50. [1. 21. ed. R.] fxeTabrifitos, Od. 6, 293. — 7> privation, loss ; as in d^e fjterafia.vda.veip rijv kXevdepiav, ^Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 544. [I. 15. ed. R.] On fiera in composition see Cattier. Gazoph. p. 81/ X. Hvp governs a dative case only, and commonly signifies the same as fxera with a genitive. So, avv rots "EXXrjai fiaXXop rj avv t fiapfiapa) ejpai, in Xen. H. Gr. iii. and arapres fxer aXXi)Xwp in Thuc. both in the same signification of standing by or siding with. XI. So fiera vouuv in Thuc. ii, 39> p. 124. and avv rols vojjlois (rw vofjtf) in Xen. Cyrop. i. c. 15. conformably to the laws, in obedience to the laws, legally. 1i>p with many other words also has / ©vaavres teal iriovres ovk %ti p.ed' rjjxi- Horn. II. i\, 228. — J. S. pa.v av€P. as J" € ' T «> % apiffTrjes vp.?v, for p-ereariv, Aristoph. Eccl. 173. p.ereaat, /cat fter' 'AxiAA.55« p-qlftvopa. : —J. S. 248 Ivy. [Chap. ix. an adverbial sense: 7ro\\a pev elite, to. he fJKovoev ov ovv tetany, indecorously, unbecomingly: Pans, in Ach. p. 420. ovv ra\ei, quickly: Soph. El. 1498. ai>v avr&7 (rw Ileiz.) yevvaiy, ovv avrtji rip Ileiz.) abUa), through mere generosity, — injustice: Xen. Ages. iv, 5. So npos blurts, and binrf alone, Soph. El. 1211. In the same manner pera with a genitive has an adverbial sense : pera tov biKalov for bucalws, Demosth. in fin. Philipp. epist. per abeias elfxl, insecurity: v. Demosth. pro Megalop. p. 83. 1. 26. pe-a xaipov, opportunely, according to occasion : Thuc. vi, 85. XII. 2vj/ Beuj, rather than pera Qeov, (although Plato has pera 6ewv, Ep. viii. p. 355. fin.) is used in various ways : vyiaivovra oe its €TrtT07roXv ovv 6eo7s upwpev, by the blessing or favor of the gods: Xen. CEc. p. 851. 1. 15. £,vv Oeols ewiwpev enl tovs ubiKovvras, with the aid or favor of the gods : Thuc. 1. XIII. Sometimes a verb is added to the phrase : 7a pev oiv els to irapbv, ovv dew e'nre'tv, e\ei KaXws : God be thanked : Plato to Dio. oinat yap, oipai, ovv 6ew b' elpi) oerat, Tavrns anaXXafyiv oe rrjs ocpdaXfxlas : with the help of God: [tinder God, with due submission and reverence to Him; God willing:] Aristoph. Plut. 114. 2i)v 'Abpaoreia elnelv is of nearly the same import. But ovv 6eu>, when not parenthetically used, is sometimes, by divine impulse or instinct : ws ol e'lrj ovv 0e« elprjpevov, to prjbeva tQv itwvTtov oXfiiov ehai : Herodot. i, 86. 1,vv is very frequently suppressed : TtXevoavTes ehQvs -nevTe (cat e'iKoot ravol, Thuc. i, 26. tovs ye pi)v kcikovs civto'is tckvoiol kciI hopois e£6XXvpev, Eurip. Hipp. 1340. seq. KaTeTofcvoe ru Xoi/ity tovs 'A)(atovs avTol.s f/ptovots teat Kvolv, Lucian, de Sacrif. p. 286. v. Her- mann, ad Horn. h. Apoll. vs. 148. Always after apa. v. Hor. Serin, i, 10. 86. Tacit. Ann. iii, 6l. Iu composition ovv signifies — 1. communion, conjunction, par- ticipation, association ; as in ovpirooiov, ovyyerrjs, ov/jpoiryv Ttvl eh — : Xen. Symp. iv, 23. Demosth. p. 1001. [I. 27- ed. R.] ov/j.- peTabibovai rijs eTufiovXrjs, Polyb. V, 36. ovppioelv to'is (ftlXois tovs €%dpovs, Id. i, 14. ovvapfw. oy^ebov ti olpat epe vrXeioj y^pi'jpaTa elpyaodai rj iiXXovs ovvhvo ovo-ivas fiovXei twv oo({>iotwv, than any other two put together: Plat. Hipp. maj. p. 2S2. Demosth. p. 564. [1. 22. ed. R.] So ovvTpets, and ivveeUooi Horn. Od. £j, 98. ovpTtavTes, owdveiv, Polyb. iv, 49. — 2. assemblage, union, collection, junction, moderate contraction or compression ; as in ovppeeiv, ovy- KaXelv, ovvvetye'iv, ovyiceipaXaiovodat, Polyb. i, 66. ovieXelv, Xen. Mem. iii, 8, Q. ovyyoatysw, ovyKXeieir, ovoropos, ovpTrte£eiv, ovvo- Tjpav (unseasonably). Except : nap' oKtyovs navres arypidqcrav. Besides: e'i rts aXXrj napd ravras earl fiaOij/jaros Ibea. ovk iari napa ravr aXXa, Aristopb. Nub. 698.'" ovbe /uf/v noie'iv rt, ovbe tl naa^eiv aXXn, nap a civ etce'iva i) notrj 7) nacr^y '. Plat. Phaed. c. 42. V. llapa bvva/.av may signify either above or below one's strength; [because naph denotes difference or incongruence.] Uaph signifies elegantly, through, or by means of; (v. Valck. ad 1 llapa. with a genitive is sometimes by, the opinion of Hermann, nothing determi- noting the agent; alffxpbv rb avXws Trparreu- : Dinarcll. c. Demosth. But 7rapd ri; is sometimes, to what end or purpose? irap" o, on which account, wherefore : irap 1 o Ka'i £opuh'rai ra aw/Aura, Philo Jud. de Circumc. p. 6'25. Olbev irapa tovto is an extenuating phrase, expressive of contempt for a thing a3 of no importance: Jo. Chrys. Iiom. 12. in ep. ad Rom. Casaub. ad Pers. v, 67, translates it, quid turn postea? and what then ? and what of that ? VI. It signifies dependence or influence; in the^ower of, or deter- mined by : iravv yap irapa tovto {ov% lpq.s ;) yeyove ra twv 'EXXi'jrwv irpdyfxara, el tovti to pfjfia, aXXa /n) tovti bieXe)(Br}v eyw, 1) bevpi Trjv \eipa, dXXh prj bevpi napijreyKn : for upon this forsooth entirely de- pended the affairs of the Greeks, whether I made use of this or the other expression, &c. Demosth. pro Cor." In this sense, ovrwal be Kat to irap' i)fxas rw KaB' ei[j,api,i£vr)v (evavTiwrarov eorii',) what de- pends upon our own will, what is in our own power: Diogenian. ap. Euseb. Praep. vi. So, 7rap' rjfxas be, baa eic rov cirovbd$.eiv fj/das, zal evepyelv, knl reXos ep%erui : are in our own power: ib. [underst. eort after be.] VII. Ilapd ttoXv is, far, by much : irepieyevovTO irapa iro\i> twv 2a/3/- vojv, Dion. Hal. iii. p. 182. 1. 12. vv yap w\ir\v eyioye oUrta irap oXiyov [so little different] iaeaOat (eKarepwv twv ipyfwv dpiOfxov,) a.X\a irapa iroXv : but different by a great excess : Plato Apol. [p. 14. I. 40. ed. Bas. I.] VIII. Sometimes with a genitive added, far below; as, irapa iroXv rfjs d£/as, irapa ttoXv ttjs eXiribos. irapa iroXv twv irepvai Karwpdw/xi- vwv tfXdev, he came far short of his last years achievements ; irapa iroXv eXeadai rjXdev, he was very far short of taking the city. See Duk. ad Thuc. viii, 76. IX. To 7rapd iroXv are opposed irapa fiitcpov, irap 1 oXiyov, irapa fipa-%11. irapa fiiKpov fjXdov vUrjs, they were very near gaining the victory: Eutrop. Metaphr. vi. 7rap' oXiyov 7]Kev r; iroXis dXwvai, Arr. " 'Hv.eh oe irapa rb rbv Meiov\{b~r]v tion, which I think the right one, (see t. ix. Tavra avyxooprjffai, fjavx'tav elxo^ev '• De- p. 296. of Reiske's Greek Orators) agrees mosth. adv. Leoch. p. 1087. 1. 2. ed. R. with Viger's. ' Reiske's would make the irapa rbv ttjs avrov ixrjTpbs 'SpKOv, Ka\ tt\v passage referable to Rule 5. Hooge- tov Sovros eKiivy rbv optcov evTjOetau, irarp'os veen's, which gives irapa, its common sig- TnrvxT]Ktis : Id. in Bosot. de nom. 1002, nification of motion, is quite inadmissible, 1. iroWh fief ovv Xacas early curia tou and must have arisen from his not having rav&' oviws ex^v, na\ ov irap" ev, oboe considered the whole passage. The words Svo, els tovto Tct irpd.yij.aTa a(p?KTai : Id. are in answer to some observations which Philipp. iii, 110, 15. — J. S. iEschines, in his oration against Ctesi- P. 305. 1. 3. ed. Reisk. This is one phon, had made on the expressions and of the passages which I have thought it action of Demosthenes ; as, e. g. ov fiefi- necessary to give more at length than as vqade avrov -ret fiiapa teal airlOava p-rju-ara ; they appear in Viger, because it has been 554, 9. ed. R. see 461, 10. and Tavra Se variously interpreted, and the few words rivos* eo-riv , Si kIvoSos, pfaara % Qavv-ara ; cited by Viger cannot enable any one to 557, 1. — J. S. judge of the meaning. Taylor's interprets- Rule 6 — 15.] Tlapa. 251 de Exp. Al. i, 23. irapa fipax" ™5 ravras eXelv '\9ovres, Zosim. i. So 7rap' eXa-^iGTOv eXdelv, to be within a very little; and nap 1 ovhev : irap' ovhev fade irapaiptdrjvai, he was within a hair's breadth of destruction : Pint, in Cic. p. 880. 1. 33. of. p. 727. and napa Gxehov. to. /uev ijbr) neirovdoTes, to. he irapa Gyehbv eXdovres 7ra0elv, having nar- rowly escaped suffering : Dion. Hal. vii. p. 451. 1. 30. In this sense els also is used, when the verb signifies motion : see § ii. R. 15. . X. Hap' oXiyov el\e tijv hinr}v, within a little; very nearly : Trap' oXlyas \pi]<[)ovs ijTifxujdr], he was within a feiv suffrages of being de- graded; a few more suffrages would have rendered him ignominious : Demosth. 7rap' oXiyov airefvyes oXedpov, you but just escaped destruc- tion ; you very narrowly escaped destruction : Eurip. Iph. T. 871. V. Thuc. vii, 71. ae ' yap Trap' oXiyov Tj hiefevyov rj air&X- Xwto, [for their escapes were always within a hairs breadth of de- struction, and their destruction was always within a hair's breadth of escape. So I understand it. p. 109. i. 1(5. ed. Bekk.] XI. With ayeiv, f]ye~iardai, Tldeadai, iroie'iadai, irapa fxiicpbv, oXiyov, fipuxv, yavXov, signify, to make little account of, and irapa iroXv the contrary : irapa fipaxy ti)i> eavrov aatyaXeiar, irpbs to fxrjhiva e| avrwv (ypafUfianav) GVKO^avTtjQrjvai defxevos '. Xiphil. Domit/ fjv ov irapa (pavXov, aXX' avrl iravris eirotelTo ireioQrjvai, Synes. ad Theophil. So Trap' ovhev : el fiovos eyto emvhvvevov, irap' ovhev av to irpayfia eiroiriGa- firjv, I should have thought nothing of it : Xiphil. in M. Antonin. Philos.? . XII. ITapa togovtov, without a case, is— 1. by so much; so great- ly : irapa togovtov ijTTtjdels ave^wprjae. — 2. by so little, by the want of SO little: irapa togovtov Manplvos ovic e^etyvye tovs hiwKovTas, within SO little was Macrinus of escaping his pursuers : Herodian. v. c. 4. § 23. ra 'IXXvpiKa he eOvrj, crreva ovtu, (cat ov iroXXijv e^oira 77/f viro 'Pwfxalois yfjv, irapa togovtov 6/j.opovs tea) yeirovas iroiel Veppavovs 'IraXiwrais : separate the Germans from the Italians by so small a barrier as their own narrow intervening territory : Herodian. vi. c. 7. § 9. XIII. With a genitive : p) irapa togovtov eXQufxev tTjs Igot^tos Betas, let us not be so far distant from, &c. let us not come only within so great a distance of it : Gregor. and in an opposite sense : irapa togovtov fj MiTvX{]vri fade Kivhvvov, so near danger: Thuc. iii. c. 49- irapa togovtov fxkv at ILvpaKovoai fadov Kivhvvov, into SO great danger : Id. vii, 2. XIV. With 7rap' ogov following : irapa togovtov ov KareXijcpOrj, irap' ogov ol hiwKovTes Trjs evdeias el^Tpair^Gav, he escaped being taken, only by the deviation of his pursuers : and in the same sense even without a negative, and with ko\ following : irapa togovtov ko\ Gv\xira-ov\xevoi y irap ogov \paieiv aiiTwv fiheXvGGo/jieQa : escaping being even trodden under foot, only through our abhorrence of touching them : Greg. irepl 6v Tivnofiiystt', in comparison of, &c. Plato Apol. c. lG. (TKexpM/ueOu yap b>) irapa tov A.VKovpyov tov Mi\ria§*/i/ e£eTu£ovres, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 272/ cf. Rom. i, 25. Kpario-revovres irapa ret &X\a a, Xen. Mem. i, 4. 14. ' iraytcaXriv Xeyeis irapa avXr]v iraibtuv, in comparison with which others are contemptible : Plat. Pliaedr. p. 276". 1. 41. With the comparative degree: v. Valck. Ep. ad Roev. p. 51. ad Adoniaz. p. 109. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 165. Valck. Diatrib. p. 119* airbs bi) nap' eavTOv beivorepos tcatf //fxepav yiverai, compared ivith himself; irapa rows tcaipovs iroXXa^ios eKarrra dewpeiv %pri cat eE,era£eiv ruiv erv/jiflavrojv, with reference to, &C. The difl'erence between irpos, when used in comparisons, (see below, § viii. R. 13.) and Trapa, is that the latter sometimes notes tran- scendence or excellence beyond that which is signified by its case : riyovfiai be nai irpos ajjitpoTepovs, Kal nap afjufjorepovs av eivat Qe/ua- runXea tov re MikTiabi\v Kal tov Kl/jwva, not merely equal, but su- perior : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 321. XVI. Ilapa signifies recurrence or repetition after regular and equal intervals of time ; as, napa rpe'is f)fj.epas or rpirrfv rjfjepav, every third day ; and elliptically, napa fxiav, every other day ; irapa rpirrtr, every third day ; and without a numeral, nap ij/xepav, every other day ; 6 irap' fipepav Trvperbs, the tertian ague ; nap' ij/jeprjv irvpeTaivetv, to have a tertian ague: Arctaeus de morb. diut. i, 2. irapa f.ir\\>a, every other month; irap' kviavrbv, every other year;* and in the same sense iffiepav izap rjfxepav, fjfjva irapa ftr/va, eviavrbv irap' eviav- rbv. Also alternation of persons or things ; as, yepovTes Kal veaviat irap' eva avfj.iropev6fi.evoi, alternately ; eKarepy irX^yrjv irapa irXi)yqv ev-eivo/ievos, first on one, then on the other ; alternately. Also exception; as, ■nap' eva, except one; drjplov el irapa ypaju/xa, with the exception of a letter: Ammian. Epigr. 9. MapKos, when // has been taken away, becomes apicos, which is here [in this dull epigram] taken to be the same as upuros : see Valck. ad Herodot. p. 70S." In composition irapa signifies — 1. assumption, accession, produc- tion ; as in irapaXafifiavetv, irapaKOfxicieiv, irapaicaXelv, irapepyeoQai eVi to. Koiva, Ml. V. H. ii, 1. irapayeiv eh to biKaorfipiov, Demosth. p. 805. [1. 14. ed. R.] — 2. passage, transgression or violation, beyond, against; as in irapobos, Lys. p. 9^- [h 12. ed. R.] irapaj3aiveiv : irapaoirovbeiv '. irapainjb^v tovs vofxovs, iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 582. [1. 7> r El Keyoi irap' avr^v BevoKXe-ns 5 animals. — J. S. Kapulvov, in rivalry with her, so that a * The following passage affords a re- cumparison might be made of his eloquence markable illustration of this sense of irapa : with hers: Aristoph. Thesm. 440. — J. S. outco Se taxvaev eV to?s 'Axp.p 8i& r<2 vd/xari Kal rrj tyvxfj KparHTTevovres. iravrbs (constantly) apxetv : Plut.inArat. Instead of construing, with Hermann, p. 1898. 1. 3. ed. H. St. — J. S. Kpar. irapa t. a. f&ia, I understand abrwv u Add irap' 4/j.I for eveKa fiov : av Se y" after KparKXTevovns, and translate irapb. aurov [nivwv o¥p.u>£e irao' e/j.'. for all I care* to &\Ka fwa, compared with the other Aristoph. Av, 846.— J. S. § vii. RULE 1—3.] Uepc. '253 ed. R.] Trapairpeafieveiv, Demosth. p. 401. [1. 4. ed. R.] — 3. care' lessness, negligence, faultiness or imperfection, cursorily, amiss ; as in irapopav, irapadewpelv : Deinostl). p. 1414. [1. 22. ed. K.] irapa- iroXwXev, Demosth. p. 543. [1. 28. ed. R.] irapaKoveiv, Polyb. ii, 8. v. Tyrwh. ad Aristot. Poet. p. 129. — 4. propinquity, proximity ; as in Trupcnrefxireiv, TrapciKoXovQe'iv , irapaKaQ7]aQai, TrapinrXelv, TrapaoTa- ttjs : Polyb. xvii, 25. — 5. presence; with, at ; as in irapaTvy^aveiv : Xen. Apol. 11. TrapaKaraTiQedOai, Id. Symp. viii, 36". irapelvat. — 6. (7.) addition, besides ; as in irapeiatyipeiv vdfiov, Demosth. p. 484. [1. 1. ed. R.] — 7. (8.) departure, deflexion ; as in Trapax^p^f obuiv, Xen. Hier. vii, 2. 7rape\?j\v0ws yjiovos, Id. Apol. 26. irapieuai, /Eschin. Dial, ii, 2. irapayeiv, Demosth. p. 487. 497. [I. 9. and 6. ed. R.] — 8. (9.) tract of time; as in Trapu^eifiuieiv. — 9- (10.) It intends or augments; as in Trapabibovai, wapadepf-iaiveodcu: iEschin. de Fals. Leg. p. 322. [1. 3. ed. R.] — 10. (11.) similitude; as in ■KapaTr\t]ai(j)s, Xen. CEc. iii, 5. Trapo/jioios, Demosth. p. 12. [1. 8. ed. R.] v. Lennep. ad Phalar. p. 312. seq. — 11. (12.) secrecy, privacy, insinuation; as in TrapabrjXovv, Demosth. de Fa!s. Leg. p. 348. [I. 7- ed. R.] ircpabivai, Id. pro Cor. p. 252. [1. 3. ed. R.] itapanipeiv, Id. ib. p. 281. [1. l6. ed. R.] v. Cattier. Gazoph. p. 83. SECTION VII. — On the prepositions Trepl and vp6. Rule I. Ilepl with a genitive signifies, about, on account of, for the sake of ; as, Trepl Trarpibos fxayeadai. ovbev Trpoor) uvrbv Ti/Aiopijaaadcn, Id. adv. Alcib. p. 519- ['• 2. ed. R.] v. John x, 33. enrep yiip abiiceiv \pu, rvpavribos Trepi kciXXmttov ttbiKelv : Eurip. Phten. -it eXevdepa (Tuj/uara — irepi ihv bajWa^av roiis T^vaKvXavujv at^aXwrovs, Dion. Halic. x. p. 651. II. With respect to, as to ; as, Trepl fiev yap rrjs fxaprvpias, ort ■fyevbrj HefiapTvprjiccHJii', avroi fioi hoKoxxnv epyw e^eXey^eiv avrijv '. v. Acts, xxviii, 22. and after troielv ; as, tovs efiireipovs r/owri/o-ef, 6, rt ypf] Ttoie'iv Trepl tVjs ey^eiprjaenjs. jxribev e^w noielv Trepl ravbpos, I know not what to do with the man ; bebiios fxtjrt teal Trepl av-ov vewepiaeiev, Herodian. i, 13, 13. with regard to himself. III. ITept ttoXXov Troie'iadai, or rideaOat, or yyeladai, is to make great account of, or to reckon of great importance : Trepl TrXeiovos, of more; Trepl TvXeiarov, of most ; Trepl iravrbs, all in all; Trepl fiiKpov, of little consequence ; Trepl eXarrovos, of less; Trepl kXayiarov, of least; Trepl ovbevos, of none at all. v Sometimes elvai is the verb joined with Trepl ttoXXov,&c. as, Trepl iroXXov eanv aipelodat to ^lapiov, it is of great importance that, &c. when a substautive is sometimes expressed " 'h-noKTivvvvcu^lv yhpavQpuirovs, Trepl sias in Eratoslh. p. 387. 1. 3. ed. Reisk. oiiSevbs 7)yovvT/.taious ty*.A>'//unra, Dion. Ilvilic. viii. p. 488. IV. (V.) It signifies, above, over: Xu-^ayous re erepovs, Kal irept avui-rwv up-^ovra tuv ^LikIvviov inrubetfcni'res : Dion. Halic. vi. p. 375. 1. 3d. ol be 'ApitJTOKpaTiKol Trepl ttui'tos OeXovres {tvishing above every thing-, above all things,) fii) Kivelodai ek tov iruTpiov Koafiov ti)v ttoXi- reiav, Id. vi. p. 384. 1. 35. V. (VII.) With a dative case Trepl signifies around: trepl ft^jxols X<>peveiv, Herod ian. v. c. 3. § l6. ti/s tuiv bopvepopwv Trepl avrrj typov- pas, Xiphil. in Macrin. About, On : Trepl rrj %etpl ypvaovv batcrvXtoi' (f>epeii>, Plato Reip. ii. p. 382. 1. 40. as el^ov Trepl awfiaaw eadfiras, Herodian, viii. c. bit. § 13. For, concerning, about, on account of : Trepl rrj noXet bebievai, tyo- fieHadai : TllUC. Tourtav c)>) eve/co. Qappeiv yjptj Trepl Tjj avrov \pw)(rj avbpa, Plato Piiaed. c. 6'3. Trepl TrrS^yw epibaivofuer, Horn. Od. a, 402. v. Od. /3, 245. p, 471. Tytarus ap. Lvcurg. p. 212. [1. 10.] ed. Reisk. 1 " Through, because of, out of: wepl o/3w, iEsch}'!. Choeph. 33. So afi(pl Tnpfiei, Id. 543. and aul, to which it is sometimes joined ; as, ctju0f 7rept xpjjvnv, Horn. 11. /3, 305. oydai V a/M{>l Trepl ^e-yaX.' "taj^ov, II. v, []i> QtXo- aotpiay biarpl/joi'Tes, Id. ad Nicocl. p. 48. ol irepl ttjv avXi)i', the cour- tiers : Julian, p. 271. Also state or condition ; vvv be lujKparrjs fiev eon irepl arrdevetav ryu rfjs crrpayyovpias, Plato to Laodamas. It serves to form a periphrasis instead of a genitive case ; as, at rjboval at irepl to a&fxu, for al rod ad)/j.aros, Plato Phaed. c. 63. v. et c. 9. Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 365. [1. 6. ed. R.] p. 1414. [I. 15. ed. R.]* In composition wept signifies — 1. circuit; roundabout; as in ne- ptpXeirew, irepieXavvetv, irepibtrelaQai : Xen. Symp. vii, 3. irept- arparonebeveiv iroXtv, Polyb. i, 2S. — 2. upon every side ; from every side; as in ireptyXt cr%pa, Hippocr. v. Fobs. (Ec. Hipp. ■xepitcuirTeiv, ■xepieXelv. — 3. It intends or augments in a good sense, irspifiXeir- ros, irepiTevrjs, irepfyapi)s, ireptovala : Xen. CEc. i, 4. irepKpnvys, Lys. p. 719. [I. 13. ed. R.] ireptira6i]s, Polyb. i, 55. In a bad sense : irepifiorjTos avarao-ts Kal Katcla, Demosth. pro Cor. p. 324. [1. 28. ed. R.] irepiepyos, Id. Phil. iv. p. 143. [1. 17- ed. R.]— 4. negligence; contempt; as in irepiibelv, Xen. Symp. iv, 23. De- mosth. pro Cor. p. 246. [1. 7. ed. R.] ireptopqv, Id. ib. [I. 13.] ire- pt(ppope'iv, Aristoph. Nub. 225. -ireptoitTeaQat, Id. ib. 124. — 5. trans- ference, removal ; as in nepta-irgp iroXeptop enel, Polyb. i, 26. ireptTpe- 7reiv eh Ttva tijv al-iav, Lys. p. 210. [I. 2. ed. R.] — 6. mastery, con- quest ; as in irepiyiyveaOat tivos, irepieliat. VIII. (X.) npo, which governs a genitive only, most usually signi- fies, before ; and that with regard either to place 4 y as npo QvpQv : -npo noXXov 7>7s TToXews ovti, being yet a great way from the city: Dion. Hal. ix. p. 593. 1. 20. or persons ; as, irpo tov fiatriXews. irpb iraarjs TTjs Trapara£ews, before all the army in array : or time ; as, *pb iroX- Xwp eru>p, many years before ; irpb Spas ctpapiraCeodat, prematurely ; s irpb yuias KaXav bwp MapWov, (or rrj irpb puas ls.aXavbu>v ij/xepa,) the day before the Calends of March, pridie Kalendas Martii ; rrj irpb beta KaXavbtiit ijpepa, the tenth day before the Calends. In this sense irporptTa is, three days before: Trporptra oicrivyv irotrio-avTes, Thuc. ii, 34. IX. (XI.) It signifies, rather than, before, in preference to : ^bev vnnXoyiCeoQat [xi)re 6a.va.-ov /JLi'ire aXXo ri p.r]bev irpb tov alaypov, Plat. Apol. Socr. 11. iravTas tovs Kivbvvovs vfiarao-dat OeXovcn, irpb tov Ttjv * Add irepl ir6Sa, fitting, applicable: yrjs, to pursue him from place to place: irepl irdSa Sri aoi Kal ^vdyyeXos ovros, Aristoph. Achani. 235. y?iv irpb yrjs Lucian, Adv. Indoct. p. 546. B. ed. e\avvofj.ai, iEsch. Prom. 703. See Dr. Salmur. — J. S. Blomfield's Glossary. — J. S. y Upb tov, which is commonly used of z Avp-n 5' 4k irorauov ^v%ph trviei rjZBi time, (see Aristoph. Eccles. 221. and foil.) irpb, Horn. Od. e, 469. Add irpb. (abso- appears in the following passage to signi- lute,) prematurely : irpi ye areva^eis, Kal fy anteriority of place: SvvriBein, Sicnre- yj>v)v, kvoTtLVTO. tov Kivbvrov airwauadai : and so with ri/Aiicrdni, yyeladai, enaivelv, &C. /Ai/re iralbas irept irXeiovos iroiov, /i»/re T() Crjv, fili~e a.XXo fit]bev, irpb tov ctKalov : Plato Crit. C. ]6. el fii) biKatbr e pov y/urjv Kal KaXXtov eivat irpb tov tyevyeiv re ical airobi- bpacTKeir, Plat. Phaed. c. 47. For, for the sake of, in defence of : nob tovtov reQravai av 7roXXa.Kts eXotro, Plato Symp. c. 6. fia^eadat irpo re iraibwv ku\ irpb yvvaiKwv, Horn. 11. 8, 57- In composition irpb signifies — 1. anteriority as to place, before; as in TrporeixiaiJia, Polyb. iv, 6"l. irpoirvXaiov, Demosth. p. 174. [1. 23. ed. R.] irpoayetv, Matth. ii, Q. "^po ™y bcpOaXfiwv irpoipalveTat, jEschin. de Pais. Leg. p. 313. [1. 14. ed. R.] — 2. advance, protru- sion ; fortcard ; as in irpofiatveiv : ovto) iroppcj irpoeXrjXvdaai (pvXctKrjs, Xen. Hier. iv. 4. ti)v aifxaoiav ir poay ay cvtcs, orevwrepav tijv bbbv ireiroiifKaaiv, Demosth. adv. Callicl. p. 1 279. [1. 13. ed. R.] irporel- vetv tcis x e ~ l P as > Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 421. [1. 18. ed. R.] npo- vevetr, Polyb. i, 21. — 3. defence, protection; as in irpbfiaxos, Xen. Hier. xi, 12. irpofiaXXeaOai, Reiske's hid. to Demosth. irpoTarreiv eavrbv, Andocid. p. 54. [1. 3. ed. R.] — 4. publication, publicity ; as in irpoetire'iv tivi iroXeuov, irpo'ievat, irpoypacpeiv, irpoKTjpvTTeiv. — 5. presidency, lead, administration, superintendence ; as in irpoioraadai twv 'EXXjpcjv, Demosth. p. 143. [I. 15. ed. R.] — 6. before, in signi- fication of time ; as in eavT>)v irpoavelXe tov avbpbs, Pint, de Garrul. p. 508. irpoayopevetv to /jiiXXov, Xen. Symp. iv, 5. irpoanoXXv^ai, Id. Apol. 27. irpoiriveiv, 3L\. V. H. iii, 15. irpoairodviiaKeir, Polyb. iii, 12. — 7. preference; as in irpoaipe'ioQai, irpoTt/j^v ri tivos. v. Cattier. Gazoph. p. 88. Upb is often redundant in compound words; v. Fisch. praef. ad Well. p. xiii. as in Tcpobtbaaiceiv : v. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Nub. 9S7. But often where it appears redundant, it has some force ; hin,fort, her ; as, rrpo'iairreiv, Ivinschicken. SECTION VIII.— On the preposition ir P 6s. Rule I. Pipes with a genitive very often signifies, agency, by; as, irpbs aTrcivTuv OepairevecrBai : irpbs avrtbiKOv w/doXvyrjrai. II. In favour of, for : KaXXias boKel /moi fiaXa irpbs Ylpw-ayopov elvai, Plat, in Protag. irpbs rfjs j3ovXrjs kari, to iroXXovs elvai tov bi'j/jov irpoararas : Dion. Hal. x. p. 657- I. 4. s os ecpdr) iroXXa irpbs iav-ov cat Kar eiceivtav £>m;rpa£ajuei>0s, Xiphil. in Aug. irpbs eav- tov to Xoyiov kXajifiavev, Zosiui. ii. c. 16. elvai /dkv yap irpbs avrov tov aerby, Arrian. i, 19. v. Hcinst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 254. Koen. ad Greg. Cor. p. 44. a TV yap ifx.)]v bpyty iniravai x^eirbv elvai ital irpbs ah-rosv, Plut. in Brut. !a% irpbs £/a.ov \tyovri, Aristoph. Vesp. p. 1810. 1. 32. ed. H. St. — J. S. 647. 456ksl 5e /ecu rb tov tSttov 6e?of Rule 1—7.] Tlpos. 257 And just the contrary, against: irpbs avbpbs e)(8pov eirityipuiv tijv iptyov, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 457. v. Sylburg. ad 1. As, in the character of : irpbs vfipews rets vovdeaias Xaftfiavwr, Philo in Legat. ad' Caium. III. To, for, conducive to : eart fioi tovto irpbs ayadov. tcaKeivo 5i) toIs iroXefiiois irpbs Katcov yevon' dv. And without a dative : irpos tIvos av ayadov yevoiro ', IV. It signifies, congruity, fitness, suitableness, conformity, cha- racteristicalness : irpbs rdvbpos ev olneioi, and ol irpos yvvaiKCJv. to irpos irarpos, yuTjrpoy, &c. family on the father's side, mother's, &c. underst. ykvos, which is sometimes expressed ; as, rb /uej/ yap irpos irarpos avr<5 yevos ec rwv rfjs GvynXrirov fiovXfjs eiricrrj[x(3)v i\v, Herodian i, J. also v yecpvpeojv rr}v irpos rov Tlovrov, Herodot. vii, 55. irpbs aovs, Eurip. Rhes. 557. d VII. With a dative case irpbs signifies, near, at : irpbs Trj iroXei. With, within : elvai irpbs eavra, to be engaged in thought ; irpbs iavrm o-Konel, he considers within himself. In : fjpev irpbs rube ry X6yu>, we were engaged in this discourse ; ol be eyprjyopevai re avrbv irdXat era (i.i) airoSiSovai : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 11. .S. T fl Ketcpoty ifjpus &vat, ra, irpbs wodwv Antig. 51. irpbs Sr; rovrwv 67wye c Ov yap %v irpbs rod Kvpov rpSvov, rl9r)u.i r\\v rav xpv^aruv /cttjciv irXeicrrov iyovra fir) airoMovai : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 11. a£iav ehat, Plato de Rep. i. p. 372. 1. 29. —J- S. ed. Bas. 1.— J. S. 2 K C58 Y\p6s. [Chap. ix. § viii. I am wholly occupied in this: v. Hor. [Ep. i, 1, 11.] In this sense it governs an accusative also. In addition to, over and above, besides; irpbs yap ry ve/jie kuI uyerres, Plut. in Demostli. p. 855. reos kari' irpos he rw vey cnraXbs, 1 lato Symp. p. l65. i\v he 6 TlXaTW irpbs rrj KaKorideiq. kcu v irpos rats kv\i£i : Herodian iii, 5/ IX. With the accusative case irpos has very various senses ; as, irpbs x<*P lv >for the sake of pleasing, to win favor; also simply for the sake of: irpbs x^piv fiopds,for the sake of food : Soph. Ant. 30. v. Id. in Phil. 11.56. irpos eiros, to the purpose, pertinent ; tovto t'i irpos eiros ; what is this to the purpose? in which sense airoKpiveadat irpos to. epwrwjxeva '. irpbs rohert Hiravra KaQioTaoBai tov Xoyov, to turn the whole discourse to this point: Aristid. Xeyeiv irpbs to fieX- tmjtov, Plat. Gorgt p. 502. 1. 42. ^evara/ieros irpbs to ypeiuthes , for advantage, for profit : Herodian ii, 9. That which is relative is called by philosophers irpos ti : but irpbs t'i ; is, to what end, where- fore? v. John xiii, 28. To the amount of: diore cnroXecrdat avraiv irpbs eirraKoalovs, Xen. H. Gr. i. p. 435. So ad in Latin : v. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 93. ad millia xcn. Caes. B. G. i. X. It is often put with an accusative case in an adverbial sense ; as, irpbs aKplfietav, accurately ; irpbs afdo}>jfi.t>, abundantly ; irpbs a, to take as an insult or injury ; irpbs e^dpav, inimically, with hostile intentions ; irpbs mipbv, or &pav, opportunely, seasonably ; irpbs 6pyr\v, angrily ; irpbs i/fipiv, injuriously, insultingly ; irpbs vfipiv Xaj3e7v, to take as an injury or insult ; tvq he prj irpbs opyrjv rj irpbs vfipiv Xa(5rj to irpdyfia, Dion. Hal. ix. p. 576. I. 19. irpbs virepfioXrjv, surpassingly, exceedingly ; irpbs virovoiav, suspiciously ; irpbs (pdovov, enviously, invidiously ; irpbs fyiXiav, kindly, in a friendly manner. XI. I7pos signifies, towards, regarding, for : to. irpbs deovs ocria: * Xanth. x°P eveiv Pov\o[iai. Bacch. mosth. in Aphob. iii. p. 45. 1. 11. ed. K&yo>ye Trp6s. Aristoph. Ran. 415'. ijfj.e7s Herwag. ii. irpoain, Reisk. 859, 20. 5' a£iovfAev rrj ir6\ei irpoiKa — afivveiv — . e Cod. Bavar. — J. S. «ai irpbs, ovk alrovfiev ovSev : Aristoph. / Add that irpbs signifies purpose or Eq. 578. wv d irar^p 7]fuv KareXiire are- end:"va. irpbs tovtois avTols i)yep.6ves povfiivovs, Kal irpbs inrb tovtwv vPpi^ofii- Siai, Xen. Mem. iii, 2, 3.— J. S. vovs : Demosth. in Aphob. i. p. 835. e iEschyl. toIs irovypoTs 8' 5}SeTat ; 1. 10. ed. Reisk. yudo-eo-Oe,— to nefxap- Bacch. oil Srjr iKelvrj y', ctAXa XW™ Tvptipjva its io-Tiv a\7i8rj,—ical irpbs '6n irpbs ftiav : Aristoph. Ran. 1457. — J. S. V??/iio?Toi kuto. t\\v papTvpiav ovSey : De- Rule 8— 13.] Upbs. 25,9 and simply ra irpbs deovs, Demosth. 01. iii. ra Trpos tovs iroXefxiovs evirpeirT] iroiijoaodai. irpbs ryv vboov iroielv, to be good for the disease ; to. irpos ooarnpiav ) XII. On account of, on the score of : to aveonov, Kal drropov, Kal irpos KarabiKas fj \pea tijv kitiTifiiav airoXwXeKos (fivXov : Dion. Hal. iv. p. 235. 1. 35.' Towards, to or with : ras irpos aXXr/Xovs biaXXayas ironjaaadai. irpos tov eyBpbv biaXXaTTeoBai. irpos tovs cpiXovs KoivoXoyelodai. For : apyvpiov irpos tov o'itov KUTaXXctTTeodai. With, in company of : irpos tov flaotXea. XIII. It signifies, proportion, suitableness, agreeableness ; accord- ing to, with reference to 'J to fxev yap eipos 7jv es e£ /uaXiora arablovs' fiaSos be ovbe irpos Xoyov tov evpovs, aXXa iroXii brj ti fiadvrepos : Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii, 29. irpos utyav emorois biavelfiai. irpos to KadfJKov irdvTa oiKovoiie'iv. irpos HXXov £rjv. bel ovv irpos to. avLifial- vovra, olfxat, tovtois yprjoBai : Xen. Cyrop. i, 44. ovbe irpos apyvpiov Trjv evbaifiovlav eKpivov, Isocr. Paneg. p. 109. v. Matth. xix, 8. In comparison of: etvai tujv apyaiwv tovs irep\ r?}»' oofiav 4. irpocrairoXeirai, Polyb. i, 74. irpoabia- oafe'iv, Id. iii, 24. irpoaeirifxeTpelv tlpI, Id. iv, 51. — 3. near, at, in, upon, against; as in irpoaKadicleodai, jEschin. Dial, ii, l6. irpoo- Kaprepe'tv rrj iroXiopicia, Polyb. i, 55. irpooKvaaQai rols Xfflois, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 30. — 4. towards; as in irpoo-cpepeaOai tipl, Xen. Mem. iii, 1 1, 11. — 5. It intends or augments; as in irpocraiTe'iv , Xen. Apol. 9. ■npooavafiaiveiv, Polyb. iii, 72. irpoaeiriatTiieadai, Id. i, 29. v. Cattier, Gazopb. p. 89- SECTION IX. — ON THE PREPOSITIONS virep, virb, x^p". Rule I. 'Y7rep governs a genitive and accusative only. Witb a genitive it signifies, over, above; about, concerning ; l by, in the name of: m Apollon. Rh. iii, 701. for, on account of. n It signifies also, in the place or stead of: V7rep twv airodavovTwv ev tl-> irpas Avriaras iroXefiio orpa.TiwTtiv, y/tyovv irepovs KaraypcHpeiv : Dion. Hal. p. 553. 1. 41. fxeXeip be tipl Kal oXXlo virep eavrov ti irpo'ibelp, Thuc. i, 141. [p. 211. 1. 14. ed. Bekk.] Also, the motive: 6 yap Beds eanp b ivepywv ev vp~iv Kal to BeXetv, kuI to evepyeiv, virep rfjs evboKias : of his good pleasure: Paul, ad Pbilipp. ii, 13. virep rfjs els to. koipo. }avya$.eiv eBvr) bia v arjS r' abrov KecpaXijs : Odyss. 0, 261. — itcewos irpcvnei vvv, oi>x oStlcs exovcriv : J. S. Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 119. 1. 4. ed. R. n 'Tirep abrov rod irapajirivai rbu v6- tcad' ot/s Kaipovs 7/ elcrayyeXia e56Sr] r\ els fiou, Tocravrijp eScoite SIkijv : Demosth. in tV fiovXr/v virep 'Apiffrdpxov tov Molt- Mid. p. 572- 1. 3.ed. Reisk. — J. S. Xov, '6ti eXi) NiK&b'yLiov aireKrovies : Id. in ° Add the sense, in favor of, for the Mid. 554, 11. ff acpe s obDev el3 or cov v trip advantage of : tovs v6llovh ws irpaorarovs Ttiiv irpaTTOLtevccv, Plut. in Aiat. p. 1884. Kal fierpiccraTOVs efoat, virep ra>v aSwd- l. 17. ed. St. — J.S. tuv fidKurr ecri: Demosth. in Timocr. m Aio-o-op.' virep Gveuv ko\ Saiftovos,— p. 759. 1. 20. ed. Reisk. — J. S. RuLli 1—6.] 'Ynep, 'Yiro. 26 1 of those who ruined themselves by keeping horses: Schol. Aristoph. Nub. 31. [For, in signification of the end:] Avyelov — vnep rriv tZv ai^arwv eKxyaiv [e i:\votv] embiwKOPTOs, Schol. Aristoph. Nub. 508. [500. ed. Bekk.] Intermission : virep fxiav (underst. y/uepar), every other day. In composition inrep signifies — 1. beyond, (of place ;) as in ra virepopia, Xen. Symp. iv, 31. vwepopHeaBai, iEschin. c. Ctesiph. p. 522. [1. 4. ed. R.] virepBopeiv v\prj\ov virep epxos, Demosth. p. 422. [I. 24. ed. R. from Solon.] vnepicBpLeiv and vitepveo\Kelv, Polyb. iv, 19. viii, 29- — 2. beyond, (of time;) as in virepyrjpos, M\. V. H. iv, 1. virepcuc/uios, 1 Cor. vii, 36. v7repripepos, Demosth. p. 518. [I. 2. ed. R.] — 3. excess; as in virepayairav, Demosth. p. 1 72. [I. 18. ed. R.] vireptpofielaBai, Xen. (Ec. viii, \j. virepeaBieiv, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 3. virep^aipeiv, JE,\. V. H. iv, 25. virepepavBai rrjv evyeveiav twos, Id. xii, 1. vireptcaBapais, Hippocr. Aphor. iv, 5. — 4. contempt, pretermission or overpassing, negligence, transgression or violation ; as in virepopqv, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 9- virepoirriicos, Polyb. v, 46. virep- fialveiv ttoXXci, iEscbin. Dial, iii, 12. vofxov virepfiaiyeiv, Diod. S. xvii, 34. vnepftaXos, Iliad o, 94. &c. — 5. protection ; as in i»7rep- aairiceiv, Polyb. vi, 37 '• VTrepe\eiv ras xeipas tlvi, Id. xv, 29« — 6. superiority, preeminence ; as in virepj3a\\eiv , Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 7. bireptpepeiv 7r6XXu> twos, Id. Apol. 15. v. Cattier, Gazoph. p. pi. IV. 'Ytto governs a genitive, dative, and accusative. With a geni- tive it signifies, agency, by ; and in this sense it follows even a verb neuter ; as, airoBavelv viro twv it oXe pilar, viro rCov hiKaoT&v eKtreaely. And so with the verb substantive : elrai ej' bofy viro riros, to be honored by a person. It is sometimes suppressed : ijv tovto viKrjOys e/iov, Aristoph. Nub. 1083. Also under: vnb paXrjs, Lucian. V. It signifies, on account of, through, because of: viro r^s cnrexQeias : v. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. 1125. vir evbelas ovx e'x w °' Tl av ^"atrw XPVcrij)fxai. p For bia : viro gkotov. In : viro ri/s arotrlas j'jv Yefifjpos, in perplexity : Xiphil. in Sever. With : viro Girovb^s eiroielro rrjv buo'iiv, Time, iii, 33. 'Yv Ki)/xby 'io"Tr\K %%- 1, 489. and Longin. § x.~ J. S. owr" : Aristoph. Tbesni. 1031. At, on, 262 T«ro, Xupis. [Chap. ix. § ix. of the c[ty by the Gauls: Eutrop. Metaphr. ii. ?/ fiiv vtt 'Ay xlirrj Texe fiovKoXeovri, Horn. II. e, 313/ eKdavovnov be avriov xntb kuv/jluti, Zosim. ii. c. 2. v. Abresch. ad ^Esch. iii. p. 54. vtto tvIs oliceiois a/jLapTy'ifMaai, Kai ov-% vtto reus vols eoQuXn 7, Plat. Pha3dr. p. 242. 1. 35. In composition ko signifies — 1. under, beneath; as in vwoyeios, vnofiaXXeiv Trjs yrjs, Xen. CEc. xix, 8. viroyBovios, viruldpios, viroyaa- rpiov, vTzopiviov, virobeiv, vTTOTepveiv, vwocwvrvetv vavs, Polyh. E. L. 64. Acts Ap. xxvii, 17. — 2. within; [under the surface;"] as in op/moi vnolvXoi, Xen. CEc. x, 3. — 3. secretly, by stealth ; as in vwe^aipeiadai, Xen. Hier. v, 2. viravoiyeiv ypafx/jtara, Demosth. p. ■889- [1. 28. ed. R.] vnoKadiSeiv, Polyb. xii, 2. Xndbv VTreiffr/Xde to yrjpas, iEschin. Dial, iii, 9« — 4. by degrees, as hairs are said koto. fxiicpa viroppeeiv, EL\. V. H. xi, 4. v. Valck. ad Theocr. Id. x. p. 119. — 5. diminution; as in v7roXoyiieadat £k twv 64imviu)v, Polyb. vi, 37. It has a diminuent force in the following : vnepvdpos, vtto- cairpos, v7r6xXu)pos, viroXevKos. — 6. protection ; as in vnoawovbos, Xen. Ages, ii, lfj. — 7. subjection, obnoxiousness ; as in 71/1-17 viravbpos, Polyb. E. P. 3f5. vnofiaXXeiv riva toIs oxXois, lb. 52. vira'tTios, Xen. Mem. ii, 8, 4. viraKoveiv, lb. ii, 7> 10. viroKripos, v. Foes. (Econ. Hipp. — 8. approach, coming under: inrobvvetv to gevyos, iEschin. Dial, iii, 10. [undertaking :] vnobveaOai tt/v 7rpa£iv, Polyb. ii, 21. [addition, adjection :] vnemeiv, Demosth. p. 797. [I. 19. ed. R.] — p. It has an augmentative force ; as in virotnrelpeiv yeXwra, yElian, V. H. ii, 13. v7roniveiv, Xen. Symp. ix, 2. — 10. readiness ; as in virapxeiv, virelvat: v. Ind. Demosth. Reisk. — 11. retreat, return; as in vtto- Xwp{]aeis webival, Polyb. i, 34. — 12. irpb, forward, on ; as in vrrayetv. V. Thorn. M. p. 666. seq. v. Caltier, Gazoph. p. 91. VIII. (IX.) Xwpls governs a genitive case only, and commonly signi- fies, without, absque, sine : sometimes, besides, in addition to ; in which sense a case is not always joined with it : x m P ls ^> «M° S o/jiXos -iptXuiv, ovk SXiyos: Thuc. ii. and it takes an infinitive mood instead of a case : x^P^ h* v a( ™ eorepijerfleu, besides being deprived of you: Plat. Crit. But sometimes the genitive of the article is joined * 'AfyiKOfiiywis 8e rusv jrarepwv Kai ruv &v$pu — : Diog. Laert.in Diogen. p. 226. vwepex, virb rcirois rcHpyjvcu rbv I. 23. ed. H. Steph, f. minim.— J. S. Rule 7—10.] XwpU. 263 with the infinitive : x w P ls rov fxi) oixoXoytlv ravra etceivois, besides that these things do not agree with those : Arislid. pro Quat. p. 472. IX. (X.) It signifies, except: (Sore biacpdapTjvat iravras avQpwirovs, SXlywv x^P ts: Apollodor. i. p. 19. and in this signification it is fol- lowed by rj on, as j^wpls rj on Ylo/ATnjiavds 6 yepvjv ovk eariv ore a.irr)v- TJjfrev, except that, &c. Xiphil. in Conimod. and the case following is not influenced by the phrase : kclkovs orpartwras ovk eyei, %wpts rj on SXiyovs rivds: [oXlyovs is governed by e^ei understood;] or it is followed by rj ooos : X W P IS % oa0L V7r ° voawv, rj yrjpws, cpvyeiv abvvaroi r)aav, except as many as, &c. Dion. Hal. x. p. 646. 1. 19. or by av or el with a negative particle : x w l°' s "" VV r , a^a'"«Kos r) iroXepos, unless there should be a war with the Gauls: Plut. Camill. p. 151. 1. 26'. X. (XL) Sometimes it is rather an adverb than a preposition, signi- fying apart, separately : y^wpls yap hceivos, ml Kad' alrbv brj fxovov e£era5erat. x^P^ ire P L eKaorwj' elireiv. oaov hia. arahiov x w |°'s clXXtj- \u)y biearrjKerai. THE END. PRINTED BY A. J. VALPY, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY A. J. VALPY, AND MAY BE HAD OF ALL BOOKSELLERS. LEMPRIERE ABRIDGED. — LEMPRIERE'S CLASSICAL DICTIONARY, ABRIDGED from Antiion's and Bau- ker's Second Edition. For Public and Private Schools of both sexes. By E. H. Barker. Royal 12mo. 8s. Gd. bound. * # * This Work contains every article in a condensed form. DICTIONARY of LATIN PHRASES; com- prehending a methodical digest of phrases from the best authors, which have been collected in all phraseological works hitherto published : for the more speedy progress of students in Latin Composition. By W. Robertson, A. M. of Cambridge. A new Edition ; with considerable additions, alterations, and corrections. For the Middle and Upper Classes in Schools. 15s. royal duod. bd. *„,* The present Edition has this advantage over its predecessors, that it is enriched with many hundred phrases which have hitherto been unrecorded ; and these have been drawn from the purest fountains, by actual perusal ; from Cicero, Tacitus, Terence, Plautus, &c. . GRADUS AD PARNASSUM; a new Edition, omitting the Verses and Phrases : the .English of the words is given, with their formation. Many new words are added, and other improvements. Fourth Ed. 7s. 6d. duod. VIRGIL, collated from the best Editions. By A. J. Valpy, M.A. Twelfth Edition. 3s. Gd. 18mo. VIRGIL, with English Notes, Original, and selected from the Delphin and other editions. No Interpretatio. Seventh Ed. 7s. Gd. ' The body of Notes forming the Appendix constitutes an excellent com- mentary on Virgil, and must prove of peculiar benefit to the pupil in clear- ing up difficulties of the sense or the metre. But these explanatory Notes are of still farther utility, as tending to lead juvenile minds into a train of inquiry that will expand their ideas and facilitate their progress in classical literature. The notes of Voss contribute to enrich the impression.' — New Monthly Mag. HORACE; collated from the best Editions. The ob- jectionable Odes and Passages have been expunged. Printed uniformly with the Virgil. Fifth Edition. 3s. 6d. HORACE, with English Notes. Fifth Edition. 6*. ELEGANTI^) LATINS; or, Rules and Exercises illustrative of Elegant Latin Style. Intended for the middle and higher Classes of Schools. By the Rev. E. Valpy, B.D. Tenth Edition. Im- proved and made easier. 4s. Gd. A List of Phrases, as used in the original, and an Index, are added.— A KEY may be had, Pr. 2s. CICERO DE OFFICIIS, with Critical and Expla- natory Notes. The text of the Heusingers is followed. Third Ed. Gs. bds. ' To students the present edition will prove particularly acceptable : con- siderable information and much useful elucidation will be found in the adsci- titious matter ; and the student will be thus benefited without any aug- mentation of labor.' — Crit. Rev. TACITI OPERA, Brotier's Text; with his Explanatory Notes translated into English, by the Rev. F. Valpy, M.A., Master of Reading School. 3 vols. £l. 7s. bds. fNly'33